62543en1 PDF

GFZ-62543EN-1 B-62543EN-1
GE Fanuc CNC
Series 0-TD/0-MD/0-GCD/0-GSD
Connection Manual (Function)
Presented By: CNC Center

For Product Needs Please Visit:
http://www.cnccenter.com/
OR Email:
sales@cnccenter.com
OR Call:
1-800-963-3513
GE Fanuc CNC Manuals www.cnccenter.com

B–62543EN–1/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
B–62543EN–1/01 PREFACE

This manual describes the following NC functions required to enable

machine tool builders to design their CNC machine tools.
om
1. General
Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operator’s manual as
requied.
2. Signals
Describes names, functions, output conditions and addresses of the
signals required to realize a function.
r.c
3. Parameters
Describes parameters related with a function.
4. Alarms and messages
Lists the alarms and messages related with a function in a table.
e
5. Reference item
List the related items of the related manuals in a table.
nt
A list of addresses of all signals and a list of signals are described in the
appendix of this manual. Refer to it as required.
ce
Applicable models The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Product Name Abbreviations Series
nc
FANUC Series 0–TD 0–TD

T series
FANUC Series 0–GCD 0–GCD
S i 0–D
Series 0 D
FANUC Series 0–MD 0–MD
.c
M series
FANUC Series 0–GSD 0–GSD
w
Applicable software This manual describes signals used with the following software series and
series and editions editions. It may not be used for other software series and editions.
w
Product Name Series Edition
FANUC Series 0–MD 0471 Edition 05 or later

w
0472 Edition 01 or later
FANUC Series 0–GSD 0891 Edition 01 or later
FANUC Series 0–TD 0671 Edition 04 or later

0672 Edition 01 or later
FANUC Series 0–GCD 0881 Edition 01 or later
This manual provides a general description of the FANUC Series 0–D.

Some functions described in this manual may not, therefore, be available
depending on the software series or type.
p–1
PREFACE B–62543EN–1/01
Expression of signals One address accommodates eight signals.

Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F148 OP SA STL SPL ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
In case the signal address differs between the T and M series, which series
the signal address belongs to is indicated above its description.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Signal address (T series)
om
Signal address (M series)
Parameter description Parameters are classified by data type as follows :
r.c
Dta type Valid data range
Bit 0 or 1
Byte 0 to 255
e
Word 0 to 32767
2–word 0 to 99999999
nt
NOTE
ce
1 For the bit type parameters, a single data number is
assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different meaning.
2 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general
range. The range varies according to the parameters. For
nc
the valid data range of a specific parameter, see the

explanation of the parameter.
.c
D Notation of bit type

parameters
Data No. Data (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 APRS PRG9 OFFVY EBCL ISOT
w
D Notation of parameters
other than bit type
w
Data No. Data
0518 Data
In case the parameter data number differs between the T and M series,
which series the data number belongs to is indicated above its description.
Data number Data (T series)
Data number Data (M series)
p–2
B–62543EN–1/01 PREFACE
[Machine without PMC]
X016 to X022
Series 0–D Machine

Y048 to Y053
om
[Machine with PMC]
G100 – X000 –
r.c
Series 0–D PMC Machine
F148 – Y048 –
e
nt
NOTE
1 What X and Y addresses are usable in a specific unit
depends on the type of the I/O card installed in the unit.
ce
2 What F and G addresses are usable in a specific unit
depends on the type of the PMC installed in the unit.
3 For the PMC–M, the self–diagnosis data number is
obtained by adding 2000 to the signal address.
nc
.c
w
w
w
p–3
PREFACE B–62543EN–1/01
Manuals related to The table below lists manuals related to the FANUC Series 0–D.
Series 0-D In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Manuals related to the FANUC Series 0–D
Specification
Manuals name
number
FANUC Series 0–TD/MD/GCD/GSD

B–62543EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)

B–62543EN–1 *
om
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62544EN
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62574EN

B–62545EN
r.c
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD PARAMETER MANUAL B–62550EN
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD PARAMETER MANUAL B–62580EN
e
Manuals related to the The table below lists manuals related to the Control Motor α series.
Control Motor α series nt
Table 2 Manuals related to the Control Motor α series
ce
Document
Document name Major contents Major usage
number
D Specification
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series D Characteristics
nc
B–65142E
DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions
D Connections D Selection of motor
D Specification D Connection of motor
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series D Characteristics
B–65152E
DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions
.c
D Connections
D Specifications and
functions D Selection of
w
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER D Installation amplifier

B–65162E
α series DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions and D Connection of
maintenance area amplifier
D Connections
w
D Start up the system

D Start up procedure
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α series (Hardware)
B–65165E D Troubleshooting
MAINTENANCE MANUAL D Troubleshooting
D Maintenance of motor
w
D Maintenance of motor
D Initial setting
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
B–65150E D Setting parameters D Start up the system
PARAMETER MANUAL
D Description of parameters ((Software))
D Initial setting D Turning the system
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series
B–65160E D Setting parameters (Parameters)
PARAMETER MANUAL
D Description of parameters
p–4
B–62543EN–1/01 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
1. AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.1 Name of Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.2 Increment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
om
1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2.5 Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.2.6 Follow–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2.7 Servo Off (Mechanical Handle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
r.c
1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.2 Backlash Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.4 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO–CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
e
1.4.1 Parameters Related to Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4.3
1.4.4
nt
Ignore–the–fourth–axis–signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cancel–the–Z–axis Command Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ce
1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.5.3 Rotary Axis Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
nc
1.6 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL (0–GCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

1.7 Cf AXIS CONTROL (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

.c
2.1 EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

2.2 CNC READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
w
2.3.1 Overtravel Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
w
2.4 ALARM SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

2.5 START LOCK/INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.6 MODE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
w
2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

2.8 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.1 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
c–1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62543EN–1/01
4.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.3 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.4 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.2 RESET AND REWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.3 TESTING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.3.1 Machine Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
om
5.3.2 Dry Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.3.3 Single Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.6 EXACT STOP/EXACT STOP MODE/TAPPING MODE/CUTTING MODE (M SERIES) . . . . . . 133
r.c
5.7 DNC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.8 IN–FEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
e
6.1 POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.2
6.3
6.4
nt
LINEAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THREAD CUTTING (ONLY FOR T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
142
147
ce
6.4.1 Thread Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.4.2 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.5 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6.6 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (ONLY FOR 0–GSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
nc
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . 159

7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
.c
7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.1.3 Feed Per Minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
w
7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

7.1.5 Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
w
7.1.5.1 Rapid traverse override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

7.1.5.2 Feedrate override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7.1.5.3 Rapid traverse override B (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
w
7.1.5.4 Override cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.2.2 Corner Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7.2.2.1 In–position check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7.2.2.2 In–position check independently of feed/rapid traverse (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.2.2.3 Error detect (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
7.2.2.4 Signals output according to the speed of travel along an axis (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.2.3 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
c–2
B–62543EN–1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

8.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
8.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
8.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
8.4 HIGH–SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

9.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
om
9.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
9.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
9.4 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (FOR T SERIES ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
9.5 RIGID TAPPING (FOR M SERIES ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
9.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
r.c
9.5.2 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
9.5.3 Rigid Tapping Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
9.5.4 Display Data on the Diagnosis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
e
9.5.5 Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
9.5.6 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
nt
9.5.6.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.6.2 Signals related to S code output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.6.3 Signals related to gear switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
257
258
259
ce
9.5.6.4 Signal addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
9.5.6.5 Notes on interface with the PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
9.5.7 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
9.5.7.1 When M29 is specified before G84 (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
nc
9.5.7.2 M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
9.5.7.3 Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
9.5.7.4 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
9.5.8 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
.c
9.5.9 Alarm and Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

9.5.10 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
9.5.11 Reference Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
w
9.6 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

9.7 POSITION CODER FEEDBACK CONTROL FUNCTION (0–TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
w
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

10.1 TOOL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
w
10.2 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/TOOL COMPENSATION

NUMBER/TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
10.3 CUTTER COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.3.1 Cutter Compensation C (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.3.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
11. PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

11.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL
POINT PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
c–3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62543EN–1/01
11.2 G CODE SYSTEM (T Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

11.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
11.4 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
11.5 CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
11.5.1 Custom Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
11.6 CANNED CYCLE (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
11.7 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
11.8 CANNED CYCLE (T Series)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T Series) . . . . . . . . . 333
om
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
12.1 DISPLAY/SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
12.1.1 Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
12.1.2 Spindle Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
12.1.3 Self–diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
r.c
12.1.4 Position Display Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
12.1.5 Run Hour and Parts Count Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
12.1.6 Displaying Operating Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
12.1.7 Software Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
e
12.1.8 Multi–language Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
12.2 EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
nt
12.2.1 Part Program Storage Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 No. of Registered Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
357
12.2.3 Memory Protection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
ce
12.2.4 Password Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
12.2.5 Background Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

nc
13.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

13.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
13.3 EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
.c
14. MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

w
14.1 SKIP FUNCTION (FOR 0–GCD/GSD ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

14.1.1 Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
14.1.2 Multi–step Skip (0–GCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
w
14.1.3 Torque Limit Skip (0–GCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

14.2 ENTERING COMPENSATION VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
w
14.2.1 Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

14.2.2 Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

15.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL/PMC AXIS SPEED CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
15.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
15.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
15.4 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
15.5 PMC WINDOW FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
c–4
B–62543EN–1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
c–5
B–62543EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1 AXIS CONTROL
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
1
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62543EN–1/01
1.1
CONTROLLED AXES
General The total number of controlled axes and the number of controlled axes that
can be used at the same time in a specific unit vary depending on the model
and the configuration of its options. Refer to the relevant operator’s
manual. In manual operation, basically, only one axis can be controlled
at a time; the number of axes that can be controlled at the same time can
be extended to three by parameter setting, however.
om
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0049 S3JOG
r.c
S3JOG Specifies the number of axes that can be controlled at the same time
during manual operation, as follows:
1 : Up to three
0 : One
e
Alarm and message nt
Number Message Description
ce
015 TOO MANY AXES COM- The number of the commanded axes ex-
MANDED ceeded that of simultaneously controlled
axes. Correct the program.
nc
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.2.1 Controlled Axes
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
.c
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.2.1 Controlled Axes

w
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
w
w
2
1.2
SETTING EACH AXIS
1.2.1
Name of Axes
General The axis names are as follows:
(M series)
om
Axis number 1 2 3 4
Axis name X Y Z Parameter

(No.0008#2, #3, #4)
(T series)
r.c
Axis number 1 2 3
Axis name X Z Parameter

(No.0030#0)
e
Parameter
0008
#7
nt #6 #5 #4
ADW2
#3
ADW1
#2
ADW0
#1 #0
(M series)
ce
ADW0, ADW1, ADW2
Specify the name of the fourth axis as listed below:
ADW2 ADW1 ADW0 Axis name
nc
0 0 0 A
0 0 1 B
.c
0 1 0 C
0 1 1 U
w
1 0 0 V
1 0 1 W
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0030 ADW30 (T series)
w
ADW30 Specifies the name of the third axis as follows:

1: C
0: B
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0069 B3AX BABS BAX (T series)
For G–code system A in the T series, the name of the third axis can be
changed by parameter setting as listed below:
Third axis
B3AX BABS BAX
ABS INC
om
0 0 0 C H
0 0 1 C H
0 1 1 C H
1 0 1 C B
r.c
1 1 1 B H
Note
e
NOTE
If the second auxiliary function is used, it is impossible to use
nt
address B as an axis name.
ce
Reference item
nc
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.2.2 NAMES OF AXES

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.2.2 NAMES OF AXES

.c
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
w
w
w
4
1.2.2
Increment System
General The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input ) and
least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the
least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command
increment is the least increment for moving the tool on the machine. Both
increments are represented in mm, inches, or degrees.
om
The increment system is classified into IS–B and IS–C (Tables 1.2.2(a)
and 1.2.2 (b)).
Table 1.2.2 (a) Increment system IS–B
Least input increment Least command increment
Metric mm 0.001mm(Diameter) 0.0005mm
r.c
system input
0.001mm(Radius) 0.001mm
machine
0.001deg 0.001deg
inch 0.0001inch(Diameter) 0.0005mm
input
e
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.001mm
0.001deg 0.001deg
nt
Inch
system
machine
mm
input
0.001mm(Diameter)
0.001mm(Radius)
0.001deg
0.00005inch
0.0001inch
0.001deg
ce
inch 0.0001inch(Diameter) 0.00005inch
input
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.0001inch
0.001deg 0.001deg
nc
Table 1.2.2 (b) Increment system IS–C

Least input increment Least command increment
Metric mm 0.0001mm(Diameter) 0.00005mm
system input
0.0001mm(Radius) 0.0001mm
.c
machine
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
inch 0.00001inch(Diameter) 0.00005mm
input
w
0.00001inch(Radius) 0.0001mm
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
Inch mm 0.0001mm(Diameter) 0.000005inch
w
system input
0.0001mm(Radius) 0.00001inch
machine
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
w
inch 0.00001inch(Diameter) 0.000005inch

input
0.00001inch(Radius) 0.00001inch
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
NOTE
Diameter programming is used only for X axis at T series.
Whether diameter programming or radius programming is
used is selected by parameter XRC (No.0019#3).
5
Parameter
Setting parameter
INCH Specifies the input unit as follows:
0 : Millimeter
1 : Inch
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 SCW
om
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
r.c
[Data type] Bit
SCW Specifies the least command increment of linear axes as follows:
0 : Millimeter (metric machine)
e
1 : Inch (inch machine)
0019
#7
nt
#6 #5 #4 #3
XRC
#2 #1 #0
(T series)
ce
NOTE
nc
[Data type] Bit

XRC Specifies whether the X–axis travel distance is specified based on the
.c
diameter or radius, as follows:

1 : Radius–based specification
0 : Diameter–based specification
w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.2.1 Controlled axes

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
w
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.2.1 Controlled axes

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
6
1.2.3
Specifying the
Rotation Axis
General It is possible to specify whether the fourth axis of the M series unit and
the third axis of the T series unit are a linear or rotation axis, using
parameters ADLN (bit 2 of parameter No.0011) and LIN3 (bit 2 of
parameter No.0032), respectively. The basic axes can be specified only
om
as linear, however.
The rollover function can prevent the coordinates of a rotation axis from
overflowing. The rollover function is enabled by setting bit 1 of
parameter No.0398 (M) and bit 1 of parameter No.0388 (T) to 1 (for the
rotation axis).
In a incremental command, the travel distance is determined directly by
r.c
a value specified in the command. In an absolute command, the travel
distance is determined as follows: the coordinates of the end point are
obtained by rounding to the travel distance per rotation, and the travel
direction is determined to be the one in which the distance to the end point
e
is shorter (when bit 2 of parameter No.0398 (M) or bit 2 of parameter
No.0388 (T) is 0).
nt
The display of the relative coordinates can be rounded to the travel
amount per rotation (when bit 3 of parameter No.0398 (M) or bit 3 of
parameter No.0388 (T) is 1).
ce
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc
0011 ADLN (M series)
ADLN Specifies whether the fourth axis is a linear or rotation axis, as follows:
1 : Linear axis
.c
0 : Rotation axis
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0032 LIN3
LIN3 Specifies whether the third axis is a linear or rotation axis, as follows:
w
1 : Linear axis
0 : Rotation axis
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0388 PECNT PODRC ROAXC (T series)
0398 ROCNT RODRC ROAXC (M series)
[Data type] Bit

ROAXC The roll–over function of a rotation axis is
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
7
NOTE
ROAXC specifies the function only for a rotation axis.
RODRC In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1 : Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
om
RODRC is valid only when ROAXC is 1.
ROCNT Relative coordinates are

0 : Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
1 : Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
r.c
NOTE
1 ROCNT is valid only when ROAXC is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
e
(No.0860 (M)/No.0788 (T)).
0788
nt Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis (T series)
ce
0860 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis (M series)
NOTE
1 After setting the parameter, turn off the power once and turn
nc
it on again to operate the machine.

2 This parameter is valid only when ROAXC = 1.
.c
[Data type] Two–word

[Unit of data] Increment system Unit of data Standard value
IS–A 0.01 deg 36000
w
IS–B 0.001 deg 360000

IS–C 0.0001 deg 3600000
w
[Valid data range] 1000 – 9999999

Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.18 Rotary Axis Roll–over
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.17 Rotary Axis Roll–over

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
8
1.2.4
Controlled Axes
Detach
General The PMC can be used to indicate the movement status of each axis.
Signal
om
Axis–movement–under–
way signals
r.c
MVX to MV4
<F148#4 to #7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals indicate that the respective controlled axes are moving. The
e
signals correspond to the controlled axes on a one–to–one basis. A
numeral or letter at the end of each signal name represents the controlled
nt
axis number.
MV x
X ..... X–axis movement is under way.
ce
Y ..... Y–axis movement is under way.
Z ..... Z–axis movement is under way.
: :
: :
nc
[Output condition] Each signal becomes 1 when:

· The corresponding axis begins to move.
· The corresponding axis is selected as a handle feed axis during manual
.c
handle feed mode.

Each signal becomes 0 when:
w
· Distribution of the move command for the corresponding axis ends.

w
Signal address
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F148 MV3 MVZ MVX (T series)
MV4 MVZ MVY MVX (M series)
Caution
CAUTION
These signals are output regardless of whether the
operation is automatic or manual.
9
1.2.5
Mirror Image
General Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by setting
parameters. All movement directions are reversed during automatic
operation along axes to which a mirror image is applied.
X
B
om
A B’
Z
0
When M1 signal turned to “1” at point A
r.c
Mirror image (Example for T series)
However, the following directions are not reversed:

– Direction of manual operation and direction of movement, from the
e
intermediate position to the reference position during automatic
reference position return (for the M and T series)
nt
– Approach direction for single direction positioning (G60) and shift
direction for boring cycles (G76 and G87) (for M series only)
Mirror image check signals indicate whether mirror image is applied to
ce
each axis. System variable #3005 contains the setting data (refer to the
operator’s manual).
nc
Signal
Mirror image signal

.c
MIRX, MIRY, MIR4

<G127#0, #1, #7>(M)
w
MIX, MIZ
<G120#0, G127#1>(T)
[Classification] Input signal
w
[Function] Apply mirror image to the specified axes.

[Operation] Apply mirror image to those axes for which the signals are 1.
w
These signals are provided for the controlled axes on a one–to–one basis.
A number or alphabet appended to a signal represents the controlled axis
number.
MI x (T series) MIR x (M series)
X ..... Applies mirror image to the X axis.

Y ..... Applies mirror image to the Y axis.
Z ..... Applies mirror image to the Z axis.
: :
: :
10
The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases:
a) During offset cancel;
b) When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state and not in the
feed hold state.
Mirror image check

signal
MMI1, MMI2, MMI4
om
<F158#0, #1, #3>(M)
MMI1, MMI2
<F155#0, #1>(T)
r.c
[Function] These signals indicate the mirror image condition of each axis. The mirror
image is set by taking the logical sum of the signal from the MDI panel
and the input signal of the machine tool, then relaying the information to
the machine tool.
e
These signals are provided for every control axis; the numeral in the signal
name indicates the relevant control axis number.
nt
MMI n
1 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 1st axis
2 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 2nd axis
ce
4 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 4th axis
[Output condition] These signals turn to “1” when:

· Mirror image signal MIn of the corresponding axis is “1”; or
nc
· Mirror image of the corresponding axis is turned on by setting data

from the MDI panel.
These signals turn to “0” when:
.c
· Mirror image signal (MIn) of the corresponding axis is “0” and the
setting of the mirror image in the control unit is turned off.
w
Signal address
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 MIX (T series)
(M series)
w
G127 MIZ (T series)

MIR4 MIRY MIRX (M series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F155 MMI2 MMI1 (T series)
(M series)
F158 (T series)
MMI4 MMI2 MMI1 (M series)
11
Setting parameters
(M series)
REVX, REVY, REV4
Turn on or off the mirror image of each axis, as follows:
0 : Off
1 : On
Caution
om
CAUTION
Even when the mirror image is applied, commands which do
not actuate mirror image (such as automatic reference
position return and manual operation) do not affect mirror
image check signals MMI1 to MMI4 <F155 (T)/F158 (M)>.
r.c
Reference item
e
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.4.4 Mirror Image
nt
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.4.5 Mirror Image

ce
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
nc
.c
w
w
w
12
1.2.6
Follow–up
General When position control is disabled for the controlled axes (when the servo
is off, during emergency stop, or during a servo alarm), if the machine is
moved, a positional error occurs. Follow–up is a function for changing
the current position of the CNC and reset the error counter to zero,
assuming a command corresponding to the error has been specified.
om
Follow–up requires the mechanical handle function and PMC.
Follow–up is always performed during emergency stop or a servo alarm.
D When follow–up is not When signal *FLWU is 1, follow–up is not performed. The error is added
performed for axes for to the error counter as a servo error. In this case, the machine moves to
which the servo is
r.c
compensate for the error when the servo off signal changes to 0.
turned off In general, follow–up is not used if the machine is mechanically clamped
when position control is disabled for the controlled axes.
D When follow–up is When *FLWU is “0”, the follow-up function is engaged. The present
e
performed for the axes position of the CNC is changed to reset the error counter to zero. The
for which the servo is machine tool remains in a deviated position, but since the present position
turned off nt
of the CNC changes correspondingly, the machine moves to the correct
position when the absolute command is next applied.
In general, follow–up should be used when motors are driven by
mechanical handles.
ce
Signal
nc
Follow–up signal
*FLWU <G104#5>
.c

[Function] Select whether to perform follow–up when the servo is turned off for those
w
axes.
[Operation] 0: Performs follow–up.
w
1: Does not perform follow–up.

w
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G104 *FLWU
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 1.2.7 Servo Off (Mechanical handle)
(This manual)
13
1.2.7
Servo Off (Mechanical
Handle)
General Place the controlled axes in the servo off state; that is, they stop the current
to the servo motor, which disables position control. However, the
position detection feature functions continuously, so the current position
is not lost.
om
These signals are used to prevent the servo motors from overloading when
the tools on the axes are mechanically clamped under certain machining
conditions on the machine, or to move the machine by driving the motors
by mechanical handles.
r.c
Signal
e
Servo off signal
SVFX – SVF4 nt
<G105#0 – #3>
ce
[Function] Select whether to place each axis in the servo off state.
* SVF x
X ..... Servo off for the X axis
Y ..... Servo off for the Y axis
nc
Z ..... Servo off for the Z axis

: :
[Operation] These signals place those axes for which the signals are 1 in the servo off
.c
state (the current to the servo motor is stopped), thus disabling position
control. However, the position detection feature continues to function, so
the current position is not lost.
w
These signals are provided for the controlled axes on a one–to–one basis.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
w
Signal address
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G105 SVF3 SVFZ SVFX (T series)
SVF4 SVFZ SVFY SVFX (M series)
14
Caution
CAUTION
1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo off
signal for that axis is 1.
2 When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is
turned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using the
auxiliary function. Set the timing for the auxiliary function,
mechanical clamp and servo off signals as shown in the
diagram below. The clamp command auxiliary function
om
should be executed only after the distribution end signal
(DEN) turned to “1”.
Clamp Unclamp command
r.c
MF
Machine
clamp
e
Servo off state
nt SVF1, ...
ce
FIN
nc
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 1.2.6 Follow–up
(This manual)
.c
w
w
w
15
1.3
ERROR
COMPENSATION
1.3.1
Stored Pitch Error
Compensation
General If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can
om
be compensated in detection unit per axis.
Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation position at the
intervals specified for each axis. The origin of compensation is the
reference position to which the tool is returned.
Pitch error compensation data can be set with external devices such as the
Handy File (see Operator’s manual). Compensation data can also be set
r.c
directly with the MDI panel.
The following parameters must be set for pitch error compensation. Set
the pitch error compensation value for each pitch error compensation
position number set by these parameters.
e
In the following example, 33 is set for the pitch error compensation
number at the reference position.
nt Pitch error compensation value (absolute value)
3
ce
Compensation number parameter
for the reference position
(No.n000) 2
1
nc
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Reference position
–1
.c
Compensation magnification
parameter (No.0011#0, 1)
–2
Compensation interval parameter
w
(No.0712 – 0715 (M))

(No.0756 – 0758 (T))
Compensation
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
w
position number
Compensation +3 –1 –1 +1 +2 –1 –3
value to be set
w
· Number of the pitch error compensation position at the reference

position (for each axis): Parameter n000 (n : axis number)
· Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis): Parameter
0011#0, 1
· Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each axis):
Parameter 0712 – 0715 (M), 0756 – 0758 (T)
16
Examples
D For linear axis ⋅ Machine stroke: –400 mm to +800 mm
⋅ Interval between the pitch error compensation positions: 50 mm
⋅ No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 40
If the above is specified, the correspondence between the machine
coordinate and the compensation position No. is as follows:
–400 –350 –100 –50 0 50 100 750 800

Machine
coordinate (mm)
om
Compensation
point number.
33 39 40 41 42 56
Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by .
r.c
Therefore, set the parameters as follows:
Parameter Setting value
e
n000 (n : axis number) 40
: Compensation number for the reference position
nt
0011#0, 1 : Compensation magnification
0712 – 0715 (M), 0756 – 0758 (T)

: Interval between pitch error compensation positions
0, 0
50000
ce
The compensation amount is output at the compensation position No.
corresponding to each section between the coordinates.
nc
The following is an example of the compensation amounts.

No 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 56

+2 +1 +1 –2 0 –1 0 –1 +2 +1 0 –1 –1 –2 0 +1 +2 1
.c
Pitch error compensation value

+4 (absolute value)
w
+3
+2
+1
w
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
0 (mm)
–400 –300 –200 –100 –1 100 200 300 400
–2
w
Reference –3
position
–4
17
D For rotary axis ⋅ Amount of movement per rotation: 360°

⋅ Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45°
⋅ No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 60
If the above is specified, the correspondence between the machine
coordinate and the compensation position No. is as follows:
Reference position 0.0
45.0 315.0
(61) (68)
(60)
om
(62) (67)
(+)
90.0 270.0
(63) (66)
r.c
(64) (65)
135.0 225.0
180.0
e
Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by .
nt
If the sum of the compensation values for positions 61 to 68 is not 0, pitch
error compensation values are accumulated for each rotation, causing
positional deviation.
ce
The same value must be set for compensation positions 60 and 68.
Therefore, set the parameters as follows:
Parameter Setting value
nc
n000 (n : axis number) 60

: Compensation number for the reference position
0011#0, 1 : Compensation magnification 0, 0

.c
0712 – 0715 (M), 0756 – 0758 (T) 45000

: Interval between pitch error compensation positions
The following is an example of compensation amounts.

w
No 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

+1 –2 +1 +3 –1 –1 –3 +2 +1
w
Pitch error compensation value

(absolute value)
+4
w
+3
Reference position
68 +2
(60)
+1 68
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 (60) 61 62
45 90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 90 (deg)
–1
–2
–3
–4
18
Parameter
n000 Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position
(n : axis number)
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
om
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference
position for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
r.c
0011 PML2 PML1
#0 PML1
#1 PML2 Specify the pitch error compensation multiply value as listed below:
e
#1 PML2 #0 PML1 Multiply
nt 0
1
0
0
1
4
ce
1 1 8
nc
0756 – 0758 Interval between pitch error compensation positions (T series)
0712 – 0715 Interval between pitch error compensation positions (M series)

.c
[Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
w
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
w

The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equally spaced.
w
Set the space between two adjacent positions for each axis.
The minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions is
limited and obtained from the following equation:
Minimum interval of pitch error compensation positions = maximum
feedrate (rapid traverse rate)/1875
Unit: mm, inch, deg
[Example] When the maximum rapid traverse rate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum
interval between pitch error compensation positions is 8 mm.
19
Warning
WARNING
1 Compensation value range
Compensation values can be set within the range from –7
x compensation magnification (detection unit) to +7 x
compensation magnification (detection unit). The
compensation magnification can be set for each axis within
the range from 1, 2, 4, and 8 in parameters 0011#0, and #1.
om
2 Intervals of compensation positions
The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with
equally spaced. Set the space between two adjacent
positions for each axis to the parameter (No.n000 (n: axis
number)).
3 Pitch error compensation of the rotary axis
r.c
For the rotating axis, the interval between the pitch error
compensation positions shall be set to one per integer of the
amount of movement (normally 360°) per rotation. The sum
of all pitch error compensation amounts per rotation must be
e
made to 0. Also, set the same compensation value to a
position and the same position with one rotation.
nt
4 Conditions where pitch error compensation is not
performed
Note that the pitch error is not compensated in the following
cases:
ce
· When the machine is not returned to the reference
position after turning on the power. This excludes the
case where an absolute position detector is employed.
· If the interval between the pitch error compensation
nc
positions is 0.
.c
w
w
w
20
1.3.2
Backlash
Compensation
General
D Backlash compensation Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a
compensation value in parameter Nos.0535 – 0538, in detection units
from 0 to "2550 pulses.
om
D Backlash compensation More precise machining can be performed by changing the backlash
for each rapid traverse compensating value depending on the feedrate, the rapid traverse or the
and cutting feed cutting feed.
Let the measured backlash at cutting feed be A and the measured backlash
r.c
at rapid traverse be B. The backlash compensating value is shown below
depending on the change of feedrate (cutting feed or rapid traverse) and
the change of the direction of movement.
Change of feedrate Cutting feed to Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Cutting feed to
e
cutting feed to rapid traverse to cutting feed rapid traverse
Change of direction
of movement
Same direction
Opposite direction
nt 0
"A "B
0 "α
"(B+α)
" (*α)
" (B+α)
ce
@ = (A:B)/2
@ The positive or negative direction for compensating values is the
direction of movement.
nc
Stopped during cutting feed Stopped during rapid traverse

.c
α α
A B
⇒ ⇒
w
w
: Overrun
@ Assign the measured backlash at cutting feed (A) in parameter

w
Nos.0535 – 0538 and that at rapid traverse (B) in parameter Nos.0686

– 0689 (M)/Nos.0673 – 0676 (T).
21
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0076 ADBLS
[Data type] Bit

ADBLS Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapid
traverse
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
om
0535 – 0538 Backlash compensating value
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Detection unit
r.c
Set the backlash compensating value.
When ADBLS is 1, set the backlash compensating value for cutting feed.
e
When the machine moves in the reference position return direction after
the power is turned on, the first backlash compensation is performed.
0673 – 0676
nt Backlash compensating value used for rapid traverse (T series)
ce
0686 – 0689 Backlash compensating value used for rapid traverse (M series)
[Data type] Word

nc

Set the backlash compensating value used in rapid traverse for each axis.
This parameter is valid when ADBLS, is set to 1.
.c
Caution
w
CAUTION
The backlash compensation for each rapid traverse and
cutting feed is not performed until the first reference position
w
return is completed after the power is turned on. Under this

state, the normal backlash compensation is performed
according to the value specified in parameter Nos.0535 –
w
0538 irrespective of a rapid traverse and a cutting feed.
Note
NOTE
When backlash compensation is applied separately for
cutting feed and rapid traverse, jog feed is regarded as
cutting feed.
22
1.4 The servo interface of the Series 0 features the following:

Digitally controlled AC servo motor
SETTINGS RELATED Motor feedback with serial pulse coders
TO SERVO– (1) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses/rev
CONTROLLED AXES (2) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 65,536 pulses/rev
(3) Incremental pulse coder with a resolution of 10,000 pulses/rev
Scale feedback with A/B/Z signal interface
1.4.1
om
Parameters Related to
Servo
General Explanation of terms frequently used in CNC
r.c
Least command increment
The minimum unit of a command to be given from CNC to the
machine tool
Detection unit
The minimum unit which can detect the machine tool position
e
Command multiplier (CMR)
nt
A constant to enable the weight of CNC command pulses to meet the
weight of pulses from the detector
Detection multiplier (DMR)
A constant to enable the weight of CNC command pulses to meet the
ce
weight of pulses from the detector
CAUTION
nc
The relations among the least command increment,

detection unit, CMR, and DMR are as specified below.
Least command increment = CMR detection unit
Move amount per revolution of motor
Detection unit =
.c
DMR number of pulses of detector per revolution
The flexible feed gear function in the digital servo defines

constant DMR using two parameters (Nos.8x84 and 8x85
w
(x : axis number)) n and m (DMR = n/m).

w
w
23
Parameter
POWER OFF #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0004 DMRX GRDX
POWER OFF #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0005 DMRZ GRDZ (T series)
DMRY GRDY (M series)
POWER OFF #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0006 DMR3 GRD3 (T series)
om
DMRZ GRDZ (M series)
POWER OFF #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0007 DMR4 GRD4 (M series)
GRDx Specify the reference counter size for each axis as listed below:
r.c
Setting value Reference counter size
#3 #2 #1 #0 Other than digital servo Digital servo

0.1µ detector 0.1µ detector
e
0 0 0 0 1000 10000
0 0 0 1 2000 20000
0
nt 0
0
1
1
0
1
3000
4000
30000
40000
ce
0 1 0 0 5000 50000
0 1 0 1 6000 60000
0 1 1 0 7000 70000
nc
0 1 1 1 8000 80000
1 0 0 0 9000 90000
.c
1 0 0 1 10000 100000
1 0 1 0 11000 110000
w
1 0 1 1 12000 120000
1 1 0 0 13000 130000
w
1 1 0 1 14000 140000
1 1 1 0 15000 150000
w
1 1 1 1 16000 160000
24
DMRx Specify the detection multiply value (DMR) for each axis as follows:
#6 #5 #4 Detection multiplier
0 0 0 1/2
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 3/2
0 1 1 2
1 0 0 5/2
om
1 0 1 3
1 1 0 7/2
1 1 1 4
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 OFFVY
e
[Data type] Bit axis
OFFVY When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before position
nt
control ready signal PRDY comes ON
0 : A servo alarm is generated.
1 : A servo alarm is not generated.
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0021 APC3 APCZ APCX (T series)
APC4 APCZ APCY APCX (M series)
nc
APCx Specify whether to use absolute pulse coder detector for each axis, as
follows:
0 : Do not use
.c
1 : Use
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0022 ABS3 ABSZ ABSX (T series)
ABS4 ABSZ ABSY ABSX (M series)
w
ABSx Specify whether the reference position for the absolute pulse coder of each
axis has been established, as follows:
w
0 : Not established
1 : Established
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0037 SPTP3 SPTPZ SPTPX (T series)
SPTP4 SPTPZ SPTPY SPTPX (M series)
SPTPx Specify whether to use a separate pulse coder for each axis, as follows:
0 : Do not use
1 : Use
25
0100 – 0103 Command multiply (CMR)
NOTE
[Data type] Byte axis
om
Set a command multiply indicating the ratio of the least command
increment to the detection unit for each axis.
Least command increment = detection unit x command multiply
Relationship between the increment system and the least command
increment
r.c
Least command increment
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
e
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
nt
The value set in the parameter is obtained as follows:
(1) When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27
ce
Set value = 1 + 100
(Command multiply)
Valid data range: 102 to 127
(2) When command multiply is 1 to 48
nc
Set value = 2 command multiply

Valid data range: 2 to 96
NOTE
.c
When command multiply is 1 to 48, the set value must be

determined so that an integer can be set for command
multiply.
w
w
0504 – 0507 Positioning deviation limit in movement
[Data type] Word

w

Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during
movement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stopped
immediately (as in emergency stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some
margin in this parameter.
26
0508 – 0511 Grid shift
[Data type] Word

[Valid data range] 0 to "32767
A grid shift is set.
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in
this parameter. Up to the half of maximum value counted by the reference
om
counter can be specified as the grid shift.
NOTE
r.c
0512 – 0515, 0517 Servo loop gain (M series)
e
[Data type] Word
nt
[Unit of data] 0.01 s –1
ce
Set the loop gain for position control.
When the machine performs linear and circular interpolation (cutting), the
same value must be set to parameter 0517. For machines that require only
positioning, parameter 0517 must be 0, but the settings of parameters
nc
0512 to 0515 can vary from axis to axis. As the loop gain increases, the
response by position control is improved. A too large loop gain, however,
makes the servo system unstable.
The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of pulses
.c
counted by the error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as follows:

Positioning deviation = feedrate (loop gain)
60
w
Unit: Positioning deviation mm, inches, or deg

Feedrate: mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min
w
loop gain: s–1

w
0593 – 0596 Positioning deviation limit in the stopped state
[Data type] Word

Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning
deviation limit set for stopped state, a servo alarm is generated, and
operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
27
1.4.2
Absolute Position
Detection
General Even when the power to the CNC is turned off, a battery–powered pulse
coder stores the current position. No reference position return is required
when the power to the CNC is turned on next.
om
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0021 APC3 APCZ APCX (T series)
r.c
APC4 APCZ APCY APCX (M series)
APCx Specify whether to use absolute pulse coder detector for each axis, as
follows:
0 : Do not use
e
1 : Use
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
28
1.4.3
Ignore–the–fourth–axis
–signal
Signal
Ignore–the–fourth–axis
om
signal
4NG<X004#7> (M series)
[Function] When a unit with an additional axis is switched on with this signal set to
1, its fourth axis is ignored; that is, it is assumed that the unit has no
r.c
additional axis. So, it is unnecessary to perform processing related to the
additional axis.
CAUTION
e
This signal is checked instantly the power is switched on.
It is no use turning on and off the signal when the power is
nt
already on.
ce
NOTE
This signal is valid only when parameter C4NG (bit 1 of
parameter No. 0019) = 1.
nc
Signal address
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 4NG
w
Parameter
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0019 C4NG
w
[Data type] Bit

C4NG Specifies whether to enable the ignore–fourth–axis signal (4NG, bit 7 of
signal X004), as follows:
0 : Enable
1 : Disable
29
1.4.4
Cancel–the–Z–axis
Command Signal
General Setting this signal to 1 causes the machine to behave in the same manner
as when only the Z–axis is locked.
om
Signal
Cancel–the–Z–axis
command signal (Input)
r.c
ZNG (M series)<G103#6>
[Function] The X– and Y–axis move commands and the M, S, and T functions work
normally, but the Z–axis movement of the machine is inhibited, and only
the current display is updated.
e
[Operation] Instantly this signal becomes 1 during Z–axis movement, this function
becomes enabled. The signal is valid during both automatic and manual
nt
operations.
ce
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G103 ZNG
nc
.c
w
w
w
30
1.5
SETTINGS RELATED
WITH COORDINATE
SYSTEMS
1.5.1
Machine Coordinate
System
om
General Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point
proper to the machine system.
With G53 command, the machine coordinate system is selected and the
axis can be moved at rapid traverse to the position expressed by the
machine coordinates.
r.c
Warning
WARNING
e
Since the machine coordinate system must be set before
the G53 command is specified, at least one manual
nt
reference position return or automatic reference position
return by the G28 command must be performed after the
power is turned on. This is not necessary when an
absolute–position detector is attached.
ce
nc
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
.c
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
w
(B–62544EN)
w
w
31
1.5.2
Workpiece Coordinate
System
General A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a

workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set
with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate system).
A machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system (selecting a
workpiece coordinate system).
om
A set workpiece coordinate system can be changed by shifting its origin
(changing a workpiece coordinate system).
Setting a workpiece A workpiece coordinate system can be set using one of three methods:
coordinate system (1) Method using G92 (M)/G50 (T)
r.c
A workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying a value after G92
(G50) in the program.
(2) Automatic setting
If bit 7 (APRS) of parameter No.0010 is set beforehand, a workpiece
e
coordinate system is automatically set when manual reference
position return is performed.
nt
(3) Input using the CRT/MDI panel
Six workpiece coordinate systems can be set beforehand using the
CRT/MDI panel.
ce
Selecting a workpiece The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described
coordinate system below.
(1) Selecting a workpiece coordinate system set by G92 (G50) or
nc
automatic workpiece coordinate system setting

Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected, absolute commands
work with the workpiece coordinate system.
(2) Choosing from six workpiece coordinate systems set using the
.c
CRT/MDI panel
By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece
coordinate systems 1 to 6 can be selected.
w
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1

w

w

Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 are established after reference
position return after the power is turned on. When the power is turned
on, G54 coordinate system is selected.
32
Changing workpiece The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be
coordinate system changed by changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or
workpiece zero point offset value.
Three methods are available to change an external workpiece zero point
offset value or workpiece zero point offset value.
(1) Inputting from the CRT/MDI panel
(2) Programming by G10 or G92 (G50)
(3) Changing an external workpiece zero point offset value
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
om
coordinate coordinate coordinate coordinate
system 1 (G54) system 2 (G55) system 3 (G56) system 4 (G57)
ZOFS2 ZOFS3
ZOFS1 ZOFS4
Workpiece
r.c
coordinate
ZOFS5 system 5 (G58)
EXOFS
ZOFS6
Machine zero Workpiece
coordinate
e
system 6 (G59)
EXOFS : External workpiece zero point offset value
ZOFS1 to ZOFS6 : Workpiece zero point offset value
nt
Changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or workpiece zero point
offset value
ce
Workpiece coordinate When the coordinate system actually set by the G92 (G50) command or
system shift (T series) the automatic coordinate system setting deviates from the programmed
workpiece coordinate, the set coordinate system can be shifted.
nc
Set the desired shift amount in the workpiece coordinate system shift
memory.
X
x X–Z: Coordinate system in programming
.c
x–z : Current set coordinate system with shift
ÂÂÂ
amount 0
ÂÂÂ
(coordinate system to be modified by
shifting)
w
ÂÂÂ
w
O’
z
Shift
Z
w
Set the shift amount from O’ to O in the workpiece coordinate system shift memory.
Workpiece Coordinate System shift
33
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 APRS WSFT (T series)
APRS (M series)
[Data type] Bit

APRS Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference
position return is performed
0 : Not set automatically
om
1 : Set automatically
WSFT Specifies whether to shift the workpiece coordinate system, as follows:
0 : Do not shift
1 : Shift
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0063 PRSTIN
e
[Data type] Bit
PRSTIN Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate system is set
nt
automatically
0 : Value set in parameter Nos.0708 – 0711 is used.
1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter Nos.0708 – 0711 is used,
ce
or for input in inches, the value set in parameter Nos.0815 – 0818 is
used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc
0388 WKZSFT (T series)
[Data type] Bit

WKZSFT Shift value of the workpiece coordinate system and external workpiece
.c
zero point offset value are

0 : Stored in the separate memory areas.
1 : Stored in the same memory area, that is, the shift and the offset values
w
are the same.

w
0708 – 0711 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system
setting is performed
w

[Unit of data] Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999

Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used
for setting a coordinate system automatically.
34
0751 – 0754 External workpiece zero point offset value (T series)
0940 – 0943 External workpiece zero point offset value (M series)

om

This is one of the parameters that give the position of workpiece
coordinate system (G54 to G59). It gives an offset of the workpiece zero
point common to all workpiece coordinate systems. In general, the offset
r.c
varies depending on the workpiece coordinate systems. Usually, this is
set automatically according to the input from the machine (external data
input).
e
0755 – 0758 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system1 (G54) (T series)
0759 – 0762
0763 – 0766
nt
Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system2 (G55)
Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system3 (G56)

(T series)
(T series)
ce
nc
0944 – 0947 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system1 (G54) (M series)
.c
w
w
w


The workpiece zero point offset values in workpiece coordinate systems 1
to 6 (G54 to G59) are set.
35
Workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)
Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)

Workpiece zero point offset
om
r.c
Origin of machine coordinate system
e
setting is performed with inch input
nt
Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
ce

nc
for setting a coordinate system automatically when input is performed in

inches.
NOTE
.c
This parameter is valid when PRSTIN in parameter 0063#1

is set to 1.
w
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE
w
OPERATOR’S MANUAL SYSTEM

(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE

OPERATOR’S MANUAL SYSTEM
(B–62544EN)
36
1.5.3
Rotary Axis Roll Over
General The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from
overflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 1 (ROACx)
of parameter (No.0398 (M) or 0388 (T)) to 1.
For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in the
command. For an absolute command, the coordinates after the tool has
om
moved are values rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation set
in parameter (No.0860 (M) or 0788 (T)). The tool moves in the direction
in which the final coordinates are closest when bit 2 (RODRC) of
parameter No.0398 (M) or 0388 (T) is set to 0. Displayed values for
relative coordinates are also rounded by the angle corresponding to one
r.c
rotation when bit 2 (ROCNT) of parameter No.0398 (M) or 0388 (T) is
set to 1.
e
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0011
nt ADLN (M series)
ADLN Specifies whether the fourth axis is a linear or rotation axis, as follows:
1 : Linear axis
ce
0 : Rotation axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0032 LIN3 (M series)
nc
1 : Linear axis
0 : Rotation axis
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0388 ROCNT RODRC ROAXC (T series)
w
0398 ROCNT RODRC ROAXC (M series)

w
[Data type] Bit

ROAXC The roll–over function of a rotation axis is
0 : Invalid
w
1 : Valid
NOTE
ROAXC specifies the function only for a rotation axis.
37
RODRC In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1 : Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
RODRC is valid only when ROAXC is 1.
ROCNT Relative coordinates are

0 : Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
om
1 : Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
NOTE
1 ROCNT is valid only when ROAXC is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
r.c
(No.0860 (M) or 0788 (T)).
e
0788 Move amount per rotation of rotary axis (T series)
0860 Move amount per rotation of rotary axis

nt
NOTE
(M series)
ce
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.

nc

Unit of data 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Standard setting
.c
36000 360000 3600000

value

w
Set move amount per rotation of rotation axis.

w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.18 ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVER

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.17 ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVER

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
38
1.6
ANGULAR AXIS
CONTROL (0–GCD)
General When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90° with the X axis, the
Z axis control function controls the distance traveled along each axis
according to the inclination angle. A program, when created, assumes
that the X axis and Z axis intersect at right angles. However, the actual
om
distance traveled is controlled according to an inclination angle.
+X Program coordinate system
+X Actually used (moved) coordinate system
r.c
(Xp, Za) Program command
Xp
θ
Xa
e
Za
+Z
Zp
nt θ : Inclination angle
Xa, Za, Fa: Actual travel distance and speed
Xp, Zp, Fp: Programmed travel distance and speed
ce
The travel distance for each axis is controlled according to the following
nc
expressions.
For the 0–GCD
The X–axis travel distance specified based on the diameter is obtained by:
Xa = Xp/2cosθ
.c
For the Z–axis travel distance is obtained using the following expression,
which is corrected by the inclination of the X–axis:
Za = Zp –1/2 Xp tanθ
w
The feedrate, which is always specified based on the radius, is obtained

as follows:
X–axis rate component
w
Fa = Fp/cosθ
The NOZAGC signal can be used to prevent Z–axis movement from

w
being activated due to compensation. No update occurs, so the current

position can be maintained. (The machine behaves as if it were in a
machine lock state.)
Method of use Parameter AGLST enables or disables the inclined axis control function.
If the function is enabled, the distance traveled along each axis is
controlled according to an inclination angle (set at parameter).
Parameter ZRTM1 enables X axis manual reference point return only with
a distance along the X axis.
39
Machine position display (1) Absolute/Relative position display

The position is displayed using the programmed rectangular
coordinate system.
(2) Machine position display
A machine position indication is provided in the machine coordinate
system where an actual movement is taking place according to an
inclination angle. However, when inch/metric conversion is
performed, a position is indicated which incorporates inch/metric
conversion applied to the results of inclination angle operation.
om
Signal
r.c
Inclined axis
control–related Z–axis
compensation
movement signal
e
NOZAGC<G133#6>
(0–GCD)
nt
[Function] Prevents compensation–based Z–axis movement during inclined–axis
control.
ce
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc
G133 NOZAGC (0–GCD)

.c
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0036 ZRTM1 AGLST (0–GCD)
w
[Data type] Bit

w
ZRTM1 0 : The machine tool is moved along the Z axis during manual reference
position return along the X axis under angular axis control.
1 : The machine tool is not moved along the Z axis during manual
w
reference position return along the X axis under angular axis control.
AGLST 0 : Does not perform angular axis control.
1 : Performs inclined axis control.
0755 Inclination angle for X axis control (0–GCD)
[Valid data range] 20000 to 60000, –20000 to –60000

[Unit of data] 0.001 degree
40
Warning
WARNING
After inclined axis control parameter setting, be sure to
perform manual reference point return operation.
Note
om
NOTE
1 If Z–axis movement is expected during a manual reference
position return on the X–axis, perform an X–axis reference
position return first.
2 If an inclination angle close to 0° or ±90° is set, an error can
r.c
occur. A range from ±20° to ±60° should be used.
3 Before a Z axis reference point return check (G27) can be
made, X axis reference point return operation must be
completed.
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
41
1.7
Cf AXIS CONTROL
(T series)
General This function controls the third axis connected to a servo motor as an NC
axis.
om
Specification As the basic specifications of the Cf axis are the same as those for the first
and second axes, this section focuses on the differences.
Attribute: This function can be set for linear and rotation axes,
using parameter LIN3 (bit 2 of parameter No.0032).
Which axis of the basic coordinate system becomes
r.c
the Cf axis is specified using parameter No.0279.
Command address:Absolute command C (*)
Incremental command H
e
NOTE
It is necessary to set parameter ADW (bit 0 of parameter
nt
No.0030) to 1. It is also necessary to set parameter No.
ADRC (bit 4 of parameter No.0029) to 1 if the chamfering
corner R and direct drawing dimension input functions are
used.
ce
nc
Signal If this function is unavailable, bit 2 of G118 is GR1, bit 2 is GR2, and bit
7 is DRN. If this function is available, bit 2 of G118 is changed to +3, bit
3 is to –3, and bit 7 is to H3. So, when using GR1, GR2, or DRN, set
parameter ADDCF (bit 5 of parameter No.0031) to 1, so that these signals
.c
are assigned to G123.

w
C–axis–off signal
COFF<G123#0>
w

[Function] Informs the NC that the third axis is connected as the spindle.
w
[Operation] When the signal becomes 1, the relative coordinates are cleared to 0. If
a reference position return has been completed, the
reference–position–return–completed signal (ZP3, bit 2 of F148) for the
third axis becomes 0.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G123 COFF (T series)
42
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0029 ADRC DSP3
DSP3 Specifies whether to display the current position of the third axis, as
follows:
1 : Display
0 : Do not display
ADRC Specifies the address of chamfering corner R as follows:
om
1 : I/K rather than C is used. C/R for the address for direct drawing
dimension input is prefixed with a comma as follows: ,C/,R
0 : C/R is used. C/R is used also for direct drawing dimension input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
r.c
0030 ADW30
ADW30 Specifies the name of the third axis as follows:

1: C
0: B
e
0031
#7
CNRST
nt
#6
ESFC
#5
ADDCF
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ADDCF Specifies the PMC address for signals GR1, GR2, and DRN as follows:
ce
1 : G123#2 GR1, G123#3 GR2, G123#7 DRN
0 : G118#2 GR1, G118#3 GR2, G118#7 DRN
ESFC Specifies whether to enable the feedback pulse from the position detector
during the turning mode in Cf axis control.
nc
1 : Enable
0 : Disable
CNRST Specifies whether to clear the Cf axis relative coordinates at a reference
.c
position return.
1 : Clear
0 : Do not clear
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0032 ROT10 LIN3
w
1 : Linear axis
w
0 : Rotation axis
ROT10 Specifies the measurement unit of parameters for the upper limit to the
cutting feedrate (parameter No.0527), rapid traverse F0 rate (parameter
No.0533), and the FL rate for a reference position return (parameter
No.0534) during inch output, as follows:
1 : 1 degrees/min
0 : 0.1 degrees/min
43
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62543EN–1/01
2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
44
B–62543EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
General If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the
machine movement stops in a moment.
Red
om
EMERGENCY STOP
Fig. 2.1 (a) EMERGENCY STOP
r.c
This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the
machine tool builder, the button can usually be unlocked by twisting it.
e
Signal
Emergency stop
*ESP<X021#4,G121#4>
nt
ce
[Function] Outputting an emergency stop signal stops the machine instantly.
[Operation] When the emergency stop signal *ESP turns to “0”, the emergency stop
is applied to the machine and the CNC is reset. This signal is controlled
nc
by the B contacts of a pushbutton switch. The emergency stop signal turns

the servo ready signal (SA) to “0”.
Overtravel detection by this CNC is handled by the software limit
function, and a limit switch for normal overtravel detection is not needed.
.c
To prevent the machine from moving beyond the software limit through
servo feedback error, always install a stroke end limit switch (shown in
Fig. 2.1 (b) below).
w
Emergency stop limit switch

Emergency stop
w
+X –X +Y –Y +Z –Z +4 –4
w
Relay power
Emergency stop temporary release
supply
EMG
SK
Spark killer
Fig. 2.1 (b) Connection of Emergency Stop Limit Switch
45
The distance from the position where the dynamic brake is applied to that
where the tool stops moving is given in the “AC Servo Motor
Descriptions.”
WARNING
Software limit setting point and operating point of limit switch
for emergency stop
The stop point by the software limit goes beyond the setting
point by as much as the following distance.
R
om
(mm)
7,500
R: Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
The actual stopping point may exceed the position set by a
parameter (Nos.0700 – 0703 and 0704 – 0707) by as much
as R/7500 (mm). Set the limit switch for emergency stop
r.c
including the allowance for the above value.
Software limit setting point
e
ÄÄÄÄ
Stroke end direction
nt ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
R
ÄÄÄÄ
7,500
ce
The machine stops in this Set the limit switch for emergency stop in
range. this range.
nc
Signal address
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X021 *ESP
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G121 *ESP
w
Reference item
w
AC SERVO MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B–65002E

AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E
46
2.2
CNC READY SIGNAL
General When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNC
ready signal is set to 1.
Signal
om
CNC Ready Signal
MA<F149#7>
r.c
[Function] The CNC ready signal reports that the CNC is ready.
[Output condition] When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the signal
is set to 1. Normally, it takes several seconds to establish this state after
the power is turned on. If a system alarm is issued, the signal is set to 0.
e
The signal remains set to 1, however, when an emergency stop or a similar
operation is performed.
Servo Ready Signal

nt
ce
SA <F148#6>
[Function] Signal SA turns to “1” when the servo system is ready to operate. For an
nc
axis that is to be braked, release the brake when this signal is sent and
apply the brake when this signal is not sent.
Time chart of this signal is as follows:
Power off
.c
Power on
Ready signal (MA)

w
60 to 100 msec
w
Servo ready
signal (SA)
w
Brake on
Servo alarm Servo alarm
Overload
Reset
Reset Emergency stop
1 to 2 seconds About 1 second
Fig.2.2 Time Chart for Servo Ready Signal
47
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F148 SA
F149 MA
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
48
2.3
OVERTRAVEL
CHECK
2.3.1
Overtravel Signal
General When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool
om
limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit
switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed.
Signal
r.c
Overtravel signal
*+LX to *LZ
e
<X020#0 to #5>(M)
*+LZ<X018#5>(T)
nt
[Function] Indicates that the control axis has reached its stroke limit. There are
ce
signals for every direction in every control axis. The +/– in the signal
name indicates the direction and the alphabet corresponds to the control
axis.
+ L x
nc
X X axis is at stroke limit.

Y Y axis is at stroke limit.
Z Z axis is at stroke limit.
: :
.c
+ Has moved to and reached a + direction.

– Has moved to and reached a – direction.
w
[Operation] When it is “0” , the control unit operates as given below.

@ In automatic operation, if even one axis overtravel signal turns to “0”,
w
all axes are decelerated to stop, an alarm is given and operation is

halted.
@ In manual operation, only the axis whose movement signal has turned
w
to “0” is decelerated to a stop, and the axis can be moved in the

opposite direction.
@ Once the axis overtravel signal has turned to “0”, the axis direction is
registered. Even if the signal returns to “1”, it is not possible to move
that axis in that direction until the alarm is cleared.
49
The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel.

(i) Rapid traverse
Command pulse
deceleration
V
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
Servo system delay
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
VR
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
t
om
*+L limit switch t1 t2 TR
r.c
TR 1
L1=VR(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch]
2 60000
L1:Deceleration distance
VR: Rapid traverse speed (mm/min or inch/min)
e
t1: Limit switch signal delay time (from limit switch operation to *+L
ntsignal turn off (ms))
t2: Receiver delay time 30ms
TR: Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant (ms)
ce
TS: Servo system time constant (ms)
NOTE
Servo system time constant TS is 33 msec when the servo
nc
unit is adjusted to the standard setting.
ii) Cutting feed

.c
V Servo system delay
ÄÄÄÄ
w
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
VC
ÄÄÄÄ
w
w
t1 t2
*+L limit switch
TR 1
L2=VC(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch]
2 60000
L2:Deceleration distance
Vc: Maximum feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
t1, t2, Ts: Same as (i).
50
D Releasing overtravel Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety
direction by manual operation. For details on operation, refer to the
operator’s manual of the machine tool builder.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X018 *+LZ (T series)
X020 *–LZ *–LY *–LX *+LZ *+LY *+LX (M series)
om
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015 COTZ (T series)
r.c
[Data type] Bit
COTZ The overtravel limit signal is:
0 : Checked
e
1 : Not checked
nt
WARNING
For safety, usually set 0 to check the overtravel signal.
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0057 HOT3 (M series)
nc
HOT3 The overtravel limit signal is:

0 : Not checked
1 : Checked
.c
WARNING
For safety, usually set 1 to check the overtravel signal.
w
w
Alarm and message M series

w
5n4 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–4) +

side hardware OT.
5n5 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–4) –
side hardware OT.
T series
520 OVER TRAVEL : +Z axis Exceeded the Z axis + side hardware

OT.
51
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.6.2 Overtravel
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.6.2 Overtravel

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
52
2.3.2
Stored Stroke Check 1
General When the tool exceeds a stored stroke check, an alarm is displayed and
the tool is decelerated and stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool
can be moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came.
Parameters (Nos.0700 – 0707 or 0743 – 0750 (M)/0770 – 0777 (T)) set
boundary. Outside the area of the set checks is a forbidden area. The
om
machine tool builder usually sets this area as the maximum stroke.
Signal
r.c
Stored stroke check
select signal
EXLM2 <G129#6>
e
[Function] Selects stroke check 1 (parameter Nos.0700 to 0707) or stroke check 2
nt
(parameter Nos.0743 to 0750 (M)/0770 to 0777 (T)).
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
– Checks stroke check 1 on the basis of parameter Nos.0743 to 0750
ce
(M)/0770 to 0777 (T), instead of parameter Nos.0700 to 0707.
Signal address
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G129 EXLM2
.c
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015 LM2 (T series)
w
0020 LM2 (M series)
[Data type] Bit

w
LM2 The EXLM2 signal for switching stored stroke check 1 and 2
0: Disabled
w
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0065 PSOT
[Data type] Bit

PSOT Checking of stored stroke limit during the time from power–on to the
manual position reference return
0: The stroke limit is checked.
1: The stroke limit is not checked
53
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0076 OTRFOM
[Data type] Bit

OTRFOM When a command that exceeds a stored stroke check is issued
0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check is exceeded.
1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check is exceeded.
om
0700 – 0703 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
0704 – 0707 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
r.c
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
e
[Valid data range] – 99999999 to 99999999
nt
The coordinate values of stored stroke checks 1 in the positive and
negative directions are set for each axis in the machine coordinate system.
The outside area of the two checks set in the parameters is inhibited.
ce
WARNING
1 For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must
be set.
nc
2 When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke

becomes infinite:
parameters 0700 – 0703 < parameters 0704 – 0707
For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set,
only incremental commands are available. If an absolute
.c
command is issued for this axis, the absolute register may

overflow, and normal movement will not result.
w
w
0743 – 0746 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis (T series)
0747 – 0750 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis (T series)
w
0770 – 0773 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis (M series)
0774 – 0777 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis (M series)

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
54

Set the coordinate values of stored stroke checks 1 in the positive and
negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system.
When stroke check switching signal EXLM2 is ON, stroke checks are
checked with parameters 0700 to 0707, not with parameters 1320 and
1321. The area outside that set by parameters 1326 and 1327 is inhibited.
NOTE
The EXLM2 signal is enabled only when parameter LM2
(No.0020#4 (M)/No.0015#4 (T)), is set to 1.
om
Alarm and message
Number
r.c
Message Description
5n0 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–4) +

side stored stroke check I.
5n1 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–4) –
e
side stored stroke check I.
Caution nt
CAUTION
In setting a forbidden area, if two points to be set are the
ce
same, all area is forbidden in check 1.
nc
Note
NOTE
1 Parameter PSOT (bit 6 of No.0065) selects whether each
.c
check becomes effective after the power is turned on and

manual reference position return or automatic reference
position return by G28 has been performed or immediately
w
after the power is turned on.

2 Parameter OTRFOM (bit 7 of No.0076) selects whether an
alarm is displayed immediately before the tool enters the
w
forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the

forbidden area.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.6.3 Stroke check
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.6.3 Stroke check

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
55
2.4
ALARM SIGNAL
General When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is indicated on the CRT
screen, and the alarm signal is set to 1.
If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specified
level while the CNC is turned off, the battery alarm signal is set to 1.
om
Signal
Alarm signal
r.c
AL<F149#0>
[Function] The alarm signal reports that the CNC is in an alarm state.
e
There are the following alarms. The following alarms are issued:
(a) TH alarm
nt
(b)
(c)
(d)
TV alarm
P/S alarm
Overtravel alarm
ce
(e) Overheat alarm
(f) Servo alarm
[Output condition] The alarm signal is set to 1 when:
– The CNC is placed in the alarm state.
nc
The alarm signal is set to 0 when:

– The alarm has been released by resetting the CNC.
.c
Absolute pulse coder

battery alarm signal
w
BAL1 to BAL4
<F156#0 to F156#2>
(T series)
w
<F159#0 to F159#3>
(M series)
w

[Function] Indicates when the battery voltage for the absolute pulse coder is below
the specified value.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
– The battery voltage of the absolute pulse coder has fallen to below the
specified level.
The signal is set to 0 when:
– The battery voltage of the absolute pulse coder has risen to the
specified level or higher.
56
Battery alarm signal

BAL<F149#2>
[Function] The battery alarm signal indicates that the voltage of the battery for the
memory has fallen to below a specified level while the CNC is off. In
general, this signal is used to turn on an LED to notify the operator.
– The battery voltage has fallen to below the specified level.
om
– The battery voltage has risen to the specified level or higher.
r.c
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F149 BAL AL
F156 BAL3 BAL2 BAL1 (T series)
e
F159 BAL4 BAL3 BAL2 BAL1 (M series)
Parameter
nt
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0064 NPA
[Data type] Bit

nc
NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is

entered
0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen.
1 : The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen.
.c
w
w
w
57
2.5
START LOCK/
INTERLOCK
General This signal disables machine movement along axes. When this signal is
input during movement along axes, the tool movement is decelerated,
then stopped.
om
Signal
Start lock signal

STLK<G120#1>(T series)
r.c
[Function] This signal disables machine movement along axes in automatic
operation (memory or MDI operation).
e
[Operation] When the STLK signal turns to “1”, the axis movement is decelerated and
stopped.
nt
In automatic operation, blocks containing M, S, or T commands are
executed consecutively until a block containing an axis move command
is encountered; the system then stops and is placed into the automatic
operation mode (STL is “1”, SPL is “0”). When the STLK signal turns
ce
to “0”, operation restarts. (Figs.2.5 (a), (b)).
Command read
nc
Axis move
.c
STLK
w
Fig.2.5 (a) Block containing only axis move command

w
Command read
w
MF/SF/TF
FIN
STLK
Fig.2.5 (b) Block containing auxiliary functions only
58
Interlock signal
*ILK<G117#0>(M series)
[Function] This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective
regardless of the selected mode.
[Operation] When the *ILK signal is “0”, the axis movement is decelerated and
stopped. In automatic operation, blocks containing M, S or T commands
are executed consecutively until a block containing an axis move
om
command is encountered; the system then stops and is placed into the
automatic operation mode (cycle start lamp signal STL is “1”, feed hold
lamp signal SPL is “0”). When the *ILK signal turns to “1”, operation
resumes (Figs.2.5.2(c), (d)).
r.c
Command read
Axis move
e
*IT
nt Fig.2.5 (c) Block containing only axis move command
(manual and automatic operation)
ce
Command read
nc
MF/SF/TF
FIN
.c
*IT
Fig.2.5 (d) Block containing auxiliary functions only

(automatic operation)
w
NOTE
w
The overtravel amount of the motor after turning *ILK to “0”

is represented by the following formula.
1 Tc Ts A
Qmax =Fm @ × (
w
+ + )
60 1000 1000 1000
Where
Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm or inch)
Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Tc : Cutting time constant (ms)
Ts : Servo time constant (Ts = 33ms normally)
A : Processing time of CNC
A = 50ms at standard interlock signal
A = 16ms at high–speed interlock signal
59
Interlock signal for each

axis
*ITX to *IT4
<G128#0 to #3>(M series)
ITX to IT3
<G128#0 to #2>(T series)

[Function] These signals disable feed along axes on an axis–by–axis basis.
om
A separate interlock signal is provided for each controlled axis. The
number at the end of each signal name denotes the number of the
corresponding controlled axis.
*IT x
X ..... Interlock for the X axis
r.c
Y ..... Interlock for the Y axis
Z ..... Interlock for the Z axis
: :
e
: :
[Operation] a) In manual operation

nt
The movement of an interlocked axis is inhibited, but the other axes
are movable. If an axis is interlocked during movement, it stops after
being decelerated, and it starts moving again when it is released from
ce
interlock.
b) In automatic operation (AUTO or MDI mode)
If an axis is interlocked while its movement is being commanded (the
move amount is not 0, inclusive of the tool offset), all axes movements
nc
are prevented.
If a moving axis is interlocked, all axes stop moving after being
decelerated, and they start moving again when it is released from being
interlocked.
.c
This function is effective during dry run.

w
Interlock signal for each

axis and direction
*+MITX, *–MITX, *+MITY,
w
*–MITY, *+MITZ, *–MITZ,

*+MIT4, *–MIT4
w
<G142>(M series)
+MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2,
–MIT2
<X008#2 to X008#5>
(T series)
[Function] This function allows a directional interlock for each axis. Together with
the high-speed interlock, it is possible to release the interlock of an axis
only in the direction in which no axis/directional interlock is applied.
60
[Operation] When the axis/directional interlock signal becomes “0”, CNC applies
interlock only in the corresponding axial direction. However, during
automatic operation, all axes will stop.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X008 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G117 *ILK (M series)
om
G120 STLK (T series)
G128 IT3 ITZ ITX (T series)

*IT4 *ITZ *ITY *ITX (M series)
r.c
G142 *–MIT4 *–MITZ *–MITY *–MITX *+MIT4 *+MITZ *+MITY *+MITX (M series)
Parameter
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0008 EILK (T series)
nt
EILK Specifies whether a start lock is applied to each axis separately or in
common, as follows:
1 : Separately (ITX, bit 0 of G0128 to ITZ, bit 3)
ce
0 : In common (STLK, bit 1 of G0120)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc
0008 EILK (M series)
EILK Specifies whether an interlock signal is applied to each axis separately or

in common, as follows:
1 : Separately
.c
0 : All axes in common or Z–axis alone

w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 ZILK (M series)
ZILK Specifies whether an interlock is applied to only the Z–axis or all axes in
w
common, as follows:
1 : Z–axis only
w
0 : All axes in common
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015 RILK (M series)
RILK Specifies whether to enable the high–speed interlock signal (*RILK, bit 5
of X008), as follows:
1 : Enable
0 : Disable
61
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0024 EDILK (T series)
EDILK Specifies whether to enable axial interlock signals (+MIT1, bit 2 of X008
to –MIT2, bit 5), as follows:
1 : Enable
0 : Disable
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0049 RDIK DILK (M series)
om
DILK Specifies whether to enable axial interlock signals (*+MIT, bit 0 of G142
to *–MIT, bit 7), as follows:
1 : Enable
0 : Disable
RDIK Specifies when the high–speed interlock signal (*RILK, bit 5 of X008) is
r.c
to be enabled, as follows:
1 : Disable when the axial interlock signals (*+MIT, bit 0 of G142 to
*–MIT, bit 7)
0 : Always enable
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
62
2.6
MODE SELECTION
General The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1,
MD2, and MD4. The seven modes -- memory edit (EDIT), memory
operation (MEM), manual data input (MDI), manual handle/incremental
feed (HANDLE/STEP), manual continuous feed (JOG), TEACH IN
JOG, and in addition, DNC operation mode can be selected by combining
the (AUTO) mode setting and the DNCI signal. Manual reference
position return mode can be selected by combining the manual
om
continuous feed (JOG) mode setting and the ZRN signal.
The currently selected operation mode can be posted by outputting the
operation mode check signal.
r.c
Signal
e
Mode selection signal
MD1, MD2, MD4
<G122#0 to #2> nt
DNCI<G127#5>
ZRN<G120#7>
ce
[Operation] As shown in the following table, the mode select signal is a grey code (a
code in which only one bit is different than that of the adjacent mode).
To prevent faulty mode switching, use an overcrossing contact rotary
nc
switch so that only one bit changes from that of the adjacent mode.
“Faulty mode switching” means for example:
When the mode is switched to the EDIT mode during memory operation,
the CNC enters the single block state and the operation stops at the end
.c
of the executing block.

w
w
w
63
For this mode switching, only MD2 should change from 0 to 1. If a

transient signal status change occurs in a signal other than MD2 during
mode switching, however, another mode (manual continuous feed mode,
for example) is set between automatic operation mode and memory edit
mode. When manual continuous feed mode is set while the CNC is in
automatic status, the CNC immediately stops memory operation. As a
result, although the operator intends to switch the mode to the memory
edit mode, the CNC is, instead, placed in the feed hold state.
Signal status
om
Mode
MD4 MD2 MD1 DNCI ZRN
1 Memory edit (EDIT) 0 1 1 0 0
2 Memory operation (AUTO) 0 0 1 0 0
r.c
3 Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0 0 0
4 Manual handle/incremental feed 1 0 0 0 0

(HANDLE/INC)
e
5 Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 1 0 0
6 TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1 0 0
8
nt TEACH IN JOG
DNC operation
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
ce
9 Manual reference position return 1 0 1 0 1
(ZRN)
nc
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 ZRN
.c
G122 MD4 MD2 MD1
G127 DNCI
w
w
w
64
Note
NOTE
Precautions on modes and mode switching
1 In the MDI mode, the STL signal turns to “0” and the CNC
stops at the end of execution of the commands input from
the CRT/MDI panel, but the SPL signal does not turn to “1”.
Therefore, another command can be input from the manual
data input unit under this state.
2 When the manual handle function is not provided,
om
incremental feed is enabled in the HANDLE/INC mode.
When the manual handle function is provided, only manual
handle feed is enabled in that mode.
3 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG and TEACH IN
HANDLE mode.
r.c
a) When parameter JHD no.0013#0 is set to “0” so that jog
operation and handle feed operation are performed with
separate modes:
In TEACH IN JOG mode, jog operation can be done.
In TEACH IN HANDLE mode, handle feed can be done
e
when optional manual handle feed function is provided,
and incremental feed can be done when handle feed
nt function is not provided.
b) When parameter JHD no.0013#0 is set to “1” so that jog
operation and handle feed operation are performed with
ce
the same mode:
In TEACH IN JOG mode, handle feed and jog feed can be done
when optional manual handle feed function is provided, but jog
feed only when it is not included.
In TEACH IN HANDLE mode, handle feed and jog feed
nc
can be done when optional manual handle feed function

is provided, but incremental feed only when it is not
included.
The program can be edited in both TEACH IN JOG and
.c
TEACH IN HANDLE modes.

4 When the CNC is operating in the MEM mode and is
switched to MDI, the unit automatically switches to single
w
block operation, then enters the MDI mode at the end of the
executing block. The STL signal turns to “0” at this time, but
the SPL signal does not turn to “1” (see Fig.2.6 (a)).
w
MEM mode
w
Mode select signal state

MDI mode
Operation
Executing command Manual data in-

put possible in
STL this range
Fig.2.6 (a)
65
NOTE
5 When the CNC is operating in the MDI mode and is switched
to MEM mode, the executing command is finished before
the CNC switches to the MEM mode (Fig. 2.6 (b)).
MDI mode
MEM mode
om
Operation
Memory opera-
Executing command tion possible in
this range
STL
r.c
Fig.2.6 (b)
6 When the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode is
e
selected while the CNC is operating in the MEM or MDI
mode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signal
nt turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, and
the CNC enters the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE
mode. Manual handle feed or incremental feed by axis
direction select signal is possible under this state. Since the
ce
MEM mode or MDI mode commands are held, operation
can be restarted by the cycle start signal by selecting the
MDI or MEM mode. However, if operation was stopped by
switching to the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode
nc
during manual data input or automatic operation, it can be

restarted only by the mode in use before the operation was
stopped (Fig.2.6 (c)).
.c
MEM/MDI mode
HANDLE/INC or
w
TEACH IN HAN-
DLE mode
Operation in the MEM

w
mode or MDI mode
Manual handle
/incremental
w
feed enabled
STL
SPL
ST
Cycle start signal
Fig.2.6 (c)
66
NOTE
7 When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected during
MEM or MDI mode operation, operation stops, the STL
signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to
“1”, and the CNC enters the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode.
Manual feed by feed axis direction select signal is possible
under this state. Operation can be restarted by returning to
the original state, as described for HANDLE/STEP or
TEACH IN HANDLE mode . When the mode is switched to
the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode during manual handle
om
feed or step feed operation, the CNC ignores the manual
handle feed or step feed command and manual jog feed
becomes effective. If a feed axis direction select signal turns
to “1” before the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected,
that signal is ignored. The feed axis select signal is selected
by turning the necessary feed axis direction signal to “1”
r.c
after turning all the feed axis direction select signals to “0”.
It is possible to perform handle feed in TEACH IN JOG mode
by parameter TJHD no.0002#6. For details, refer to item (3)
(Fig.2.6 (d), (e)).
e
MEM/MDI mode
ntMode select signal state
Operation in the
HANDLE/INC or
TEACH IN JOG
mode
ce
MEM mode or MDI
mode
Jog feed
enabled
nc
STL
SPL
ST Cycle start signal

.c
Fig.2.6 (d)
w
100ms or more
MEM/MDI/HADLE/
w
Mode select signal state INC mode/TEACH

IN HANDLE mode
Jog or TEACH
w
IN JOG
Feed axis
direction select
signal
Jog feed Jog feed enable

disable
Fig.2.6 (e)
67
NOTE
8 The mode switching operation is summarized in the time chart below (Fig.2.6 (f)).
M M M M
D D D
Disable because of Disable because of

feed hold state of MDI operation
possible here- feed hold state of
automatic operation MDI operation
after
om
H / S or
J End of opera-
End of operation tion
Memory read Memory Memory Memory read
operation MDI command MDI command
operation operation operation
r.c
ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
STL STL STL STL STL

SPL SPL
e
*SP
M MEM mode selection
H/S
D
nt
MDI mode selection
HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode selection

ce
J JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode selection
Fig.2.6 (f) Mode signal time chart

nc
.c
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 4.1 Manual Reference Position Return
(This manual)
w
w
w
68
2.7
STATUS OUTPUT
SIGNAL
General The table below lists the status output signals for notifying the state of the
CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal.
Signal name Symbol Reference section
Alarm signal AL 2.4
om
Battery alarm signal BAL 2.4
Reset signal RST 5.2
Rewinding signal RWD 5.2
Tapping signal TAP 11.7
r.c
Moving signal MVX – MV4 1.2.5
In–position signals INPX – INP4 7.2.6.1
Cutting feed signal CUT 2.7 (the section you are
e
reading)
nt
Thread cutting signal
Canned cycle start

signal
THRD
FXST
6.4.1
2.7 (the section you are

reading)
ce
Signal
nc
Cutting feed signal

CUT<F188#6>
.c

[Function] Notifies that cutting feed is being performed by automatic operation.
w
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:

– When cutting feed is being performed by automatic operation (cutting
w
feed for linear interpolation, circular interpolation, thread cutting, skip

cutting, or canned cycle)
w
CAUTION
This signal is not output in the feed hold state.
NOTE
This signal is output even when the feedrate override is 0%,
or during interlock.
69
Canned cycle start

signal
FXST<F161#4>
[Function] This signal is kept to be 1 for 200 ms after the beginning of drilling axis
movement, to indicate when a canned cycle such as G73, G74, G76, or
G80 to G89 (including a rigid tapping cycle) begins.
[Output condition] This signal becomes 1 when:
om
D Drilling axis movement begins in a canned cycle such as G73, G74,
G76, or G80 to G89 (including a rigid tapping cycle); when drilling
axis movement begins at the R point, signal output is treated as one
block, so be careful about single–block operation.
The signal becomes 0 when:
r.c
D 200 ms elapses after the signal becomes 1.
D A reset occurs, or an emergency stop signal is input.
NOTE
e
1 If drilling axis movement ends in the 200 ms period during
which the signal is 1, the signal will not be reset to 0.
nt
2 If feed hold occurs in the 200 ms period during which the
signal is 1, the signal will not be reset to 0.
ce
Signal address
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F161 FXST
F188 CUT
.c
w
w
w
70
2.8
VRDY OFF ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL
General The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivated
when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF alarm ignore
signal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, even if the
safety guard has been opened.
om
Signal
r.c
All–Axis VRDY OFF
Alarm Ignore Signal
IGNVRY<G123#0>(M)
IGNVRY<G127#0>(T)
e
[Function] Disables the detection of servo alarm No.401 or 403, VRDY OFF, for all
axes.
nt
[Operation] When this signal is set to logical 1, the control unit operates as follows:
ce
@ The control unit does not issue servo alarm No.401 or 403, VRDY OFF,
even when the servo amplifier ready signal goes off.
nc
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G123 IGNVRY (M series)
.c
G127 IGNVRY (T series)

w
Alarm and message

w
401 SERVO ALARM: 1, 2TH 1–axis, 2–axis servo amplifier READY

AXIS VRDY OFF signal (DRDY) went off.
w
403 SERVO ALARM: 3, 4TH 3–axis, 4–axis servo amplifier READY

AXIS VRDY OFF signal (DRDY) went off.
71
Caution
CAUTION
1 When the control enters NOT READY status due to
emergency stop or a servo alarm and then the control is
reset, reset processing is not terminated until the VRDY
OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 0.
2 When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1 and the
servo amplifier ready signal is set to off, the motor is freed
om
from the drive, but follow up is not performed. To perform
follow up, set the servo off signal to 1.
Note
r.c
NOTE
While the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1, and a
servo alarm other than alarm No.401 or 403 occurs, the
control unit detects the alarm.
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
72
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62543EN–1/01
3 MANUAL OPERATION
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
73
3.1
JOG FEED/
INCREMENTAL FEED
General
D Jog feed In the jog mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection signal to “1”
on the machine operator’s panel continuously moves the tool along the
selected axis in the selected direction.
om
Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. 3 axes can be selected
at a time by parameter S3JOG (No.0049#4).
D Incremental feed In the incremental feed mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection
signal to “1” on the machine operator’s panel moves the tool one step
r.c
along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance
the tool is moved is the least input increment. Each step can be 10, 100,
or 1000 times the least input increment.
The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the override signal.
e
With the rapid traverse selection signal the tool can be moved at the rapid
traverse rate regardless of the override signal.
Signal
nt
The following signals determine the way in which jog feed or incremental
ce
feed is executed.
Selection Jog feed Incremental feed
Mode selection MD1, MD2, MD4 MD1, MD2, MD4

nc
Selection of the axis to

move
+X –X,
+X, –X +Y
+Y, –Y,
–Y+Z+Z, –Z,
–Z . . .
Selection of the direc-
.c
tion to move the axis
Selection of the move MP1, MP2

amount
w
Selection of feedrate *OV1 – *OV8, RT, ROV1, ROV2

w
The only difference between jog feed and incremental feed is the method
of selecting the feed distance. In jog feed, the tool continues to be fed
while the following signals selecting the feed axis and direction are “1”:
w
+X, –X, +Y, –Y, +Z, –Z, etc. In incremental feed, the tool is fed by one
step.
The distance of the step is selected by the manual handle feed move
distance select signal MP1 an d MP2.
For the signals selecting the mode, see Section 2.6, “Mode Selection
Signals.” For the manual handle feed selection signals, MP1 and MP2 of
selection of the move amount, see 3.2 “Manual handle feed.” For rapid
traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2, see Subsec. 7.1.7.1,
“Feedrate Override Signals.”
Other signals are described below.
74
B–62543EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Feed Axis and Direction

Selection Signal
+X to +4
<G116#2 to G119#2>
–X to –4
<G116#3 to G119#3>
[Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed.
om
The sign (+ or –) in the signal name indicates the feed direction. The
number or alphabet indicates the number of the control
axis.
+ x
X X axis is fed
r.c
Y Y axis is fed
Z Z axis is fed
: :
4 Fourth axis is fed
e
+ Feed in positive direction
– Feed in negative direction
nt
[Operation] When the signal is high, the control unit operates as described below.
D When jog feed or incremental feed is allowed, the control unit moves
ce
the specified axis in the specified direction.
D In jog feed, the control unit continues to feed the axis while the signal
is “1”.
nc
Jog mode
(or Teach in jog mode)
+X
X axis move
.c
D In incremental feed, the control unit feeds the specified axis by the step
distance which is specified by the manual handle feed move distance
w
selection signal MP1, MP2. Then the control unit stops it. Even if the
signal is set to “0” while the axis is being fed, the control unit does not
stop feeding it.
w
To feed the axis again, set the signal to “0”, then set it to “1” again.
Incremental feed mode
(TEACH IN HANDLE mode)
w
+X
X axis move
75
NOTE
1 If both the positive direction and negative direction signals of the same axis are simultaneously
set to “1”, neither the positive direction nor the negative direction is selected. The control unit
assumes that both these signals are set to “0”.
2 If the feed axis and direction selection signals are set to “1” before the jog feed mode or
incremental feed mode is selected, these signals are invalidated. After the jog feed mode or
incremental feed mode is selected, set these signal to “0”, then set them to “1” again.
Jog mode
or incremental feed mode
om
+X
X axis move
+X is inef-
fective dur- Axis is fed again after signals
ing this have turned to “0” once.
period.
r.c
3 If the control unit is reset while the feed axis and direction selection signals are set to “1” or if
a feed axis and direction signal turns to “1” while the control unit is in the reset state, the signal
cannot be validated by releasing the reset state. After the reset state is released, set these
signals to “0”, then set them to “1” again.
e
Incremental feed mode
(TEACH IN HANDLE mode)
Reset
+X
nt
ce
X axis move
+X is inef-
fective dur- Axis is fed again
Move is stopped by ing this
resetting after signals have
period. turned to “0” once.
nc
.c
Override signal
*OV1 to *OV8
<G121#0 to #3>
w

[Function] Selects the feedrate for jog or incremental feed.
w
[Operation] During jog or incremental feed, the signal specifies the feedrate that is
applied when the manual rapid traverse selection signal, RT, is 0.
w
76
A relationship between the state of the machine contact and the feedrate
can be selected from the two in the following table according to parameter
setting.
When parameter OVRI is 0 When parameter OVRI is 1
Machine contact state
Jog feed Jog feed
Override Override
value Metric Inch value Metric Inch
*OV1 *OV2 *OV4 *OV8 [%] system system [%] system system
[mm/min] [inch/min] [mm/min] [inch/min]
om
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 150 1260 50
0 1 1 1 10 20 0.08 140 790 30
1 0 1 1 20 3.2 0.12 130 500 20
r.c
0 0 1 1 30 5.0 0.2 120 320 12
1 1 0 1 40 7.9 0.3 110 200 8.0
0 1 0 1 50 12.6 0.5 100 126 5.0
e
1 0 0 1 60 20 0.8 90 79 3.0
0 0 0 1 70 32 1.2 80 50 2.0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
nt 80
90
50
79
2.0
3.0
70
60
32
20
1.2
0.8
ce
1 0 1 0 100 126 5.0 50 12.6 0.5
0 0 1 0 110 200 8.0 40 7.9 0.3
1 1 0 0 120 320 12 30 5.0 0.2

nc
0 1 0 0 130 500 20 20 3.2 0.12
1 0 0 0 140 790 30 10 2.0 0.08

.c
0 0 0 0 150 1260 50 0 0 0
NOTE
w
1 Parameter OVRI is bit 4 of parameter No.003.

2 A newly selected feedrate becomes valid immediately when
w
the override switch is operated during axis movement.

3 Generally, this signal is issued using the rotary switch.
4 Each feedrate value in the above table includes an error of
w
3%.
5 In the M series units, the feedrate for jog feed can be
changed by parameter setting.
6 This signal can be used also as an override signal for
automatic dry run.
77
Manual rapid traverse

selection signal
RT<G121#6>
[Function] Selects a rapid traverse rate for jog feed or incremental feed.
[Operation] When the signal turns to “1”, the control unit operates as described below:
D The control unit executes the jog feed or incremental feed at a rapid
traverse rate. The rapid traverse override is validated.
om
D When the signal is switched from “1” to “0” or vice versa during jog
feed or incremental feed, the feedrate is decelerated until it reaches
zero, then increased to the specified value. During acceleration and
deceleration, the feed axis and direction selection signal can be kept
“1”.
r.c
Jog feed mode
or incremental feed mode
+X
e
RT
X axis move
nt Rapid traverse
rate
ce
Feedrate selected by manual
feedrate override signal
nc
WARNING
After the power is turned on, the stroke limit function does
not work until the reference position return is completed.
During this period, the control unit ignores the RT signal, if
.c
it is set to “1”, and keeps moving the tool at a feedrate

selected by the manual feedrate override signal. A
parameter ISOT (No.0010#0) can be specified so that the
rapid traverse is validated before the reference position
w
return is completed.
w
w
78
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G116 –X +X
G117 –Z +Z (T series)
–Y +Y (M series)
G118 –3 +3 (T series)
–Z +Z (M series)
om
G119 –4 +4 (M series)
G121 RT *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
r.c
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0008 MFPR (T series)
[Data type] Bit
e
MFPR Jog feed (manual continuous feed)
0 : Jog feed is performed at feed per minute.
#7
nt
1 : Jog feed is performed at feed per rotation.
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
0010 ISOT
[Data type] Bit

ISOT Manual rapid traverse during the period from power–on time to the
nc
completion of the reference position return.

0 : Disabled (Jog feed is performed.)
1 : Enabled
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0049 S3JOG
w
[Data type] Bit

S3JOG Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapid
traverse and manual reference position return
w
0 : 1 axis
1 : Up to 3 axes
w
0559 – 0562 Manual rapid traverse rate
[Data type] Two–word axis

[Unit of data] Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 – 24000 30 – 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 – 9600 30 – 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 – 24000 30 – 12000
79
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is
100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameters 0518 – 0521 (rapid
traverse rate) is assumed.
om
0601 – 0604 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 msec
r.c
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog
feed.
e
0605 – 0608 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
nt
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B IS-C
ce
nc
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration in

jog feed.
Warning
.c
WARNING
For incremental feeding along an axis under diameter
w
programming, the tool moves in units of the diameter.

w
Note
w
NOTE
1 Time constant and method of automatic acceleration/
deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00
in programmed command.
2 If a manual pulse generator is provided, the manual handle
feed mode is enabled instead of incremental feed mode.
However, using parameter JHD (bit 0 of parameter
No.0013) enables both manual handle and incremental
feed in the manual handle feed mode.
80
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.3.2 JOG FEED
OPERATOR’S
OPERATOR S MANUAL
(B–62574EN) III.3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.3.2 JOG FEED

OPERATOR’S
OPERATOR S MANUAL
(B–62544EN) III.3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
81
3.2
MANUAL HANDLE
FEED
General In the manual handle feed mode, the tool can be minutely moved by
rotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along which the tool
is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection signal.
The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse
generator is rotated by one graduation is equal to the least input increment.
Or the distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is
om
rotated by one graduation can be magnified by 10 times or by one of the
two magnifications specified by parameters (No.0121 and 0699).
The handle magnifications can be selected by the manual handle feed
move distance selection signal.
r.c
The number of manual pulse generators available depends on the type of
used as listed below.
(M series)
– Control with one manual handle: Up to one generator
e
(T series)
– Control with one manual handle: Up to one generator
Availability of manual
nt
Parameter JHD (bit 0 of No.0013) enables or disables the manual handle
ce
handle feed in Jog mode feed in the JOG mode.
When the parameter JHD( bit 0 of No.0013) is set 1,both manual handle
feed and incremental feed are enabled.
nc
Availability of manual Parameter TJHD (bit 6 of No.0002) enables or disables the manual handle
handle feed in TEACH IN feed generator in the TEACH IN JOG mode.
JOG mode
.c
A command to the MPG Parameter HDLPM (No.0060#4 (M)/No.0077# (T)) specifies as follows:
exceeding rapid traverse SET VALUE 0: The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate
w
rate and generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are
ignored.(The distance the tool is moved may
not match the graduations on the manual pulse generator.)
w
SET VALUE 1: The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate and
generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are not
ignored but accumulated in the CNC.
w
(No longer rotating the handle does not immediately stop

the tool. The tool is moved by the pulses accumulated in the
CNC before it stops.)
Movement direction of Parameter HPNEG (No.0386#0 – #3) (T) switches the direction in which
an axis to the rotation of the tool moves along an axis, corresponding to the direction in which the
MPG handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated.
82
Signal
Manual handle feed axis

selection signal
HX – H4<G116#7 –
G119#7>(M series)
om
[Function] When only one manual pulse generator is used
The following table lists the relationships between the manual handle feed
axis selection signal and the axis to which the signal is applied. Any
combination not listed below does not cause axis movement at all.
Manual handle feed axis selection signal
r.c
Feed axis
H4 HZ HY HX
0 0 0 1 X axis
e
0 0 1 0 Y axis
0 1 0 0 Z axis
nt 1 0 0 0 Fourth axis
ce
(T series)
HX<G116#7>
HZ<G117#7>
nc
H3<G118#7>
[Function] When only one manual pulse generator is used
.c
The following table lists the relationships between the manual handle feed
axis selection signal and the axis to which the signal is applied. Any
combination not listed below does not cause axis movement at all.
w
Manual handle feed axis selection signal

Feed axis
w
H3 HZ HX
0 0 1 X axis
w
0 1 0 Z axis
1 0 0 Third axis
83
Manual Handle Feed

Amount Selection Signal
MP1, MP2
<G120#0, #1>(M)
<0118#0, G119#0>(T)
(Incremental Feed
Signal)
om
[Function] This signal selects the distance traveled per pulse from the manual pulse
generator during the manual handle feed or manual handle interrupt. It
also selects the distance traveled per incremental feed step.
The table below lists the signal–to–distance correspondence.
Travel distance
select signal for
r.c
Distance traveled
manual handle
feed
Manual handle Manual handle
MP2 MP1 Incremental feed
feed interrupt
e
0 0 Least input Least command Least input
increment 1 increment 1 increment 1
0 1 Least input Least command Least input
nt1
1
0
1
increment
Least input
increment
Least input
10
m*1
increment 10
Least command
increment m*1
Least command
increment
Least input
increment
Least input
10
100
ce
increment n*1 increment n*1 increment 1000
*1 Scale factors m and n are specified using parameter Nos.0121 and

0699.
nc
WARNING
1 Because the least input increment is used as the units for
manual handle and incremental feed, the same value
represents a different distance depending on whether the
.c
metric or inch input system is used.

2 For an axis under diameter programming, the tool moves by
the diameter value.
w
w
NOTE
See Section 3.1, “Jog Feed/Incremental Feed” for
incremental feed.
w
84
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G116 HX
G117 HZ MP1 (T series)

HY (M series)
G118 H3 MP2 (T series)

HZ (M series)
om
G119 H4 (M series)
G120 MP2 MP1 (M series)
r.c
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0002 TJHD
[Data type] Bit
e
TJHD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode
nt
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0013 JHD
[Data type] Bit

nc
JHD Manual handle feed in JOG mode or incremental feed in the manual
handle feed
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0018 NAMP2 NZMP2 NYMP2 NXMP2 (M series)
w
[Data type] Bit

N*MP2 Specify whether to enable the handle feed multiply value ( 100) for each
w
axis, as follows:
1 : Disable
0 : Enable
w
85
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0060 HDLPM (M series)
0077 HDLPM (T series)
[Data type] Bit

HDLPM When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued,
0 : The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are ignored. (The graduations of the
manual pulse generator may not agree with the distance the machine
om
has traveled.)
1 : The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are not ignored, but stored in the CNC. (If
the rotation of the manual pulse generator is stopped, the machine
moves by the distance corresponding to the pulses preserved in the
r.c
CNC, then stops.)
0118 Number of manual pulse generators used (M series)
e
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1
nt
This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators.
ce
0121 Manual handle feed magnification m
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] One time
nc

This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed
movement selection signal MP2 is on.
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0386 HDPG4 HDPG3 HDPG2 HDPG1
w
[Data type] Bit

HDPG* Specify whether to enable the handle feed multiply value ( 1000) for
w
each axis, as follows:

1 : Disable
0 : Enable
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0386 HPNEG4 HPNEG3 HPNEG2 HPNEG1 (T series)
[Data type] Bit

HPNEG* Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator
0 : Same in direction
1 : Reverse in direction
86
0699 Manual handle feed magnification n
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] One time
This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed
movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are “1”.
Warning
om
WARNING
Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such
as x100 moves the tool too fast or the tool may not stop
immediately after the handle is no longer rotated or the
r.c
distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on
the manual pulse generator. The feedrate is clamped at the
rapid traverse rate.
e
Caution
nt
CAUTION
Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations
ce
per second or lower.
nc
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
.c
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
w
(B–62544EN)
w
w
87
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62543EN–1/01
4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
88
B–62543EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
4.1
MANUAL
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZM*

(No.0003#0 – #3) for each axis by turning the feed axis and direction
select signal to “1” in the manual reference position return mode, and is
om
returned to the reference position.
Manual reference position return is performed by using a grid method.

The reference position is based on an electrical grid, using on one–rota-
tion signals received from the position detector.
r.c
D Automatic setting of Bit 7 of parameter 0010 (APRS) can be set to automatically determine the
coordinate system coordinate system at manual reference position return. Parameters 0708
– 0711 can be set to determine the workpiece coordinate system by
assigning, upon the completion of reference position return, the value set
e
in a parameter to a reference point on the tool holder or the tip position
of the reference tool.
nt
The following signals relate with the manual reference position return:
Manual Reference Position Return

ce
Mode selection MD1, MD2, MD4
Selection of reference position return ZRN

nc
Selection of axis to be moved

+X –X,
+X, –X +Y
+Y, –Y,
–Y+Z+Z, –Z
–Z, ...
Selection of direction to be moved
Selection of speed to be moved ROV1, ROV2

.c
Deceleration signal for reference *DECX, *DECY, *DECZ, ...

position return
w
Completion signal for reference posi- ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ...

tion return
Reference position establishment sig- ZRFX, ZRFY, ZRFZ, ...

w
nal
w
Basic Procedure for (1) Select the JOG mode or TEACH IN JOG mode, and set the manual
Reference Position reference position return selection signal ZRN to “1”.
Return (2) Feed a target axis toward the reference position by making an
appropriate feed axis and direction selection signal (+X, –X, +Y,
–Y,…) “1”.
(3) While the feed axis and direction selection signal is “1”, rapid traverse
takes place along that axis. Although the rapid traverse override
signals (ROV1, ROV2) are valid, the override is generally set to
100%.
89
(4) When the reference position is approached, a limit switch installed on

the machine is turned on, making the deceleration signal (*DECX,
*DECY, *DECZ,…) for reference position deceleration “0”.
Consequently, the feedrate is decelerated to 0, then the tool is fed at
a constant low speed (reference position return FL feedrate specified
by parameter (No.0534) setting).
(5) When the deceleration signal turns to “1” again after the limit switch
for deceleration is passed, the tool is fed with the feedrate unchanged,
then the tool stops at the first grid point (electric grid point).
(6) Upon confirmation that the current position is in the in–position area,
om
the reference position return end signal (ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ,…) and the
reference position establishment signal (ZRFX, ZRFY, ZRFZ,…) turn
to “1”.
Step (2) and subsequent steps are performed independently for each axis.
The number of simultaneously controlled axes is usually one, but it
r.c
becomes three by parameter S3JOG (No.0049#4).
If the feed axis direction selection signal (+X, –X, +Y, –Y,…) turns to “0”
between step (2) and (5) , the tool is stopped at once, and reference
e
position return is assumed to be canceled. If the signal turn to “1” again,
operation resumes from step (3) (rapid traverse).
nt
The timing charts for the basic procedures are given below.
JOG or TEACH IN
ce
JOG mode
ZRN
+X
nc
*DECX
Grid ................ . . . . .
ZPX
.c
ZRFX
Feedrate
w
Rapid traverse rate FL rate

w
w
90
Installation conditions When installing the deceleration limit switch for manual reference
for deceleration limit position return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied:
switch Deceleration limit Deceleration limit
operation position release position Reference position
LDW LDA
*DECX
Grid
. . . . . . . . . . .
om
Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate (VR) FL rate (VL)
r.c
D LDW: Deceleration dog width (mm or inch)
T
V R( R ) 30 ) T S) ) 4V L T S
L DW u 2
e
60 1000
VR: Rapid traverse (mm/min or inch/min)
nt
TR: Rapid traverse time constant (ms)
TS: Servo time constant (ms)
VL: FL speed for reference position return (mm/min or inch/min)
ce
D LDA: Distance between deceleration limit switch released position
and reference position
LDA: Move amount of 1/2 revolution of motor
Since the above conditions do not include the limit switch operation
nc
variations, this point must also be considered at installation.
Servo position error and To perform manual reference position return when the reference position
one–rotation signal has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual reference
.c
position return mode, in the reference position return direction at a speed

so that the servo position error value exceeds 128. At this time, the tool
must cross the grid line corresponding to a one–rotation signal from the
w
position detector.
The servo position error is calculated from the following formula:
w
Servo position error amount = F 1000 1 1

60 G U
F: Feedrate
w
G: Servo loop gain [s–1]

U: Detection unit [mm]
(Example)
When the tool is fed at a feedrate F of 6000 mm/min with a servo loop gain
G of 30 s–1 and a detection unit U of 1 mm, the servo position error is
calculated as follows:
Servo position error + 6000 1000 1 1

60 30 1
=3,333
91
By reversing the formula above, the following formula gives the feedrate
F needed to set the servo position error to 128 when the servo loop gain
G is 30 s–1 and the detection unit U is 1 mm:
F = 128 60 30
1000
= 230 [mm/min]
Therefore, when the servo loop gain is 30 s–1 and the detection unit is 1
mm, the tool must be fed in the reference position return direction at a
speed of at least 230 mm/min before manual reference position return.
om
Grid shift The grid can be shifted by the distance set in parameters 0508 to 0511,
thus shifting the reference position. The grid shift to be set in the
parameter must not exceed the reference counter capacity (parameter
No.0004#0 to #3, No.0007#0 to #3) (grid interval).
r.c
Signal
e
Manual reference
position return selection
signal ZRN<G120#7>
nt
ce
[Function] This signal selects manual reference position return. Manual reference
position return is a kind of jog feed. Therefor, to select manual reference
position return, it is required that the jog mode be selected and that the
nc
manual reference position return selection signal be set to “1”.

[Operation] When the manual reference position return selection signal is set to “1”,
the control unit becomes as described below.
D If jog feed mode is not selected, the control unit ignores the manual
.c
reference position return selection signal.

D If jog mode is selected, manual reference position return is enabled.
w
NOTE
If the ZRN status changes from “0” to “1” or “1” to “0” during
jog feed, the feedrate is decelerated to 0. Then, to make
w
reference position return or jog feed, turn feed axis and

direction selection signal to “0” then set it to “1”.
w
92
Feed Axis and Direction For details about this signal, see 3.1.2, “Feed Axis and Direction
Selection Signal Selection Signal”. Here, only notes on use of reference position return are
given.
NOTE
1 The direction of reference position return is predetermined
for each axis by parameter ZM* (No.0003#0 to #3). If the
tool is fed in the opposite direction to the predetermined
direction in manual reference position return, the
om
deceleration signal for reference position return turns to “0”,
and the tool is returned to the point at which the deceleration
signal turns to “1” again (that is, the point where the
deceleration limit switch would be encountered if the tool
were fed in the predetermined direction). Then reference
r.c
position return is performed automatically in the
predetermined direction.
e
JOG mode or TEACH IN
nt
JOG mode
ZRN
–X
ce
*DECX
Grid ................ . . . . .
ZPX
nc
ZRFX
Feedrate
.c
FL rate
Rapid
w
traverse
Rapid traverse rate rate
w
NOTE
w
2 When reference position return is selected, an axis whose

reference position return end signal is already “1” or an axis
whose reference position return end signal was set “1” upon
completion of reference position return is locked, and
movement along that axis is disabled while the reference
position return selection signal (ZRN) is “1”. To perform
movement along such an axis, ZRN must be set “0”, and the
feed axis and direction selection signal must be set “0” then
set “1” again.
93
Reference position
return deceleration
signals *DECX to *DEC4
<X016#5 to X019#5>
[Function] These signals decelerate the feedrate for manual reference position return
so that the reference position is approached at a low feedrate.
The deceleration signals are provided for axes in a one–to–one correspon-
dence. A number or alphabet appended to a deceleration signal represents
om
a controlled axis number.
*DEC x
X : Reference position return deceleration signal for the X axis
Y : Reference position return deceleration signal for the Y axis
Z : Reference position return deceleration signal for the Z axis
r.c
:
:
[Operation] For the operation of the control unit in response to the deceleration signal,
e
see the description of the basic procedure for manual reference position
return.
Reference position
return end signals
nt
ce
ZPX to ZP4
<F148#0 to #3>
nc
[Function] These signals report that the tool is at the refernce position on a controlled
axis.
These siganls are provided for axes in a one–to–one corespondence.
A number or alphabet appended to a signal represents a controlled axis
number.
.c
ZP x
X : Reference position return end signal for the X axis
w
Y : Reference position return end signal for the Y axis

Z : Reference position return end signal for the Z axis
:
w

w
D Manual reference position returns is completed, and the current

position is in the in–position area.
D Automatic reference position return (G28) is completed, and the
current position is in the in–position area.
D Reference position return check (G27) is completed, and the current
position is in the in–position area.
These signals turn to “0”when:
D The tool has moved from the reference position.
D An emergency stop is applied.
D A servo alarm is raised.
94
Reference position
establishment signal
ZRFX to ZRF4
<F168#0 to #3>
[Function] Notify the system that the reference position has been established.
A reference position establishment signal is provided for each axis. The
number appended to each signal name indicates the number of the
om
controlled axis.
ZRF x
X : X-axis reference position establishment signal
Y : Y-axis reference position establishment signal
Z : Z-axis reference position establishment signal
r.c
:
:
[Output condition] The signals are set to 1 in the following case:
e
⋅ When the reference position is established after manual reference
position return
nt
⋅ When the reference position is established using the absolute–position
detector at initial power–on
The signals are set to 0 in the following case:
ce
⋅ When the reference position is lost
nc
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X016 *DECX
.c
X017 *DECZ (T series)

*DECY (M series)
X018 *DEC3 (T series)

w
*DECZ (M series)
X019 *DEC4 (M series)

w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 ZRN
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F148 ZP3 ZPZ ZPX (T series)
ZP4 ZPZ ZPY ZPX (M series)
F168 ZRF3 ZRFZ ZRFX (T series)

ZRF4 ZRFZ ZRFY ZRFX (M series)
95
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 DECI
[Data type] Bit

DECI Deceleration signal (*DECX to *DEC4) for manual reference position
return
0 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0.
1 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 1.
om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0003 ZM3 ZMZ ZMX (T series)
ZM4 ZMZ ZMY ZMX (M series)
r.c
NOTE
e
[Data type] Bit
ZMx The direction of reference position return and the initial direction of
nt
backlash at power–on
0 : Positive direction
1 : Negative direction
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0004 – 0007 Reference counter size
[Data type] Bit

nc

Set the size of the reference counter.
As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the
.c
reference position return in the grid method.

grid interval
Size of the reference counter =
detection unit
w
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
NOTE
w

w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 APRS
[Data type] Bit

96
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0024 CLCL (M series)
0075 CLCL (T series)
[Data type] Bit

CLCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0 : The local coordinate system is not canceled.
om
1 : The local coordinate system is canceled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0041 JRNJF (T series)
[Data type] Bit
r.c
JRNJF The manual reference position return at JOG feedrate
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0049
[Data type] Bit

nt S3JOG
S3JOG Number of axes controlled simultaneously in JOG feed, manual rapid

ce
traverse and manual reference position return
0 : 1 axis
1 : 3 axes
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0063 PRSTIN
[Data type] Bit

.c

automatically
0 : Value set in parameter Nos.0708 to 0711 is used.
w
1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter Nos.0708 to 0711 is used,
or for input in inches, the value set in parameter Nos.0815 to 0818 is
w
used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0065 POST
[Data type] Bit

manual reference position return
0 : The stroke limit is checked.
1 : The stroke limit is not checked
97
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0074 CFR3 CFRZ CFRX (T series)
CFR4 CFRZ CFRY CFRX (M series)
[Data type] Bit

CFRx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued in
automatic operation (AUTO or MDI) when a return to the reference
position has not been performed since the power was turned on
0 : An alarm is not generated.
om
1 : An alarm is generated. (P/S alarm 224).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0399 OUTZRN
r.c
[Data type] Bit
OUTZRN When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt state
during automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of the
conditions listed below:
e
0 : Manual reference position return is not performed, with P/S alarm No.
091.
nt
1 : Manual reference position return is performed without an alarm
occurring.
< Conditions >
ce
D When there is a remaining distance to travel.
D When an auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle–speed
function, tool function) is being executed.
D When a cycle such as a dwell cycle or canned cycle is being executed.
nc
0508 – 0511 Grid shift value

.c
[Data type] Word

w
A grid shift is set.

w
w
NOTE
98
0534 FL rate of the reference position return
[Data type] Word

Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 – 15000 6 – 12000
om
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return
is performed.
0708 – 0711 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
coordinate system automatically
r.c
Linear axis
e
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
(input in mm)
Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
nt
(input in inches)
Rotation axis

0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
ce
nc
coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches

.c

Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
(input in inches)
w

w

inches.
w
NOTE
is set to 1.
99
Alarm and message

090 REFERENCE RETURN IN- The reference position return cannot be

COMPLETE performed normally because the reference
position return start point is too close to the
reference position or the speed is too slow.
Separate the start point far enough from the
reference position, or specify a sufficiently
fast speed for reference position return.
Check the program contents.
om
091 REFERENCE RETURN IN- Manual reference position return cannot be
COMPLETE performed in the feed hold state. Perform a
manual reference position return in the au-
tomatic operation stop state or reset state.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE Not returned to reference point before cycle

POINT start. (Only when parameter No.0074#0 to
r.c
#3 are 1.
Do reference position return.
e
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION
nt
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.3.1

RETURN
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION

ce
OPERATOR’S MANUAL RETURN
(B–62544EN)
nc
.c
w
w
w
100
4.2
SETTING THE
REFERENCE
POSITION WITHOUT
DOGS
General This function moves the tool near around the reference position set for
each axis in the manual continuous feed mode. Then it sets the reference
position in the reference position return mode without the deceleration
om
signal for reference position return by turning the feed axis and direction
select signal to “1”. With this function, the machine reference position can
be set at a given position without installing the limit switch for
deceleration for reference position return.
r.c
Also, if the absolute-position detector is provided, the set reference
position is retained after the power is turned off. In this case, when the
power is turned on again, there is no need for setting the reference position
again.
e
Basic Procedure for Setting (1) Feed the tool, along the axis for which the reference position is to be
the Reference Position ntset, by manual continuous feed in the reference position return
Without Dogs direction. Stop the tool near the reference position, but do not exceed
the reference position.
ce
(2) Enter manual reference position return mode, then set 1 for the feed
axis direction selection signal (for the positive or negative direction)
for the axis.
(3) The CNC positions the tool to the nearest grid line (based on
nc
one–rotation signals from the position detector) in the reference

position return direction specified with bits 0 to 3 (ZMx) of parameter
No.0003. The point to which the tool is thus positioned becomes the
reference position.
.c
(4) The CNC checks that the tool is positioned to within the in–position
area, then sets the completion signal for reference position return and
the reference position establishment signal to 1.
w
The timing chart for the basic elements constituting steps (2) to (4) is
shown below.
w
w
101
Manual reference
position return
mode
+X or –X
Grid . . . . . .
ZPX
ZRFX
Feedrate
om
FL rate
r.c
The following figure shows the positional relation between the reference
position and the point to which the tool is positioned by manual
continuous feed.
e
– direction + direction
nt Grid A Position
after jog feed
B
ce
A Reference position for reference position return in the negative direction
B Reference position for reference position return in the positive direction
nc
Servo position error and To set the reference position without dogs, when the reference position
one–rotation signal has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual continuous
feed mode, in the reference position return direction at such a speed that
the servo position error value exceeds 128. The tool must cross the grid
.c
line corresponding to a one–rotation signal from the position detector.
Section 4.1 explains how to calculate the servo position error.

w
Grid shift To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the distance set
in parameter Nos.0508 to 0511. The grid shift to be set in the parameter
w
must not exceed the reference counter capacity (bits 0 to 3 of parameter

Nos.0004 to 0007).
w
Reference position When the feed axis and direction selection signal is set to 1 in manual
return reference position return mode after the reference position has been
established, the tool is positioned to the reference position regardless of
the direction specified with the feed axis and direction selection signal.
The completion signal for reference position return is then set to 1.
102
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE
om
[Data type] Bit
ZMx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
e
0004 – 0007 Reference counter size
[Data type] Bit

nt
Set the size of the reference counter.
ce
As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the
reference position return in the grid method.
grid interval
Size of the reference counter =
detection unit
nc
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
NOTE
.c

w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0010 APRS
[Data type] Bit

w

103
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0024 CLCL (M series)
0075 CLCL (T series)
[Data type] Bit

CLCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0 : The local coordinate system is not canceled.
1 : The local coordinate system is canceled.
om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0049 S3JOG
[Data type] Bit
r.c
S3JOG Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed,
manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return
0 : 1 axis
1 : 3 axes
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0063
[Data type] Bit

nt PRSTIN
ce
automatically
0 : Value set in parameter Nos.0708 to 0711 is used.
1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter Nos.0708 to 0711 is used,
nc
or for input in inches, the value set in parameter Nos.0815 to 0818 is

used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c
0065 PSOT
[Data type] Bit

w
manual position reference return
0 : The stroke limit is checked.
w
1 : The stroke limit is not checked

w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0074 CRF3 CRFZ CRFX (T series)
CRF4 CRFZ CRFY CRFX (M series)
[Data type] Bit

CRFx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued in
automatic operation (AUTO or MDI) and when a return to the reference
position has not been performed since the power was turned on
0 : An alarm is not generated.
1 : An alarm is generated (P/S alarm 224).
104
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0076 JZRN
[Data type] Bit

JZRN Function setting the reference position without dog
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
NOTE
om
This function can be specified for each axis by JZRNx, bits
0 to 4 of parameter No.0391.
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0391 JZRN3 JZRNZ JZRNX (T series)
JZRN4 JZRNZ JZRNY JZRNX (M series)
[Data type] Bit
e
JZRNx Function for setting the reference position without dogs for each axis
(Note) nt
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
ce
NOTE
When parameter JZRN (No.0076#1) is 1, these parameters
are enabled.
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0399 OUTZRN
.c
[Data type] Bit

OUTZRN When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt state
w
during automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of the
conditions listed below:
0 : Manual reference position return is not performed, with P/S alarm No.
w
091.
1 : Manual reference position return is performed without an alarm
w
occurring.
< Conditions >
D When there is a remaining distance to travel.
D When a auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle–speed
function, tool function) is being executed.
D When a cycle such as a dwell cycle or canned cycle is being executed.
105
0508 – 0511 Grid shift value
[Data type] Word

A grid shift is set for each axis.
om
NOTE
r.c
0534 FL rate of the reference position return
e
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
nt
Increment system
Millimeter machine
Unit of data
1 mm/min
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
6 – 15000
IS-C
6 – 12000
ce
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return
nc
is performed.
.c

w
Linear axis
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
(input in mm)
Linear axis
w
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

(input in inches)
w

106

Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
(input in inches)
om
inches.
NOTE
r.c
is set to 1.
e
Alarm and message
nt
Number
090
Message
REFERENCE RETURN IN-

Description
The reference position return cannot be

ce
COMPLETE performed normally because the reference
position return start point is too close to the
reference position or the speed is too slow.
Separate the start point far enough from the
reference position, or specify a sufficiently
fast speed for reference position return.
nc
Check the program contents.
091 REFERENCE RETURN IN- Manual reference position return cannot be

COMPLETE performed in the feed hold state. Perform a
manual reference position return in the au-
tomatic operation stop state or reset state.
.c
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE Not returned to reference position before

POINT cycle start. (Only when bits 0 to 3 of pa-
rameter No.0074 are 1).
w
Do reference position return.
Note
w
NOTE
Alarm No. 090 is issued when G28 is specified if the
w
reference position has not yet be established.
107
4.3
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via the
specified intermediate point, along the specified axis, then sets the
completion signal for reference position return (see Section 4.1) to 1.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or reference position at the rapid
om
traverse rate.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
r.c
NOTE
e
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
[Data type] Bit

nt
ce
ZMx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial
nc
Alarm and message

.c
405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO Position control system fault. Due to

w
POINT RETURN FAULT) an CNC or servo system fault in the

reference position return, there is the
possibility that reference position re-
turn could not be executed correctly.
w
Try again from the manual reference

position return.
w
108
Caution
CAUTION
1 The tool is moved from the intermediate point in a sequence

similar to manual reference position return, if the G28
command is issued in the following cases:
· When the reference position has not yet been
established
· When the input increment (millimeter/inch) is changed at
om
a position other than the reference position
In these cases, the tool leaves the intermediate point in the
reference position return direction specified with bits 0 to 3
(ZMx) of parameter No.0003. The intermediate point must
therefore be specified at a position from which reference
r.c
position return is possible.
2 If the G28 command is issued in the machine lock status,
the completion signal for reference position return is not set
to 1.
3 If millimeter input is selected for an inch–system machine,
e
the completion signal for reference position return may be
set to 1, even when the programmed tool position deviates
nt
from the reference position by the least input increment.
This is because the least input increment is smaller than the
least command increment for the machine.
ce
Reference item
nc
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.6 REFERENCE POSITION

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
.c
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.6 REFERENCE POSITION

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
w
w
w
109
4.4
2ND REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd reference position, via the
specified intermediate point, along the specified axis. Then, it sets the
completion signal for 2nd reference position return to 1.
The 2nd reference position must be set in parameter Nos.0735 to 0738

with coordinates in the machine coordinate system, before issuing the
om
G30 command.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or 2nd reference position at the
rapid traverse rate.
Return to the 2nd reference position can be performed only after the
r.c
reference position has been established.
Signal
e
Second reference
position return end
nt
signals
ce
ZP2X to ZP24
<F161#0 to #3>
nc
[Function] The second reference position end signals report the tool is at the second
reference positions on a controlled axis, respectively. These signals are
provided for axes in a one–to –one correspondence. A numeric or
alphabet character appended to the end of a signal represents a controlled
.c
axis number, and a numeric character immediately following ZP

represents a reference position number.
ZP 2 x
w
X : Return end signal for the X axis

Y : Return end signal for the Y axis
w
Z : Return end signal for the Z axis

:
:
w
2 : Second reference position return

D The second reference position return (G30) is completed, and the
current position is in the in–position area.
These signals turn to “0” when:
D The tool moved from the reference position.
D An emergency stop is applied.
D A servo alarm is raised.
110
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F161 ZP23 ZP2Z ZP2X (T series)
ZP24 ZP2Z ZP2Y ZP2X (M series)
Parameter
0735 – 0738 Coordinate value of the second reference position on each axis in the machine
coordinate system
om
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
r.c

Set the coordinate values of the second reference positions in the machine
e
coordinate system.

ce
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RE- Other than P2 is commanded for 2nd refer-
TURN COMMAND ence position return command.
Correct program.
nc
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the G30 command is issued in machine lock status, the
.c
completion signal for 2nd reference position return is not set

to 1.
2 If millimeter input is selected for an inch–system machine,
the completion signal for 2nd reference position return may
w
be set to 1, even when the programmed tool position

deviates from the 2nd reference position by the least input
w
increment. This is because the least input increment is

smaller than the least command increment for the machine.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.6 REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.6 REFERENCE POSITION

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
111
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–62543EN–1/01
5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
112
B–62543EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5.1
CYCLE START/FEED
HOLD
General
D Start of automatic When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in which
operation (cycle start) memory (AUTO) mode or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC
enters the automatic operation start state then starts operating.
om
Signal ST, however, is ignored in the following cases:
1. When the mode is other than AUTO or MDI
2. When the feed hold signal (*SP) is set to 0
3. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0
r.c
4. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1
5. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
6. When MDI RESET key is pressed
7. When the CNC is in the alarm state
e
8. When the CNC is in the NOT READY state
9. When automatic operation is starting
nt
10.When the program restart signal (SRN) is 1
11.When the CNC is searching for a sequence number.
ce
The CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation in the following
cases during automatic operation:
1. When the feed hold signal (*SP) is set to 0
nc
2. When the mode is changed to manual handle feed (HNDL),

incremental feed (STEP), or jog feed (JOG).
The CNC enters the automatic operation stop state and stops operating in
the following cases during automatic operation:
.c
1. When a single command block is completed during a single block

operation
w
2. When operation in manual data input (MDI) mode has been completed
3. When an alarm occurs in the CNC
4. When a single command block is completed after the mode is changed
w
to manual data input mode (MDI) or memory edit (EDIT)
The CNC enters the reset state and stops operating in the following cases
w
during automatic operation:

The state of the CNC (automatic operation start, feed hold , automatic
operation stop, or reset) is posted to the PMC with status output signals
OP, SPL, and STL. See the table in the “Signals” section for details.
113
D Halt of automatic When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the
operation (feed hold) CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time,
cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp signal SPL is
set to 1. Re–setting signal *SP to 1 in itself will not restart automatic
operation. To restart automatic operation, first set signal *SP to 1, then
set signal ST to 1 and then to 0.
ST ST ST This signal is ignored when the

feed hold signal is set to 0.
om
STL STL
SPL
*SP *SP
r.c
Fig. 5.1 Time Chart for Automatic Operation
When signal *SP is set to 0 during the execution of a block containing
e
only the M, S or T function, signal STL is immediately set to 0, signal SPL
is set to 1, and the CNC enters the feed hold state. If the FIN signal is
nt
subsequently sent from the PMC, the CNC executes processing up until
the end of the block that has been halted. Upon the completion of that
block, signal SPL is set to 0 (signal STL remains set to 0) and the CNC
ce
enters the automatic operation stop state.
(a) During threading
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading, the CNC enters the feed
hold state after executing a non–threading block after the threading
nc
blocks.
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading with the G92 command
(threading cycle), signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation
continues up until the end of the retraction block following threading.
.c
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading with the G32 command,
signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation continues until the
end of a non–threading block following the threading blocks.
w
(Stopping feeding during threading is dangerous because the amount

of cutting will increase.)
(b) During tapping in a cannec cycle (G84)
w
When signal *SP is set to 0 during tapping in a canned cycle (G84),

signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation continues until the
tool returns to the initial level or R point level after the completion
w
of tapping.
(c) When a macro instruction is being executed
Operation stops after the currently executing macro instruction has
been completed.
114
Signal
Cycle start signal

ST<G120#2> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Starts automatic operation.
[Operation] When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in memory (AUTO) mode or manual data
om
input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the cycle start state and starts
operation.
AUTO or MDI mode

Signal ST “1”
“0”
r.c
Start
⋅⋅⋅
Automatic operation
e
Feed hold signal
*SP<G121#5> [Classification] Input signal
nt
[Function] Halts automatic operation.
ce
[Operation] When signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the CNC enters
the feed hold state and stops operation. Automatic operation cannot be
started when signal *SP is set to 0.
nc
AUTO or MDI mode

Signal ST “1”
“0”
Ignored
.c
Signal *SP “1”

“0”
w
Start Start
Feed hold
Automatic operation
w
w
Automatic operation
signal [Classification] Output signal
OP<F148#7>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that automatic operation is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed in
Table 5.1.
115
Cycle start lamp signal

STL<F148#5>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that automatic operation start is entered.
Table 5.1.
om
Feed hold lamp signal
SPL<F148#4>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that feed hold state is entered.
r.c
Table 5.1.
Table 5.1 Status of Operation
e
Signal name Cycle start Feed hold Automatic op-
State of lamp lamp eration lamp
nt
the operation
Cycle start state

STL
1
SPL
0
OP
1
ce
Feed hold state 0 1 1
Automatic operation stop 0 0 1

state
nc
Reset state 0 0 0
· When the reference position has not yet been established

The CNC is executing memory operation or manual data input
operation commands.
.c
@ Feed hold state

The CNC is not executing memory operation nor manual data input op-
w
eration commands while the commands to be executed remain.

@ Automatic operation stop state
Memory operation or manual data input operation has been completed
w
and stopped.
@ Reset state
w
The automatic operation has been forcibly terminated.
NOTE
If the sequence number search is performed through MDI
panel during Memory mode (AUTO), the signal op turns to
“1”.
116
Manual data input start

signal
DST<F150#5>
[Function] Informs when the [START] button on the MDI panel is pressed.
[Output condition] The signal becomes 1 when:
D The [START] button on the MDI panel is pressed.
om
The signal is 0 when:
D The [START] button on the MDI panel is not pressed.
Signal address
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 ST
G121 *SP
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F148 OP STL SPL
F150 nt DST
ce
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 DCS
nc
[Data type] Bit

DCS Specifies how the [START] button on the MDI panel is used, as follows:
1 : The signal from the button does not passes the machine, so that
manual data input is started directly by the NC.
.c
0 : The signal from the button is sent to the machine as the manual data
input start signal (DST, bit 5 of F150). If the machine returns a start
signal, manual data input begins.
w
w
Alarm and message

D Self–diagnosis During automatic operation, the machine may sometimes show no
w
information movement while no alarm is detected. In that case, the CNC may be
performing processing or waiting for the occurrence of an event. The state
of the CNC can be obtained using the CNC self–diagnosis function
(diagnosis numbers 0700 and 0701).
Detailed information on the automatic operation stop or feed hold state

can also be displayed (diagnosis number 0712).
117
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.4.1 MEMORY OPERATION
OPERATOR’S
OPERATOR S MANUAL
(B–62574EN) III.4.2 MDI OPERATION
III.7.2 CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC

SCREEN
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.4.1 MEMORY OPERATION

OPERATOR’S
OPERATOR S MANUAL
(B–62544EN) III.4.2 MDI OPERATION
om
III.7.2 CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC
SCREEN
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
118
5.2
RESET AND REWIND
General The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases:
When the CNC is reset, the resetting signal (RST) is output to the PMC.
om
The resetting signal (RST) is set to 0 when the resetting signal output
time, set with parameter No.0252, has elapsed after the above conditions
have been released.
RST signal output time = Treset (Reset processing time) + (parameter
r.c
setting value) 16 msec.
Reset ON
Reset Pro-
e
cessing
nt RST signal
Treset (Parameter
ce
setting value)
16 msec
nc
CAUTION
Treset requires at least 16 msec. This time will be longer on
optional configurations.
.c
When the CNC is reset during automatic operation, automatic operation

is stopped and tool movement along the controlled axis is decelerated and
stopped(*1). When the CNC is reset during the execution of the M, S, or
w
T function, signal MF, SF, or TF is set to 0 within 100 ms.

Tool movement along the controlled axis is also decelerated and
w
stopped(*1) in jog feed (JOG), manual handle feed (HNDL), or

incremental feed (STEP).
w
CAUTION
(*1) When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0, the
tool is stopped by an emergency stop.
Bit 6 (CLER) of parameter No.0045 is used to select whether the

CNC internal data (such as modal G codes) is cleared or reset when
the CNC is reset. Refer to the Appendix E, ”Status when turning on
power, when cleared, and when reset” in the Operator’s manual for
the state of the internal data when cleared or reset.
119
The following parameters are also used to select how to handle

processing for CNC data when the CNC is reset.
S Bit 6 (COMC) of parameter No.0040
Whether custom macro variables #100 to #149 are cleared or stored
S Bit 7 (LOCC) of parameter No.0040
Whether custom macro local variables #1 to #33 are cleared or
stored
D Reset & Rewind When the reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1, reset is performed and
om
the following rewinding operation is also performed.
1. In automatic operation mode, if the DNC operation selection signal
(DNCI) is 1, and the selected input/output unit is connected with a
portable tape reader, the tape on the reader is rewound.
While the tape reader is being rewound, the rewinding–in–progress
r.c
signal (RWD) is output. This signal goes 0 when the tape reader has
been rewound.
2. In cases other than case 1, the head of the selected main program is
searched for. Setting RWDOUT, bit 2 of parameter no. 0045,
e
determines whether the rewinding–in–progress signal is output.
When RWDOUT is set to 1:
nt
The rewinding–in–progress signal is output. It is set to 1, then set to
0 after about 100 ms. Since searching for the main program in memory
takes little time, when the rewinding–in–progress signal (RWD) is set
ce
to 0, the main program has already been searched for.
Signal
nc
External reset signal

ERS<G121#7>
.c

[Function] Reset the CNC.
w
[Operation] Turning the signal ERS to 1 resets the CNC and enters the reset state.
While the CNC is reset, the resetting signal RST turns to 1.
w
w
Reset & rewind signal

RRW<G104#6>
[Function] CNC is reset and a program under an automatic operation is rewound.
[Operation] As described in the item, “RESET AND REWIND”.
120
Resetting signal
RST<F149#1>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being reset. This signal is used for reset
processing on the PMC.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases:
om
3. When the reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
This signal is set to 0 in the following case:
When the resetting signal output time, set with parameter No.0252, has
r.c
elapsed after the above conditions have been released and the CNC is reset
Rewinding signal
e
RWD<F164#6>
nt
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being rewound.
[Output condition] As described in the item, “RESET AND REWIND”.
ce
Signal address
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G104 RRW
G121 ERS
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F149 RST
w
F164 RWD
w
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0040 LOCC COMC
[Data type] Bit

COMC Custom macro’s common variables Nos. 100 through 149
0 : Cleared to “vacant” by reset
1 : Not cleared by reset
LOCC Custom macro’s local variables Nos. 1 through 33
121
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0045 CLER RWDOUT
[Data type] Bit

RWDOUT RWD signal indicating that rewinding is in progress
0 : Output only when the tape reader is being rewound by the reset and
rewind signal RRW
1 : Output when the tape reader is being rewound or a program in
memory is being rewound by the reset and rewind signal RRW
om
CLER Reset key on the CRT/MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind
signal, and emergency stop signal
0 : Cause reset state.
1 : Cause clear state.
r.c
0252 Output time of reset signal RST
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 16 ms
e
nt
To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added is
specified in this parameter.
RST signal output time = time required for reset + parameter value
ce
16 ms
Reference item
nc
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING

OPERATOR’S MANUAL POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
(B–62574EN) AND WHEN RESET
.c
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING

OPERATOR’S MANUAL POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
(B–62544EN) AND WHEN RESET
w
w
w
122
5.3 Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be

executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine
TESTING A as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine
PROGRAM actually or viewing the position display change without running the
machine.
5.3.1
Machine Lock
om
General The change of the position display can be monitored without moving the
machine.
When all–axis machine lock signal MLK is set to 1, output pulses (move
commands) to the servo motors are stopped in manual or automatic
operation. The commands are distributed, however, updating the
r.c
absolute and relative coordinates. The operator can therefore check if the
commands are correct by monitoring the position display.
e
Signal
All–axis machine lock

nt
ce
signal
MLK <G117#1>
[Function] Places all controlled axes in the machine lock state.
nc
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, pulses (move commands) are not output to
the servo motors for all axes in manual or automatic operation.
.c
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
G117 MLK
w
w
123
Note
NOTE
1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S,
and T commands)
Machine lock applies only to move commands along
controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting a
coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, and T
commands are also performed normally.
om
2 Reference position return in the machine lock state
(G27, G28, and G30)
When the reference position return command (G28), or 2nd
reference position return command (G30), is executed for
an axis in the machine lock state, distribution and position
updating are performed. The tool, however, is not returned
r.c
to the reference position. The reference position return
completion signals (ZPX to ZP4) are not output.
The reference position return check command (G27) is
ignored in the machine lock state.
e
3 Turning on/off the machine lock signal during
movement along an axis
nt
When the machine lock signal for an axis is set to 1 during
movement along the axis that is not in the machine lock
state, the axis is immediately placed in the machine lock
state and output pulses (move commands) to the servo
ce
motor are stopped. The tool is decelerated and stopped
with the automatic acceleration/deceleration function.
On the other hand, when the machine lock signal for an axis
is set to 0 during distribution of the move command along
nc
the axis in the machine lock state, pulse (move command)

output for the axis is immediately restarted. The tool is
accelerated with the automatic acceleration/deceleration
function.
.c
w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY

OPERATOR’S MANUAL FUNCTION LOCK
(B–62574EN)
w
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY

OPERATOR’S MANUAL FUNCTION LOCK
(B–62544EN)
124
5.3.2
Dry Run
General Dry run is valid only for automatic operation.

The tool is moved at a constant feedrate(*1) regardless of the feedrate
specified in the program. This function is used, for example, to check the
movement of the tool without a workpiece.
CAUTION
om
This feedrate depends on the specified parameters, the
manual rapid traverse switching signal (RT), manual
feedrate override signals (*OV1 to *OV8), and whether the
command block specifies rapid traverse or cutting feed, as
listed in the table below.
r.c
Manual rapid Program command
traverse
e
it hi
switching Rapid traverse Feed
signal (RT)
nt 1
0
Rapid traverse rate
Feedrate determined using

Maximum value on the
manual feed feedrate dial
Feedrate determined using
the override dial, or rapid tra- the override dial
ce
verse rate (*1)
Rapid traverse rate . . . . . . . . Setting by parameter Nos.0518 to 0521

*1:If parameter RDRN (bit 6 of parameter No.0001) is 1, the feedrate
nc
determined using the override dial is used. If the parameter is 0, the

rapid traverse rate is used.
.c
Signal
w
Dry run signal

DRN<G118#7>
w

[Function] Enables dry run.
w
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the tool is moved at the feedrate specified for
dry run.
When this signal is set to 0, the tool is moved normally.
CAUTION
When the dry run signal is changed from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0
during the movement of the tool, the feedrate of the tool is
first decelerated to 0 before being accelerated to the
specified feedrate.
125
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G118 DRN
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 RDRN
om
[Data type] Bit
RDRN Dry run for rapid traverse command
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0065 TAPDRN (M series)
e
[Data type] Bit
0 : Enabled
nt
TAPDRN Dry run during tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84; rigid tapping)
1 : Disabled
ce
0518 – 0521 Rapid traverse rate
[Data type] Word

nc

.c

w
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for
each axis.
w
0527 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes

w
[Data type] Word

Specify the maximum cutting feedrate.

A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that it
does not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter.
126
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.5.4 Dry run
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.5.4 Dry run

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
om
5.3.3
Single Block
General Single block operation is valid only for automatic operation.
r.c
When the single block signal (SBK) is set to 1 during automatic operation,
the CNC enters the automatic operation stop state after executing the
current block. In subsequent automatic operation, the CNC enters the
automatic operation stop state after executing each block in the program.
e
When the single block signal (SBK) is set to 0, normal automatic
operation is restored.
nt
Single block operation during the execution of custom macro statements
depends on the setting of bit 5 (SBKM) of parameter No.0011, as follows:
ce
SBKM = 0: Operation does not stop in the custom macro statements
but stops once the next NC command has been executed.
SBKM = 1: Operation stops after each block in the custom macro

statements.
nc
When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state during single block
operation, the mode can be changed to manual data input (MDI), manual
handle feed (HND), incremental feed (STEP), or jog feed (JOG), by using
.c
the mode select signals (MD1, MD2, and MD4).

w
Signal
w
Single block signal

SBK<G116#1>
w

[Function] Enables single block operation.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, single block operation is performed. When
this signal is set to 0, normal operation is performed.
127
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G116 SBK
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0011 SBKM
om
[Data type] Bit
SBKM Custom macro statement
0 : Not stop the single block
1 : Stops the single block
r.c
Caution
CAUTION
Operation in canned cycle
e
When the SBK signal turns to “1” during canned cycle
operation, the operation stops at each positioning,
nt
approach, drilling and retreat instead of the end of the block.
The SPL signal turns to “1” while the STL signal turns to “0”,
showing that the end of the block has not been reached.
ce
When the execution of one block is completed, the STL and
SPL signals turn to “0” and the operation is stopped.
nc
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.5.5 Single block
.c
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.5.5 Single block

w
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
w
w
128
5.4
MANUAL ABSOLUTE
ON/OFF
General This function selects whether the movement of the tool with manual
operation (such as jog feed and manual handle feed) is counted for
calculating the current position in the workpiece coordinate system.
om
When manual absolute When manual operation interrupts during automatic operation:
turns on (manual i) At the end of the block where manual operation interrupts, the tool
absolute signal *ABSM position moves in parallel by the manual move amount, regardless of
=0) the absolute or incremental command.
r.c
ii) In subsequent blocks, the parallel-moved tool position remains
unchanged until an absolute command block appears. Therefore, if all
blocks are programmed by incremental commands, the tool keeps the
parallel-moved position until machining ends.
e
In case of incremental commands
Manual
intervention
nt
ce
End
point
nc
Programmed tool path The tool returns to the programmed

tool path when an absolute command
block is encountered.
.c
Fig. 5.4 (a) Manual absolute ON

w
CAUTION
If the machining end position has shifted by the manual
move amount because all blocks are programmed by
w
incremental commands only, the present position is

displayed shifted by the manual move amount.
w
When manual absolute The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on the
turns off (manual workpiece coordinate system. The current position display on the CRT
absolute signal includes the manual move amount. The display is reset to the initial value
*ABSM=1) (before manual operation) when the control is reset, when operation in the
automatic operation mode, or MDI mode is started after the manual
operation.
129
During automatic operation, if manual intervention of a block interrupts,

the tool position moves in parallel by the manual move amount,
regardless of the absolute or incremental command at the end point of that
block, as well as at the end point of subsequent blocks.
Actual tool path
(The tool moves along this path, regardless of The actual end point
absolute command or incremental command) always moves in parallel
om
Manual in-
tervention
End
r.c
Programmed tool path point
Fig. 5.4 (b) Manual absolute OFF
The present position display at the finish of the operation shows an end
e
point value on the program as if manual intervention had not been
executed. However, the tool position moves in parallel.
Signal
nt
ce
Manual absolute signal
*ABSM<G127#2>
nc

[Function] Turns the manual absolute function on or off.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
.c
– Turns off the manual absolute function.

When this signal is set to 0, the control unit operates as follows:
– Turns on the manual absolute function.
w
Signal address
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G127 *ABSM
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.3.5 Manual absolute ON and OFF
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.3.5 Manual absolute ON and OFF

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
130
5.5
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP
General When a slash is specified at the head of a block, and optional block skip
signal BDT is set to 1 during automatic operation, the information
contained in the block for which / is specified is ignored (from / to the end
of the block).
(Example) / N123 X100. Y200. ;
om
Input signal Code specified at teh head of a block
BDT /
The following figures show the relationship between the timing, when
optional block skip signals (BDT) are set to 1, and the ignored
r.c
information:
1. When BDT is set to 1 before the CNC starts reading a block containing
/, the block is ignored.
BDT ”1”
e
”0”
nt Reading by CNC ³
ÄÄÄ
...; / N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....
Ignored
ce
2. When BDT is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block containing /,
the block is not ignored.
BDT ”1”
nc
”0”
Reading by CNC ³ ...; / N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....

.c
Not ignored
3. When BDT, currently set to 1, is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a

w
block containing /, the block is ignored.

BDT ”1”
”0”
ÄÄÄÄ
w
Reading by CNC ³ ...; / N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....
ÄÄÄÄ Ignored
w
131
Signal
Optional block skip

signal
BDT<G116#0>
om
[Function] Select whether a block containing / is to be executed or ignored.
[Operation] During automatic operation, a block containing / in the program is
ignored when the corresponding optional block skip signal is set to 1. It
is executed normally when the signal is set to 0.
r.c
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
e
G116 BDT
Note
nt
NOTE
ce
1 This function is ignored when programs are loaded into
memory. Blocks containing / are also stored in memory,
regardless of how the optional block skip signal is set.
Programs stored in memory can be output, regardless of
nc
how the optional block skip signals are set.

Optional block skip is effective even during sequence
number search operation.
2 Position of a slash
.c
A slash (/) must be specified at the head of a block. If a slash

is placed elsewhere, the information from the slash to
immediately before the EOB code is ignored.
w
3 TV and TH check
When an optional block skip signal is “1”. TH and TV checks
are made for the skipped portions in the same way as when
w
the optional block skip switch is “0”.

w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.12.2 Program section configuration
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.12.2 Program section configuration

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
132
5.6
EXACT STOP/EXACT
STOP MODE/
TAPPING MODE/
CUTTING MODE
(M SERIES)
General NC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cutting feed
om
blocks as described below.
D Exact stop (G09) The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an in–position
check (*1) is performed. When the feed motor falls in position, the tool
is moved by the next block. This function may be used to produce a sharp
edge at the corner of a workpiece.
r.c
D Exact Stop Mode (G61) When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at the
end point and inposition check is performed per block thereafter. This
G61 is valid till G63 (tapping mode) or G64 (cutting mode), is
commanded.
e
D Tapping Mode (G63) When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded
as 100%), and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not
nt
decelerate at the end of block to transfer to the next block. This G63 is
valid till G61 (exact stop mode) or G64 (cutting mode) is commanded.
D Cutting Mode (G64) When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block
ce
thereafter is not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This
command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode) is commanded.
However, in G64 mode, feed rate is decelerated to zero and in–position
check is performed in the following case;
nc
1) Positioning mode (G00, G60)

2) Block with exact stop check (G09)
3) Next block is a block without movement command
.c
*1 The term in–position indicates that the servo motor reaches in a range
of positions specified by a parameter. See Subsec. 7.2.6.1 and 7.2.6.2
for details.
w
(Example) Tool paths from block (1) to block (2)

Y
w
In–position check
Tool path in the exact stop mode

w
Tool path in the cutting mode or

tapping mode
0 X
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Cutting Mode (G64)
(B–62574EN) Tapping Mode (G63)
133
5.7
DNC OPERATION
General By activating automatic operation during the DNC operation mode, it is

possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a program is being
read in via the reader/puncher interface.
To use the DNC operation function, it is necessary to set the parameters
related to the reader/punch interface in advance.
om
Signal
DNC operation select

signal
r.c
DNCI<G127#5>
[Function] Selects the DNC operation mode.
To select the DNC operation mode, it is necessary to select the automatic
e
operation mode (AUTO) and set the DNC operation select signal to
logical 1 simultaneously.
nt
[Operation] When the DNC operation select signal becomes logical 1, the control unit
operates as follows:
– If the automatic operation mode (AUTO) has not been selected, the
ce
signal is ignored, and nothing happens.
– If the automatic operation mode (AUTO) has been selected, the DNC
operation mode is selected, and DNC operation becomes possible.
nc
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G127 DNCI
.c
Parameter
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0390 NODC3
w
[Data type] Bit

NODC3 In DNC operation, a program is:
0 : Read block by block. (A DC3 code is output for each block.)
w
1 : Read continuously until the buffer becomes full. (A DC3 code is

output when the buffer becomes full.)
NOTE
In general, reading is performed more efficiently when
NODC3=1. This specification reduces the number of
buffering interruptions caused by reading of a series of
blocks specifying short movements. This reduces the cycle
time.
134
Alarm and message

086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by

using Reader / Puncher interface, the
ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher
was off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable
is not connected or a P.C.B. is defec-
tive.
om
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used dur-
COMMAND IN DNC ing DNC operation.
Modify the program.
210 CAN NOT COMAND M198 and M99 are executed in the
M198/M199 schedule operation. Or M198 is
executed in the DNC operation.
r.c
Reference item
e
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.4.3 DNC OPERATION
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
nt
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
III.4.3 DNC OPERATION
ce
CONNECTION MANUAL 13.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
(This manual)
nc
.c
w
w
w
135
5.8
IN–FEED CONTROL
Signal
In–feed control cut–in

start signal (0–GSD only)
INFD<G237#6>
om
[Function] When this signal is turned on, the tool moves through a specified cut–in
amount along a programmed figure.
r.c
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G237 INFD
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
136
B–62543EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
137
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62543EN–1/01
6.1
POSITIONING
General The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system
specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse
rate.
In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is
programmed.
In the incremental command the distance the tool moves is programmed.
om
The rapid traverse rate in the G00 command is set to the parameter
(Nos.0518 to 0521 for 1st axis to 4th axis) for each axis independently by
the machine tool builder. In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the
tool is accelerated to a predetermined speed at the start of a block and is
decelerated at the end of a block. Execution proceeds to the next block
r.c
after confirming the in–position.
Parameter
e
0518 Rapid traverse rate for 1st axis
0519
0520
nt Rapid traverse rate for 2nd axis
Rapid traverse rate for 3rd axis

ce
0521 Rapid traverse rate for 4th axis

nc

.c
[Description] Set a rapid traverse rate for each axis.
NOTE
w
By setting the FML 10 bit (bit 7 of parameter 0049) to 1, the

units of data can be multiplied by ten. Doing so causes the
maximum value to change as follows:
w
IS–A, IS–B: 100 [m/min] (4000 [inch/min])

IS–C: 12 [m/min] (480 [inch/min])
w
Note
NOTE
The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address
F.
138
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00)

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
139
6.2
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
General Tools can move along a line

A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate
specified in F.
The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It
need not be specified for each block.
om
The feedrate commanded by the F code is measured along the tool path.
If the F code is not commanded, the feedrate is regarded as zero.
The feedrate of each axis direction is as follows.
G01ααββγγζζ
r.c
Ff ;
Feed rate of α axis direction : F + f

L

Feed rate of β axis direction : F +
L
f
e

Feed rate of γ axis direction : F + f
L
nt Feed rate of ζ axis direction :
L + Ǹ 2 ) 2 ) 2 ) 2
F +

L
f
ce
The feedrate of the rotary axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min (if the
feedrate is 12 deg/min, F12.0 is commanded).
When the straight line axis α(such as X, Y, or Z) and the rotating axis β
nc
(such as A, B, or C) are linearly interpolated, the feed rate is that in which

the tangential feed rate in the α and β cartesian coordinate system is
commanded by F(mm/min).
β–axis feedrate is obtained ; at first, the time required for distribution is
.c
calculated by using the above fromula, then the β –axis feedrate unit is
changed to deg/min.
w
A calculation example is as follows.
(Example)
w
G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ;

This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric
input. The time required for distribution is calculated as follows:
w
Ǹ20 2 ) 40 2
8 0.14907 (min)
300
The feed rate for the C axis is
40 deg 8 268.3 degńmin
0.14907 min
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the feed rate is calculated the same way
as in 2 axes control.
140
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0011 G01
[Data type] Bit

G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0 : G00 mode (positioning)
1 : G01 mode (linear interpolation)
om
0527 Maximium cutting feedrate for all axes
[Data type] Word

r.c
e
0549
nt Cutting feedrate when the power is turned on (M series)
ce
[Data type] Word
nc

When the machine requires little change in cutting feedrate during

cutting, a cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter. This
.c
eliminates the need to specify a cutting feedrate in the NC command data.

w
Alarm and message

No. Message Description
w
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMAN- Cutting feedrate was not commanded or

DED the feedrate was inadequate. Modify the
program.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.4.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
141
6.3
CIRCULAR
INTERPOLATION
General The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the defined
plane.
“Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane
(ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed
om
in the positive–to–negative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis or Xp axis,
respectively) in the Cartesian coordinate system. See the figure below.
Yp Xp Zp
r.c
G03 G03 G03
G02 G02 G02

Xp Zp Yp
G17 G18 G19
e
The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is
expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91.
nt
For the incremental value, the distance of the end point which is viewed
from the start point of the arc is specified with a sign.
The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for the Xp, Yp, and Zp
ce
axes, respectively. The numerical value following I, J, or K, however, is
a vector component in which the arc center is seen from the start point,
and is always specified as an incremental value, as shown below.
I, J, and K must be signed according to the direction.
nc
End point (x,y) End point (z,x) End point (y,z)

y x z
.c
x Start z Start y
i k j Start
point point point
j i k
w
Center Center Center

w
I0,J0, and K0 can be omitted. When Xp, Yp , and Zp are omitted (the end
point is the same as the start point) and the center is specified with I, J,
w
and K, a 360_ arc (circle) is specified.

G02I; Command for a circle
If, when the RADCHK bit (bit 6 of parameter 0393) is set to 1, the
difference in the radius between the start and end points exceeds the value
set in parameter 0876, alarm No. 020 is issued.
142
The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc
can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.
In this case, one arc is less than 180_, and the other is more than 180_ are
considered.
For T series, an arc with a sector angle of 180_ or wider cannot be
specified (Alarm 023).
For M series, specify an arc more than 180_ with a negative radius value
commanded.
If Xp, Yp, and Zp are all omitted, if the end point is located at the same
position as the start point and when R is used, an arc of 0°is programmed.
om
G02R_ ; (The tool does not move.)
(Example) (T series)
For arc (1) (less than 180_)
G02 W60.0 U10.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
r.c
For arc (2) (greater than 180_)
An arc with a sector angle of 180°
or wider cannot be specified
within a single block.
e
(2)
r=50mm
nt (1)
End point
ce
Start point
r=50mm
Y
nc
X
.c
w
w
w
143
(Example) (M series)
For arc (1)(less than 180_)
G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc (2)(greater than 180_)
G91 G02 XP60.0 YP20.0 R–50.0 F300.0 ;
(2)
r=50mm
om
End point
(1)
Start point r=50mm
r.c
Y
e
X
nt
The feedrate in circular interpolation is equal to the feedrate specified by
the F code, and the feedrate along the arc (the tangential feedrate of the
ce
arc) is controlled to be the specified feedrate.
The error between the specified feedrate and the actual tool feedrate is
±2% or less. However, this feedrate is measured along the arc after the
cutter compensation (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T
nc
series) is applied.
Parameter
.c
0212 Plane selected at power–up (M series)

w
[Data type] None

w
[Description] Set one of the following as the plane that will be selected at power–up:
Setting value Selected plane
w
0 X – Y plane (G17)
1 Z – X plane (G18)
2 Y – Z plane (G19)
144
0279 Setting of 3rd axis in the basic coordinate system (T series)

Setting of 4th axis in the basic coordinate system (M series)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
om
[Data type] Byte
To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter
compensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for the
T series), etc.
G17: Plane Xp–Yp
r.c
G18: Plane Zp–Xp
G19: Plane Yp–Zp
Set value Meaning
e
2 Y axis of the basic three axes (Only for T series)
5 Axis parallel to the X axis

nt 6
7
Axis parallel to the Y axis
Axis parallel to the Z axis

ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0393 RADCHK
nc
RADCHK When a circular interpolation command is specified, the difference in the

radius between the start and end points is:
1 : Checked.
0 : Not checked.
.c
0876 Tolerance of arc radius

w

w
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm

Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
w

When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03) is executed, the
tolerance for the radius between the start point and the end point is set. If
the difference of radii between the start point and the end point exceeds the
tolerance set here, a P/S alarm No. 20 is informed.
145
Alarm and message

011 NO FEEDRATE COM- Cutting feedrate was not commanded

MANDED or the feedrate was inadequate.
Modify the program.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF In circular interpolation (G02 or G03),
RADIUS difference of the distance between the
start point and the center of an arc
and that between the end point and
om
the center of the arc exceeded the
value specified in parameter No.
3410.
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS An axis not included in the selected
COMMANDED plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
commanded in circular interpolation.
r.c
Modify the program.
023 ILLEGAL RADIUS COM- In circular interpolation by radius des-
MAND ignation, negative value was com-
(T series) manded for address R. Modify the
e
program.
025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 F0 (rapid traverse) was instructed by
IN G02/G03 F1 –digit command in circular inter-
nt
028
(M series)
ILLEGAL PLANE SE-
LECT
polation. Modify the program.
In the plane selection command, two
or more axes in the same direction
ce
are commanded.
Modify the program.
Note
nc
NOTE
1 The U, V and W axes (parallel with the basic axis) can be
used with G–code system B and C. (T series)
.c
2 If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the

arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other
are ignored.
w
3 If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded,

an alarm is displayed.
For example, when G code system B or C is used, if U axis
w
with X axis is specified as a parallel axis to X axis when

plane XY is specified, an alarm (No.028)is displayed.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.4.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (G02,G03)
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (G02,G03)
(B–62544EN)
146
6.4
THREAD CUTTING
(ONLY FOR T series)
6.4.1
Thread Cutting
General Tool movement can be synchronized with spindle rotation when cutting
threads.
om
The spindle speed is continuously read through the position coder
attached to the spindle. Then, it is converted to a cutting feedrate (feed
per minute) to feed the tool.
r.c
L : Lead L
L L
e
nt
ce
Straight Thread Tapered Screw Scroll Thread
nc
In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path in rough
cutting through finish cutting for a screw. Since thread cutting starts when
the position coder mounted on the spindle outputs a 1–turn signal,
threading is started at a fixed point and the tool path on the workpiece is
unchanged for repeated thread cutting. Note that the spindle speed must
.c
remain constant from rough cutting through finish cutting. If not,

incorrect thread lead will occur.
w
Signal
w
w
Thread cutting signal

THRD<F188#3>(T series)
[Function] This signal indicates that thread cutting is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal turns to “1” in the following cases:
S Thread cutting mode in progress
S Thread cutting cycle for turning
This signal turns to “0” in the following case.
S Neither thread cutting mode nor thread cutting are in progress.
147
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F188 THRD
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0024 SCTO
om
[Data type] Bit
SCTO The spindle speed arrival signal (G120#4 SAR) is:
0 : Not checked
1 : Checked
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0065 G92ZAX (T series)
G92ZAX Parameters for the Z–axis time constant and acceleration/deceleration
e
lower limit (FL) in threading (G92):
0 : Parameters common to all axes
nt
1 : Parameters 0627 and 0628
ce
0526 Time constant of threading (G92) for the X–axis (T series)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] msec
nc

[Description] Set a time constant of threading (G92) for the X–axis.
NOTE
.c
Set an optimum value, considering parameter 0528.

w
D Setting the time constant

for the threading cycle
w
0627 Time constant of exponetial acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for (T series)
Z axis
w
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in the
thread cutting cycle (G92) for Z axis.
148
D Setting the FL feedrate

for the thread cutting
cycle
0528 FL rate of acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for X axis (T series)
[Data type] Word

om
Set the FL rate of acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle

(G92) for X axis.
r.c
NOTE
Set an optimum value, considering parameter 0526.
e
0628 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for Z (T series)
[Data type] Word

nt axis
ce
nc
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of acceleration/deceleration in the thread

cutting cycle (G92) for each axis.
.c
D Setting the chamfering

distance for the thread
cutting cycle
w
0109 Chamfering distance in the thread cutting cycles G76 and G92 (T series)
[Data type] Byte

w
[Unit of data] 0.1 pitch

w
This parameter sets the chamfering in the thread cutting cycles G76 and
G92.
149
D Setting the minimum

depth of cut for the
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
0725 Minimium depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 (T series)

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch
om
This parameter sets the minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
D Setting the finishing
r.c
allowance for the
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
0726 Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 (T series)
e
[Unit of data] nt
Increment system
Metric input
Inch input
IS–A
0.01
0.001
IS–B
0.001
0.0001
IS–C
0.001
0.0001
Unit
mm
inch
ce
This parameter sets the finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
D Setting the repetition
nc
count of finishing for the

multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
.c
0723 Repetition count of final finishing in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 (T series)

w
[Unit of data] Cycle

w
This parameter sets the repetition count in the multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
D Setting the tool angle for
w
the multiple repetitive

canned cycle G76
0724 Tool nose angle in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 (T series)

[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in the multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
150
Warning
D Warnings applicable to
both the M and T series
WARNING
1. Feedrate override is ignored during thread cutting, 100%
being assumed.
2. During threading, spindle override is ignored, 100% being
assumed.
3. It is very dangerous to stop feeding the thread cutter without
om
stopping the spindle. This will suddenly increase the cutting
depth. Thus, the feed hold function is ineffective while
thread cutting. If the feed hold button is pressed during
thread cutting, the tool will stop after a block not specifying
thread cutting is executed as if the SINGLE BLOCK button
r.c
were pushed. However, the feed hold lamp (SPL lamp)
lights when the FEED HOLD button on the machine control
panel is pushed. Then, when the tool stops, the lamp is
turned off (Single Block stop status).
e
4. When the first non–threading block is executed after
threading mode has been finished, and the feed hold button
nt
is pressed again (or the feed hold button has been held
down), the execution of the non–threading block is stopped
immediately.
5. When thread cutting is executed in the single block status,
ce
the tool stops after execution of the first block not specifying
thread cutting.
6. When the previous block was a thread cutting block, cutting
will start immediately without waiting for detection of the
nc
1–turn signal even if the present block is a thread cutting

block.
.c
D Warning applicable to
the T series only
w
WARNING
The thread cutting retract function is supported only for the
threading cycle.
w
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.4.4 CONSTANT LEAD THREADING
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.5 CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTTING
(B–62544EN) II.13.1.2 Thread Cutting Cycle
II.13.2.7 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
151
6.4.2
Thread Cutting Cycle
Retract (T series)
General When the automatic operation stop signal *SP <G121#5> is set to 0
during threading in a threading cycle, the tool immediately retracts while
performing chamfering, then returns to the start point of the current cycle,
first along the X–axis, then along the Z–axis.
om
Stop point
Ordinary cycle
r.c
Rapid traverse Motion when the signal *SP is
set to 0.
e
The signal *SP is set to 0 here.
nt
ce
Parameter
D Setting to enable the
override function during
thread cutting cycle
nc
retraction #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0394 TFHOVR
[Data type] Bit

.c
TFHOVR Override while the tool is retracting in threading

0 : Override is effective.
1 : Override is not effective.
w
D Setting a chamfering
distance in thread
w
cutting cycle retraction

0109 Chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
w
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 0.1 pitch
This parameter sets the chamfering in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92.
152
Warning
WARNING
While the tool is retracting, automatic operation stop signal
*SP <G121#5> is ignored.
Note
om
NOTE
The chamfering distance for retraction is determined by the
setting of parameter No.0109.
r.c
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.13.1.2 Thread Cutting Cycle
e
OPERATOR’S
OPERATOR S MANUAL
(B–62544EN) II.13.2.7 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
153
6.5
SINGLE DIRECTION
POSITIONING
(M series)
General For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final
positioning from one direction is available.
Overrun
om
distance
Start position
r.c
Start position
Temporary stop
End position
e
nt
An overrun and a positioning direction are set by the parameter (Nos.0204
– 0207). Even when a commanded positioning direction coincides with
that set by the parameter, the tool stops once before the end point.
ce
Parameter
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0029 G604 G60Z G60Y G60X
G60x The approach direction for each axis in unidirectional positioning (G60)
is:
.c
0 : Positive.
1 : Negative.
w
0204 Approach distance along the X–axis in unidirectional positioning

w
0205 Approach distance along the Y–axis in unidirectional positioning
0206 Approach distance along the Z–axis in unidirectional positioning

w
0207 Approach distance along the fourth–axis in unidirectional positioning
[Unit of data] Unit of data IS–A IS–B IS–C

Millimeter machine [mm] 0.1 0.01 0.01
Inch machine [inch] 0.01 0.001 0.001
Rotation axis [deg] 0.1 0.01 0.01
[Valid data range] 0 to 255 (For IS–C, the maximum value is 163.)
[Description] Set an approach distance for unidirectional positioning (G60) for each
axis.
154
NOTE
Set the approach direction for each axis in bits G60X to
G604 (bits 0 to 3 of parameter 0029).
Example Unidirectional positioning when the approach direction is negative
Approach distance
om
Position of
temporary stop
r.c
– +
End point
e
Reference item
nt
ce
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.4.2 Single direction positioning
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
nc
.c
w
w
w
155
6.6
NORMAL DIRECTION
CONTROL
(ONLY FOR 0–GSD)
General When a tool with a rotation axis (4th axis) is moved in the XY plane
during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool
so that the 4th axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 6.6).
om
Programmed tool pat
4th axi
4th axi
r.c
Tool
Tool
e
nt
ce
nc
Normal direction (in

which the tool moves)
Fig. 6.6 Sample Movement of the tool

.c
Movement of the 4th axis inserted at the beginning of each block is

executed at the feedrate set in parameter 5481. If dry run mode is on at
that time, the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along
w
the X–and Y–axes in rapid traverse (G00) mode, the rapid traverse rate
is applied.
w
If the federate of the 4th axis exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate of the
4th axis specified to parameter No.0527, the federate of each of the other
axes is clamped to keep the federate of the 4th axis below the maximum
w
cutting feedrate of the 4th axis.
156
Parameter
[Data type] Word

om
r.c
0683 Rotation feedrate of normal direction control axis
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 deg/min
e
This parameter sets the feedrate of a normal direction control axis that is
nt
inserted at the start point of a block during normal direction control.
ce
0832 Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of normal direction control axis

nc

The rotation block of a normal direction control axis is not inserted when
.c
the rotation insertion angle calculated during normal direction control

does not exceed this setting value. The ignored rotation angle is added to
the next rotation insertion angle. The block insertion is then judged.
w
NOTE
1 No rotation block is inserted when 360 or more degrees are
w
set.
2 If 180 or more degrees are set, a rotation block is inserted
only when the circular interpolation is 180 or more degrees.
w
157
0833 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of a
preceding block

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
om
This parameter sets the limit value of movement at the normal direction
angle of a preceding block.
N2
Tool center path For straight line
Block N2 is machined with the tool being normal
r.c
N3 to block N1 when the movement of N2 in the
N1 figure on the left does not exceed the set value.
Movement
Programmed path
e
N2 For arc
Programmed path
nt
Tool center path
N3
Arc N2 is machined with the tool being normal
to block N1 when the arc diameter of N2 in the
figure on the left does not exceed the setting
value. A normal direction axis is not controlled
ce
to move in the normal direction according to
the arc movement.
N1
Diameter
nc
Note
.c
NOTE
The helical interpolation option is required to use this
w
function. Helical interpolation cannot be specified in the

normal direction control mode.
w
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.14.5 Normal Direction Control
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
158
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62543EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND

DECELERATION CONTROL
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
159
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62543EN–1/01
7.1 The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed
functions are available:
FEEDRATE CONTROL
1. Rapid traverse
When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at
a rapid traverse rate set in the CNC (parameter Nos.0518 – 0521).
2. Cutting feed
The tool moves at a programmed cutting feedrate.
Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using
the switch on the machine operator’s panel.
om
7.1.1
Rapid Traverse Rate
r.c
General The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse.
e
G00 IP_ ;
G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)

nt IP_ ; Dimension word for the end point
ce
In rapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specified rate
becomes 0 and the servo motor reaches a certain range set by the MTB
(in–position check).
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter Nos.0518 – 0521,
so no rapid traverse rate need be programmed.
nc
The following overrides can be applied to a rapid traverse rate using the
switch on the machine operator’s panel :F0, 25, 50, 100%
F0: Allows a fixed feedrate to be set for all axes by parameter No.0533.
.c
Parameter
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 RDRN
w
[Data type] Bit

RDRN Dry run for rapid traverse command
0 : Disabled
w
1 : Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0393 STOV0
[Data type] Bit

STOV0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,
0 : The machine tool does not stop moving.
1 : The machine tool stops moving.
160
0518 Rapid traverse for X axis
0519 Rapid traverse for Y axis
0520 Rapid traverse for Z axis
0521 Rapid traverse for 4th axis

om
Set the rapid traverse rate for each axis.
r.c
NOTE
By setting the FML 10 bit (bit 7 of parameter 0049) to 1, the
units of data can be multiplied by ten. Doing so causes the
maximum value to change as follows:
e
IS–A, IS–B: 100 [m/min] (4000 [inch/min])
IS–C: 12 [m/min] (480 [inch/min])
nt
ce
0559 – 0562 Manual rapid traverse rate

nc

.c
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse for each axis when the rapid traverse
override is 100% for each axis.
w
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter No.0518 – 0521 is
w
assumed.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.5.2 Rapid traverse
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.5.2 Rapid traverse

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
161
7.1.2
Cutting Feedrate
Clamp
General A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis
with parameter No.0527. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override
applied) exceeds a specified upper limit, it is clamped to the upper limit.
om
Parameter
[Data type] Word
r.c
e
nt
ce
Note
NOTE
nc
CNC calculation may involve a feedrate error of +2% with

respect to a specified value. However, this is not true for
acceleration/deceleration. To be more specific, this error is
calculated with respect to a measurement on the time the
tool takes to move 500 mm or more during the steady state:
.c
w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.5.3 Cutting Feed

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
w
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.5.3 Cutting Feed

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
162
7.1.3
Feed Per Minute
General
D Feed per minute (G94) After specifying G94 (G98 for T series) (in the feed per minute mode), the
amount of feed of the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting
a number after F. G94 (G98 for T series) is a modal code. Once a G94
(G98 for T series) is specified, it is valid until G95 (G99 for T series) (feed
om
per revolution) is specified. At power–on, the feed per minute mode (feed
per revolution mode for T series) is set.
An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per
minute with the feedrate override signal.
Refer to manuals of machine tool builder for details.
r.c
[M series] Feed amount per minute
(mm/min or inch/min)
e
Tool
nt Workpiece
Table
ce
Fig. 7.1.3 Feed per minute
WARNING
nc
No override can be used for any commands such as for

threading.
.c
Format
For M series
w
G94; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)

F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
w
w
For T series
G98; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)
F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
163
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0077 HICFR
[Data type] Bit

HICFR Cutting feedrates at feed per minute is specified by F commands
0 : In units of 1 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.01 inches/min for
inch machines.
1 : In unit of 0.001 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001
om
inches/min for inch machines.
NOTE
M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting
feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001
r.c
mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for
inch machines.
e
011 NO FEEDRATE COM- Feedrate was not commanded to a

ce
MANDED cutting feed or the feedrate was inad-
equate. Modify the program.
nc
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.5.3 Cutting feed
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
.c
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.5.3 Cutting feed

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
w
(B–62544EN)
w
w
164
7.1.4
Feed Per Revolution/
Manual Feed Per
Revolution (T series)
General
D Feed per revolution After specifying G99 (in the feed per revolution mode), the amount of
om
feed of the tool per spindle revolution is to be directly specified by setting
a number after F. G99 is a modal code. Once a G99 is specified, it is valid
until G98 (feed per minute) is specified.
An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per
revolution with the switch on the machine operator’s panel. For detailed
r.c
information, see the appropriate manual of the machine tool builder.
[T series]
F Feed amount per spindle revolution
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
e
nt
ce
Fig. 7.1.4 Feed per revolution
D Manual feed per Jog feedrate can be specified by feed per revolution.
revolution
nc
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0008 MFPR (T series)
.c
[Data type] Bit

MFPR Jog feed
w
0 : Jog feed is performed at feed per minute.

1 : Jog feed is performed at feed per rotation.
w
Caution
w
CAUTION
When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation
may occur. The slower the spindle rotates, the more
frequently feedrate fluctuation occurs.
165
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
166
7.1.5
Override
7.1.5.1
Rapid traverse override
General An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the
rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No.0533).
om
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
r.c
Rapid traverse
rate10m/min
Override
50%
ÇÇ
5m/min
e
Fig.7.1.5.1 Rapid traverse override
D Feedrate Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse rate preset
nt
by parameter Nos.0518 – 0521 by the override value determined by this
signal, whether in automatic or manual operation (including manual
reference position return).
ce
D F0 rate For F0 value, an absolute value is set by parameter No.0533 within a range
of 0 to rapid traverse rate.
nc
Signal
.c

signal
w
ROV1, ROV2
<G116#7, G117#7>
w

[Function] These signals override the rapid traverse rate
w
[Operation] These code signals correspond to the rates as follows:

Override value
ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100 %
0 1 50 %
1 0 25 %
1 1 Fo %
Fo: Set in parameter No.0533
167
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G116 ROV1
G117 ROV2
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
0078 EAXOVE (M series)
[Data type] Bit

EAXOVE Dry run and override signals during axis control by the PMC
0 : Use the same signals as CNC
r.c
(1) Cutting feed override signal *OV1 to *OV128
(2) Override cancel signal OVC
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2
(4) Dry run signal DRN
e
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RT
1 : Use dedicated axis control signals by the PMC.
(1) Cutting feed override signal *OV1E to *OV8E
nt
(2) Override cancel signal OVCE
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E
(4) Dry run signal DRNE
ce
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RTE
0533 F0 rate of rapid traverse override

nc
[Data type] Word

.c

w
Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override.

w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.5.2 Rapid traverse override

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.5.2 Rapid traverse override

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
168
7.1.5.2
Feedrate override
General A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%)

selected by the override dial.This feature is used to check a program.
For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program,
setting the override dial to 50% moves the tool at 50 mm/min.
om
Feedrate 100 mm/min Tool
(Specified by programmed) Check the machining
by altering the feedrate
Feedrate 50 mm/min after from the value speci-
feedrate override fied in the program.
r.c
Workpiece
e
nt Fig.7.1.5.2 Feedrate override
ce
Signal
Feedrate Override signal

nc
*OV1 to *OV8
<G121#0 to G121#3>
*AOVR16 to *AOVR128
<G116#4 to G116#6,
.c
G117#6>(M series)
<G140#4 to G140#7>
w
(T series)
[Function] These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code signals
w
correspond to override values as follows:

7
Override value = Σ ȧ 2i×Vi ȧ %
w
i=0
Vi=0 when *OVi is “1” and

Vi=1 when *OVi is “0”
These signals have the following weight.
*OV1=1%, *OV2=2%, *OV4=4%, *OV8=8%,
*AOV16=16%, *AOV32=32%, *AOV64=64%, *AOV128=128%
When all signals are “0”, they are regarded as overriding 0% in the same
way as when all signals are “1” .
Thus, the override is selectable in steps over a range of 0 to 254%.
169
[Operation] Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the speed specified in cutting

feed in automatic operation mode by the override value selected by this
signal.
The override is regarded as 100%, regardless of this signal, in the
following cases:
⋅Override cancel signal OVC is “1”.
⋅During cutting in tap cycle of canned cycle;
⋅Tapping mode (63); or
⋅Thread cutting is in progress.
om
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G116 *AOV64 *AOV32 *AOV16 (M series)
r.c
G117 *AOV128 (M series)
G121 *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
G140 *AOVR128 *AOVR64 *AOVR32 *AOVR16 (T series)
e
Parameter
#7
nt #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
0393 STOV0
[Data type] Bit

nc
STOV0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,

0 : The machine tool does not stop moving.
1 : The machine tool stops moving.
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0397 OVR255 (T series)
OVR255 (M series)
w
OVR255 The signals of speed override in units of 1% (*AOVR16 to *AOVR128)

are:
w
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
w
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
170
7.1.5.3
B (T series)
General The rapid traverse rate can be overridden by selecting a rapid traverse
override signal (ROV1D to ROV3D).
om
Signal
[Operation] Machine contact status Override value
ROV3D ROV2D ROV1D When parameter When parameter
OVRI is 0 OVRI is 1
0 0 0 100% 20%
r.c
0 0 1 50% 15%
0 1 0 25% 10%
0 1 1 F0 5%
e
1 0 0 5% F0
1 0 1 10% 25%
nt 1
1
1
1
0
1
15%
20%
50%
100%
ce
Signal address
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G116 ROV3D ROV2D ROV1D
.c
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0003 OVRI
w
OVRI 1 : When the override signal (*OV1 to *OV8, ROV1, ROV2, ROV1D to
ROV3D) is set to 1, the speed increases.
w
0 : When the override signal (*OV1 to *OV8, ROV1, ROV2, ROV1D to

ROV3D) is set to 0, the speed increases.
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0041 ROVB
ROVB 1 : ROV1D to ROV3D are used as the rapid traverse override signals.
0 : ROV1 and ROV2 are used as the rapid traverse override signals.
171
7.1.5.4
Override cancel
General The override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%.
Signal
om
Override cancel signal
OVC<G126#4>
r.c
[Function] Feedrate override is fixed to 100%.
[Operation] When the signal is “1”, the CNC operates as follows:
⋅ Feedrate override is fixed to 100% irrespective of feedrate override
signal.
e
⋅ Rapid traverse override and spindle speed override are not affected.
Signal address
#7
nt #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
G126 OVC
nc
.c
w
w
w
172
7.2
ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION
CONTROL
7.2.1 D Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration

Automatic D Cutting feed exponential acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/
Deceleration
om
General
D Automatic acceleration/ To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically
deceleration applied when the tool starts and ends its movement (Fig.7.2.1 (a)).
r.c
Rapid traverse rate
FR FR : Rapid traverse rate
e
TR : Acceleration/
deceleration time
nt

constant for rapid
traverse rate
Time
ce
TR TR
Feed rate
nc
FC FC : Feedrate
TC : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a cutting
.c
feedrate
w
Time
TC TC
w
Fig.7.2.1 (a) Automatic acceleration/deceleration (example)

w
Acceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and ending

movement, resulting in smooth start and stop.
Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feedrate
changes, so change in speed is also smoothly done.
It is not necessary to take acceleration/deceleration into consideration
when programming.
Rapid traverse: Linear acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is
set by parameters 0522 – 0525)
Cutting feed: Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per
axis is set by parameter 0529)
173
Jog feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per

axis is set by parameters 0601 – 0604)
Rate after interpolation Rate after acceleration/deceleration

Servo motor
Acceleration/
deceleraton Servo control
Pulse control
CNC distribution
command (interpolation) Acceleraton/
deceleration Servo control
om
control
Parameter
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0065 G92ZAX (T series)
G92ZAX Parameters for the Z–axis time constant and acceleration/deceleration
e
lower limit (FL) in threading (G92):
0 : Parameters common to all axes
1 : Parameters 0627 and 0628
0522 – 0525
nt
Time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse
ce
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] ms
nc
Specify a time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid

traverse.
.c
0526 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration at X axis in thread cutting (T series)

cycle
0627 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration at Z axis in thread cutting (T series)

w
cycle
[Data type] Word

w
[Unit of data] ms
w
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in

thread cutting cycle (G92).
174
0528 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration at X axis in thread cutting cycle (T series)
0628 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration at Z axis in thread cutting cycle (T series)
[Data type] Word

om

thread cutting cycle (G92).
r.c
0529 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed
[Data type] Word
e
[Unit of data] ms
nt
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in
cutting feed.
ce
0530 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed
[Data type] Word

nc

Millimeter machine 6 – 15000 6 – 12000
.c

w
cutting feed.
w
0555 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks (T series)
0379 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks (M series)
w
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter is used when rapid traverse blocks are arranged
successively, or when a rapid traverse block is followed by a block that
does not cause movement. When the feedrate for each axis of a block is
reduced to the ratio set in this parameter, the execution of the next block is
started.
175
NOTE
This parameter is effective when parameter SMZCT
(No.0050#4 (T)/No.0048#4 (M)) is set to 1.
(Example)
Fh: Rapid traverse feedrate
X–axis feedrate α: Setting of parameter No.0555 (T)/No.0379 (M)
(feedrate reduction ratio)
om
Fd: Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: = Fh×α/ 100
N1 G00 X- - ; N2 G00 X- - ;
When the function of overlapping rapid traverse
r.c
blocks is enabled
Fh
When the function of overlapping rapid traverse
Fd blocks is disabled
t
e
0601 – 0604
nt
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed
[Data type] Word

ce
[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog
nc
feed.
0605 – 0608 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed

.c
[Data type] Word

w

w


w
jog feed for each axis.
176
7.2.2
Corner Control
7.2.2.1
In–position check
General Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is
checked.
om
If the in–position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position
during deceleration. If the position is found to exceed the specified range,
the CNC does not execute the next block.
NOTE
r.c
The purpose of in–position check is to check that the servo
motor has reached within a specified range (specified with
parameter Nos.500 – 503).
e
Signal
In–position signals
nt
ce
INP1 to INP4<F184>
[Function] These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the in-position
nc
condition.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name
corresponds to the control axis number.
I N P 1
.c
1 . . . . The 1st axis is set to the in-position condition.

w
2 . . . . The 2nd axis is set to the in-position condition.
3 . . . . The 3rd axis is set to the in-position condition.

w
: :
w
: :
[Output condition] These signals turn to “1” in the following case :
⋅ The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding control axis
is zero and the servo error is within the specified allowance.
These signals turn to “0” in the following cases :
⋅ The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding control axis
is not zero.
⋅ The servo error of the corresponding control axis exceeds the specified
allowance
177
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F184 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0020 NCIPS
om
[Data type] Bit
NCIPS Inposition check at deceleration
0 : Performed
1 : Not performed
r.c
0500 – 0503 In–position width
[Data type] Word
e
nt
The in–position width is set.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position
ce
(the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the
in–position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified
position.
nc
Note
NOTE
.c
1 The in–position signals may turn to “1” even during the

movement if the axis is fed at very low speed.
2 The in–position check function is enabled, at the interface
w
between two cutting blocks, in the following cases:

w
M series When the exact stop command (G09) or exact stop mode com-
mand (G61) is specified
T series When the error detect signal is on

w
178
7.2.2.2
In–position check
independently of
feed/rapid traverse
(M series)
General If separate in–position check for cutting feed and rapid traverse is
executed, a small in–position check range can be specified between those
om
cutting feed blocks that require a high degree of precision. A large
in–position check range can be specified between those rapid traverse
blocks that require quick positioning.
r.c
Signal See Subsection 7.2.2.1.
e
Parameter
0020
#7
[Data type] Bit

nt #6 #5
NCIPS
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
NCIPS Inposition check at deceleration
0 : Performed
1 : Not performed
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0045 CCIPN
.c
[Data type] Bit

CCIPN The in–position area for cutting feed is:
w
0 : Set in parameter Nos.0500 – 0503 (same as for rapid traverse).

1 : Set in bit 4 (CINPS) of parameter No.0399.
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0399 CINPS
w
[Data type] Bit

CINPS When bit 4 (CCINP) of parameter No.0045 = 1, the in–position area for
cutting feed is:
0 : Use value in parameter Nos.0609 – 0612 if the next block is also for
cutting feed, or use value in parameter Nos.500 – 503 if the next block
is for rapid traverse.
1 : Use value in parameter Nos.0609 – 0612, regardless of the next block.
(The setting of parameter Nos.500 – 503 is used for rapid traverse, and
the setting of parameter Nos.0609 – 0612 is used for cutting feed.)
179
Parameter CINPS (No.0399#4)

0 1
Rapid→Rapid Nos.0500 Rapid→Rapid Nos.0500
– 0503 – 0503
Rapid→Feed Nos.0500 Rapid→Feed Nos.0500
– 0503 – 0503
0
Feed→Feed Nos.0500 Feed→Feed Nos.0500
– 0503 – 0503
Feed→Rapid Nos.0500 Feed→Rapid Nos.0500
Parameter
P – 0503 – 0503
om
CCINP
(No.0045#4) Rapid→Rapid Nos.0500 Rapid→Rapid Nos.0500
– 0503 – 0503
Rapid→Feed Nos.0500 Rapid→Feed Nos.0500
– 0503 – 0503
1
Feed→Feed Nos.0609 Feed→Feed Nos.0609
r.c
– 0612 – 0612
Feed→Rapid Nos.0500 Feed→Rapid Nos.0609
– 0503 – 0612
e
0500 – 0503 In–position width
nt
[Data type] Word
ce
The in–position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position
(the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the
nc
in–position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified

position.
0609 – 0612 In–position width in cutting feed for each axis

.c
[Data type] Word

w

Set an in–position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is
w
valid when bit 4 (CCINP) of parameter No.0045=1.

w
Note
NOTE
If the NCIPS bit (bit 5 of parameter No.0020) is set to 1, so
that position check is not performed during deceleration,
this function is invalid. The system starts execution of the
next block as soon as deceleration has been completed,
without checking whether the servo position error is within
the specified range.
180
7.2.2.3
Error detect (T series)
General Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of two
blocks during cutting feed.
Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded.
This part causes the corner of
the tool path to be rounded.
om
Programmed tool path
Feedrate
Actual tool–center path
r.c
Time
If the error detect signal is used, it is possible to specify that a block not
be started until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous block has
been completed.
e
Feedrate
nt
ce
Time
nc
Signal
.c
Error detect signal SMZ

<G126#6>
w

[Function] Enables error detection.
w
[Operation] If the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:

S At the interface of two blocks during cutting feed, the control unit waits
until the acceleration/deceleration of the first block has been completed.
w
Only then does the control unit execute the next block.
The setting of the SMZ signal determines whether, at the interface of
two cutting blocks, the control unit waits until the acceleration/decel-
eration of the previous block has been completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G126 SMZ
181
Note
NOTE
If the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executed
until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cutting
block has been completed.
This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due to
delay caused by the servo motor, however.
To prevent corner rounding due to delay caused by the
om
servo motor, use the in–position check function together
with this function.
After acceleration/ After servo

deceleration motor delay
Feedrate
e r.c
Time
nt Range of in–position check

ce
7.2.2.4
Signals output
nc
according to the speed

of travel along an axis
(M series)
.c
General When a programmed value after linear acceleration/deceleration by rapid

traverse exceeds the value (percentage) specified in the corresponding
parameter, a signal is output.
w
Programmed speed
w
Command After acceleration/deceleration
?%
w
Signal
182
Signal
Signals output
according to the speed
of travel along an axis
SPDS1 to SPDS4
<G189#0 to #3>
om
[Function] The signal reports that the speed programmed for any of the first to the
fourth axes in direct acceleration/deceleration exceeds the value specified
in the corresponding parameter.
r.c
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G189 SPDS4 SPDS3 SPDS2 SPDS1
e
Parameter
0243
nt SPDSP
SPDSP Set a reference speed in %, to enable the function to output a signal

ce
according to the speed of travel along an axis. If a value exceeding the
range indicated below is set, no signal is output.
Valid data range: 0% to 99%
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0394 SPDS
SPDS The function used to output a signal according to the speed of travel along
.c
an axis is:
1 : Enabled.
0 : Disabled.
w
Note
w
NOTE
w
1 The signal is output in rapid traverse mode only.

2 Identical values are set for acceleration and deceleration.
183
7.2.3
Feed Forward in Rapid
Traverse (M series)
General Feed–forward control can be performed even during rapid traverse. In

this case, the servo position error is reduced, thus reducing the time
required for positioning to within the specified range.
om
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0395 FDFFEN
[Data type] Bit
r.c
FDFFEN Feed–forward control is enabled for
0 : Cutting feed only
1 : Cutting feed and rapid traverse
e
Reference item nt
For details of this function, refer to the “FANUC AC SERVO
AMPLIFIER Maintenance Manual (B–65005E)” or the “FANUC
CONTROL MOTOR a series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E).”
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
184
B–62543EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
185
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62543EN–1/01
8.1
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION/2ND
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General
om
D Miscellaneous Function When a numeral of up to 8 digits is specified following address M, code
(M code) signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these
signals to turn on or off its functions.
Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In some cases,
however, up to three M codes can be specified for some types of machine
r.c
tools (see 8.3 “Multiple M code per Block”)
D 2nd Auxiliary Function When three or six digits (a decimal point can not used) are specified after
(B code) address B, a code signal and strobe signal are sent. These signals are used
e
to index the rotation axis of the machine. The code signal is retained until
another B code is specified.
nt
In each block, a single B code can be specified. Output format is BCD
output.
ce
Basic procedure The following signals are used with these functions. (For details of the
spindle–speed function and tool function, see Chapters 9 and 10.)
nc
Output signal Input signal

Program
F i
Function
address Distribution end Completion
Code signal Strobe signal
signal signal
.c
Miscellaneous M M11 to M38 MF

function
Spindle–speed func- S S11 to S28 SF

w
tion
DEN FIN
Tool function T T11 to T28 (T) TF
T11 to T48 (M)
w
Secondary auxiliary B B11 to B38 (M) BF

function
w
Each function uses different program addresses and different signals, but
they all input and output signals in the same way, as described below. (A
sample procedure for the miscellaneous function is described below. The
procedures for the spindle–speed function, tool function, and secondary
auxiliary function, are obtained simply by substituting S, T, or B in place
of M.)
186
(1) Suppose that Mxxx is specified in a program.

(2) Code signal M11 to M38 is sent. After period TMF, specified in
parameter No.0009#4 – #7 (standard value: 16 msec), strobe signal
MF is set to 1. The code signal is the binary representation or BCD
of the programmed value xxx.(*1) If the move, dwell, spindle–speed,
or another function is specified at the same time as the miscellaneous
function, the execution of the other function is started when the code
signal of the miscellaneous function is sent.
(3) When the strobe signal is set to 1, the PMC reads the code signal and
performs the corresponding operation.
om
(4) To execute an operation after the completion of the move, dwell or
other function specified in the block, wait until distribution end signal
DEN is set to 1.
(5) Upon completion of the operation, the PMC sets completion signal
FIN to 1. The completion signal is used by the miscellaneous function,
r.c
spindle–speed function, tool function, secondary auxiliary function,
external operation function described later, and other functions. If any
of these functions are executed simultaneously, the completion signal
must be set to 1 upon completion of all the functions.
e
(6) If the completion signal remains set to 1 for longer than period TFIN,
specified in parameter No.0009#0 – #3 (standard value: 16 msec), the
CNC sets the strobe signal to 0 and reports that the completion signal
nt
has been received.
(7) When the strobe signal is set to 0, set the completion signal to 0 in the
PMC.
ce
(8) When the completion signal is set to 0, the CNC sets all code signals
to 0 and completes all sequences of the miscellaneous function.(*2)
(9) Once all other commands in the same block have been completed, the
CNC executes the next block.
nc
*1 When the tool function is executed, the programmed tool number is

sent as the code signal (T series).
*2 When the spindle–speed function, tool function, or secondary
miscellaneous function is executed, the code signal is maintained until
.c
a new code for the corresponding function is specified.

The timing diagram is shown below:
w
Example 1 Single miscellaneous function specified in a block
(1)(2) (3) (5) (6) (7)(8) (9)

w
M command
(independent) Mxxx
Code signals M11–M38 (*2)
w
Strobe signals MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN

Distribution
end signals DEN
TMF TFIN
187
Example 2 Move command and miscellaneous function in the same block

a. Execution of a miscellaneous function without waiting for move command completion
M command (1)(2) (3) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(independent) Mxxx
Move command
Code signals M11–M38 (*2)
Strobe signal MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
om
Distribution
end signals DEN
TMF TFIN
r.c
b. Execution of a miscellaneous function after move command completion
M command (1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)(7)(8) (9)
e
(independent) Mxx
Move command
Code signals
Strobe signal
M11–M38
MF
nt (*2)
ce
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution
end signals DEN
nc
TMF TFIN
.c
w
Signal
w
Miscellaneous function
code signals
w
M11 to M38
<F151, F157#0 to #3>
strobe signal
MF<F150#0>
[Function] These signals report the specification of miscellaneous functions.
[Output condition] For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of “Basic
procedure” above.
188
NOTE
1 The following miscellaneous functions are only processed
internally by the control unit; they are not subject to output
even when specified:
· M98, M99, M198
· M code that calls a sub program (parameter Nos.0240 to
0242)
· M code that calls a custom macro (parameter Nos.0230
to 0239)
om
2 Decode signals as well as the code signals and strobe
signal are output for the miscellaneous functions listed
below. (only for M series)
M00, M01, M02, M30
r.c
Decode M signals
(M series)
e
M00<F009#7>,
M01<F009#6>,
M02<F009#5>,
M30<F009#4>
nt
ce
[Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified. The
miscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to output
signals as indicated below.
nc
Command program Output signal
M00 M00
M01 M01
M02 M02
M30 M30
.c
[Output condition] A decode M signal goes “1” when:

· The corresponding miscellaneous function is specified, and any move
w
commands and dwell commands specified in the same block are

completed. These signals are not output when the end signal of the
w
miscellaneous function is returned before completion of such move

commands and dwell commands.
A decode M signal goes “0” when:
w
· The FIN signal goes “1”

· Reset occurs
189
Spindle–speed code
signals
S11 to S28
<F152#0 to #7>
Spindle–speed strobe
signal
SF<F150#2>
om
[Function] These signals report that spindle speed functions have been specified.
procedure” above.
r.c
Tool function code
signals
T11 to T48<F153#0 to #7,
F156#0 to #7>(M series)/
e
T11 to T28
<F153#0 to #7>(T series)
Tool function strobe
signal
TF<F150#3>
nt
ce
[Function] These signals report that tool functions have been specified.
procedure” above.
nc
Second auxiliary
.c
function code signals

B11 to B38<F155#0 to #7,
F154#0 to #3>(M series)
w
Second auxiliary
function strobe signal
BF1, BF2<F150#7, #6>
w
(M series)
w

[Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified.
procedure” above.
190
End signal
FIN<G120#3>
[Function] This signal reports the completion of a miscellaneous function,
spindle–speed function, tool function, second auxiliary function, or
external operation function.
[Operation] For the control unit operation and procedure when this signal goes “1”,
see the description of “Basic procedure” above.
om
The FIN signal must remain “1” for a certain time (TFIN, which is set by
a parameter No.0009#0 to #3) or longer. The FIN signal driven “1” is
ignored if the FIN signal goes “0” before TFIN elapses.
WARNING
r.c
Only one end signal is used for all functions above. The end
signal must go “1” after all functions are completed.
e
Distribution end signals
DEN<F149#3> nt
[Function] These signals report that all commands (such as move commands and
ce
dwell) are completed except those miscellaneous functions, spindle
functions, tool functions, and so forth that are contained in the same block
and have been sent to the PMC. They also report that the end signal from
the PMC is being awaited.
nc
[Output condition] The DEN signal turns to “1” when:

· The completion of miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions,
tool functions, and so forth is being awaited, all other commands in the
same block are completed, and the current position is in the in–position.
.c
The DEN signal turns to “0” when:

· The execution of one block is completed
w
NOTE
w
A parameter can specify, whether to only check if an

acceleration/deceleration delay is eliminated, or to also
check if a servo delay (error) has been reduced to within a
w
certain range.
191
Passing point signal

(T series)
DEN2<F150#6>
[Function] The signal indicates that the position specified by the passing point signal
output function has been reached.
[Output condition] The DEN2 signal becomes 1 when:
D The specified position is passed.
om
The DEN2 signal becomes 0 when:
D Miscellaneous function completion signal FIN is returned.
r.c
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 FIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
e
F149 DEN2 DEN
F150 TF SF MF (T series)
F150
F151
BF1
M28
nt
BF2
M24 M22 M21

TF
M18
SF
M14 M12
MF
M11
(M series)
ce
F152 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11
F153 T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11

nc
F154 M00 M01 M02 M30 B38 B34 B32 B31 (M series)
F155 B28 B24 B22 B21 B18 B14 B12 B11 (M series)
F156 T48 T44 T42 T41 T38 T34 T32 T31 (M series)
.c
F157 M38 M34 M32 M31 (M series)

w
Parameter
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0009 TMF TFIN
w
[Data type] Bit

[Unit of data] 16[msec]
[Valid data range] 1 to 6 (16[msec] to 256[msec])
TFIN Set a time range within which the miscellaneous, spindle–speed, or tool
function completion signal FIN (G120, #3) can be accepted.
TMF Set a period starting from when an M, S, or T code is sent until the
miscellaneous function code read signal MF (F150, #0), spindle–speed
function code read signal SF (F150, #2), or tool function code read signal
TF (F150, #3) is sent.
192
Setting value
TMF TFIN #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4
16msec 16msec or more 0 0 0 0
om
r.c
e
nt
208msec
224msec
208msec or more
224msec or more
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
ce

nc
M, S, T, B code
.c
MF, SF, TF, BF,

signal
w
Delay time
w
M, S, T, B code
w
MF, SF, TF, BF

signal
FIN sigal TFIN
Ignored be- Valid because

cause shorter longer than min.
than min. signal width
signal width
193
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015 CPRD
[Data type] Bit

CPRD When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal
point
0 : The least input increment is assumed.
1 : The unit of mm, inches, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0019 M02NR
[Data type] Bit
r.c
M02NR When M02 is specified in memory operation
0 : M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automati-
cally searched for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset
or reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program is
e
executed, starting from the beginning.
1 : M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched
for. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind
nt
signal.)
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0020 BCD3 (M series)
[Data type] Bit

nc
BCD3 The B code is output using:

1 : Three digits.
0 : Six digits.
When a B command is programmed for automatic or MDI operation, the
.c
value of the B command is sent to the PMC as a BCD code.

The B function can output the BCD code of the B command using three
or six digits (BCD3 bit, bit 4 of parameter 0020). When six–digit BCD
w
code output is selected, the three high–order digits and three low–order
digits of the BCD code are output separately. The B function outputs the
code at the same timing as the miscellaneous function, spindle–speed
w
function, and tool function. The B function uses the same FIN signal as
the miscellaneous function, spindle–speed function, and tool function.
For details, see the relevant section.
w
194
(1) Output timing of the three–digit BCD code (when the BCD3 bit (bit
4 of parameter 0020) is set to 1)
Next command
B command read
Three disits
B function BCD output
BF1
om
FIN
Three disits
TMF
B
TFIN
r.c
Output for B11 to B18
e
(2) Output timing of the six–digit BCD code (when the BCD3 bit (bit 4
ntof parameter 0020) is set to 0)
ce
B command read
Next command
Three high–order digits Three low–order digits
B function BCD output
nc
BF2
BF1
FIN
.c
TMF TMF
TFIN TFIN
w
Three high–order digits Three low–order digits

B
w

w

195
0111 M code preventing buffering 1
0112 M code preventing buffering 2
[Data type] Byte

Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing
directed by an M code must be performed by the machine without
buffering the following block, specify the M code.
om
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are
not specified in these parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0393 M3RQNG
r.c
M3RQNG The command for the three–digit M code is:
1 : Disabled (P/S 003).
0 : Enabled.
e
Note nt
NOTE
ce
1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are
specified in the same block, the commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and
nc
miscellaneous function commands.

ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon
completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the
sequence of PMC.
.c
2 If the second miscellaneous function is provided, B cannot

be used as an axis address.
3 The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read
w
into the input buffer register, if present. Similarly, ten M

codes which do not buffer can be set by parameters (Nos.
0111 to 0112).
w
4 For M00 and M01 only, miscellaneous function code signal,

auxiliary function strobe signal, and M decode signals are
sent; the control of program stop and optional stop shall be
w
designed on the PMC side.

5 When the automatic operation is stopped by M02 or M30,
it is necessary to send the external reset signal from the
machine side to the CNC, instead of the FIN signal, When
the external reset signal is returned against the M02 or M30,
the control returns to the top of the program recently
executed and enters the reset state. When the FIN signal
is returned, the control returns to the beginning of the
program recently executed and executes it from the top..
196
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.11.1 Auxiliary function (M function)
OPERATOR’S
OPERATOR S MANUAL
(B–62574EN) II.11.3 The second axiliary functions (B code)
(for 0–MD only)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.11.1 Auxiliary function (M function)

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
197
8.2
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION LOCK
General Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function.

That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued.
This function is used to check a program.
om
Signal
Auxiliary function lock
r.c
signal
AFL<G103#7>
[Function] This signal selects auxiliary function lock. That is, this signal disables
e
the execution of specified M, S, T, and B functions.
below.
nt
[Operation] When this signal turns to “1”, the control unit functions as described
(1) The control unit does not execute M, S, T, and B functions specified
ce
for memory operation or MDI operation. That is, the control unit stops
the output of code signals and strobe signals (MF, SF, TF, BF).
(2) If this signal turns to “1” after code signal output, the output operation
is executed in the ordinary manner until its completion (that is, until
nc
the FIN signal is received, and the strobe signal turns to “0”).
(3) Among the miscellaneous functions, M00, M01, M02, and M30 are
executed even when this signal is “1”. All code signals, strobe signals,
decode signals (for M series only) are output in the ordinary manner.
.c
(4) Among the miscellaneous functions, even when this signal is “1”,
those functions (M98 and M99) that are executed in the control unit
without outputting their execution results are executed in the ordinary
w
manner.
WARNING
w
Even when this signal is “1”, spindle analog output or

spindle serial output is executed.
w
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G103 AFL
198
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.5.1 Machine lock and auxiliary function
OPERATOR’S MANUAL lock
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.5.1 Machine lock and auxiliary function

OPERATOR’S MANUAL lock
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
199
8.3
MULTIPLE M
COMMANDS IN A
SINGLE BLOCK
General So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this
function allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block.
Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to the
machine. This means that compared with the conventional method of a
om
single M command in a single block, a shorter cycle time can be realized
in machining.
(Example)
One M command Multiple M commands
r.c
in a single block in a single block
M40 ; M40M50M60 ;
M50 ; G28G91X0Y0Z0 ;
M60 ; :
G28G91X0Y0Z0 ; :
e
: :
: :
: :
Basic procedure
nt
(1) Assume that “MaaMbbMcc;” was commanded by the program.
(2) The 1st M command (Maa) sends the code signals M11 to M38 in a
ce
manner similar to the conventional one-block single command. The
strobe signal MF is set to “1” after a time TMF set by parameter
No.0009#4 – #7 (Standard setting: 16 msec).
The second M command (Mbb) sends the code signal M211-M238,
nc
the third M command (Mcc) sends the code signal M311-M338, and
their respective strobe signals MF2 and MF3 are set to “1”.
Furthermore, the three code signals are sent simultaneously.
The strobe signals MF, MF2, and MF3 become “1” at the same time.
.c
The code signal is a binary notation of the program command aa, bb

and cc.
(3) On the PMC side, the code signals corresponding to the respective
w
strobe signals are read when the strobe signals become “1”, and the
appropriate operations are performed.
(4) When the operation of all M commands ends on the PMC side, the end
w
signal (FIN) is set to “1”.

(5) When the completion signal stays “1” for a time (TFIN) set by
w
parameter No.0009#0 – #3 (Standard: 16 msec), all strobe signals

(MF, MF2 and MF3) are set to “0” at the same time and the reception
of completion signal is reported.
(6) On the PMC side, when MF, MF2 and MF3 are set to “0”, the
completion signal is set to “0”.
200
A time chart for this procedure is shown below:
M command (MaaMbbMcc;)
Code signal M11 to M38
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation

Strobe signal MF2
PMC side operation
om
Strobe signal MF3
PMC side operation
End signal FIN
TMF TFIN
r.c
Signal
e
2nd, 3rd M function code
signal
nt
ce
M211 to M238
<F193#0 to F194#3>
M311 to M338
<F194#4 to F195#7>
nc
2nd, 3rd M Function

strobe signal
MF2<F157#4>
MF3<F157#5>
.c

[Function] Indicates that second and third auxiliary functions have been issued.
[Output condition] The output conditions and procedures are the same as that described in
w
“Basic procedure”.
w
Signal address
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F157 MF3 MF2
F193 M228 M224 M222 M221 M218 M214 M212 M211
F194 M318 M314 M312 M311 M238 M234 M232 M231
F195 M338 M334 M332 M331 M328 M324 M322 M321
201
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0065 M3B
[Data type] Bit

M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block
0 : One
1 : Up to three
om
Caution
CAUTION
1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be
specified together with another M code.
r.c
2 Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99,
and M198 cannot be specified together with other M codes;
each of those M codes must be specified in a single block.
Such M codes include these which direct the CNC to
perform internal operations in addition to sending the M
e
codes themselves to the PMC. To be specified, such M
codes are M codes for calling program numbers 9001 to
nt
9009 and M codes for disabling advance reading (buffering)
of subsequent blocks.
The M codes which can be specified in a single block must
be those which the CNC send only the M code signals to the
ce
PMC side.
3 In MDI operation of type A, only a single M code can be
specified.
nc
Note
.c
NOTE
CNC allows up to three M codes to be specified in one block.
w
However, some M codes cannot be specified at the same

time due to mechanical operation restrictions. For example,
M42 can be specified only after the mechanical operation of
w
M41 is completed.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.11.2 Multiple M commands in a single
OPERATOR’S MANUAL block
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.11.2 Multiple M commands in a single

OPERATOR’S MANUAL block
(B–62544EN)
202
8.4
HIGH–SPEED M/S/T/B
INTERFACE
General To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high–speed M/S/T/B
interface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and completion signals
of the M/S/T/B functions.
Whether to use the usual system or high–speed system for strobe signal
and completion signal handling can be specified by parameter HSIF
om
(No.0045#7).
The description below uses the miscellaneous functions (M code

commands) as an example. The same description applies to the
spindle–speed function (S code), tool function (T code) and 2nd auxiliary
function (B code).
r.c
Basic procedure (1) Assume that the following program is given:
Mxx;
Myy;
e
(2) In response to an M command, the NC system sends out the code
ntsignals M11 to M38.
After the expiration of the time set with bits 4 to 7 of parameter 0009,
the system inverts the logic level of strobe signal MF. That is, the MF
signal is brought to 1 from 0, or to 0 from 1.
ce
(3) The CNC system inverts the strobe signal, then when the logical level
of the auxiliary function completion signal MFIN becomes the same
as the strobe signal, the CNC assumes the completion of PMC
sequence.
nc
With the usual method, the operation is assumed to be completed when

a falling edge (“1” to “0”) of the M/S/T/B completion signal FIN is
received after a rising edge (“0” to “1”) of the FIN signal is detected. This
.c
new system, on the other hand, assumes the operation has been completed
upon detection of only one transition of the completion signal.
In addition , the usual system uses only one completion signal (FIN)
w
common to the M/S/T/B functions. This new system uses a different

completion signal for each of the M, S, T, and B functions; the completion
signals for the M, S, T, and B functions are MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, and
w
BFIN, respectively.
The Fig.8.4 (a) 1 below shows the timing chart of these signals with the
new system. For comparison, Fig.8.4 (b) shows the timing chart of the
w
conventional system.
203
Next block
Code signal
Mxx Myy
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
om
Auxiliary function
completion signal MFIN
Fig. 8.4 (a) Timing Chart of the High–Speed System
Next block
r.c
Code signal
Mxx Myy
e
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
Completion signal FIN

nt
ce
Fig. 8.4 (b) Timing Chart of the Usual System
A high–speed interface can also be used for multiple M commands issued

nc
for one block. This interface provides separate completion signals for
each M code. They are called MFIN (the same name as for the single M
command per block function), MFIN2, and MFIN3, respectively. The
signal transfer sequence for multiple M codes per block is the same as that
for a single M code per block.
.c
The high–speed interface can also be used for the external operation
function. In this case, special external operation signal EFD and
w
completion signal EFIN are used. The procedure for sending and
receiving these signals is identical to that for sending and receiving the
strobe and completion signals of the miscellaneous function (M series).
w
w
204
Signal
completion signal
MFIN<G115#0>
om
[Function] Reports that the execution of a miscellaneous function using the high–
speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and aprocedure of the contol unit when this signal turns
to “1” and “0”, see the description of “Basic procedure” above.
r.c
Spindle function
completion signal
SFIN<G115#2>
e
nt
[Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the
high–speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit when this signal turns
ce
nc
Tool function completion

signal
TFIN<G115#3>
.c
[Function] Reports that the execution of a tool function using the high–speed
M/S/T/B interface is completed.
w
w
2nd auxiliary function

w
completion signal
BFIN1, BFIN2
<G115#7, #6>(M series)
[Function] Reports that the execution of a second auxiliary function using the
high–speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
205
2nd, 3rd M function

completion signals
MFIN2, MFIN3
<G134#4, #5>
[Function] Indicate that when the high–speed interface is used for multiple M com-
mands per block, the second or third M function have been completed.
[Operation] See “Basic procedure” for how the control unit operates and what it per-
om
forms when the signal turns to “1” and “0”.
External operation signal

for high–speed interface
r.c
(M series)
EFD<F150#1>
e
[Function] Indicates that positioning for the external operation function has been
completed for the high–speed M, S, T, or B interface, and that another
external operation is required.
nt
[Operation] Refer to the description of the output conditions and procedure described
in “Basic procedure”.
ce
External operation
function completion
nc
signal (M series)
EFIN<G115#1>
.c
[Function] Indicates that the external operation function has been completed for the
high–speed M, S, T, or B interface.
[Operation] The “Basic procedure” describes the procedure and operation of the
w
control unit when the signal is set to 1 or 0.

w
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
G115 TFIN SFIN MFIN (T series)
G115 BFIN1 BFIN2 TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN (M series)
G134 MFIN3 MFIN2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F150 EFD (M series)
206
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0045 HSIF
[Data type] Bit

HSIF Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B codes
0 : Normal
1 : High–speed
om
Note
NOTE
1 The strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF are “0” when the
r.c
power is turned on.
2 When the control unit is reset, MF, SF, TF, and BF are set
to “0”.
e
Reference item
nt
CONNECTION MANUAL 8.1 Miscellaneous function/2nd auxiliary
ce
(This manual) function
8.3 Multiple M commands in a block
11.7 External operation function

nc
.c
w
w
w
207
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62543EN–1/01
9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
208
B–62543EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.1
SPINDLE SPEED
FUNCTION
(S CODE OUTPUT)
General When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe
signals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The code
signals are retained until another S code is issued.
om
One S code is used for each block.
Signal Refer to 8.1.
r.c
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are
e
specified in the same block, the commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
nt
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and
miscellaneous function commands.
ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon
ce
completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the PMC
processing sequence.
2 For S code output when the spindle serial output/analog
nc
spindle output is used, refer to 9.3.

.c
w
w
w
209
9.2
SPINDLE SERIAL
OUTPUT/SPINDLE
ANALOG OUTPUT
9.2.1 There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serial
General output and spindle analog output.
The table below lists the relationships between the spindle control
om
interfaces and the configuration of the spindle.
Spindle serial Spindle analog First spindle Second spindle Third spindle
output output
f × First serial spindle Second serial spindle Analog spindle
r.c
The PC can be used. The PC can not be used. The PC cannot be used.
f × Serial spindle Analog spindle

Can not be used.
The PC can be used. The PC can not be used.
× f
e
First analog spindle
Can not be used. Can not be used.
The PC can be used.
× × nt
See Section 9.1.
⇒ Controlled by the PMC using an external interface.
ce
· PC = position coder
The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.
nc
fAvailable ×Unavailable
Serial spindle Analog spindle

Spindle
Function When used as the
Second serial
.c
First serial spindle first spindle

spindle
(with no serial SP)
Thread cutting/feed per rotation

w
f × f
(synchronous feed) (for T series only)
Constant surface speed control

f × f
w
(for T series only)
Rigid tapping (for M series only) f × f

w
Spindle control unit functions (*1), such as

f f f
spindle orientation
Spindle output control using PMC f f f
NOTE
(*1) These functions belong to the spindle control unit. They
cannot be used unless the spindle control unit supports
those functions.
210
The signals and parameters for spindle speed control are common to both
spindle serial output and spindle analog output. (See Section 9.3.)
The table below lists the differences related to direct control of the spindle
control unit.
Spindle control unit for Spindle control unit for
spindle serial output inter- spindle analog output in-
face terface
Parameters for Specified as CNC parame- Directly specified for the
the spindle con- ters spindle control unit
om
trol unit (6000 to 6888/S1, S2)
Used after being transferred
to the spindle control unit
Control signal for Connected to the PMC via Connected to the PMC via
the spindle con- the CNC an external contact
trol unit G229 to G232 and F281 to
r.c
F284:
Addresses for the first
spindle
G233 to G236 and F285 to
F288:
Addresses for the second
e
spindle
nt
Spindle speed
command inter-
face
Digital data in a range from
0 to " maximum spindle
motor speed
Analog voltage from 0 to
"10 V (excluding portion
for offset voltage adjust-
ment)
ce
Position coder Connected to the CNC via Connected directly to the
interface the spindle control unit CNC
nc
Signal · Spindle control unit signals for the serial spindle
<G0229 to G0232> (input), <F0281 to F0284>

→ for the first serial spindle
.c
<G0233 to G0236> (input), <F0285 to F0288>

→ for the second serial spindle
w
These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/output
signals for the spindle control unit for the serial spindle.
w
For details of the signals belonging to these addresses, refer to the

manuals for the serial spindle:
w
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series (Serial Interface) Descriptions

(B–65042E)
FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT Serial Interface S series
Maintenance Manual (B–65045E)
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER a series Descriptions
(B–65162E)
211
Signal address
D For 1st SERIAL SPINDLE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G229 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
G230 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G231 NRROA ROTAA INDXA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
F281 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
F282 RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA
D For 2ND SERIAL

SPINDLE #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
r.c
G233 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G234 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
G235 NRROB ROTAB INDXB
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F285 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
F286 nt RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB

ce
Parameter
D Connection of serial
spindle control unit
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0071 SRLS2P
[Data type] Bit

SRLS2P The number of connections in serial spindle control
.c
0: 1
1: 2
w
NOTE
To connect two serial spindles, set jumper S1 on the 1st
serial spindle control unit to B.
w
D Parameters of serial Nos.6500 – 6635: S1 → For 1st serieal spindle

w
spindle control unit Nos.6640 – 6775: S2 → For 2nd serial spindle

The above parameters are on the CNC, but actually they are used for the
spindle control unit of serial spindle.
For details of these parameters, refer to the following manual:
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B–65160E)
FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT Serial Interface S series
Maintenance Manual (B–65045E)
212
Alarm and message

408 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK This alarm is generated when the spindle con-
START FAULT trol unit is not ready for starting correctly when
the power is turned on in the system with the
serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as fol-
lows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable, or
om
the spindle control unit’s power is OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on under
alarm conditions other than SU–01 or
AL–24 which are shown on the LED dis-
play of the spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier
power off once and perform startup again.
r.c
3) Other reasons (improper combination of
hardware)
4) The second spindle (when SRL2SP, bit 4
of parameter No.0071, is 1) is in one of
e
the above conditions 1) to 3).
Note) This alarm does not occur after the
system including the spindle control
nt
409 SPINDLE ALARM DETEC-
TION
unit is activated.
A spindle amplifier alarm occurred in a system

with a serial spindle. The alarm is indicated
ce
as “AL–XX” (where XX is a number) on the
display of the spindle amplifier. For details,
see Section 14. Setting bit 7 of parameter
No.0397 causes the spindle amplifier alarm
number to appear on the screen.
nc
DIAGNOSIS SCREEN
D Load and speed meter
.c
readings for the serial

spindle 750 First serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)
w
751 First serial spindle: Speed meter reading (rpm)
752 Second serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)

w
753 Second serial spindle: Speed meter reading (rpm)
To display the load and speed meter readings, the following parameters
w
must be specified correctly.

Maximum motor speed:
Parameter Nos.6520 and 6660 (main)/Nos.6160 and 6340 (sub)
Load meter reading at maximum output:
Parameter Nos.6627 and 6767 (main)/Nos.6238 and 6418 (sub)
NOTE
The spindle switch function is used for main/sub switching.
Select main if the spindle switch function is not used.
213
9.3
SPINDLE SPEED
CONTROL
General This section describes spindle speed control. It also explains the position
coder and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR).
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
214
Command flow of The following chart summarizes spindle speed control.

spindle speed control
CNC PMC and machine

Machining program, etc.
↓
Gear select signal output Output to the PMC

⋅ S command
(M series) (to change the machine gear).
(GR3O, GR2O, GR1O)
om
⋅ S code/SF signal output . Output to the PMC
(to be used for ladders).
⋅ Spindle stop signal/spindle orientation signal

Switching in the machine
⋅ Spindle override signal
r.c
(*SSTP/SOR, SPA to SPC (M), SPA to SPD (T))
⋅ Processing for gear change Input the gear select

(S command → spindle motor speed con- ←From the
signal (GR1, GR2). PMC
e
version)
Clamp the speed according to parameters.
nt
CNC output specification
(result of speed conversion)
S12 bit code output (R12O to R01O)
Output to the PMC
(used for ladders)
ce
⋅ Determine the output. ← Output specification by the PMC ←From the
(Selected by the SIND signal) (set to R12I to R01I) PMC
nc
Specify output polarity in the CNC.

(M03/M04 and parameter TCW, CMM
(No.0013#6, #7))
.c
⋅ Determination of output polarity ← Polarity specification by the PMC ←From the

(Selected by the SSIN signal) (set to SGN) PMC
w
Thread cutting, ⋅ Control over the ← Input the spindle

feed per rotation, start of cutting speed arrival
etc. feed. signal (SAR).
w
⋅ Position coder Monitor the arrival

⋅ Command output to the spindle speed
feedback
w
spindle, spindle enable sig-

signal
nal output, gain, and offset
Spindle Spindle Position

amplifier motor coder
Gear change Sensors

Input the spindle amplifier Spindle
control signal from the mechanism
PMC, etc. Mechanical section of the machine
215
D S command The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining
programs, etc. for the CNC.
For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts
the specified surface speed to the spindle speed.
In the M series, the CNC specifies the gear stage for the desired spindle
speed to the PMC according to parameter Nos. 3741, 3742, and 3743, and
the S command.
(GR3O, GR2O, GR1O <F152#2, #1, #0>)
om
D S code/SF signal output With the spindle serial output or spindle analog output option, the spindle
control function in the CNC converts the S command value to the output
value for the spindle motor. Unlike a system without such options, the
system with the options responds to the S command with the S code/SF
signals as follows to enable gear change and constant surface speed
r.c
control:
M series → Outputs the S code.
The SF signal is output only when the CNC directs the PMC
to change the gear.
e
T series → Outputs neither S code nor SF signal.
(This is because the S code is not always the spindle speed
D Spindle stop signal

(*SSTP)
nt when the constant surface speed control option is used.)
This signal sets the S command value in the CNC to 0. If the CNC has
the spindle output specified (see descriptions on the SIND signal), this
ce
signal sets the speed command for the spindle to 0.
Even if the function of the spindle stop signal is not used, the signal must
be set to logical 1 for the CNC to perform spindle speed control.
nc
D Spindle orientation If the spindle orientation signal is logical 1 and the spindle stop signal is
signal (SOR) logical 0, the spindle rotates in the direction specified by bit 5 (ORCW)
of parameter No.0013 at a constant speed specified by parameter
No.0108.
.c
Because the spindle rotates at a constant speed regardless of the gear

stage, this signal can be used to rotate the spindle to drive the stopper or
w
pin during mechanical spindle positioning.

In the M series, specifying bit 5 (GST) of parameter No.0003 causes the
spindle motor to rotate at constant speed. This function can be used for
w
gear shifting because it maintains a constant speed of the gear change

mechanism.
w
D Spindle speed override This signal specifies an override of 50% to 200% (T series)/50% to 120%
signal (M series) for the specified S value for spindle control.
(SPA to SPD (T series)/
SPA to SPC (M series)) However, the spindle speed override function is disabled when the CNC
is in the following state:
Tapping cycle (G84, G74) for the M series
Thread cutting (G32, G92, G76) for the T series
When the spindle speed control is performed but the spindle speed
override is not used, set the override value to 100%.
216
D Processing for gear Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that is
changing actually controlled is the spindle motor. Therefore, the CNC must have
some provision to detect the gear stage between the speed and spindle
motor.
There are two types of gear selection methods:
M type
The CNC selects a gear stage according to the range of speed for each gear
stage previously specified in a parameter, as directed by the S command,
and informs the PMC of the selected gear stage (one of the three gear
stages ) using the gear select signal output (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O).
om
Also, the CNC outputs the spindle speed based on the selected gear stage
(output as the gear select signal).
T type
The gear stage (one of the four gear stages ) being currently used by the
machine is input in response to the gear select signal inputs (GR1, GR2).
r.c
The machine determines which gear to use.
The CNC outputs the spindle speed that corresponds to the gear stage
input.
D Selection of gear change
e
The M series system can use only M type.
system The T series system can use only T type.
D Details of M type
(Output of GR1O, GR2O,
GR3O)
nt
By specifying from S0 to S99999 in memory or MDI operation, the CNC
outputs a command corresponding to the spindle speed. There is a
two-speed (GR1O and GR2O) or three-speed range (GR1O, GR2O,
ce
GR3O), set by parameter nos. 0541, 0539, and 0555, and the gear
selection signal is output simultaneously. When the gear selection signal
is changed, the SF signal is output at the same time (parameter SFOUT
no. 0020#7).
nc
The meaning of the gear signals is shown below:

Gear 2–stage Gear 3–state Remarks
GR1O Low Low
Low :Low Gear
.c
GR2O High Middle Middle :Middle Gear

High :High Gear
GR3O High
w
The speed commands output to the spindle motor are as follows:

⋅ For the serial spindle, the speed commands are processed as values 0 to
w
16383 between the CNC and spindle control unit.

⋅ For the analog spindle, the speed commands are output to the analog
voltage signal SVC as analog voltages 0 to 10 V.
w
The following descriptions exemplify the analog spindle. However, they

can be applied to the serial spindle on the assumption that spindle motor
speed with analog voltage 10 V corresponds to the maximum spindle
motor speed.
217
D M type gear change method A (Fig. 9.3.1 (a))
Spindle motor speed command

(Analog voltage command)
For gear 2-stage
10V
Upper limit of
spindle speed
(Vc)
GR2O (GR3O)
GR1O (GR2O)
om
(GR1O)
C
Spindle speed
command
r.c
A B
(S code input)
Vmin Vmax Vmax Vmax ( ) for gear 3-stage

A× A× B× C×
4095 4095 4095 4095
e
Fig.9.3.1 (a) S code input and output voltage
nt
Set the following values as parameters:
· Constant Vmax: for upper limit of spindle speed (parameter No.0542)
ce
Upper limit of spindle speed
Vmax=4095×
Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
nc
· Constant Vmin; for lower limit of spindle speed (parameter No.0543)

Lower limit of spindle speed
Vmin=4095×
Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
.c
· Spindle speed A (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and low gear

(parameter No.0541)
w
· Spindle speed B (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and high gear (or
middle-high gear) (parameter No.0539)
w
· Spindle speed C (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and high gear

(parameter No.0555) (for gear 3–stage)
w
NOTE
If a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than the
acceptable input voltage for the spindle drive system,
calculate the spindle speed that corresponds to 10 V using
a proportional calculation method and use it instead. Now,
in response to the specified S code, the speed command
and gear select commands (G3O, G2O, G1O) are output to
the spindle motor as shown in Fig.9.3.1 (a).
218
D Gear change point during tapping cycle mode (G84, G74)

In case of G84 (tapping cycle) or G74 (counter tapping cycle) the gear
shift speed is changed by parameter G84S (No.0012#6). In this case,
gear shift (high–speed/low–speed) is performed at the speed set by
parameter Nos.0540 and 0556 (Fig. 9.3.1 (b)).

(analog voltage output)
10V
om
Upper limit
voltage of
spindle GR1O
motor speed
(Vc)
GR2O
r.c
Spindle speed
command
(S code input)
D A E B C
e
D : Gear shift point (parameter No.0540) for low/high speed change (or low/medium speed change) (set by
parameter as rpm value) during tapping.
E : Gear shift point (parameter No.0556) (3-stage gear) for medium/high speed change (set by parameter as
rpm value) during tapping.
Fig.9.3.1 (b)
nt
S code input and output analog voltage (in tapping)
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
219
D M type gear change method B (M series) (Fig. 9.3.1 (c))

The speed (rpm) at which the low-speed and the high-speed gears are
changed over can be set as a parameter (No.0585) by setting parameter
LGCM No.0035#6. When a 3-step gear is used, it is possible to set the
speeds (rpm) for switching low-speed and medium-speed gears, and
medium-speed and high-speed gears, using parameters Nos.0585, 0586.

(analog voltage output)
om
10V
VC
VH
GR3O
VL
r.c
GR1O GR2O
e
Spindle speed
A×
Vmin
A×
Vmaxl
ntA
B×
Vmaxh
B
C×
Vmax
C
command
(S code input)
ce
4095 4095 4095 4095
VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor.
VH: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor with high-speed gears (medium
speed gear for 3-step gear)
nc
VL: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor at low-speed gear
Fig.9.3.1 (c) M type gear change B

.c
When using this function, set the following parameters:

· Constant Vmax (Parameter No.0542) related to the upper limit of
spindle motor speed (rpm)
w
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm)

Vmax = 4095×
w
Spindle motor speed (rpm) when the command voltage is 10V
· Constant Vmin (Parameter No.0543) related to the lower limit of

w
spindle motor speed (rpm)
Lower limit of spindle motor speed (rpm)

Vmin = 4095×
· Constant Vmaxl (Parameter No.0585) related to the upper limit of

spindle motor speed (rpm) with low-speed gears
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm) with low-speed gears

Vmaxl = 4095×
220
· Constant Vmaxh (Parameter No.0586) related to the upper limit of

spindle motor speed (rpm) with high-speed gears (medium-speed gear
for 3-step gear)
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm) with high-speed gears (medium-speed gear for 3-step gear)
Vmaxh = 4095×
· Spindle speed A (Parameter No.0541) (rpm) with low-speed gears

when the command voltage is 10V
· Spindle speed B (Parameter No.0539) (rpm) with high-speed gears
om
when the command voltage is 10V (medium-speed gear for 3-step)
· Spindle speed C (Parameter No.0555) (rpm) with high-speed gears
when the command voltage is 10V (3-step gear)
Spindle motor speed commands (0 to 10V) and gear selecting signals
(GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) are issued on each S code command as shown in
r.c
the figure:
CAUTION
1 In a tapping cycle when parameter G84S (No.0012#6) is
e
set, the gears are changed over at the gear changing point
for tapping.
nt
2 For this function (parameter LGCM=1 (No.0035#6)), when
only one-step gear is used, the voltage corresponding to the
upper limit value to the spindle motor is calculated using
Vmaxl, and when 2-step gear is used, it is calculated
ce
according to Vmaxh. Therefore, set Vmaxl when only
one-step gear is used, Vmaxl and Vmaxh when 2-step gear
is used.
nc
D Time chart When S code is commanded, the I/O signal time chart is :
D When Gear select signal does not change
.c
S code read
To next block
w
Spindle speed
command output
w
VH
VL
0V
w
Fig. 9.3.1 (d) Time chart when gear select signal does not change
In this case, the SF signal is not output and the CNC advances to the next
block automatically after the next spindle speed command is output.
221
D When Gear select signal change
S code read
To next block
Gear select signal

TMF
GR3O
/GR2O
/GR1O SF
om
FIN
TMF
TFIN
r.c
Spindle speed command
VH
VL
0V
e
Fig.9.3.1 (e) Time chart when gear select signal changes
In this case, the gear select signal is output; after elapse of the time
nt
constant set by parameter (TMF), the SF signal is output. After another
TMF elapse, the spindle speed command is output. On the PMC side,
change the gears by this signal, and return the FIN signal after the end of
ce
gear change. The time chart for SF and FIN signals is the same as in S
code output. TMF, set by parameter No.0009#4 to #7, is common to M,
S and T functions.
nc
Moreover, specifying bit 7 (SFOUT) of parameter No.0020 can specify

that the SF signal be output even if no gear change is used.
D Details of T type To perform the T type gear changing, the maximum spindle speed for each
(Input of GR1, GR2) gear select signal issued from the PMC side must be set by parameter Nos.
.c
0540 – 0543.
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship
between the signal and gear number is :
w
Parameter No. for max.

GR1 GR2 Gear No.
spindle speed
w
0 0 1 No.0540
1 0 2 No.0541
w
0 1 3 No.0542
1 1 4 No.0543
The following descriptions exemplify the analog spindle. Like the

descriptions of the M type, they also apply to the serial spindle on the
assumption that spindle motor speed with analog voltage 10 V
corresponds to the maximum spindle motor speed.
222
In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analog
voltages 0 to 10 V for analog spindle control correspond to digital data
0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be easier if you
consider them code signals from 0 to 4095 for convenience sake without
distinguishing between serial and analog spindles.
Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed
with the output voltage 10 V is 1000 rpm for the low speed gear (G1) and
2000 rpm for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds by the parameter
Nos.0540, 0541. In this case, the analog voltage has the linear relationship
shown below.
om
N
2000rpm When gear
2 selected
r.c
When gear
1000rpm 1 selected
600rpm
e
Volt
0 V2 V1 10
nt
When spindle speed S=600 is given, V1 (for G1) or V2 (for G2) is
calculated inside the CNC and output to the machine side.
ce
V1: 6(V)
V2: 3(V)
The value of output voltage V is calculated automatically from the
following equations:
nc
10N
V=
R
R: Spindle speed at 10V output voltage
.c
N: Spindle speed given by S5-digits

This is equivalent to the G97 mode for constant surface speed control.
w
See Section 9.4 for operations during the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
w
In addition, parameter No.0556 (upper limit to the spindle speed) can

specify speed clamping for all gear positions.
w
223
Reference→ Block Diagram for Analog Voltage Output

With the constant surface speed control option equipped.
CNC Power magnetics cabinet
[Surface speed]
M code Gear change command
S(m/min)
Spindle speed
X–axis pres-
command
ent value Constant
r S (rpm)
surface
rpm/10V speed control
Gear change
om
G97
G96
Parameter GR1, GR2
Motor speed conversion gear select signal
Full scale conversion
()
r.c
Spindle motor
D-A SVC
Speed
converter control
e
D Determination of output
nt SF signal is not sent.
Using the above processing for gear change, the CNC calculates the speed
ce
R12O–R01O (Output) command output to the spindle motor that is necessary to obtain the
R12I–R01I (Input) specified spindle speed with the gear.
SIND (Input) For either serial spindle or analog spindle control, the calculation results
are output as the S12 bit code signal from 0 to 4095 to the PMC.
nc
(R01O to R12O<F172#0 to F173#3>)

After the calculation results are received, the SIND signal <G125#7>
determines which is to be used, the speed command output calculated by
the CNC or the data specified in the PMC. Thus speed command output
.c
control for the spindle motor is determined. (See also Section 15.4.)
D Determination of output The speed command output to the spindle motor is determined as
w
polarity SSIN/SGN (Input) described above, but the actually used output polarity is determined by the
CNC as follows:
⋅ If bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.0013 = 0
w
→ Determined according to bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No.0013

⋅ If bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.0013 = 1
→ Determined according to bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No.0013 and
w
M03/M04 given to the CNC

After that, the SSIN signal <G125#6> determines which is to be used, the
output polarity calculated by the CNC or the polarity specified in the
PMC. In this way, the output polarity of the speed command output to
the spindle motor is determined. (See also Section 15.4.)
Keep in mind the following: Even with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter
No.0013 = 1, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if it has not
issued M03/M04, and therefore, actual output does not work even if the
speed command output has been specified.
224
D Command output to According to the speed command output and the polarity determined so
spindle far, the command is sent to the spindle control unit as follows:
⋅ For serial spindle → Digital data 0 to 16383
⋅ For analog spindle → Analog voltage 0 to 10 V
D Requirement of output After power is switched on, a nonzero command is output to the spindle
only when the following conditions are met: A nonzero spindle speed
command is specified, and the output polarity is determined.
With bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.0013 = 1, no command output is sent
to the spindle, because the output polarity is not determined until an
om
M03/M04 is issued.
D Requirement to stop The command output to the spindle is reset to 0 when a command to
output specify so (such as *SSTP = 0 or S0 command) is issued.
M05, emergency stop, or reset does not cause the CNC to reset the
command output to the spindle to 0.
r.c
D Spindle enable signal Another output related to spindle control is the spindle enable signal
ENB <F149#4> ENB.
The ENB signal is logical 1 when a nonzero command output is sent to
the spindle. If the command is logical 0, the ENB signal becomes logical
e
0.
When the analog spindle is being used, an offset voltage in the spindle
nt
motor speed amplifier may cause the spindle motor to rotate at low speed
even if the command output (in this case, analog voltage) to the spindle
is zero. The ENB signal can be used to stop the motor in such a case.
ce
D Gain and offset The analog spindle may require gain and offset voltage adjustment
depending on the spindle motor speed amplifier being used.
The following parameters are available for such adjustment.
nc
⋅ Analog spindle as the first spindle

→ Gain adjustment data: Parameter No.0516
Offset voltage compensation: Parameter No.0577 (M)/0539 (T)
⋅ Analog spindle as the second spindle
.c

Offset voltage compensation: Parameter No.0614
⋅ Analog spindle as the third spindle
w

(valid for multispindle control)
Offset voltage compensation: Parameter No.0618
w
D Position coder feedback The position coder is necessary for thread cutting or feed per rotation.
signal (For the M series, a software option must also be purchased.)
w
The position coder detects the actual spindle speed and the one–rotation
signal (used to detect a fixed point on the spindle for thread cutting).
Ideally, the position coder should be connected directly to the spindle
(with a gear ratio of 1:1). If it is necessary to use a gear, select a gear ratio
from 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8 that reduces the position coder speed.
When using a gear between the spindle and position coder, specify the
gear ratio in bits 6 and 7 (PSG1, PSG2) of parameter 0028 (M series)/bits
6 and 7 (PSG1, PSG2) of parameter 0003 (T series).
See Section 9.5 for position coder connection for rigid tapping.
225
D Speed arrival signal The spindle speed arrival signal SAR is an input signal used as a condition
(SAR) to cause the CNC to start cutting feed. This signal is used generally when
cutting feed should be started after the spindle reaches the specified speed.
In this case, a sensor is used to check the spindle speed. The detected
speed is sent to the CNC via the PMC.
When the above operation is performed using the PC ladder regularly,
however, cutting feed may be started based on the SAR signal indicating
the previous spindle state (spindle speed before change), if the spindle
speed change command and the cutting feed command are issued at the
same time.
om
To avoid the above problem, monitoring the SAR signal can be deferred
for a time specified by parameter No.0110 after the S command or cutting
feed command was issued.
When using the SAR signal, set bit 2 (SCTO) of parameter No.0024 to
r.c
1.
Bit 6 (CSCT) of parameter No.0700 on the diagnosis screen is kept at 1
while this function is keeping the cutting feed block at a halt.
e
Signal
Spindle stop signal

nt
ce
*SSTP<G120#6>
[Function] The command output to the spindle is held.
nc
[Operation] When the spindle stop signal turns to “0” , the output voltage becomes 0V
and the enable signal ENB turns to “0” (M05 is not output). When this
signal turns to “1”, the analog voltage returns to its original value and the
ENB signal turns to “1”.
.c
S××××
Input command M03 M05 M04 S0
w
processing

w
Spindle stop signal

*SSTP
w
Analog voltage 0V
Enable signal ENB
The above time chart is an example. Actually, the time chart should meet
the specification of the spindle control unit.
· When this signal is not used, always set the signal to “1”.
· M03, M04, M05 are not processed inside the CNC.
226
Spindle orientation
signal SOR<G120#5>
[Function] The spindle or the spindle motor is rotated at a constant speed.
[Operation] When the spindle orientation signal turns to “1” and the spindle stop
signal *SSTP turns to “0”, a spindle speed command which lets the
spindle rotate at the constant speed set by parameter No.0108 is output.
The enable signal ENB also turns to “1”. This signal is disabled when the
om
spindle stop signal is “1”.
In M series, when the spindle speed for orientation is set by parameter
GST No.0003#5 and the SOR signal is input, the CNC outputs the spindle
speed command corresponding to the speed set to parameter 0108 with
an output polarity set by parameter ORCW (No.0013#5), but the gear
select signal does not change. For example, if the SOR signal is turned
r.c
to “1” with high gear selected, and the speed set to parameter No.0108 is
in the low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and the
command output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high
gear.
e
When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No.0003#5)=1,
the command output is output regardless of gear select signal. When the
Input command
nt
spindle motor speed is set, it is used for gear shift.
Example of usage is shown below:
ce
M19 M03
processing
Stop command Orientation
nc
detection
Spindle stop signal
*SSTP
.c
Spindle orientation signal

SOR
Max. 70ms
w
Max. 70ms
w
Command output to
the spindle 0
w
Enable signal
ENB
Spindle speed
0 rpm
RL: Constant speed set by parameter No.0108
227
Spindle speed override

signal
SPA to SPD<G103#2 to
#5>(T series)/
SPA to SPC<G103#3 to
#5>(M series)
[Function] The spindle speed override signal specifies an override from 50% to 200%
(T)/from 50% to 120% (M) in 10% units for the S command sent to the
om
CNC.
[Operation] (M series)
Spindle
p override Machine contact status
value SPA SPB SPC
r.c
50% 1 1 1
60% 0 1 1
70% 0 1 0
e
80% 1 1 0
90% 1 0 0
nt 100%
110%
120%
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
ce
(T series)
Spindle
p override Machine contact status
value SPA SPB SPC SPD
nc
50% 1 1 1 0
60% 0 1 1 0
70% 0 1 0 0
.c
80% 1 1 0 0
90% 1 0 0 0
w
100% 0 0 0 0
110% 0 0 1 0
w
120% 1 0 1 0
130% 1 0 1 1
140% 1 1 1 1
w
150% 0 1 1 1
160% 0 1 0 1
170% 1 1 0 1
180% 1 0 0 1
190% 0 0 0 1
200% 0 0 1 1
1 : Contact is closed.
0 : Contact is opened.
228
The spindle speed override function is disabled (an override of 100% is

applied) under the following conditions:
⋅ Tapping cycle (G84, G74), M series
⋅ Thread cutting (G32, G92, G78), T series
→ When this function is not in use, specify an override of 100%.
Spindle speed arrival
om
signal SAR <G120#4>
[Function] The SAR signal initiates cutting feed. In other words, if the signal is
logical 0, cutting feed will not start.
r.c
[Operation] Generally, this signal is used to inform the CNC that the spindle has
reached the specified speed.
For this purpose, the signal must be set to 1 only after the actual speed of
the spindle has reached the specified speed.
e
Setting parameter No.0110 with a wait time before the start of checking
nt
the SAR signal inhibits cutting feed from starting under a condition of
SAR = 1 specified before the change of the spindle command.
To use the SAR signal, it is necessary to set bit 2 (SCTO) of parameter
ce
No.0024 to 1.
The CNC checks the SAR signal under the following conditions:
(a) Bit 2 (SCTO) of parameter No.0024 is set to 1.
nc
(b) Before starting distribution of the first feed (move command) block
after shifting from the rapid traverse mode to the cutting feed mode.
This checking is performed after the time set by parameter No.0110
has elapsed after the feed block is read.
.c
(c) Before starting distribution of the first feed command block after an
S code is commanded. The wait time for checking is the same as in
item (b).
w
(d) When an S code and feed are programmed in the same block, the S
code (or command output to the spindle) is output, and the SAR signal
w
is checked after a fixed time elapses. If the SAR signal is set to “1”,
feed begins.
w
CAUTION
According to the conditions of item (d) above, note that if the
circuit is so designed that SAR is turned to “0”
simultaneously with the output of an S code and the change
of spindle speed is gated with DEN signal, the operation will
stop. That is, the spindle speed does not reach the
commanded speed because the CNC is waiting for the DEN
signal and distribution is not started because the CNC is
waiting for the SAR signal.
229
Spindle enable signal

ENB<F149#4>
[Function] Informs absence or presence of spindle output command.
[Output condition] The ENB signal becomes logical 0 when the command output to the
spindle becomes logical 0. Otherwise, the signal is logical 1.
During analog spindle control, S0 may not be able to stop the spindle from
om
rotating at low speed because of an offset voltage in the spindle motor
speed control amplifier. In such a case, the ENB signal can be used to
provide a condition to determine whether to stop the motor.
The ENB signal can be used also for serial spindle control.
r.c
Gear selection signal
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
e
<F152#0 to #2>(M series)
nt
[Function] The gear select signal specifies a gear stage to the PMC.
[Output condition] For details of this signal, see descriptions on the M type gear selection
ce
method in General.
nc
Gear selection signal

GR1, GR2
<G123#2, #3>(M series)/
<G118#2, #3>(T series)
.c

[Function] This signal informs the CNC of the gear stage currently selected.
w
[Output condition] For details of this signal, see descriptions on the T type gear selection
method in General.
w
S12–bit code signal

w
R01O to R12O
<F172#0 to F172#3>

[Function] This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the
CNC to code signals 0 to 4095.
[Output condition] The relationship between the spindle speed command value (calculated
by the CNC) and the value output by this signal is as shown below.
230
S12 bit code

signal
4095
om
0
16383 (Digital data) ← Serial spindle
0 10V (Analog voltage) ← Analog spindle
r.c
This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the
spindle control function of the CNC to data from 0 to 4095 (for both serial
and analog spindle control) and outputs the result. Note that the
conversion result is not the actual output value. (See Section 15.4.)
e
Other signals
Spindle speed function

nt
See Sections 9.1 and 15.4 for these signals.
ce
code signal
S11 to S28<F152>
(Output)
Spindle speed function
nc
strobe signal
SF<F150#2>(Output)
Spindle speed output See Section 15.4 for these signals.

.c
control signal by PMC

SIND<G125#7>(Input)
R01l to R12l
w
<G124#0 to G125#3>
(Input)
w
SSIN<G125#6>(Input)
SGN<G125#5>(Input)
w
231
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G103 SPC SPB SPA SPD (T series)
G103 SPC SPB SPA (M series)
G120 *SSTP SOR SAR
G123 GR2 GR1
G124 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
om
G125 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F149 ENB
F150 SF
r.c
F152 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11
F172 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O
e
F173 R12O R11O R10O R09O
Parameter
#7
nt #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
0003 GST (T series)
[Data type] Bit

GST The SOR signal is used for:
nc
0 : Spindle orientation
1 : Gear shift
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0003 PG2 PG1 (M series)
.c
0028 PG2 PG1 (T series)
[Data type] Bit

w
PG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder

Magnification PG2 PG1
1 0 0
w
Spindle speed
2 0 1 Magnification=
4 1 0 Number of position coder revolutions
w
8 1 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 G84S (M series)
[Data type] Bit

G84S Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74)
0 : Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)
1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the
spindle speed set in parameters 0540 and 0556).
232
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0013 TCW CWM ORCW
[Data type] Bit

ORCW Voltage polarity during spindle orientation
0 : Positive
1 : Negative
TCW, CWM Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is output
om
TCW CWM Voltage polarity
0 0 Both M03 and M04 positive
0 1 Both M03 and M04 negative
1 0 M03 positive, M04 negative
1 1 M03 negative, M04 positive
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0020 SFOUT (T series)
e
[Data type] Bit
SFOUT The SF signal is output:
nt
0 : When gears are switched
1 : Irrespective of whether gears are switched
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0029 SFOB (T series)
[Data type] Bit

nc
SFOB When an S code command is issued in constant surface speed control,

0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output.
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0035 LGCM (M series)
w
[Data type] Bit

LGCM Gear switching method
w
0 : Method A (Parameters 0541 and 0539 for the maximum spindle speed
at each gear are used for gear selection.)
1 : Method B (Parameters 0585 and 0586 for the spindle speed at the gear
w
switching point are used for gear selection.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0049 EVSF (M series)
[Data type] Bit

EVSF When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is
used, S codes and SF are:
0 : Not output for an S command.
1 : Output for an S command.
233
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0071 HISSC (T series)
[Data type] Bit

HISSC The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed
0 : 4 (Normally, set to 0.)
1: 1
om
0108 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during
spindle gear shift
[Data type] Byte

r.c
Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor
speed during gear shift.
When GST, #5 of parameter 0003, is set to 0, set the spindle speed during
spindle orientation in rpm.
e
When GST, #5 of parameter 0003, is set to 1, set the spindle motor speed
during spindle gear shift calculated from the following formula.
Set value =
nt
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
Maximum spindle motor speed
×4095 (For an analog spindle)
ce
0110 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal
[Data type] Byte

nc
[Unit of data] msec

Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the
checking of the spindle speed arrival signal.
.c
0516 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed
w
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.1 %
w

Set data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed.
w
[Adjustment method] (1) Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter.

(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed
is the maximum voltage (10 V).
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter
No.0516.
10 (V)
Set value= × 1000
Measured data (V)
234
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog
output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirm that the
output voltage is 10V.
NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.
0539 Compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the spindle speed (T series)
om
0577 Compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the spindle speed (M series)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Velo
[Valid data range] –1024 to+1024
r.c
Set compesation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the
spindle speed.
Set value =–8191 Offset voltage (V)/12.5
e
[Adjustment method] (1) Assign standard value 0 to the parameter.
(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed
nt
is 0.
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter
ce
No.0539 (T)/0577 (M).
–8191 × Offset voltage (V)
Set value=
12.5
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog
nc
output of the spindle speed is 0. Confirm that the output voltage is 0V.
NOTE
This parameter need not to be set for serial spindles.
.c
w
0540 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1

w

w
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear.
NOTE
These parameters are valid when a T type gear is selected.
235
0540 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping (M series)
0556 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping (M series)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
When method B is selected (G84S, #6 of parameter 0012, is set to 1) for
om
the tapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed when the
gears are switched.
Spindle motor speed
r.c
Max. speed (4095, 10V)
Spindle motor max.

clamp speed
(Parameter No.0542)
e
nt
ce
Spindle motor minimum
clamp speed
(Parameter No.0543) Spindle speed
nc
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 command

Max. Max. Max. (S command)
speed speed speed
Parameter Parameter Parameter
No.0541 No.0539 No.0555
.c
w
Gear 1–2 Gear 2–3

change point change point
parameter parameter
w
No.0540 No.0556
w
236
0542 Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor (M series)
[Data type] Word

Set the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor
Set value = ×4095
om
Spindle motor speed
r.c
Spindle motor max.
clamp speed
(Parameter No.0542)
e
Spindle motor minimum
nt
ce
clamp speed
(Parameter No.0543)
Spindle speed (S command)
nc
0543 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor (M series)
[Data type] Word

.c
Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.

Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
×4095
w
Set value =
w
w
237
0556 Maximum spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed.
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of
the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum
om
speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter.
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is
r.c
not clamped.
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed
is not clamped at the maximum speed.
e
nt
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the constant surface speed
control option is selected.
ce
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed,
regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is
specified.
nc
.c
w
w
w
238
0585 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 (M series)
0586 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 3 (M series)
[Data type] Word

For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears
are switched.
Spindle motor speed when the gears are switched
om
Set value = ×4095
Spindle motor speed
r.c
Spindle motor max. clamp speed Parameter No.0542
Speed at gear 2–3 change point Parameter No.0586
e
Parameter No.0585
Speed at gear 1–2 change point
nt
ce
Spindle motor minimum clamp Parameter No.0543
speed
Spindle speed
command
nc
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3

(S command)
max. max. max
speed speed speed
parameter parameter parameter
No.0541 No.0539 No.0555
.c
w
Gear 1–2 Gear 2–3

w
0613 PSANG2
w
PSANG2 Set data used for adjusting the gain of the second spindle.
The setting method is the same as that for the corresponding parameter for
the first spindle (parameter 0516).
0614 SPDLC2
SPDLC2 Set an offset compensation value for the spindle speed of the second
spindle.
239
0615 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the second spindle (T series)
0616 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the second spindle (T series)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Set maximum spindle speeds for the gears of the second spindle.
om
NOTE
These parameters are provided for multiple–spindle
control.
r.c
0617 PSANG3
PSANG3 Set the data used for adjusting the gain of the third spindle.
e
0618
nt
Offset–voltage compensation value of the analog output of the third–spindle speed (T series)
ce
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Velo
nc
Set a compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog spindle speed
output of the second spindle when multiple–spindle control is applied.
0619 G3MAX1
.c
0620 G3MAX2
w
G3MAX2, G3MAX1 Speeds of the first and second gears of the third spindle, respectively,
when 10 V is specified in the spindle speed command
w
[Unit of data] rpm

w
Caution
CAUTION
This section mentioned a spindle speed control that should
be prepared on the CNC side. But it is also necessary to
design the signals to the spindle control unit.
Consult the manual of the spindle control unit used and take
necessary actions on the spindle control unit.
240
9.4
CONSTANT
SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL
(FOR T SERIES ONLY)
General With the spindle serial output or analog output function, specifying the
surface speed (m/min or feet/min) directly in an S command makes it
possible to change the spindle output continuously so as to maintain a
om
constant surface speed at a programmed point. (For the rapid traverse
command, however, the surface speed for the end point is output at the
beginning of rapid traverse.)
r.c
Spindle speed N
e
r
nt Surface speed S=2πr·N

ce
Whether or not constant surface speed control is performed is selected by
G code.
G96: Constant surface speed control performed. S in the G96 mode is
nc
m/min or feet/min.
G97: Constant surface speed control not performed. S in the G97 mode
is rev/min.
.c
To perform constant surface speed control, the maximum spindle speed

for each gear select signal issued from the PMC side must be set by
parameter Nos.0540 – 0543.
w
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship
between the signal and gear number is :
w
GR1 GR2 Gear number

0 0 1
w
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 4
241
Example of Spindle Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed
Analog Output with the output 10 V is 1000 rpm for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000
rpm for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the parameter nos.
0540, 0541, respectively. In this case, the spindle output has the linear
relationship shown below:
N
2000rpm G2
When gear
2 selected
om
G1
1000rpm When gear
1 selected
600rpm
Spindle output
r.c
(Volt)
0 V2 V1 10
Here, S = 60 m/min is given as the surface speed; if the position of the
e
present X-axis cutter is 16 mm from the center, the spindle speed N
becomes 600 rpm (S = 2πr N). Therefore, V1 (for G1) or V2 (for G2) is
nt
calculated inside the CNC and output to the machine side.
V1: 6(V)
V2: 3(V)
The value of output voltage V is calculated automatically from the
ce
following equations:
(i) G96
nc
10S
V=
2πrR
R: Spindle speed (rpm) at 10V output voltage (that is , spindle speed set
.c
by parameter Nos.0540 to 0543)

S: Surface speed (m/min) specified by S command
r: Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
w
(ii)G97
w
10N
V=
R
w
R: Spindle speed at 10V output voltage (rpm)

N: Spindle speed given by S command (rpm)
242
Spindle Serial Output The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data.
Therefore assume the following relation for calculation:
Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output
(digital data) 4095.
The above calculation becomes as follows:
The value of Spindle output D:
(i) G96
4095S
D=
2πrR
om
R: Spindle speed (rpm) at maximum spindle motor speed (that is , spindle
speed set by parameter Nos.0540 to 0543)
S: Surface speed (m/min) specified by S
r: Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
r.c
(ii) G97
4095N
D=
R
R: Spindle speed at maximum spindle motor speed (rpm)
e
N: Spindle speed given by S command (rpm)
Signal
nt
ce
Gear selection signal Refer to 9.3 “Spindle Control”.
(Input)
GR2, GR1<G118#3, #2>
nc
(T series)
Parameter
.c

w

w
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
w
0551 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
The spindle speed in constant surface speed control is clamped to the
speed given by parameter.
243
0556 Maximum spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed.
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle
speed is specified, or the spindle speed exceeds the maximum speed
om
because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the constant surface speed
r.c
control option is selected.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed,
regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is
specified.
e
Caution
nt
ce
CAUTION
1 If the spindle speed corresponding to the calculated surface
speed exceeds the speed specified in the spindle speed
clamp command (G50S_ for T series) during the G96 mode,
nc
the actual spindle speed is clamped at the value specified

in the spindle speed clamp command.
If the specified spindle speed is lower than the value
specified in parameter No.0551, the actual spindle speed is
.c
clamped at the specified speed.

w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.9.3 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

OPERATOR’S MANUAL CONTROL (G96, G97)
(B–62544EN)
w
244
9.5
RIGID TAPPING
(FOR M SERIES ONLY)
9.5.1 In a tapping cycle (G84/G74), synchronous control is applied to the

General tapping operation of a tapping axis and the operation of the spindle.
This capability eliminates the need to use a tool such as a float tapper, thus
enabling higher–speed, higher–precision tapping.
om
Whether a tapping cycle is an ordinary tapping cycle or rigid tapping cycle
is determined by the miscellaneous function code for rigid tapping M29.
(A different M code can be used by setting the parameters accordingly, but
M29 is used in the description given here.)
By setting the parameters, G codes for tapping cycles can be changed to
r.c
G codes for rigid tapping only. In this case, the CNC specifies M29
internally.
To perform rigid tapping, the following must be added to the ordinary
connections:
e
· Connection of a position coder to the spindles (described in 9.5.2)
· Addition of a sequence to the PMC (described in 9.5.6 and 9.5.7)
nt· Setting of related parameters (described in 9.5.8)
CAUTION
ce
1 The description given in this section covers up to the fourth
axis.
2 When both the CT3G (bit 1 of parameter 0077) and the
VALT (bit 6 of parameter 0037) are set to 1, the maximum
nc
spindle speed for the third gear is set in parameter 0617.
The descriptions given in this section are based on the explanation given
in Section 9.3. Refer to Section 9.3 as necessary.
.c
Rigid tapping of M series The tapping cycle G84 and the reverse tapping cycle G74 can be used to
w
specify M series rigid tapping.

A tapping axis can be arbitrarily selected from the basic axes X, Y, and
Z, as well as axes parallel to the basic axes, by setting the corresponding
w
parameters accordingly (bit 6 (FXY) of parameter No.0057).

The spindle operations of G84 and G74 are reversed with respect to each
w
other.
The first spindle allows rigid tapping, even if the spindle is an analog or
serial spindle.
245
9.5.2 As shown in the figure below a gear can be inserted between the spindle
Connection Among and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder.
Spindle, Spindle Motor,
and Position Coder
Spindle control
om
Error Spindle amplifier Spindle motor
counter
Gear ratio n:m
r.c
4 Position Gear ratio q:p Spindle
coder
e
1024 p/rev
(The 512 pulses/rev position coder is incorporated into some

nt
spindle motors. When the serial spindle is used, the system
carries out conversion from 512 pulses/rev to 1024 pulses/rev.)
ce
(1) Gear between spindle Up to three gear stages can be provided between the spindle and the
and spindle motor spindle motor. The gear ratio is arbitrary. The spindle move distance per
spindle motor rotation is different, based on the gear ratio. The speed
command to the spindle motor must be adjusted. See (2), below, for addi-
nc
tional information regarding a spindle motor incorporating a position

coder.
(2) Gear between spindle The position coder is used to detect the position of the spindle.
.c
and position coder The gear ratio for the spindle and position coder is specified in the parame-
ter sets No.0663 to No.0668, or parameter set PSG1 and PSG2
No.0028#6, #7. Which parameter set to use is specified by parameter
w
VALPC No.0063#3.
⋅ Arbitrary gear ratio This is used if the gear ratio for the spindle motor and position coder
w
(VALPC=1) (built-in or separate) is not 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, or 1:8, set VALPC to 1 and set
the gear ratio using parameter No.0663 to 0668.
w
When position coder is mounted on a spindle, the gear ratio for the spindle
motor and position coder cannot be changed by shifting the spindle motor
and spindle gears. Parameters No.0663 to 0665 must all specify the same
value for the teeth of the individual spindle gears. Parameters No.0666 to
0668 must all specify the same value for the teeth of individual position
coder gears.
The 1024 or 512 pulses/rev position coder is built into the spindle motor.
For the 512 pulses/rev version, specify double the number of teeth on each
gear for the position coder. (Double the number of teeth need not be
specified for the serial spindle.)
246
The CNC allows up to three stages, regardless of which gear selection

method has been selected. (Parameter Nos.0663 and 0668 cannot be
used.)
Example)
Built–in position coder

Spindle
motor
om
r.c
1st gear set 30 : 70
2nd gear set 50 : 50
3rd gear set 70 : 30
e
nt
Parame- 512p/rev
P
Set value
ter No. Position

1024p/
rev
Position
M
Meaning
i
ce
coder
coder
0663 70 Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the
spindle side
0664 50 Number of teeth of the 2nd gear for the
nc
spindle side
0665 30 Number of teeth of the 3rd gear for the
spindle side
0666 60 Note) 30 Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the
.c
position coder side

0667 100 Note) 50 Number of teeth of the 2nd gear for the
position coder side
w
0667 140 Note) 70 Number of teeth of the 3rd gear for the
position coder side
w
NOTE
Double value setting is not required for serial spindle.
w
247
S Gear ratio is 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using parameters
1:8 (VALPC=0) PSG1 and PSG2 (Nos.0027#6, #7). This applies if the position coder is
mounted in a spindle or built into a spindle motor when only one stage
gear is provided.
Parameter Gear ratio
Position D
Detection
i unit
i
PG2 PG1 Spindle
coder
0 0 1 1 360/4096=0.08789 deg
0 1 1 2 360/4096 2=0.17578 deg
om
1 0 1 4 360/4096 4=0.35156 deg
1 1 1 8 360/4096 8=0.70313 deg
The spindle motor building in the 512 pulses/rev position coder uses the
values set forth in the following table. A serial spindle does not require
double-value setting; use the same values as for the spindle motor
r.c
building in the 1024 pulses/rev position coder.
Gear ratio Parameter Gear ratio
Detection
of spindle
Spindle unit
B il i
Built–in Spindle PG2 PG1 to position
(deg)
e
position motor coder
coder 1 1 0 1 1:2 0.17578
512p/rev
nt 2
4
1
1
1
1
0
0
1:4
1:8
0.35156
0.70313
ce
(3) Rigid tapping and The CNC determines whether gears need changing using the gear change
machines with specification mentioned in section 9.3. If the gears need to be changed,
multiple gears the CNC generates the S function code read signal SF (F150#2) and gear
selection signals GR1O, GR2O, and GR3O (F152#0-#2) to notify the
nc
PMC. Change gears using the PMC, based on these signals.

Using the PMC, determine whether gears need changing, and make the
change if needed. Input gear selection signals GR1 and GR2 <G123#2,
#1>, and notify the CNC of them.
.c
To perform rigid tapping with the serial spindle, enter the clutch/gear
selection signals CTH1 and CTH2 (G229#3,#2) from the PMC. Notify
the serial spindle control unit of these signals via the CNC, irrespective
w
of the gear selection method.

Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from that
for gear changes during normal machining. As described above, changing
w
gears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in section

9.3.
Regardless of the option’s selection, if the range in which the spindle
w
speed specified by the S function code does not correspond to the

currently selected gear, the gears are changed.
The following tables list the spindle speed ranges for each gear during
normal machining (assuming no machine restrictions) and rigid tapping:
248
Spindle speed range (normal machining)

Gear
Lower limit Upper limit
Low– 1 revolution Maximum low–speed gear speed =
speed Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear Low–speed gear ratio
Medium Maximum low–speed Maximum medium–speed gear speed =
speed gear speed Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear + 1 revolution Medium speed gear ratio
High– Maximum medium– Maximum high–speed gear speed =
speed speed gear speed
om
Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear +1 revolution High–speed gear ratio
NOTE
The table shows sample spindle speed ranges for a spindle
r.c
having three gears. In the table, L% is a spindle motor
protection constant (up to 100), provided to calculate the
maximum speed. Different L values can be specified for
individual gears if gear change method B is selected for M
type gear selection (when the LGCM (bit 6 of parameter
e
0035) is set to 1).
nt
Gear
Spindle speed range (during rigid tapping)
Lower limit Upper limit
ce
Low– 1 revolution Maximum low–speed gear speed
speed Basic spindle motor speed +α
gear =
Low–speed gear ratio
nc
Medium Maximum low–speed Maximum medium–speed gear speed

speed gear speed Basic spindle motor speed +α
gear + 1 revolution =
Medium–speed gear ratio
.c
High– Maximum medium– Maximum high–speed gear speed

speed speed gear speed Basic spindle motor speed +α
gear +1 revolution =
High–speed gear ratio
w
NOTE
w
This table show an example of three gears. For the basic

spindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor description
manual. “+α” means that the spindle motor speed may
w
slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed.
249
Use gear change method B (bit 6 (G84S) of parameter No.0012 = 1) in

the tapping cycle to specify the following:
The table above shows the maximum low-speed gear speed during rigid
tapping for low-/medium-speed gear change position D (parameter
No.0540).
The table above shows the maximum medium-speed gear speed during
rigid tapping for medium-/high-speed gear change position E (parameter
No.0556).
See Section 9.3, “Spindle Control” for details of the spindle gear change
specifications.
om
The loop gain can be specified for each gear. Specify “0” for parameter
No.0615 and specify loop gains for each gear for parameter Nos.0669 to
0671. Unless “0” is specified for parameter No.0615, the loop gains for
each gear are disabled, and the loop gain common to all gears, the value
of parameter No.0615, is enabled.
r.c
Specify the time constant and the maximum spindle speed for each gear.
Use parameters Nos.0692, 0693, and 0613 to specify the time constant.
Use parameters Nos.0694, 0695, and 0617 to specify the maximum
spindle speed.
e
Set the maximum spindle speed to parameter No.0617, irrespective of the
number of gear stages used.
nt
Setting bit 5 (RGCTO) of parameter No.0035 to “1” enables setting of the
extraction time constant for each gear set. Specify the extraction time
constant for each gear in parameter Nos.0400 to 0402.
If bit 3 (VSLRC) of parameter No.0063 is set to “1”, the gear ratio for the
ce
spindle and position coder can be set to anywhere between 1:32767 and
32767:1 in one-increment units for three gear sets. However 1:8 to 8:1
is the recommended value.
nc
9.5.3
Rigid Tapping
.c
Specification
D Feed rate In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F; the
spindle speed is S 360(deg/min). Override is invalid for both of them.
w
An override of up to 200% can be applied to withdrawal operations by

setting bit 4 (RGDOV) of parameter No.0063 to “1”, and setting an
w
appropriate override value in parameter No.0258. The time constant for

withdrawal operations can be modified by bit 5 (RGCTO) of parameter
No.0035; when it is set to “1”, the values in parameter Nos.0400 to 0402
w
are used as the time constant for withdrawal.

D Acceleration and Linear acceleration/deceleration is valid for rigid tapping.
deceleration
D Override Override is invalid for rigid tapping. Fixed override can be applied to
withdrawal operations by setting bit 4 (RGDOV) of parameter No.0063
or parameter No.0258.
D Dry run Dry run is valid for G84 (G74). When the dry run is applied to the tapping
axis speed of G84 (G74), tapping is performed. The spindle speed will
match the dry run speed.
250
D Machine lock Machine lock is valid for G84 (G74).

When G84 (G74) is executed with the machine locked, however the
tapping axis and the spindle do not move.
D Reset When the reset operation is performed during rigid tapping, the mode is
reset. The spindle motor goes to the ordinary mode, but G84 (G74) mode
is not reset.
D Feed hold, interlock, and The feed hold, interlock, and single block functions are effective for G84
single block (G74).
The feed hold and single block functions in rigid tapping mode can be
om
nullified by setting bit 2 (RGMFH) of parameter No.0388 to “1”.
As with the machine lock signal, the feed hold and single block functions
are also effective for the spindle indirectly, through tapping axis
operations.
D Operation mode G84 (G74) can be executed only in the AUTO and MDI modes.
r.c
D Manual feed Rigid tapping cannot be performed in the manual feed mode.
D Backlash compensation In rigid tapping mode, the backlash is compensated for the lost motion at
forward and reverse spindle rotations. Set it using parameter No.0255.
e
The backlash compensation is normally made for the tapping axis.
9.5.4
nt
For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays information
ce
Display Data on the related to rigid tapping.
Diagnosis Screen The following information items are displayed, when rigid tapping is
executed:
· Spindle position deviation → Diagnosis No.627
nc
· Number of command pulses distributed to the spindle

(momentary value) → Diagnosis No.628
· Cumulative number of command pulses distributed to the spindle
.c
→ Diagnosis No.799
⋅ Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis
w
⋅ Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis

w
Diagnosis No.696 is cleared to “0” when rigid tapping mode is set or

canceled, and diagnosis No.697 is cleared to “0” in the positioning of the
w
rigid tapping cycle.

The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis.
251
Z–axis
error
Zc
Ze
1 1
om
Speed
Zc = × × 102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit
Ze = Z–axis error counts (measured value)
r.c
Spindle
error
Sc
e
Se
Speed
nt
360 1 1
× × 102 (Theoretical value)
ce
Sc =
60 Gain Detection unit
Se = Spindle error counts (measured value)

nc
Speed : mm/min or inch/min

Gain : 0.01 s-1
Detection unit :mm, inch, or deg
Speed : rpm
.c
Ze
DZ= 100 [%]
w
Zc
The error difference between the spindle and Z axis

Se can be obtained by DS–DZ. This value is sampled
DS=
w
100 [%] at intervals of 64 ms.

Sc
w
252
Diagnosis screen
D Spindle position
deviation 0627 SPINDLE MOTION ERROR
Spindle position deviation during rigid tapping

[Data type] Word
[Unit] Pulse
D Number of pulses
om
distributed to the spindle
0628 SPINDLE MOTION PULSE
Number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid tapping

[Data type] Word
r.c
[Unit] Pulse
D Error difference between
the spindle and tapping
axis (momentary value)
e
0696 RIGID ERROR
nt
Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis during
rigid tapping (signed)
[Data type] Word
ce
[Unit] %
D Error difference between
the spindle and tapping
nc
axis (maximum)
0697 RIGID ERROR(MAX)
Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis during
.c
rigid tapping (absolute value)

[Data type] Word
w
[Unit] %
D Cumulative number of
pulses distributed to the
w
spindle during rigid

tapping
w
0799 SPINDLE PULSE(SUM)
Cumulative number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid

tapping
[Unit] Pulse
253
9.5.5
Command Format Gjj X__ Y__ Z__ R__ P__ F__ K__ ;
Number of repeats
Cutting feedrate
Dwell time at the bottom face of a
tapped hole and upon R point return
Specifies the position of an R point
Specifies the position of the bottom face of a tapped hole
om
Specifies a tapping position.
G84 Tapping cycle
G74 Counter tapping cycle
The rigid tapping mode can be specified by using any of three methods:
D Specification of M29S**** before specifying a tapping cycle
r.c
D Specification of M29S****in the same block
D Enabling rigid tapping to be performed without specifying M29S****
e
When using the third method, specify S**** either before or in a block
containing G84 (G74).
nt
Thus, the spindle stops, after which the tapping cycle specified next is
placed in rigid tapping mode.
ce
Rigid tapping mode can be canceled by G80;. Note, however, that a G
code for another canned cycle, or a group 01 G code can also cancel rigid
tapping mode.
nc
When rigid tapping is terminated by a command issued to cancel rigid

tapping mode, the spindle stops. (Output to the spindle is equivalent to
the specification of S0.)
A reset (by means of the RESET button or an external reset) can also
.c
cancel rigid tapping mode. Note, however, that canned cycle mode is not
canceled by a reset.
w
D Specifying M29 before a block containing G84 (G74)

M29 S****;
GjjX__Y__Z__R__P__F__K__ ;
w
X__Y__;
Rigid
X__Y__; tapping
w
· mode
·
G80;
D Specifying M29 and G84 (G74) in the same block
GjjX__Y__Z__R__P__F__K__M29****;
X__Y__;
Rigid
X__Y__;
tapping
· mode
·
G80;
254
D Converting G84 (G74) to a G code for rigid tapping (by setting bit 3
(G84 RGD) of parameter No.0076 to 1)
GjjX__Y__Z__R_P_F_K_S**** ;
X__Y__;
Rigid
X__Y__; tapping
· mode
·
G80;
Notes on Command
om
NOTE
1 In feed per minute mode, F_/S**** determines a thread
lead.
2 S**** must specify a value that does not exceed the value
r.c
set in the maximum spindle speed parameter (No.617) for
the gear to be used. Otherwise, P/S alarm No. 200 is issued
in a block containing G84 (G74).
3 F_ must specify a value that does not exceed the maximum
e
cutting feedrate. When 0 is specified, P/S alarm No. 201 is
issued.
nt
4 Between M29 and G84 (G74), S and a command for
movement along an axis must not be specified. Further,
M29 must not be specified in a tapping cycle. Otherwise,
P/S alarm Nos. 203 and 204 are issued, respectively.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
255
G84⋅( Tapping cycle)

G84 (G98 mode) G84 (G99 mode)
Spindle Spindle
stop stop
Initial point
Motion 1
om
Motion 2 Motion 6
r.c
Spindle CW R point Spindle CW R point
Spindle Spindle
stop stop
e
Motion 3 Motion 5
nt Spindle CCW Spindle CCW

ce
Z point
P P
Spindle stop Spindle stop
Motion 4
nc
Rapid traverse
Z (X) axis feed
P Dwell
.c
CAUTION
w
During cutting feed along the Z–axis (X–axis), the feedrate override is assumed to be 100%.
The spindle speed override is also assumed to be 100%. For a retract motion (motion 5), a fixed
override of up to 200% can be applied by specifying bit 4 (RGDOV) of parameter No.0063 and
w
parameter No.0258 (RGOVR).

w
G74 (Counter tapping The spindle rotation is inverted in steps 3 and 5 of a G84 cycle.
cycle)
256
9.5.6
Signal
9.5.6.1
Signals for the rigid
tapping function
Rigid tapping signal
om
RGTPN<G123#1>
[Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) is
specified, the PMC enters rigid tapping mode, then turns on this signal
to notify the CNC.
r.c
1 : The PMC enters in rigid tapping mode.
0 : The PMC does not enter rigid tapping mode.
For an explanation of placing the PMC in rigid tapping mode, see the
description of the interface with the PMC, given later.
e
This signal posts whether the PMC has entered rigid tapping mode. If this
signal is not set to 1, even when M29 is specified, a P/S alarm is issued in a
nt
G84 (G74) block.
ce
Spindle rotation
direction signals
RGSPM, RGSPP
<F165#1, #0>
nc
(M series only)
[Function] During rigid tapping, these signals notify the PMC of whether the spindle
is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.
.c
During rigid tapping, the spindle is:

RGSPP 1 : Rotating in the forward direction (CW).
w
0 : Not rotating in the forward direction.

RGSPM 1 : Rotating in the reverse direction (CCW).
0 : Not rotating in the reverse direction.
w
[Output condition] These signals are output when the spindle is rotating in rigid tapping
mode. This means that, even in rigid tapping mode, these signals are not
output, for example, when the spindle is being positioned to a hole
w
position, or a dwell operation is in progress at the bottom of a hole or at

an R point.
These signals are not output in the feed hold state or single block stop
state. When the spindle is placed in the interlock stop state, machine lock
state, or Z–axis ignore state, however, the spindle is not regarded as
having stopped; these signals are output.
These signals are valid only in rigid tapping mode. In normal spindle
control, these signals are not output; both RGSPP and RGSPM are set to
“0”.
257
9.5.6.2
Signals related to S code
output
Spindle enable signal

ENB <F149#4>
[Function] These signals post whether the spindle output is 0. In rigid tapping mode,
om
these signals are used to cancel rigid tapping in a PMC sequence
associated with rigid tapping.
For details, see the explanation of the interface with the PMC, given later.
r.c
Spindle–speed function
code signals
(BCD output)
S11 to S58
e
<F185#0 to F187#3>
Spindle–speed function
strobe signal
SF<F150#2>
nt
ce
[Function] These signals send S codes specified for the CNC, in binary format, to the
PMC.
nc
[Output condition] When an S code is specified, the specified value is output, in BCD format,
with the signals. Upon the completion of output, the SF signal is set to
“1”.
Before rigid tapping can be performed, however, parameter setting is
.c
required to output these signals, as described below.

SF output depends on bit 7 (SFOUT) of parameter No.0020.
w
In rigid tapping, when SF is to be used by the PMC to read an S code

output signal for gear switching or output switching, set the above
parameters as required.
w
NOTE
w
The timing charts, given later, give examples of gear

switching by setting the parameters as follows:
M series: SFOUT = 0, SFOB = 0
258
9.5.6.3
Signals related to gear
switching
Gear selection signals

(output)
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
<F152#0, #1, #2>
(M series only)
om
[Operation] The signals post, to the PMC, information about a spindle gear to be used,
according to the value of S**** specified at the execution of G84 (G74).
As gear switching becomes necessary, the states of the signals change
together with the SF signal.
r.c
The PMC should perform gear switching according to the information
posted by the signals.
Reference information: The table below indicates the relationship
between the output signals and gear selection.
e
GR3O GR2O GR1O
1st (low) speed gear × × f
nt
2nd (medium) speed gear
3rd (high) speed gear f
× f
×
×
×
ce
9.5.6.4
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc
G123 RGTPN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F149 ENB
.c
F150 SF
F152 GR3O GR2O GR1O (M series)

w
F165 RGSPM RGSPP (M series)

w
9.5.6.5 The following describes some notes in designing the interface with the
Notes on interface with PMC.
w
the PMC
Rigid tapping mode The PMC must manage rigid tapping mode as follows: rigid tapping
management and ENB mode is set using M29, and is canceled upon the issue of a reset or at the
falling edge of the spindle enable signal ENB in rigid tapping mode. ENB
is used during rigid tapping in this way, so the spindle stop signal *SSTP
must not be set to “0”.
However, *SSTP and SOR may be used for gear switching. To do so,
ensure that the PMC does not cancel rigid tapping mode on a falling edge
of ENB while *SSTP is “0”.
259
Controlling spindle When the SIND signal is set to “1”, spindle output is controlled by the
output by the PMC signals (SSIN, SGN, R1I to R12I) output from the PMC.
At this time, the effect of ENB is as described above. In addition, when
rigid tapping mode is canceled in a block containing G80;, the momentary
rotation of the spindle, caused by a delay in the PMC processing, can
result. Accordingly, the PMC’s control over spindle output must be
disabled in rigid tapping mode by setting SIND to “0”.
Gear switching timing In general, a block containing M29 (miscellaneous function for
preparation for rigid tapping) specifies S****, S**** being output when
om
a block containing G84 (G74) is executed. This means that gear switching
is performed in the block specifying G84 (G74).
When rigid tapping mode M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) and S****
r.c
is specified specify rigid tapping mode. When M29 is accepted by the PMC, the
following processing must be performed:
D Stop the spindle when it is rotating.
D Check that the spindle has stopped completely, then set the rigid
e
tapping signal RGTPN<G123#1> to on.
D Activate the spindle motor. Activate the motor so that a positive speed
nt
command rotates the spindle in the forward direction (CCW when
viewed from the – side of the tapping axis).
D Return FIN at least 250 ms after activation.
ce
NOTE
The condition “at least 250 ms after activation” results from
there being no way of checking the completion of spindle
nc
motor activation. Therefore, this wait period serves as an

alternative. The time required for activation to be completed
varies with the spindle motor and amplifier. Therefore, this
value of 250 ms is given as a guideline only.
.c
In an M29 block, S**** is not executed, merely being read in. S**** is
w
executed in a G84 block. Spindle output is equivalent to the specification

of S0.
The timing chart is shown in the chart indicating the execution of G84
w
(G74).
w
Execution of G84 (G74) When M29S****; is specified, S**** is read in, spindle output being
equivalent to the specification of S0;. S**** is output when G84 (G74)
is executed.
D When M–type gear When using a machine that features multiple gear stages for use with the
selection is used spindle motor and spindle, and S**** is outside the previously selected
gear range, the spindle–speed function strobe signal SF <F150#2> and
gear selection signals (output) GR3O, GR2O, GR1O <F152#2, #1, #0>
are output to the PMC.
At this time, perform gear switching at the PMC.
260
9.5.7 The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method
Timing Charts for Rigid used to specify rigid tapping mode and whether to perform gear
switching.
Tapping Specification
From the table, find the appropriate timing chart (Fig.9.5.7.1 (a) to
Fig.9.5.7.3 (b)) and apply the information it contains as necessary.
Specification method
Gear
selection
om
Gear
G By parameter setting,
method M29 and G84 (G74) are
switching M29 is specified before G84 (G74) is specified as
M–type specified in the same
G84 (G74). a G code for rigid
T–type block.
tapping.
Not performed Fig.9.5.7.1 (a) Fig.9.5.7.2 (a) Fig.9.5.7.3 (a)

M–type
r.c
Performed Fig.9.5.7.1 (b) Fig.9.5.7.2 (b) Fig.9.5.7.3 (b)
NOTE
For more information about the M/T type gear selection
e
method, see Section 9.3 SPINDLE CONTROL. Note the
following:
nt
M–type only
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
261
9.5.7.1
When M29 is specified before G84 (G74)
M type gear selection method
M29
First block Second block
om
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the second
block
r.c
Spindle
output
e
SF
GR1O nt
ce
GR2O
GR3O
nc
*SSTP
.c
SOR
w
RGTAP
250ms
or
RGTPN
or more
w
FIN
Rotation
w
Excitation
SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.5.7.1 (a) Gear is not changed
262
M29
G84 (G74)
ENB
om
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle *Gear
output change
motion
r.c
SF
GR1O
e
GR2O
GR3O
nt
ce
*SSTP
nc
SOR
RGTAP
.c
or 250ms
RGTPN
or more
FIN
w
Rotation
w
Gear change
Excitation SFR
w
Position loop
Note This time chart show an example where the gear has shifted from low to middle gear. One of the gear select
signals (GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from
“0” to “1”. This changes the gear.
Fig. 9.5.7.1 (b) When gear change is performed (From low to middle gear)
263
9.5.7.2
M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block
M type gear selection
M29
om
G84 (G74)
ENB
r.c
To be masked to the second block
Spindle
output
e
SF
GR1O
nt
ce
GR2O
nc
GR3O
*SSTP
.c
SOR
w
RGTAP 250ms
or
w
RGTPN
or more
FIN
w
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 9.5.7.2 (a) When gear–change is not performed
264
M29
G84 (G74)
ENB
om
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
r.c
SF
GR1O
e
GR2O
GR3O
nt
ce
*SSTP
nc
SOR
RGTAP
.c
or 250ms
RGTPN
or more
FIN
w
Rotation
w
Gear change
Excitation SFR
w
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from middle high gear. One of the gear select
signals (GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has tuned
from “0” to “1”. This changes the gear.
Fig. 9.5.7.2 (b) When gear–change is performed (middle to high)
265
9.5.7.3
Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters
M type gear selection
M29
om
G84 (G74) M29 is commanded

internally.
ENB
To be masked to the
r.c
second block
Spindle
output
e
SF
GR1O
nt
ce
GR2O
nc
GR3O
*SSTP
.c
SOR
w
RGTAP 250ms
or
w
RGTPN
or more
FIN
w
Rotation
Excitaiton SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.5.7.3 (a) When gear–change is not performed
266
M29
First block Second blcok
G84 (G74) M29 is commanded

internally.
ENB
om
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
r.c
SF
GR1O
e
GR2O
GR3O
nt
ce
*SSTP
nc
SOR
RGTAP
.c
250ms
or
RGTPN
or more
w
FIN
Rotation
w
Gear change
Excitation SFR
w
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from high to low gear. One of the gear select
signals (GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from
“0” to “1”. This changes the gear.
Fig. 9.5.7.3 (b) When gear change is performed (high to low gear)
267
9.5.7.4 When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such
Timing to cancel rigid as G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued.
tapping mode The spindle output is produced in the same way as executing S0. Cancel
the PMC rigid tapping mode at the falling edge of the ENB signal by
de-energizing the spindle; then turn off the rigid tapping mode signal. The
system goes to the next block after confirming that the signal is off.
When gear change is performed using *SSTP and SOR, the ENB signal
can be either “1” or “0”. Do not cancel the PMC’s rigid tapping mode at
the falling edge of the ENB signal under these circumstances. The
om
position loop is also canceled.
When the CNC is reset, the PMC’s rigid tapping mode must be canceled.
When RGTPE (parameter No.0040#2) is “1”, the system goes directly to
the next block without checking that the rigid tapping signal is “0”. Set
r.c
CRG to “1” for systems in which the rigid tapping signal is always “1”.
G80
(or G code of group 01)
e
ENB (or ENB2)
nt
ce
Spindle output
RGTAP
nc
or
RGTPN
Rotation
.c
Excitation
w
Position loop
w
w
268
WARNING
1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code,
such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code is
executed at the same time the ENB signal is turned to “0”.
Therefore, if a block contains an M code for controlling the
spindle, an error may occur during processing in the PMC.
2 When RGTPE (Parameter No.0040#2) is 1, if the next block
contains an M code for controlling the spindle, an error may
occur during processing in the PMC, when:
⋅ Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing G80
om
⋅ Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing a Group 01 G
code , such as G00 or G01
r.c
9.5.8
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 G84S (M series)
e
[Data type] Bit
nt
G84S Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84, G74)
0 : Method A (Same as normal gear switching method)
1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the
ce
spindle speed set in parameters 0540 and 0556)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0020 SFOUT (M series)
nc
[Data type] Bit

.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0028 PSG2 PSG1
[Data type] Bit

w
PSG2, PSG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder

w
Magnification PSG2 PSG1
1 0 0 Magnification =
2 0 1 Number of spindle revolutions
4 1 0 Number of position coder revolutions
8 1 1
269
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0035 RGCTO
[Data type] Bit

RGCTO Cutting time constant in rigid tapping
0 : Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter
Nos.0613, 0692, and 0693)
1 : Not use a same parameter during cutting and extraction
Parameter Nos.0613, 0692, and 0693: Time constant during cutting
om
Parameter Nos.0400 to 0402: Time constant during extraction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0040 RGTPE
r.c
[Data type] Bit
RGTPE Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, G01
group G code, reset, etc.)
0 : Canceled after rigid mode signal RGTAP is set to 0.
e
1 : Canceled before rigid mode signal RGTAP is set to 0.
0057
#7 nt#6
FXY
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit

ce
FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:
0 : Always the Z–axis
1 : The axis selected by the program
nc
NOTE
For the M series, this parameter enables a basic axis (X, Y,
or Z) perpendicular to the plane selected in the program and
.c
its parallel axes to be used as the tapping axis for rigid

tapping.
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0063 RGDOV VSLPC
[Data type] Bit

w
VSLPC Any gear ratio between spindle and position coder in rigid tapping
0 : Not used (The gear ratio is set in bits 6 and 7 of parameter No.0028.)
1 : Used (The gear ratio is set by parameters Nos.0663 through 0668.)
RGDOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping
0 : Invalidated
1 : Validated (The override value is set in parameter No.0258.)
270
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0076 G84RGD
[Data type] Bit

G84RGD Method for specifying rigid tapping
0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the
issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No.0256).
1 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used. (G84
cannot be used as a G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be used
om
for the reverse tapping cycle.)
0255 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping
[Data type] Byte
r.c
These parameters set the spindle backlash in rigid tapping.
e
0256 Rigid tapping mode specification M code
[Data type] Byte

nt
ce
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.
NOTE
nc
The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when “0” is set.

.c
0258 Override value during rigid tapping extraction
[Data type] Byte

w
[Unit of data] 10 %
w
The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction.
NOTE
w
The override value is valid when RGDOV in parameter

No.0063#4 is “1”.
271
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0388 SIG RGORT RGMFH PCTPH
[Data type] Bit

PCTPH Rigid tapping
0 : Used as a high–speed peck tapping cycle
1 : Not used as a high–speed peck tapping cycle
RGORT When rigid tapping is started:
0 : Spindle orientation is not performed.
om
1 : Spindle orientation is performed.
NOTE
These parameters can be used only for a serial spindle.
The spindle orientation is a zero return in the serial spindle
r.c
servo mode.
RGMFH Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping
e
0 : Invalidated
1 : Validated
nt
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
ce
SIG When gears are changed for rigid tapping, the use of SIND <G124 and
G125> is
nc
0 : Not permitted.
1 : Permitted.
.c
0400 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during extraction in rigid tapping

(First gear)

w
(Second gear)

(Third gear)
w
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
w

These parameters set the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
a spindle and tapping axis for every gear during extraction in rigid
tapping.
NOTE
The time constant is valid when RGTO, #5 of parameter
No.0035, is “1”.
272
0403 Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle
[Data type] Word

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

This parameter sets the return or clearance in the peck tapping cycle.
om
When bit 0 (PCTPH) in parameter No.0388 When bit 0 (PCTPH) in parameter No.0388
is 0 (High–speed peck tapping cycle) is 1 (Peck tapping cycle)
q : Cutting q : Cutting
r.c
d : Return d : Clearance
ÄÄ R
ÄÄ R
ÄÄ ÄÄ
q point q point
ÄÄ ÄÄ
d d
e
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
q
nt d
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
q
d
ÄÄ
q q
Z Z
ce
point point
nc
.c
w
w
w
273
0540 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping
0556 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
When method B is selected (G84S, #6 of parameter 0012, is set to 1) for
om
the tapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed when the
gears are switched.
Spindle motor speed
r.c
Max. output (4095, 10V)
Spindle motor
max. clamp speed
(Parameter No.0542)
e
nt
ce
Spindle motor
min. clamp speed
(Parameter No.0543) Spindle speed
command
nc
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed (S command)

at gear1 at gear2 at gear3
parameter parameter parameter
No.0541 No.0539 No.0555
.c
w
Speed at gear 1–2 Speed at gear 2–3

Parameter Parameter
No.0540 No.0556
w
w
274
0615 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
(Common in each gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.01 s–1
This parameter sets the position control loop gain of a spindle and tapping
axis in rigid tapping.
om
The loop gain setting significantly influences the screw precision.
Perform a cutting test to adjust the loop gain and its multiplier to the
optimum values.
NOTE
To change the loop gain for every gear, set this parameter
r.c
value to “0” and set the loop gain for every gear to parameter
Nos.0669 to 0671. If this parameter value is not “0”, the loop
gain for every gear is invalidated. This parameter then
becomes a loop gain that is used in common for all gears.
e
0616
nt
Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1)
ce
0624 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 2)
0625 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 3)
[Data type] Word

nc

Set the spindle loop gain multipliers for gears 1 to 3 in the rigid tapping
mode. The thread precision depends on the multipliers. Find the most
appropriate multipliers and loop gain by conducting the cutting test.
.c
NOTE
These parameters are used for analog spindles.
w
These parameters are used for analog spindles.

w
E
Loop gain multiplier = 2048 α 1000
L
where;
w
E: Voltage in the velocity command at 1000 rpm

L: Rotation angle of the spindle per one rotation of the spindle motor
: Unit used for the detection
275
Example)
When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are

connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows:
SPINDLE
MOTOR E = 1.667 (V)
Position (A motor speed of 6000 rpm corresponds to 10
Spindle coder
V.)
L = 360°
(One rotation of the spindle corresponds to one
rotation of the spindle motor.)
om
= La/4096
= 720°/4096
= 0.17578°
La = 720°
(One rotation of the position coder corresponds
r.c
to two rotations of the spindle = 360° 2.)
1: 1: 2
4096 = The number of detected pulses per
rotation of the position coder
e
Gear ratio between the spindle and the position coder
1:1 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.08789 degrees
nt1:2 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.17578 degrees
1:4 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35156 degrees
1:8 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.70313 degrees
ce
Thus, Loop gain multiplier
= 2048 1.667/360 0.17578 1000 = 1667
NOTE
nc
When the position coder which is built in a spindle motor

sends 512 pulses per rotation, the unit used for the
detection, a, is La/2048.
.c
w
w
w
276
0618 In–position width of tapping axis in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the in–position width of a tapping axis in rigid
tapping.
om
0619 In–position width of spindle in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

r.c
This parameter sets the in–position width of a spindle in rigid tapping.
CAUTION
e
The broad in–position width deteriorates the screw
precision.
nt
ce
0620 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

nc

This parameter sets the limit value of a tapping axis positioning deviation
during movement in rigid tapping.
.c
WARNING
The setting value is represented in a 10–times unit when a
high–resolution transducer is used.
w
w
w
277
0621 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation
during movement in rigid tapping.
S 360 100 1.5
om
Limit value =
60 G a
where
S: Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping
(Setting value of parameter Nos.0617, 0694, and 0695)
r.c
G: Loop gain of rigid tapping axis
(Setting value of parameter Nos.0615, 0669 to 0671)
a: Detection unit
e
Example)
SPINDLE
MOTOR
nt When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are
connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows:
S = 3600
G = 3000
ce
Position
Spindle coder L = 360_
(One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotaion)
a = La / 4096
= 720_/4096
nc
= 0.17578_
La= 720_
(One position coder rotation requires two spindle
rotations =360_ 2)
.c
4096=Detection pulse per positioncoder rotation

1: 1: 2 3600 360 100 1.5
Setting value =
w
60 3000 0.17578
= 6144
w
NOTE
w
The detection unit is a=La/2048 when the position coder

built–in spindle motor uses a position coder of 512 pulses
per revolution.
278
0622 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a tapping axis positioning deviation
during stop in rigid tapping.
om
0623 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

r.c
This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation
during stop in rigid tapping.
e
0663 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (First gear)
0664
0665
nt
Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Second gear)
Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Third gear)
ce
[Data type] Word
These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side for every
nc
gear when any gear ratio is set in rigid tapping.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when VALPC, #3 of parameter
.c
No.0063, is “1”.
Set the same value to parameter Nos.0663 to 0665 when
the spindle has a position coder.
w
w
w
279
0666 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (First gear)
0667 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Second gear)
0668 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Third gear)
[Data type] Word

These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the position coder side
om
for every gear when any gear ratio is set in rigid tapping.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when VALPC, #3 of parameter
No.0063, is “1”.
r.c
Set the same value to parameter Nos.0666 to 0668 when
the spindle has a position coder.
A spindle motor incorporating the position coder uses a
position coder with 2048 pulses per revolution. In this case,
set the value that is two times as many as the actual number
e
of gear teeth (because of conversion to 4096 pulses per
revolution).
nt
ce
0669 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (First gear)
0670 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (Second gear)
0671 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (Third gear)
nc
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.01 s –1
.c

These parameters set the position control loop gain of a spindle and
tapping axis for every gear in rigid tapping.
w
NOTE
To set the loop gain for every gear, set parameter No.0615
w
to “0”.
w
280
0694 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (First gear)
0695 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Second gear)
0617 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Third gear)

[Unit of data] rpm
[Valid data range] Spindle and position coder gear ratio
om
1:1 0 to 7400
1:2 0 to 9999
1:4 0 to 9999
1:8 0 to 9999
r.c
These parameters set the maximum spindle speed for every gear in rigid
tapping.
NOTE
In a system having one–stage gear, set the same value as
e
parameter Nos.0694 to 0617. In a system having two–stage
gear, set the same value as parameter No.0695 to
nt
parameter No.0617. If it is not set as such, P/S alarm no.
200 will be informed.
These are applicable to M series.
ce
0692 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping (First gear)
nc
0693 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping (Second gear)
0613 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping (Third gear)
.c
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
w
These parameters set the spindle and tapping axis’s time constant for
every gear during linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping.
w
Set the time required until a spindle speed reaches the maximum spindle
speed (parameter Nos.0617, 0694, and 0695). The actual time constant is
a proportional value between the maximum spindle speed and the
w
specified spindle speed.
281
9.5.9
Alarm and Message Number Message Description
200 ILLEGAL S CODE COM- In the rigid tapping, an S value is out

MAND of the range or is not specified.
The maximum value for S which can
be specified in rigid tapping is set in
parameter. Change the setting in the
parameter or modify the program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND In the rigid tapping, no F value is spe-
om
IN RIGID TAP cified.
Correct the program.
202 POSITION LSI OVER- In the rigid tapping, spindle distribu-
FLOW tion value is too large.
203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIG- In the rigid tapping, position for a rigid
r.c
ID TAPPING M code (M29) or an S command is
incorrect. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERA- In the rigid tapping, an axis movement
TION is specified between the rigid M code
(M29) block and G84 or G74 block.
e
Modify the program.
205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL Rigid tapping signal is not 1 when
nt OFF G84 or G74 block is executed though
the rigid M code (M29) is specified.
Consult the PMC ladder diagram to
find the reason the signal is not
ce
turned on. Modify the program.
206 CAN NOT CHANGE Plane changeover was instructed in
PLANE (RIGID TAP) the rigid mode.
(M series) Correct the program.
nc
4n0 SERVO ALARM: n–TH The position deviation value when the
AXIS – EXCESS ERROR n–th axis (axis 1–8 of rigid tapping
axis) stops is larger than the set val-
ue.
Note) Limit value must be set to pa-
.c
rameter for each axis.

4n1 SERVO ALARM: n–TH The position deviation value when the
AXIS – EXCESS ERROR n–th axis (axis 1–8 of rigid tapping
w
axis) moves is larger than the set val-

ue.
Note) Limit value must be set to pa-
w
rameter for each axis.

4n3 SERVO ALARM: n–th The contents of the error register for
AXIS – LSI OVERFLOW the n–th axis (axis 1–8 of rigid tapping
w
axis) are beyond the range of –231 to

231. This error usually occurs as the
result of an improperly set parame-
ters.
282
9.5.10
Notes
NOTES ON SPINDLES
CAUTION
1 When using an analog spindle, set the spindle speed offset
value parameter (No.0577) accurately. For the standard
om
system, a value within –8191 to 8191 must be specified in
this parameter. To perform rigid tapping, a value within
–1023 to 1023 must be specified.
If the spindle speed offset is set inaccurately, the spindle is
stopped and placed in in–position wait state when tapping
is started.
r.c
In rigid tapping with a serial spindle, no setting is required
for parameter No.0577. Be sure to set 0.
2 When the threading and synchronous feed functions are
enabled, the actual spindle speed during rigid tapping is
e
indicated correctly. When an arbitrary gear ratio is used (by
setting bit 3 (VLPC) of parameter No.0063 to 1), however,
nt
the actual spindle speed will not be indicated correctly in
normal spindle mode.
ce
NOTE
1 A spindle pitch error is not compensated for in rigid tapping
mode. Drift compensation is not made with an analog
nc
spindle.
2 The maximum number of pulses that can be distributed to
the spindle is:
⋅ 32,767 pulses per 8 msec for a serial spindle
.c
⋅ 4,096 pulses per 8 msec for an analog spindle

(This information is displayed by selecting No.0627 on
the diagnosis screen.)
w
These values vary with the position coder gear ratio setting
and rigid tapping specification. If a value greater than the
w
maximum allowable number is specified, P/S alarm No. 202

is issued.
w
283
Position control loop In rigid tapping, the loop gain of the tapping axis is switched so that the
gain switching and serial loop gains for position control of the tapping axis and spindle match each
spindle parameters other.
This switching processing is specified by parameter Nos.0615, and 0669

to 0671. The contents of the processing vary with whether the spindle is
an analog or serial spindle, as described below.
⋅ When the spindle is an analog spindle, the loop gains of the spindle and
tapping axis are switched according to the values set in these
parameters.
om
⋅ When the spindle is a serial spindle, the loop gain of the tapping axis
is switched according to the values set in these parameters. The loop
gain of the spindle depends on the values set in the serial spindle
parameters and applied gear signals (CTH2, CTH1).
r.c
Accordingly, to perform rigid tapping with a serial spindle, the loop gain
for position control of the spindle must be set in the serial spindle
parameters used for rigid tapping.
The parameters indicated below are the major serial spindle parameters
e
required for the setting and adjustment needed to use a serial spindle.
For details of the serial spindle parameters, refer to the “FANUC AC

nt
Spindle Motor series (Serial Interface) DESCRIPTIONS (B–65042E) or
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B–65160E).
ce
6544 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
nc
6545 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 3, gear 4)
[Data type] Word

.c
Set a proportional gain for the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid
tapping mode).
w
6552 Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
w
6553 Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode(gear 3, gear 4)
[Data type] Word

w

Set an integral gain of the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid
tapping mode).
284
6565 Position gain in the servo mode (HIGH) (CFPGH)
6566 Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH) (CFPGMH)
6567 Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM LOW) (CFPGML)
6568 Position gain in the servo mode (LOW) (CFPGL)
[Unit of data] 0.01 sec –1

om
Set a servo loop gain in a servo mode (such as rigid tapping mode).
CAUTION
Set a loop gain for spindle position control in rigid tapping
r.c
using a serial spindle. In these parameters, basically, set
the same values as those set in parameter Nos.0615 and
0669 to 0671 (loop gains for position control of the tapping
axis).
e
Which serial spindle parameter (i.e., loop gain) is actually used to operate
nt
the spindle depends on the serial spindle clutch/gear selection signals
CTH1 and CTH2 (G229#3, #2 for the first spindle.). Accordingly, which
parameter is to be used must be determined by considering the gear
ce
switching and PMC software.
The table below indicates the relationship between the spindle gear
selection signals and selected gear numbers.
nc
CTH1 CTH2 Gear selected Parameter No. to be used

0 0 HIGH 6565
6544 6552
0 1 MEDIUM HIGH 6566
.c
1 0 MEDIUM LOW 6567

6545 6553
1 1 LOW 6568
w
w
9.5.11
Reference Item FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.13.2 RIGID TAPPING
w
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
CONNECTION MANUAL 9.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL

(This manual)
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR Appendix SERIAL SPINDLE RIGID TAP-

series (Serial Interface) 3.5 PING TECHNICAL MANUAL
DESCRIPTIONS (B–65042E)
285
9.6
SPINDLE
ORIENTATION
General This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can
be stopped in either of the following two ways.
· The spindle is mechanically stopped by using stoppers.
· The spindle is stopped by applying a function of the spindle control
unit.
om
Mechanical stop To mechanically stop the spindle by using, for example, a stopper, rotate
the spindle at a constant low speed and drive a stopper or pin into the
spindle. The spindle can be rotated at a constant speed by applying either
of the following methods.
r.c
· Spindle orientation signal (See 9.3, “Spindle Control.”)
· Spindle output control by the PMC (See 15.4.)
Using the spindle Some spindle control units can position the spindle motor by using
e
control unit sensors and position coders. The CNC itself does not control positioning
by using these units.
Serial spindle orientation

nt
In serial spindle orientation by a position coder, the stop position is
specified either by a parameter or by the PMC (spindle orientation
ce
by a position coder
function with the stop position externally set).
nc
Signal
Spindle orientation
.c
signals with the stop

position externally set
SHA00 to SHA11 for the
w
first spindle
<G110, G111>
w

[Function] This command is used for specifying a stop position with an absolute
position within one rotation in the following equation:
w
360 11
= ȍ (2i Pi)
4096 i=0
where
Pi = 0 when SHAi = 0
Pi = 1 when SHAi = 1
286
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G110 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G111 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
0080 MORCM1
[Data type] Bit

MORCM1 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function is
used by the first spindle motor
r.c
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Caution
e
CAUTION
nt
1 To perform spindle orientation by using the spindle control
unit, the signals of the spindle control unit must be used.
To perform serial spindle orientation by using a position
coder (to perform serial spindle orientation with the stop
ce
position set externally), the serial spindle control unit signals
must be used.
2 When the spindle orientation function of stop position
external setting type is used, the stop position parameters
nc
in spindle orientation with a position coder (No.6531 and

6671) are invalid.
.c
Note
w
NOTE
Spindle orientation with the spindle positioning function
differs from that described in this section.
w
w
Reference item
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR VIII. Position coder method spindle
series (Serial Interface) orientation
DESCRIPTIONS (B–65042E)
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR 11.1 Position coder method spindle

AMPLIFIER a series orientation
DESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E) 11.2 Magnetic sensor method spindle
orientation
287
9.7
POSITION CODER
FEEDBACK
CONTROL FUNCTION
(0–TC)
General This function is used to prevent inaccurate threading due to varying

feedback pulses while the spindle is rotating at low speed in
feed–per–rotation mode. When the direction of any pulse returned in a
om
certain step is opposite to the direction of rotation as predetermined by the
PMC, the number of those pulses is stored. The difference between the
number of stored pulses and the feedback pulses returned in the next step
is used for determining the feedrate (Fig. 9.7).
r.c
Number of pulses
for controlling the
Feedback pulse feedrate
Feedback
e
Stored
pulse
nt
Spindle
Feedback pulse
ce
Fig.9.7
1 This function is enabled when bit 7 of parameter 0074 is set

accordingly.
2 This function is turned on or off by a signal (G105#7).
nc
3 When the direction of any spindle feedback pulse returned in a certain

step is opposite to the direction of rotation specified by the PMC, the
feedback pulses in that step are stored. The system internally assumes
.c
the feedback of that step to be 0. (Signal G105#6)

4 If the feedback pulses of the next step have a predetermined direction
of rotation, the difference between the number of these pulses and
w
those stored in 3, above, is used as the number of feedback pulses for

this step.
w
Operating procedure 1 To enable the function, set the PLCREV bit (bit 7 of parameter 0074)
to 1.
w
2 Set a direction of rotation of the spindle for this function from the PMC
by using the KILPLUS signal (G105#6). Set this signal before setting
the function ON/OFF signal PLCRVO (G105#7) to 1.
If the direction of a returned feedback pulse is opposite to the direction
of rotation set by KILPLUS, the feedback pulse is disabled.
3 When the function ON/OFF signal PLCRVO (G105#7) is set to 1, this
function is activated.
288
Signal
Position coder feedback

control signal
PLCRVO<G105#7>
[Function] This signal disables spindle feedback pulses of a given direction. (The
signal is valid when the PLCREV bit (bit 7 of parameter 0074) is set to
1.)
om
[Operation] A feedback pulse having a direction specified by KILPLUS is disabled.
Position coder feedback

direction selection
r.c
signal
KILPLUS<G105#6>
[Function] When KILPLUS is set to 1, positive direction feedback pulses are
disabled. When KILPLUS is set to 0, negative direction feedback pulses
e
are disabled. (This signal is valid when both the PLCREV bit (bit 7 of
parameter 0074) and the PLCRVON signal (G105#7) are set to 1.)
Signal address
nt
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G105 PLCRVON KILPLUS
nc
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0074 PLCREV
PLCREV 1 : A spindle feedback pulse having a direction opposite to that specified

.c
by the PMC is invalid.

0 : All spindle feedback pulses are valid, irrespective of their direction.
w
Caution
CAUTION
w
Set the rotation direction selection signal (G105#6) before

setting the signal of G105#7.
w
NOTE
1 When the number of feedback pulses having a direction
opposite to that specified by the PMC exceeds 3275, the
number of stored pulses is reset to 0. Then, the remaining
pulses are counted.
2 When there is a feedback pulse having a direction opposite
to that specified by the PMC, SACT also goes to 0.
289
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62543EN–1/01
10 TOOL FUNCTIONS
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
290
B–62543EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10.1
TOOL FUNCTION
General (M series)
Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to
an 4-digit numeral after address T.
(T series)
Selection of tools and offset amounts can be done by commanding tool
om
numbers and offset numbers with up to an 4-digit numeral after address
T. The offset number is specified with the last one or two digits of the T
code. The tool number is specified with the remaining digits after
excluding the one or two digits used to specify the offset number.
r.c
When the last one digit is used to specify the offset number:
(Parameter T2D (No.0014#0)=1)
Tf f
e
Offset number
nt Tool number
When the last two digits are used to specify the offset number:
ce
(Parameter T2D (No.0014#0)=0)
Tff ff
Offset number
nc
Tool number
When a T code is specified, the code signal and strobe signal correspond-
ing to the specified tool number are issued. The machine selects a tool
.c
according to the issued signals. The code signal is held until another T
code is specified.
w
In a block, no more than one T code can be specified.

w
Signal See Section 8.1.

w
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0013 GOFU2 (T series)
[Data type] Bit

GOFU2 Geometry offset number of tool offset (When the option of tool
geometry/wear compensation is selected, it is effective.)
0 : Is the same as wear offset number
1 : Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
291
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0014 T2D (T series)
[Data type] Bit

T2D Offset number of tool offset (Wear offset number when option of tool
geometry/wear compensation is selected)
0 : Specified using the lower two digits of a T code
1 : Specified using the lower one digit of a T code
om
Alarm and message
030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUM- The offset number in T function speci-
r.c
BER fied for tool offset is too large.
(T series) Modify the program.
043 ILLEGAL T–CODE COM- In a system using the DRILL–MATE
MAND with an ATC, a T code was not speci-
fied together with the M06 code in a
e
block. Alternatively, the Tcode was out
(M series) of range.
Caution
nt
ce
CAUTION
When a move command and a tool function are specified in
the same block, the commands are executed in one of the
following two ways:
nc
(i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool

function commands.
(ii) Executing tool function commands upon completion of
move command execution.
The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the sequence
.c
program of PMC.
w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
w
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
CONNECTION MANUAL 8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(This manual)
292
10.2
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/
TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY
General (M series)
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the
CRT/MDI panel or from a program.
om
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the
corresponding code is specified after address H or D in a program.
The value is used for tool length compensation or cutter compensation.
D Range of tool Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
compensation value
r.c
Tool compensation
Increment Tool wear compensation
(Geometry compensation)
system
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
IS-B 999.999mm 99.9999inch 99.999mm 9.9999 inch
e
IS-C 999.9999mm 99.99999inch 99.9999mm 9.99999inch
D Tool compensation The memory can hold 32 or 64 sets of tool compensation values.
nt
number
D Tool compensation One of the tool compensation memory A or C can be selected according
ce
memory to offset amount.
D Tool compensation memory A
There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and
wear compensation memory in this tool compensation memory A.
nc
Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset together is set

as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter
compensation (D code) and tool length compensation (H code).
D Tool compensation memory C
.c
Separate memories are prepared for cutter compensation (for D code)

and for tool length compensation (for H code).
w
The above description is summarized as follows:

Tool compensation
Compensation amount
w
memory
Tool compensation amount
A (Geometry compensation value + Wear compensa-
w
tion value)
Tool compensation value for H code

C
Tool compensation value for D code
293
(T series)
Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values

and tool wear compensation values (Fig.10.2 (a)).
Tool compensation can be specified without differentiating compensation
for tool geometry from that for tool wear (Fig.10.2 (b)).
Point on the program Point on the program
Imaginary tool
X axis
om
geometry Offset
offset value on
value X axis
X axis
wear Actual
offset tool
r.c
value
Z axis Z axis
wear geometry Offset
offset offset value on
value value Z axis
Fig.10.2 (a) Difference the Fig.10.2 (b) Not difference the tool
e
tool geometry offset from tool geometry offset from tool wear
wear offset offset
nt
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the
CRT/MDI panel or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the
ce
corresponding code is specified after address T in a program.
The value is used for tool offset or tool nose radius compensation.
D Range of tool Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
nc
compensation value
Tool compensation
y
Increment system (geometry compensation, wear compensation)
Metric input Inch input
999.999 mm 99.9999 inch

.c
IS-B
IS-C 999.9999 mm 99.99999 inch
D Tool compensation
w
The memory can hold 16 or 32 sets of tool compensation values.

number
D Tool compensation
w
Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is prepared

memory separately. Geometry compensation and wear compensation can thus be
set separately.
w
The above description is summarized as follws:

Tool compensation
Compensation amount
memory
Geometry compensation
Geometry/wear
y com-
pensation Wear compensation
294
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 ORC (T series)
[Data type] Bit

ORC Tool offset value
0 : Set by the diameter specification (Can be set in only the axis under
diameter programming)
1 : Set by the radius specification
om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0013 GOFU2 (T series)
[Data type] Bit
r.c
GOFU2 Geometry offset number of tool offset (When the option of tool geometry/
wear compensation is selected, it is effective.)
0 : Is the same as wear offset number
1 : Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015
[Data type] Bit

nt NWCH (T series)
ce
NWCH Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation
amount
0 : The characters are displayed at the left of each number.
1 : The characters are not displayed.
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0075 WNPT (T series)
.c
[Data type] Bit

WNPT Imaginary tool tip direction used for tool nose radius compensation, when
w
the geometry/wear compensation option is equipped, is the direction

specified by:
0 : Geometry offset number
w
1 : Wear offset number

w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0078 NOINOG NOINOW
[Data type] Bit

NOINOW Setting the tool wear compensation value by MDI key input is:
0 : Not disabled
1 : Disabled
NOINOG Setting the tool geometry compensation value by MDI key input is:
0 : Not disabled
1 : Disabled
295
0728 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation (T series)

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C

Metric input 0 to 99999 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999
om
Inch input 0 to 99999 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999
This parameter sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation at an
incremental input. If the incremental value exceeds the set value, the
following alarm or warning message is indicated:
Input by G10 P/S 32 offset value is out of range by G10
r.c
0729 Maximum value of tool wear compensation (T series)
e
ntMetric input
Inch input
0.01
0.001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
mm
inch
[Valid data range] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C

ce
Metric input 0 to 99999 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999
Inch input 0 to 99999 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999
This parameter sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation. The
nc
following alarm or warning will be informed when the tool wear

compensation (absolute value) exceeding this setting value is set.
Input by G10 P/S 32 offset value is out of range by G10
.c
Alarm and message

w
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE In setting an offset amount by G10 or

IN G10 in writing an offset amount by system
w
variables, the offset amount was ex-

cessive.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II 14.4 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES,
OPERATOR’S MANUAL NUMBER OF COMPENSATION
(B–62574EN) VALUES, AND ENTERING VAL-
UES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II 14.4 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES,

OPERATOR’S MANUAL NUMBER OF COMPENSATION
(B–62544EN) VALUES, AND ENTERING VAL-
UES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10)
296
10.3
CUTTER
COMPENSATION
10.3.1
Cutter
Compensation C
(M Series)
om
General When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the
tool.
To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offset
vector with a length equal to the radius of the tool (start–up). The offset
r.c
vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the vector is on the
workpiece side and the head points to the center of the tool.
If a linear interpolation or circular interpolation command is specified
after start–up, the tool path can be shifted by the length of the offset vector
during machining.
e
To return the tool to the start point at the end of machining, cancel the
cutter compensation mode.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
Cutter
compensation
cancel
ÇÇÇ
Start–up
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Fig.10.3.1 Outline of Cutter Compensation C
297
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0016 SUPM (M series)
[Data type] Bit

SUPM Start up or cancel in cutter compensation C
0 : Type A
1 : Type B
om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0036 OFRD (M series)
[Data type] Bit

OFRD Offset number of tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool
r.c
offset
0 : Specifies the tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool
offset using H codes
1 : Specifies the tool length compensation using an H code, and cutter
e
compensation C using a D code
0062
#7 nt #6 #5 #4 #3 #2
G40V
#1 #0
(M series)
[Data type] Bit

ce
G40V When G40, G41, and G42 are specified independently,
0 : The start up and cancel operation conforms to the standard
specification.
nc
1 : Moves by a distance corresponding to the offset vector which is

vertical to the next block movement.
0557 Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a corner (M series)
.c
during cutter compensation C
[Data type] Word

w

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
w
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

w
This parameter sets the limit value that ignores a slight movement
occurring when a tool moves on the outside of the corner during cutter
compensation C.
298
Alarm and message

033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be de-

termined for cutter compensation C.
Modify the program.
034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to
ST–UP /EXT BLK be performed in the G02 or G03 mode
in cutter compensation C. Modify the
program.
om
035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G39 is commanded in cutter com-
G39 pensation B cancel mode or on the
plane other than offset plane. Modify
the program.
036 CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in
r.c
G31 cutter compensation mode.
Modify the program.
037 CAN NOT CHANGE G40 is commanded on the plane oth-
PLANE IN CRC er than offset plane in cutter com-
pensation B. The plane selected by
e
using G17, G18 or G19 is changed in
cutter compensation C mode. Modify
nt
038 INTERFERENCE IN CIR-
CULAR BLOCK
the program.
Overcutting will occur in cutter com-
pensation C because the arc start
point or end point coincides with the
ce
arc center.
Modify the program.
041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter com-
pensation C. Two or more blocks are
nc
consecutively specified in which func-

tions such as the auxiliary function
and dwell functions are performed
without movement in the cutter com-
pensation mode. Modify the program.
.c
042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED Tool offset (G45 to G48) is comman-

IN CRC ded in cutter compensation. Modify
the program.
w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.14.2, Cutter compensation C

OPERATOR’S MANUAL 14.3
w
(B–62574EN)
299
10.3.2
Tool Nose Radius
Compensation
(T Series)
General It is difficult to produce the compensation necessary to form accurate parts

when using only the tool offset function due to tool nose roundness in
taper cutting or circular cutting. The tool nose radius compensation
om
function compensates automatically for the above errors.
r.c
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Workpiece Tool path without compensation
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Tool path with compensation
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
e
Insufficient
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Tool nose
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
depth of
ntcutting
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ R
ce
Shape processed without tool
nose radius compensation
nc
Fig. 10.3.2 Tool path of tool nose radius compensation

.c
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0075 WNPT
w
[Data type] Bit

WNPT Imaginary tool tip direction used for tool nose radius compensation, when
w
the geometry/wear compensation option is equipped, is the direction

specified by:
0 : Geometry offset number
w
1 : Wear offset number
0557 Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a corner (T series)
during too nose radius compensation
[Data type] Word

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
300

This parameter sets the limit value that ignores a slight movement
occurring when a tool moves on the outside of a corner during tool nose
radius compensation.
Alarm and message

om
033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be de-
termined for tool nose radius com-
pensation. Modify the program.
Modify the program.
034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to
ST–UP /EXT BLK be performed in the G02 or G03 mode
r.c
in tool nose radius compensation.
Modify the program.
G31 tool nose radius compensation mode.
Modify the program.
e
037 CAN NOT CHANGE The offset plane is switched in tool
PLANE IN NRC nose radius compensation.
nt
038 INTERFERENCE IN CIR-
CULAR BLOCK
Modify the program.
Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra-
dius compensation because the arc
ce
start point or end point coincides with
the arc center.
Modify the program.
039 CHF/CNR NOT AL- Chamfering or corner R was specified
LOWED IN NRC with a start–up, a cancel, or switching
nc
between G41 and G42 in tool nose

radius compensation. The program
may cause overcutting to occur in
chamfering or corner R. Modify the
program.
.c
040 INTERFERENCE IN Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra-

G90/G94 BLOCK dius compensation in canned cycle
G90 or G94. Modify the program.
w
041 INTERFERENCE IN NRC Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra-

dius compensation.
Modify the program.
w
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.14.2, Tool Nose Radius Compensation
OPERATOR’S MANUAL 14.3
(B–62544EN)
301
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62543EN–1/01
11 PROGRAM COMMAND
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
302
B–62543EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.1
DECIMAL POINT
PROGRAMMING/
POCKET
CALCULATOR
TYPE DECIMAL
POINT
PROGRAMMING
om
General Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point
can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can
be specified with the following addresses:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, and F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M series
r.c
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, and F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T series
There are two types of decimal point notation: calculatorĆtype notation

and standard notation.
When calculatorĆtype decimal notation is used, a value without decimal
e
point is considered to be specified in millimeters. When standard decimal
notation is used, such a value is considered to be specified in least input
nt
increments. Select either calculatorĆtype or standard decimal notation by
using the CPRD (bit 7 of parameter 0015). Values can be specified both
with and without decimal point in a single program.
ce
Program command Pocket calculator Standard type decimal
type decimal point point programming
programming
nc
X1000 1000mm 1mm

Command value with- Unit : mm Unit : Least input increment
out decimal point (0.001 mm)
.c
X1000.0 1000mm 1000mm

Command value with Unit : mm Unit : mm
decimal point
w
Parameter
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015 CPRD
w
[Data type] Bit

CPRD When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal
point
0 : The least input increment is assumed.
1 : The unit of mm, inches, or s is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point programming)
303
Alarm and message

007 ILLEGAL USE OF DEC- Decimal point “ · ” input error (A deci-

IMAL POINT mal point was input after an address
with which it can not be used. Or two
decimal points were input.)
Modify the program.
om
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.8.3 Decimal point programming
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
r.c
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.8.3 Decimal point programming
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
304
11.2
G CODE SYSTEM
(T Series)
General There are three G code systems : A,B, and C (Table 11.2). Select a G code
system using bits 5 (GSPC) and 1 (GSPG) of parameter 0036.
Table 11.2 G code list (1/2)
om
G code
Group Function
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW
r.c
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
00
G10 G10 G10 Data setting
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
e
G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20
G21
G27
G20
G21
G27
G70
G71
G27
nt 06
Input in inch
Input in mm
Reference position return check
ce
G28 G28 G28 Reference position return
00
G30 G30 G30 2nd reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function (0–GCD only)
nc
G32 G33 G33 01 Thread cutting

G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 07
0 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation right
.c
G50 G92 G92 00 Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
w
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection

w

14
w

G65 G65 G65 00 Macro command
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating
G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling
G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 G76 G78 Multiple threading cycle
305
Table 11.2 G code list (2/2)

G code
Group Function
A B C
G71 G71 G72 Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Traverse direct constant–dimension grinding cycle
G72 G72 G73
(for grinding machine)
01
G73 G73 G74 Oscillation grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Oscillation direct constant–dimension grinding cycle
G74 G74 G75
(for grinding machine)
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
om
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24 End face turning cycle
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
r.c
G98 G94 G94 Per minute feed
05
G99 G95 G95 Per revolution feed
— G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
— G91 G91 Incremental programming
e
— G98 G98 Return to initial level
11
— G99 G99 Return to R point level
Parameter
nt
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0011 G01
[Data type] Bit

nc
G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0 : G00 mode (positioning)
1 : G01 mode (linear interpolation)
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0030 G91
w
[Data type] Bit

G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0 : G90 mode (absolute command)
w
1 : G91 mode (incremental command)

w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0036 GSPC GSP
[Data type] Bit

GSP Type of the special G code system
1 : Type B
0 : Type A
GSPC Type of the special G code system
1 : Type C
0 : Type A
306
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0045 CLER
[Data type] Bit

CLER Reset button on the CRT/MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and
rewind signal, and emergency stop signal
0 : Cause reset state.
1 : Cause clear state.
om
For the reset and clear states, refer to APPENDIX E of operator’s manual
(B–62544EN).
Alarm and message
r.c
010 IMPROPER G–CODE An unusable G code or G code corre-

sponding to the function not provided is
e
specified. Modify the program.
Note
nt
NOTE
ce
1 If the CNC enters the clear state (see bit 6 (CLER) of
parameter 0045) when the power is turned on or the CNC
is reset, the modal G codes change as follows.
(1) G codes marked with in Table 11.2 are enabled.
nc
(2) When the system is cleared due to powerĆon or reset,

whichever specified, either G20 or G21, remains
effective.
(3) Setting bit 6 (G01) of parameter 0011 determines which
.c
code, either G00 or G01, is effective.

(4) Setting bit 7 (G91) of parameter 0030 determines which
code, either G90 or G91, is effective.
2 G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are singleĆshot
w
G codes.
3 Alarm 010 is displayed when a G code not listed in the G
code list is specified or a G code without a corresponding
w
option is specified.
4 G codes of different groups can be specified in the same
block.
w
If G codes of the same group are specified in the same

block, the G code specified last is valid.
5 If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the
canned cycle is canceled in the same way as when a G80
command is specified. G codes of group 01 are not affected
by G codes for specifying a canned cycle.
6 When G code system A is used for a canned cycle, only the
initial level is provided at the return point.
7 G codes are displayed for each group number.
307
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (G FUNCTION)
(B–62544EN)
APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING
POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
AND WHEN RESET
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
308
11.3
PROGRAM
CONFIGURATION
General A program consists of the following components:

Table 11.3 Program components
Components Descriptions
om
Tape start Symbol indicating the start of a program file
Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc.
Program start Symbol indicating the start of a program
Program section Commands for machining
r.c
Comment section Comments or directions for the operator
Tape end Symbol indicating the end of a program file
e
Leader section
nt Tape start % TITLE
O0001 ;
; Program start
ce
Program section (COMMENT) Comment section
nc
M30 ;
% Tape end
.c
Fig.11.3 Program configuration

w
w
w
309
Parameter
@Setting entry
TVON Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0019 NEOP
om
[Data type] Bit
NEOP With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0396 EORRE
e
[Data type] Bit
EORRE When the endĆofĆrecord mark (%) is read during program execution:
nt
0 : P/.S alarm No.0008 occurs.
(Automatic operation is stopped, and the system enters the alarm
state.)
ce
1 : No alarm occurs.
(Automatic operation is stopped, and the system is reset.)
nc
Alarm and message

.c
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect

parity was input).
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters
w
in a block is odd). This alarm will be

generated only when the TV check is
effective (when TVC, bit 0 of setting
w
parameter 0000 is set to 1).

5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.12 Program Configuration
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.12 Program Configuration

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
310
11.4
INCH/METRIC
CONVERSION
General Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code.
Parameter
om
@Setting entry
INCH Unit of input
0 : In mm
1 : In inches
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 SCW
NOTE
e
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit

nt
ce
SCW Least command increment on the linear axis
0 : In mm (metric system machine)
1 : In inches (inch system machine)
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0063 PRSTIN MTDSPI
[Data type] Bit

.c
MTDSPI Machine position is:

0 : Not displayed according to the unit of input.
w
(Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine

position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for
inch machines.)
w
1 : Displayed according to the unit of input.

(When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm,
and when input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in
w
inches accordingly.)
automatically
0 : Value set in parameter 0708 to 0711 is used.
1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter 0708 to 0711 is used, or for
input in inches, the value set in parameter 0815 to 0818 is used.
311
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0077 MICRF (T series)
[Data type] Bit

MICRF Cutting feedrates at feed per minute is specified by F commands
0 : In units of 1 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.01 inches/min for
inch machines.
1 : In unit of 0.001 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001
inches/min for inch machines.
om
NOTE
M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting
feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001
mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for
r.c
inch machines.
e
nt
ce
Linear axis
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
(Metric input)
Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
(Inch input)
nc

Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for
.c
setting a coordinate system automatically.
w

w

Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
w

Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for
setting a coordinate system automatically when input is performed in
inches.
NOTE
is set to 1.
312
Warning
WARNING
When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and
vice versa, the tool compensation value must be re–set
according to the least input increment.
om
Note
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command
increment systems are different, the maximum error is half
of the least command increment. This error is not
r.c
accumulated.
2 Reference position return is performed at a low speed for
the first G28 command after the inch input is switched to the
metric input or vice versa.
e
Reference item
nt
ce
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.8.2 Inch/metric conversion(G20, G21)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.8.2 Inch/metric conversion(G20, G21)

nc
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
.c
w
w
w
313
11.5
CUSTOM MACRO
11.5.1
Custom Macro
General Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the
custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic
operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general
om
programs such as pocketing and user–defined canned cycles. A
machining program can call a custom macro with a simple command, just
like a subprogram.
Machining program Custom macro
r.c
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: G65 H05 P#100 Q#8018 R2;
: G01 G42 X#100 Y#100 F300;
: G02 X#100 Y–#100 R#100;
e
M98 P9010; :
: :
nt :
M30 ;
:
M99 ;
ce
This means that a function of general use can be formed when
programming a certain function as a custom macro. That is, programs can
be written using variables for data that might change or be unknown. This
can be further applied to group technology.
nc
Similar workpieces can be collected as a group and a universal custom

macro body can be programmed using variables applicable to each group.
In this way, programming is not required for the workpieces in the group.
The programmer only need to assign actual values to the variables.
.c
w
r β
α
w
w
Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be made easily.
Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programmed and
registered, the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting
function.
314
Signal
Custom Macro Input

Signal
UI000 to UI015
<G130, G131>
om
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by
a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface
signals between custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
r.c
Correspondence
Signals Q’ty Variables
of values
UI000 1 #1000
UI001 1 #1001
UI002 1 #1002
e
UI003 1 #1003 “0” at “0” and
: : : “1” at “1”
nt UI014
UI015
UI000 to UI015
1
1
16
#1014
#1015
#1032 16–bit binary code

*1
ce
ȍ {#[1000 ) i]
15
*1 Variable value #1032 + 2 i}
i+0
nc
.c
w
w
w
315
Custom Macro Output

Signal
UO000 to UO015
<F162, F163>
UO100 to UO131
<F196 to F199>
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or
om
written by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for
interface signals between custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Correspondence of
Signals Q’ty Variables
values
r.c
UO000 1 #1100
UO001 1 #1101
UO002 1 #1102
UO003 1 #1103 “0” at “0” and
: : : “1” at “1”
e
UO014 1 #1114
UO015 1 #1115
nt
UO000 to UO015
UO100 to UO115
*1 Variable value
16
32
#1132 + ȍ{#[1100 ) i]
15
#1132
#1133
2 i}
16–bit binary code *1
32–bit binary code *2
ce
i+0
ȍ{2
30
*2 Variable value #1133 + i
V i}–2 31 V 31
i+0
Where Vi=0 when UO1i is 0 and Vi=1 when UO1i is 1

nc
These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment

statement as well as on the right side.
The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used
for the value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side.
.c
w
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G130 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
F162 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000
316
Parameter
D Setting for single block
stop
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0011 SBKM
[Data type] Bit

SBKM Custom macro statement
0 : Not stop the single block
om
1 : Stops the single block
D Other settings
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0040 LOCC COMC TMCR DPOSUP
r.c
[Data type] Bit
DPOSUP Reading zero when data is output using a DPRNT command
0 : Outputs a space
e
1 : Outputs no data
TMCR Custom macro (subprogram)
nt
0 : Not called using a T code
1 : Called using a T code
ce
COMC Custom macro B’s common variables Nos. 100 through 149
LOCC Custom macro B’s local variables #1 through #33
nc

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c
0057 CROUT
[Data type] Bit

w
CROUT In BPRNT or DPRNT, after the data is outputted in ISO code:

0 : Only the “LF” is outputted.
1 : “LF” and “CR” are outputted.
w
w
317
D Setting when macro

statement is input/output
with EIA code #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0042 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
0043 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
0044 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0053 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
0054 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
om
[Data type] Bit
These parameters are used to input/output macro statements.
The numeral of a suffix indicates the bit position in a code.
*0 to *7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating *.
r.c
=0 to =7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating =.
#0 to#7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating #.
[0 to [7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating [.
]0 to ]7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating ].
e
0 :Corresponding bit is 0
1 :Corresponding bit is 1.
D Setting G codes that call

custom macros of
nt
ce
program Nos.9010 to
9019 0220 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010
0221 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011
nc
.c
w
w
w
[Data type] Word

These parameters set the G codes that call the custom macros of program
numbers 9010 through 9019.
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by G00.
318
D Setting M codes that call

subprograms of program
Nos.9001 to 9009
0240 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001

om
These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program
NOTE
r.c
by M00.
D Setting M codes that call
e
custom macros of
no.9020 to 9029
0230
0231
nt
M code that calls the sub program of program number 9020
M code that calls the sub program of program number 9021

ce
0232 M code that calls the sub program of program number 9022
nc
.c
w

w

These parameters set the M codes that call the sub programs of program
w
NOTE
by M00.
319
Alarm and message

076 ADDRESS P NOT DE- Address P (program number) was not

FINED commanded in the block which includes
an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify
the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM NEST- The subprogram was called in five folds.
ING ERROR Modify the program.
om
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number
which was specified by address P in the
block which includes an M98, M99, M65
or G66 was not found. The sequence
number specified by a GOTO statement
was not found. Otherwise, a called pro-
gram is being edited in background pro-
r.c
cessing. Correct the program, or discon-
tinue the background editing.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal point
display data exceeds the allowable range.
e
Modify the program.
111 CALCULATED DATA The result of calculation is out of the al-
nt OVERFLOW lowable range (–1047 to –10–29, 0, and
10–29 to 1047).
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (including
tan 90_)
ce
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in cus-
tom macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN There is an error in other formats than
nc
MACRO <Formula>.
Modify the program.
115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE A value not defined as a variable number
NUMBER is designated in the custom macro, or the
.c
header contents are improper in a high–

speed cycle cutting. This alarm is given
in the following cases:
High speed cycle machining
w
1. The header corresponding to the specified

machining cycle number called is not found.
2. The cycle connection data value is out of
w
the allowable range (0 – 999).

3. The number of data in the header is out of
the allowable range (0 – 32767).
4. The storing start data variable number of
w
executable format data is out of the allow-

able range (#20000 – #85535).
5. The storing data variable number of execut-
able format data is out of the allowable
range (#85535).
6. The storing start data variable number of
executable format data is overlapped with
the variable number used in the header.
Modify the program.
320
116 WRITE PROTECTED The left side of substitution statement is a

VARIABLE variable whose substitution is inhibited.
Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper
ERROR limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative, BCD
argument is negative, or other values
than 0 to 9 are present on each line of
om
BIN argument.
Modify the program.
122 DUPLICATE MACRO The macro modal call is specified in
MODAL–CALL double.
Modify the program.
r.c
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used during
COMMAND IN DNC DNC operation.
Modify the program.
124 MISSING END STATE- DO – END does not correspond to 1 : 1.
MENT Modify the program.
e
125 FORMAT ERROR IN <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify
MACRO the program.
nt
126
127
ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x 3 is not established.
Modify the program.
NC, MACRO STATEMENT NC and custom macro commands coex-
ce
IN SAME BLOCK ist.
Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO SE- The sequence number specified in the
QUENCE NUMBER branch command was not 0 to 9999. Or, it
nc
cannot be searched. Modify the program.

129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT An address which is not allowed in <Argu-
ADDRESS ment Designation > is used.
Modify the program.
.c
199 MACRO WORD UNDE- Undefined macro word was used. Modify
FINED the custom macro.
w
Caution
CAUTION
w
Machine tool builders: You are requested to attach your

custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit
without fail.
w
If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory

due to a failure, FANUC servicemen or end user in charge
of maintenance should know the contents of your custom
macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble immediately.
321
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.15 and 16 Custom macro A/B
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.15 Custom macro A

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
322
11.6
CANNED CYCLE
(M Series)
General Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs.
With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can be
specified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles,
normally more than one block is required. In addition, the use of canned
cycles can shorten the program to save memory.
om
A canned cycle consists of a sequence of six operations.
Operation 1 Positioning a hole position
Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level
Operation 3 Hole machining
Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole
r.c
Operation 5 Retraction to point R level
Operation 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point
e
Operation 1
Initial level
nt Operation 2 Operation 6
ce
Point R level
Operation 5
Operation 3
nc
Rapid traverse
.c
Operation 4
Feed
Fig. 11.6 (a) Canned cycle operation sequence

w
w
w
323
SPINDLE CONTROL In some canned cycles, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse
direction may be output.
The following canned cycles require spindle control:

D Reverse tapping cycle G74
D Fine boring cycle G76
D Tapping cycle G84
D Boring cycle G86
D Back boring cycle G87
om
D Boring cycle G88
For spindle control, the following normal miscellaneous functions are
used:
See the description of the miscellaneous functions.
r.c
M03: CW spindle rotation
M04: CCW spindle rotation
M05: Spindle stop
M19: Spindle orientation
e
When the rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched from one
direction to the other (for example, when M04 is output during M03
nt
operation), a parameter can specify whether to send M05 at the time
switching.
Timing charts are described in the following page:
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
324
D G74 (Counter tapping cycle)
X, Y
Z
Z
Z
Dwell Dwell
om
(Note) (Note)
Note) It is possible to not output M05 M03 M05 M04
M05 code by using parame-
ter FXCS (No.0012#4). MF MF MF MF Next block
(G98 mode)
FIN FIN FIN FIN

Next block
r.c
(G99 mode)
D G76 (Fine boring cycle)
X, Y X or Y
e
X
or Y
Z
Z
nt
Dwell
Z
ce
(Note)
M05 M19 M03 M03
MF MF Return to ini- MF MF
Note) It is possible to not output tial level in
M05 code by using parame- G98 mode
nc
ter FXCO (No.0012#5).

FIN FIN FIN FIN
Next block
D G84 (tapping cycle) (G98 mode)
.c
Next block (G99 mode)

X, Y
w
Z
Z
w
Dwell Dwell
w
(Note) (Note)
M05 M04 M05 M03
Note) It is possible to not output MF MF MF MF Next block

M05 code by using parame- (G98 mode)
ter FXCS (No.0012#4).
FIN FIN FIN FIN

Next block
(G99 mode)
Fig.11.6 (b) Canned cycle for M series (1/2)
325
D G86 (Boring cycle)
X, Y
Return to initial level in G98 mode

Z
Z
om
M05 M03 M03
MF MF MF
FIN FIN FIN

Next block
r.c
(G98 mode)
D G87 (Back boring cycle) Next block (G99 mode)
e
X or Y X or Y
X, Y
X or Y
nt Z
ce
Z
Z
Dwell
(Note)
(Note)
nc
M05 M1
M03 M05 M19 M03
9
MF MF MF MF MF MF
.c
FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN
D G88 (Boring cycle) (Note) It is possible to not output M05 code using pa-
rameter FXCO (No.0012#5).
Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in
w
G98 mode.
X, Y
w
Manual feed Cycle start

Z
Z
w
Z
Dwell Z
M05 M03
MF MF
Return to initial level in G98 mode or
R point level in G99 mode.
FIN FIN
Fig.11.6 (c) Canned cycle for M series (2/2)
326
Tapping signal During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal is output. The tapping signal
is also output while the G code of the tapping cycle is valid.
Override During tapping, cutting feedrate override is always set to 100%.
Feed hold When the feed hold key is pressed during tapping, the movement is not
om
stopped immediately but the movement is stopped when the tool is
returned to level R.
Dry run In M series, the TAPDRN (bit 5 of parameter No.0065) specifies whether
r.c
dry run is valid during tapping.
Signal
e
Tapping signal
TAP<F149#5>
nt
ce
[Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode.
– The system is in tapping cycle mode.
nc
G74, G84: M series

– The system is in tapping mode.
G63: M series
.c
– The system is in neither tapping cycle mode nor tapping mode.

– A reset or emergency stop is specified.
w
Signal address
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F149 TAP
w
327
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0002 PMXY2 PMXY1 (M series)
[Data type] Bit

PMXY2, PMXY1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 or
G87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection.
PMXY2 PMXY1 G17 G18 G19
0 0 +X +Z +Y
om
0 1 –X –Z –Y
1 0 +Y +X +Z
1 1 –Y –X –Z
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0011 MCF (M series)
[Data type] Bit
e
MCF G81
0 : Specifies a drilling canned cycle
#7
nt
1 : Specifies an external operation command
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
0012 FXCO FXCS (M series)
[Data type] Bit

FXCO In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87:
nc
0 : Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops

1 : Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops
FXCS When a spindle rotates from the forward to the reverse direction and vice
.c
versa in tapping cycles G84 and G74 befor M04 or M03 is output:
0 : Outputs M05
1 : Not output M05
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0057 FXY (M series)
w
[Data type] Bit

FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:
w
0 : Always the Z–axis

1 : The axis selected by the program
328
0531 Return value of high–speed peck drilling cycle G73 (M series)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

This parameter sets the return value in high–speed peck drilling cycle
om
G73.
G73 (M series)
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
r.c
R point
q
d
e
d
q
nt Z point
ce
Fig. 11.6 (d) High–speed peck drilling cycle (G73)
0532 Clearance canned cycle G83 (M series)

nc
[Data type] Word

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
.c
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

w
This parameter sets the clearance value in peck drilling cycle G83.
G83 (M series)
w
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
w
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
Fig. 11.6 (e) Peck drilling cycle (G83)
329
Alarm and message

044 G27–G30 NOT AL- One of G27 to G30 is commanded in

LOWED IN FIXED CYCLE a canned cycle mode.
(M series) Modify the program.
Note
om
NOTE
A parameter FXY (No.0057#6) can be set to the Z axis
always used as the drilling axis. When FXY=0, the Z axis is
always the drilling axis. (M series)
e r.c
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.13.1 Canned cycle
nt
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
330
11.7
EXTERNAL MOTION
FUNCTION
(M Series)
General Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an external

operation function signal can be output to allow the machine to perform
specific operation.
om
G81 IP_ ; (The IP_ is axis move command )
Every time positioning for the IP_ move command is completed, the CNC
sends an external operation signal to the machine. An external operation
signal is output for each positioning operation until canceled by G80 or
a group 01 G code.
r.c
No external operation signals are output during execution of a block that
contains neither X nor Y.
e
Basic procedure 1 Once positioning for a move command has been completed, the CNC
sets the external operation signal EF to 1.
nt
2 When the EF signal is set to 1, the PMC executes drilling or another
operation. Once the operation has been completed, the PMC sets
completion signal FIN to 1.
ce
3 The CNC resets the EF signal to 0 upon the elapse of the time (TFIN)
specified in parameter No.0009 after the FIN signal is set to 1.
4 When the EF signal is set to 0, the PMC resets the FIN signal to 0.
nc
5 The CNC starts executing the next block.

.c
G81 command
Next block
Positioning
w
EF
Machine operation
w
FIN
w
TFIN
Fig. 11.7 Timing diagram of basic procedure
331
Signal
External Operation
Signal
EF<F150#1>
[Function] Reports that the positioning of G81 has been completed in the external
om
motion function, and that a special external operation is required.
[Output condition] For details of the output condition and procedure, see the “basic
procedure”, described previously.
For details of completion signal FIN, see section 8.1.
r.c
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F150 EF
e
Parameter
#7
nt#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
0011 MCF
[Data type] Bit

MCF G81:
nc
0 : Specifies a drilling canned cycle

1 : Specifies an external operation command
Caution
.c
CAUTION
1 When this function is used, canned cycles (G73, G74, G76,
w
and G82 to G89) cannot be used.

2 When the high–speed M, S, T, or B interface is used, the
signals used by this function are transferred in high–speed
w
mode. See Section 8.4.

w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.13.6 External motion function
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
332
11.8
CANNED CYCLE
(T Series)/MULTIPLE
REPETITIVE CANNED
CYCLE (T Series)
General This option canned cycles to make CNC programming easy. For instance,
the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough
machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available.
om
The following example shows stock removals in turning type I.
If a finished shape of A to A’ to B is given by a program as in the figure
below, the specified area is removed by ∆d (depth of cut), with finishing
allowance ∆u/2 and ∆w left.
C
r.c
B (R) A
∆d
(R)
(F) e
45,
(F)
e
Program command
nt (F) : Cutting feed ∆u/2
(R) : Rapid traverse
ce
∆w
A’
G71 U (∆d) R (e) ;
G71 P (ns) Q (nf) U (∆u) W (∆w) F (f ) S (s ) T (t)
nc
N (ns)⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
F____ The move command of a finished shape of
S____ A to A’ to B is specified in the blocks from
T____ sequence number ns to nf.
.c
N (nf)⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅;
∆d : Depth of cut (radius designation)
Designate without sign. The cutting direction depends on the direction
w
AA’. This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No.0717),
and the parameter is changed by the program command.
w
e : Escaping amount
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No.0718),
w
and the parameter is changed by the program command.

ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape.
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape.
∆u : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter / radius
designation).
∆w : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.
f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks ns to nf in the cycle is ignored,
and the F, S, or T function in this G71 block is effective.
Canned cycles include an outer/inner surface cutting cycle (G90), a

threading cycle (G92), and an end face turning cycle (G94).
333
Signal
Chamfering signal
CDZ<G126#7>
[Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering
distance in parameter No.0109.
om
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading
cycle.
When the signal is set to 0, chamfering is executed in the threading cycle.
r.c
Approx. Approx.
45_ 45_
γ γ
e
nt
Fig.11.8 (a) Straight thread cutting cycle Fig.11.8 (b)Taper thread cutting cycle
Set the chamfering distance g to the parameter No.0109. The chamfering

angle is made smaller than 45_ by the remaining pulses in the automatic
ce
acceleration/ deceleration circuit and servo system.
Signal address
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G126 CDZ
.c
Parameter
D Various setting for
w
multiple repetitive
canned cycle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0393 CHKMRC MCQSCH
[Data type] Bit

w
CHKMRC When a target figure other than a monotonically increasing or

monotonically decreasing figure is specified in a multiple repetitive
turning canned cycle (G71, G72):
0 : No alarm occurs.
1 : P/S alarm No. 064 is occurs.
NOTE
This parameter is valid for multiple repetitive turning canned
cycle type I.
334
MCQSCH Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check
to see if the program contains a block that has the sequence number
specified in address Q is:
0 : Not made.
1 : Made. (If the sequence number specified in address Q cannot be
found, an alarm occurs and the canned cycle is not executed.)
D Chamfering distance in
thread cutting cycles
G76 and G92
om
0109 Chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 0.1
r.c
This parameter sets the chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76
and G92.
e
D Depth of cut in multiple
repetitive canned cycles
G71 and G72
0717
nt
Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
ce
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
nc

This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles
G71 and G72.
.c
D Escape in multiple
w
G71 and G72.

0718 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72.
w

w
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm

Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71
and G72.
335
D Escape in multiple
G73
0719 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in X–axis direction
0720 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Z–axis direction

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
om
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 of
an X, then Z axis.
r.c
D Division count in
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G73
e
0721 Division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73
nt
ce
This parameter sets the division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle
G73.
nc
D Return in multiple
canned cycles G74 and
G75
.c
0722 Return in multiple canned cycles G74 and G75

w

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
w

This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74
w
and G75.
336
D Repetition count of final

finishing in multiple
repetitive canned cycle
G76 0723 Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

This parameter sets the repetition count in multiple repetitive canned
om
cycle G76.
D Tool nose angle in

multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
r.c
0724 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

[Unit of data] Degree
e
[Valid data range] 0, 29, 30, 55, 60 and 80
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle
D Minimum depth of cut in

nt
G76.
ce
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
0725 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
nc

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
.c

This parameter sets the minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive
w
canned cycle G76.
D Finishing allowance in
w
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
w
0726 Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch

This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
337
Alarm and message

061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT Address P or Q is not specified in

FOUND IN G70–G73 G70, G71, G72, or G73 command.
Modify the program.
062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1 The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero
G71–G76 or negative value.
2 The repetitive count in G73 is zero or
negative value.
om
3 The negative value is specified to ∆i or
∆k in G74 or G75.
4 A value other than zero is specified to
address U or W, though ∆i or ∆k is zero
in G74 or G75.
5 A negative value is specified to ∆d,
though the relief direction in G74 or G75
r.c
is determined.
6 Zero or a negative value is specified to
the height of thread or depth of cut of
first time in G76.
7 The specified minimum depth of cut in
e
G76 is greater than the height of
thread.
8 An unusable angle of tool tip is speci-
nt
063 SEQUENCE NUMBER
fied in G76.
Modify the program.
The sequence number specified by
ce
NOT FOUND address P in G70, G71, G72, or G73
command cannot be searched.
Modify the program.
064 SHAPE PROGRAM NOT A target shape which is not monotone
MONOTONOUSLY increase or decrease was specified in
nc
a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or

G72).
065 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1 G00 or G01 is not commanded at the
G71–G73 block with the sequence number which
.c
is specified by address P in G71, G72,

or G73 command.
2 Address Z(W) or X(U) was comman-
ded in the block with a sequence num-
w
ber which is specified by address P in

G71 or G72, respectively.
Modify the program.
w
066 IMPROPER G–CODE IN An unallowable G code was comman-

G71–G73 ded beween two blocks specified by
address P in G71, G72, or G73.
w
Modify the program.

067 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI G70, G71, G72, or G73 command
MODE with address P and Q was specified.
Modify the program.
069 FORMAT ERROR IN The final move command in the
G70–G73 blocks specified by P and Q of G70,
G71, G72, or G73 ended with cham-
fering or corner R.
338
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.13.1 Canned cycle
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.2 Multiple repetitive cycle
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
339
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62543EN–1/01
12 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
340
B–62543EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1
DISPLAY/SET
Signal
Relative coordinate
update disable signal
om
DLK<G127#6>
[Function] Setting this signal to 1 disables the updating of relative coordinates.
Subsequently setting this signal to 0 causes the updating of relative
coordinates to be resumed.
r.c
Ladder display signal
e
*LDSP<G119#0>
nt
[Function] This signal enables or disables the display of ladder diagrams.
*LDSP = 1: Does not display ladder diagrams.
*LDSP = 0: Displays ladder diagrams.
ce
NOTE
This signal is enabled only when bit 2 (LDDSPG) of
parameter No. 0060 is set to 1. When LDDSPG is 0,
nc
dynamic ladder display is disabled regardless of the state

of this signal.
.c
Signal address
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G119 *LDSP
w
G127 DLK
w
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0060 LDDSPG
[Data type] Bit

LDDSPG Dynamic ladder display is:
1 : Performed.
0 : Not performed.
341
12.1.1
Servo Tuning Screen
General On the servo tuning screen, parameters required for basic adjustment of
the servo motor and statuses being monitored are listed for each axis.
Parameter
om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0389 SRVSET
[Data type] Bit

SRVSET Servo tuning screen
r.c
0 : Displayed
1 : Not displayed
e
Reference item
nt
FANUC Series 0–TD/MD/GCD/GSD 5.2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(B–62545EN)
Servo Tuning Screen
ce
12.1.2
Spindle Tuning Screen
nc
General On the spindle tuning screen, parameters required for basic adjustment of
the serial spindle and statuses being monitored are listed. The screen is
only for the main spindle connected to the first amplifier.
.c
w
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0389 SPPRM
w
[Data type] Bit type

w
SPPRM Spindle tuning screen

0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–TD/MD/GCD/GSD 6.4 Spindle tuning screen
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(B–62545EN)
342
12.1.3
Self–diagnosis
General When a breakdown occurs, in order to quickly determine the cause, the
following should be done.
First, it has to be determined as to whether the breakdown occurred in the
NC internal section, or the PMC or machine side.
There are times when it appears that a breakdown has occurred even when
the breakdown has not actually occurred. For example, when the
om
machinery ceases to operate because it is waiting for an external signal.
In this case, the condition of the interface between the CNC and PMC, or
between the CNC and the machinery, and the conditions within the CNC
need to be investigated.
The NC checks the following itself.
r.c
1) Abnormality of detection system
2) Abnormality of position control unit
3) Abnormality of servo system
4) Overheat
e
5) Abnormality of CPU
nt
6) Abnormality of ROM
7) Abnormality of RAM
8) Abnormality in data transfer between CRT/MDI
ce
9) Abnormality of part program storage memory
10)Abnormality in tape reader read function
11)Abnormality in data transfer between PMC
nc
Input/output signals from PMC to CNC, or vice versa, and inner status
of the NC can be displayed on the CRT screen.
.c
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.7.2 CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOS-
w
OPERATOR’S MANUAL TIC SCREEN

(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.7.2 CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOS-

w
OPERATOR’S MANUAL TIC SCREEN

(B–62544EN)
w
343
12.1.4
Position Display
Neglect
General Indication of the current position can be suppressed by setting parameters.

(except for basic axes of T series)
om
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0029 DSP3 (T series)
[Data type] Bit
r.c
DSP3 Specifies whether to display the current position of the third axis, as
follows:
1 : Display
0 : Do not display
e
0035
#7
[Data type] Bit

nt #6 #5 #4 #3
NDSP4
#2
NDSP3
#1
NDSPY
#0
NDSPX (M series)
ce
NDSPx Display of the current position for each axis
0 : The current position is displayed.
1 : The current position is not displayed.
nc
.c
w
w
w
344
12.1.5
Run Hour and Parts
Count Display
General This function displays the integrated cycle operation time and the
integrated cutting time on the CRT display screen. The integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time can be altered and preset, using
the MDI.
om
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total
number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number
of parts machined on the CRT screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter
set M code is executed, the count of the total number of parts machined
and the number of parts machined in memory is incremented by 1.
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M
r.c
code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts
machined can be counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts machined reaches the number of parts
required, a signal is output to the PMC side.
e
It is possible to change and preset the number of parts required and the
number of parts machined using MDI.
nt
Signal
ce
Target part count
nc
reached signal
PRTSF<F164#7>
.c
[Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been
machined.
w
[Output condition] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when:

@ Machining of the specified number of parts has been completed.
When 0 (infinity) is set as the required number of parts, this signal is
w
not output.
The PRTSF signal is set to 0 when:
w
@ Machining of the specified number of parts has not yet been

completed.
@ The system is reset.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F164 PRTSF
345
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0040 RWCNT
[Data type] Bit

RWCNT M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts
0 : M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.0219
1 : Only M code specified by parameter No.0219
om
0219 M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts
[Data type] Byte
r.c
[Valid data range] 0 to 255 except 98 and 99
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts
are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed.
e
NOTE
Set value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted for
nt
M00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set.
ce
0600 Number of required parts
Setting entry is acceptable.

nc
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] One piece
.c
This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.

Required parts finish signal PRTSF is output to PMC when the number
w
of machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of

parts is regarded as infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The
PRTSF signal is then not output.
w
0779 Total number of machined parts

w
Setting entry is acceptable.

[Unit of data] One piece
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or
an M code specified by parameter No.0219 is executed.
346
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.11.5.4 Displaying and Setting Run Time,
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Parts Count, and Time
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.11.5.2 Displaying and Setting Run Time,

OPERATOR’S MANUAL Parts Count, and Time
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
347
12.1.6
Displaying Operating
Monitor
General The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and
the serial spindle.
D Display of the servo axes The reading on the load meter can be displayed for servo axes.
om
D Display of the spindle When serial spindles are used, the reading on the load meter and
axes speedometer can be displayed.
D Speedometer Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle
motor.
r.c
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0060 OPMNDP
e
[Data type] Bit
OPMNDP Operating monitor
nt
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
ce
6627 Load meter displayed value for maximum output
[Data type] Word axis

nc
8x86 Rated current parameter (RTCURR)
[Data type] Word axis

.c
Note
w
NOTE
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter
w
8x86 and spindle parameter 6627.

These parameters are set by the automatic setting.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.11.1.6 Operating Monitor Display
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.11.1.6 Operating Monitor Display

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
348
12.1.7
Software Operator’s
Panel
General The software operator’s panel function replaces part of the control
switches on the machine operator’s panel with soft switches which can be
turned on or off using the CRT/MDI of the control unit.
The control switches for the functions listed in the following table can be
om
replaced with soft switches. Also available are eight general–purpose soft
switches which can be used additionally by the machine tool builder.
These eight general–purpose soft switches can be optionally named by the
machine tool builder. For control switches in groups 1 to 7, parameter
(No.0017) can be used to select whether the control switches on the
r.c
machine operator‘s panel or soft switches on the CRT/MDI of the control
unit are used for each group.
Group1 :Mode selection
Group2 :Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse
e
Group3 :Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of
manual pulse magnification
nt
Group4 :Jog feedrate, feedrate override, rapid traverse override
Group5 :Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 :Protect key
ce
Group7 :Feed hold
Group8 :General purpose
The states of all soft switches are informed to the PMC by output signals.
nc
Based on these output signals, the PMC should turn “1” or “0” input
signals related to soft switch functions. In other words, turning “1” the
soft switch assigned to single block operation, for example, does not
cause the control unit to select single block operation internally. Single
.c
block operation is selected when the PMC turns to “1” the input signal for
single block operation, instead.
w
w
w
349
Signal
Group Function Output signal Related input signal
1 Mode selection MD1O<F174#0> MD1

MD2O<F174#1> MD2
MD4O<F174#2> MD4
ZRNO<F174#3> ZRN
2 Jog feed axis se- +X0 to +40 +X to +4

lect –X0 to –40 –X to –4
om
<F177>
Manual rapid tra- RTO<F178#6> RT

verse
3 Handle feed HXO<F174#4> HX

HYO<F174#5> HY
r.c
HZO<F174#6> HZ
H4O<F174#7> H4
Handle feed mag- MP1O<F175#6> MP1

nification MP2O<F175#7> MP2
e
4 Jog feed rate over- JV1O to JV8O *OV1 to *OV8
ride <F175#0 to 3>
nt Feed rate override OV1O to OV8O
<F176#0 to 3>
*OV1 to *OV8
ce
Rapid traverse ROV1O<F175#4> ROV1
override ROV2O<F175#5> ROV2
5 Optional block skip BDTO<F176#4> BDT
Single block SBKO<F176#5> SBK

nc
Machine lock MLKO<F176#6> MLK
Dryrun DRNO<F176#7> DRN

.c
6 Protect key KEYO<F178#5> KEY
7 Feed hold SPO<F178#7> *SP

w
8 General purpose OUT0 to OUT7

(Switch from 1st <F171>
line to the 8th line
on CRT)
w
w
350
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F171 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
F174 H4O HZO HYO HXO ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
F175 MP2O MP1O ROV2O ROV1O JV8O JV4O JV2O JV1O
F176 DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO OV8O OV4O OV2O OV1O
F177 –4O +4O –ZO +ZO –YO +YO –XO +XO
om
F178 SPO RTO KEYO
Parameter
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0017 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1
[Data type] Bit
e
OP1 Mode selection on software operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
nt
1 : Performed
OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse buttons on software
operator’s panel
ce
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP3 Manual pulse generator’s axis select and manual pulse generator’s
magnification switches on software operator’s panel
nc
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP4 Jog feedrate override, feedrate override, and rapid traverse override
.c
switches on software operator’s panel

0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
w
OP5 Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, and dry run switches on
software operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
w
1 : Performed
OP6 Protect key on software operator’s panel
w
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP7 Feed hold on software operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
351
0130 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel [↑]
0131 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel [↓]
0132 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel [→]
0133 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel [←]
0134 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel [ ]
om
[Data type] Byte
r.c
On software operator’s panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow
key on the CRT/MDI panel when jog feed is performed.
e
Set value Feed axis and direction
0 Not moved Arrow keys on the CRT/MDI panel
2
nt
First axis, positive direction
First axis, negative direction 7 8 9

ce
3 Second axis, positive direction
4 Second axis, negative direction

4 5 6
5 Third axis, positive direction
nc
6 Third axis, negative direction
7 Fourth axis, positive direction 1 2 3

.c
8 Fourth axis, negative direction

w
Example Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes
in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given
below. [8 °] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2 ±] to the negative
w
direction of the Z axis, [6³] to the positive direction of the X axis [4²]
to the negative direction of the X axis, [1¼] to the positive direction of
the Y axis, [9½] to the negative direction of the Y axis
w
Parameter No.0130 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)

Parameter No.0131 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.0132 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.0133 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.0134 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.0135 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.0136 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No.0137 = 0 (Not used)
352
0140 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator’s panel
0203 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator’s panel
[Data type] Byte
Example
om
OPERATOR’S PANEL O1234 N5678
These parameters set SIGNAL 1 : JOFF ON

the names of the gen- SIGNAL 2 : OFF JON
eral–purpose switches SIGNAL 3 : OFF JON
SIGNAL 4 : JOFF ON
r.c
(SIGNAL 1 through
SIGNAL 5 : JOFF ON
SIGNAL 8) on the SIGNAL 6 : JOFF ON
software operator’s SIGNAL 7 : JOFF ON
panel as described be- SIGNAL 8 : OFF JON
low.
e
nt
These names are set using character codes that are displayed in parameter
Nos. 0140 to 0203.
Parameter No.0140:
ce
Sets the character code (083) corresponding to S of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.0141:
Sets the character code (073) corresponding to I of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.0142:
nc
Sets the character code (071) corresponding to G of SIGNAL 1.

Parameter No.0143:
Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.0144:
.c
Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1.

Parameter No.0145:
w
Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1.

Parameter No.0146:
Sets the character code (032) corresponding to (space) of SIGNAL 1.
w
Parameter No.0147:
Sets the character code (049) corresponding to 1 of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter Nos.0148 to 0155:
w
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 2 shown in the figure above.

353

The character codes are shown in character code list on the following
page.
Character to Code Correspondence Table

Char- Char-
om
Code Comment Code Comment
acter acter
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
r.c
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 ” 034 Quotation marks
e
H 072 # 035 Sharpe
I 073 $ 036 Dollar mark
nt
K
J
L
074
075
076
%
&
’
037
038
039
Percent
Ampersand
Apostrophe
ce
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis
O 079 * 042 Asterisk
nc
P 080 + 043 Positive sign

Q 081 , 044 Comma
R 082 – 045 Negative sign
S 083 . 046 Period
.c
T 084 / 047 Slash

U 085 : 058 Colon
w
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon

W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket
w
X 088 = 061 Equal sign

Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Question mark
w
0 048 @ 064 Commercial at mark

1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket
2 050 ^ 092
3 051 ¥ 093 Yen mark
4 052 ] 094 Right square bracket
5 053 _ 095 Underline
354
Note
NOTE
1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft
switches. When the mode for DNC operation is to be
equipped, for example, all control switches for mode
selection should be on the machine operator’s panel or a
general–purpose soft switch should be used to select the
mode for DNC operation.
om
Soft switches available for mode selection
⋅ Manual data input
⋅ Automatic operation
⋅ Memory edit
⋅ Manual handle feed / incremental feed
⋅ Jog feed
r.c
⋅ Manual reference position return
2 When the soft switch for feed hold is turned on, output signal
SPO is turned to “1”. At this time, the PMC turns feed hold
signal *SP to “0”.
e
In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for feed hold
is turned off, output signal SPO is turned “0” and the PMC
nt
turns signal *SP to “1”. For soft switches other than feed
hold and general soft switches, when an output signal
informing the state of a soft switch is turned to “1”, the
corresponding input signal is turned to “1”.
ce
nc
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.11.6.2 Displaying and Setting the Soft-
OPERATOR’S MANUAL ware Operator’s Panel
.c
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.11.6.2 Displaying and Setting the Soft-

OPERATOR’S MANUAL ware Operator’s Panel
w
(B–62544EN)
w
w
355
12.1.8
Multi–language Display
General The CRT or LCD screens are displayed in a parameter–set language.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
0023 DSPN DITA DCHI DFRN DGRM DJPN
[Data type] Bit type
NOTE
When this parameter is set, turn off the power once.
r.c
The language used in the display on the CRT is selected.
e
DSPN DITA DCHI DFRN DGRM DJPN CRT display language
0 0 0 0 0 0 English
nt
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
Japanese
German
French
ce
0 0 1 0 0 0 Chinese (Taiwanese)
0 1 0 0 0 0 Italian
1 0 0 0 0 0 Spanish
nc
.c
w
w
w
356
12.2
EDIT
12.2.1
Part Program Storage
Length
General One of the following part program length.

M series (m) 10 — 80 120 320
om
T series (m) 10 40 — — —
Alarm and message
r.c
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.

MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs,
then retry.
e
Reference item
nt
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a List
ce
OPERATOR’S MANUAL of Programs
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a List

nc
(B–62544EN)
12.2.2
.c
No. of Registered
Programs
w
General No. of registered programs is 63.

w
Alarm and message

w
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored

exceeded 63. Delete unnecessary
programs and execute program
registeration again.
357
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a List
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a List

(B–62544EN)
om
12.2.3
Memory Protection Key
General A key called the data protection key is used to prevent part programs from
r.c
being registered or deleted erroneously.
Signal
e
Memory protection
signal
nt
KEY<G122#3>
ce
[Operation] When a signal is set to 0, the associated operations are disabled.
When a signal is set to 1, the associated operations are enabled.
nc
Signal address
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G122 KEY
w
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
w
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
358
12.2.4
Password Function
General The password function locks PRG9 (bit 4 of parameter No.0010), used
to protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999, by using the PASSWD (No.0797)
and KEYWD (No.0798) parameters. When PRG9 is locked, PRG9
cannot be set to 0. Therefore, the protection for programs numbered 9000
to 9999 cannot be released unless the correct keyword is entered.
om
NE9 is locked when different values are set in the PASSWD and KEYWD
parameters. The values set in the two parameters are not displayed. NE9
is unlocked when the value preset in the PASSWD parameter is set in the
KEYWD parameter.
r.c
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 PRG9
[Data type] Bit
e
PRG9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999
nt
0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
The following edit operations are disabled:
ce
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.)
nc
(3) Program number search

(4) Program editing after registration
(5) Program registration
.c
(6) Program collation

(7) Displaying programs
w
0797 Password(PASSWD)
w

Set a secret number to this parameter. Its value is not displayed.
w
CAUTION
Once a key is lock, parameter PRG9 cannot become 0 and
PASSWD cannot be changed unless you perform an unlock
operation or perform the memory all clear operation.
Special care should be exercised when setting the
PASSWD parameter.
359
0798 Keyword(KEYWD)

When the value set as the password (set in parameter No. 3210) is set to
this parameter, the locked state is released and the user can now modify
the password and the value set in bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202
becomes 0.
NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the
om
power is turned off, this parameter is set to 0.
12.2.5
r.c
Background Editing
General Editing a program while executing another program is called background

editing. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing
e
(foreground editing).
A program edited in the background should be registered in foreground
nt
program memory.
During background editing, all programs cannot be deleted at once.
ce
Alarm and message
nc
??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same num-

ber as the P/S alarm that occurs in or-
dinary program edit. (070, 071, 072,
073, 074, 085,086,087, and etc.)
140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in
.c
the background a program being se-

lected in the foreground.
Use background editing correctly.
w
NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line
w
of the background edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm

screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.
w
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.9.6 BACKGROUND EDITING
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.9.5 BACKGROUND EDITING

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
360
B–62543EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
361
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62543EN–1/01
13.1
READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE
General The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher

interface.
1. Program
2. Offset data
om
3. Parameter
4. Custom macro common variables.
5. PMC D area data
r.c
Parameter This CNC has one channels of input/output device interfaces. The
input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel
connected to that device in setting parameter I/O.
The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an
e
input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in
parameters for that channel in advance.
nt
For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output
device data are provided.
The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device
ce
interface parameters for the channels.
Input/output channel number

↓
nc
I/O 0002#0 Stop bit and other data

I/O =0 Number specified for the
Specify a channel for 0038#6, #7
(channel 1) input/output device
an input/output device.
.c
0552 Baud rate

I/O =0 : Channel1
0012#0 Stop bit and other data
=1 : Channel1
I/O =1
w
0038#6, #7 Number specified for the

0553 Baud rate
w
Setting entry
w
TVON TV check
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
ISO Code used for data output
0 : EIA code
1 : ISO code
362
This CNC
MAIN CPU BOARD
Channel 1
JD5A
RS–232–C
om
ÂÂÂÂÂ
r.c
Reader/puncher
I/ O CHANNEL=0
or
e
I/ O CHANNEL=1
0018
nt
(1) Parameters common to all channels
#7 #6
TVC
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
[Data type] Bit
TVC Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0 : Not performed
nc
1 : Performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0070 ICR
.c
[Data type] Bit

ICR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
w
0 : LF, CR, CR are output.

1 : Only LF is output.
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0075 IONUL
w
[Data type] Bit

IONUL Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code
0 : An alarm is generated.
1: The NULL code is ignored.
363
(2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O =0)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0002 NFED RSASCI STP2
[Data type] Bit

STP2 The number of stop bits
0: 1
1: 2
RSASCI Code used at data input
0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished)
om
1 : ASCII code
NFED Feed before and after the data at data output
0 : Output
1 : Not output
r.c
NOTE
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are
used, set NFED to 1.
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0038
[Data type] Bit

nt
RSCMD1 DEVFL1
Set the specification of the input/output device for I/O = 0 or 1, using the
ce
values shown in Table 13.1 (a).
Table 13.1 (a)
(I/O=0, 1)
nc
RSCMD* DEVFL* I/O device used

0 0 Bubble cassette
0 1 Floppy cassette
.c
1 0 RS232C, PPR
1 1 New type interface
w
0552 Baud rate (when the I/O is set to 0)

w
[Data type] Byte

Set baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL
w
is set to 0, with a set value in Table 13.1 (b).

Table 13.1 (b)
Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 50 7 600
2 100 8 1200
3 110 9 2400
4 150 10 4800
5 200 11 9600
6 300
364
(3) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O =1)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 NFED RSASCI STP2
[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used when I/O is set to 1. The meanings of the bits
are the same as for parameter 0002.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
0038 RSCMD1 DEVFL1
[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O
is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table 13.1 (a).
r.c
0553 Baud rate (when I/O is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte
e
Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL
nt
is set to 1, with a value in Table 13.1 (b).
ce
Alarm and message
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect

nc
parity was input).

Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters
in a block is odd). This alarm will be
.c
generated only when the TV check is

effective.
085 COMMUNICATION ER- When entering data in the memory by
w
ROR using Reader / Puncher interface, an

overrun, parity or framing error was
generated. The number of bits of input
data or setting of baud rate or specifi-
w
cation No. of I/O unit is incorrect.

086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by
w

was turned off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable
tive.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory by
using Reader / Puncher interface,
though the read terminate command
is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or
P.C.B. is defective.
365
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
366
13.2
EXTERNAL I/O
DEVICE CONTROL
General It is possible to request from the outside that a program be registered,

collated, or output.
D Registeration/Collation
As triggered by the external read start signal EXRD, the background
edit function saves programs from an external input unit onto tape and
om
verifies them.
D Output
As triggered by the external punch start signal EXWT, the background
edit function outputs all programs stored in the part program memory
to an external output device.
r.c
Signal
e
External read start signal
EXRD<G134#1> nt
[Function] Programs are registered through the reader/punch interface or remote
ce
buffer. Or the read programs are collated with programs already stored
in the part program memory.
[Operation] When this signal becomes logical 1, the CNC operates as follows:
D In all modes other than the MDI mode, the background edit function
nc
reads programs from an external input device, and register them on the
part program memory or collates them with programs already
registered in the part program memory.
(The memory protection key KEY<G122#3> determines whether to
.c
register or collate.)
D Bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No.0045 selects whether to register all
programs in a file or one program at a time. Bit 0 (RDL) of parameter
w
No.0045 can be used to delete all programs previously stored in the

part program memory. However, it is impossible to delete programs
protected by bit 4 (PRG9) of parameter No.0010 and bit 2 (PRG8) of
w
parameter No.0389.
D When programs are being registed or collated, the read/punch busy
w
signal (RPBSY) is kept to be logical 1.

D When the background processing–activated signal BGEACT is
logical 1 (for example, during background editing or MDI mode), the
external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
D When programs are being registered or collated, if the system is reset
or the external read/punch stop signal EXSTP becomes logical 1, the
registeration or collation is discontinued.
D If the foreground processing is already using the reader/punch
interface (for example, during DNC operation or program reading in
the edit mode), the external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
367
D There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can

be registered or collated. For example, a program cannot be registered
or collated, if a program with the same program number is being
executed in the foreground processing.
External punch start

signal
EXWT<G134#3>
om
[Function] Programs stored in the part program memory are output to an external unit
via the reader/punch interface.
D In all modes other than the MDI mode, the background edit function
r.c
outputs all programs stored in the part program memory to an external
output device.
D When programs are being output, the read/punch busy signal RPBSY
becomes logical 1.
e
D When the background processing–activated signal BGEACT is
logical 1 (for example, during background editing or MDI mode), the
nt
external punch start signal EXWT is ignored.
D When programs are being output, if the system is reset or the external
read/punch stop signal EXSTP becomes logical 1, the output is
ce
discontinued.
D If the foreground processing is already using the reader/punch
interface (for example, during DNC operation or program reading in
the edit mode), the external punch start signal EXWT is ignored.
nc
D There are some other conditions to determine whether all programs

can be output. For example, a program cannot be output, if it is
running or protected by bit 4 (PRG9) of parameter No.0010 and bit 2
(PRG8) of parameter No.0389.
.c
w
External read/punch stop

signal
EXSTP<G134#2>
w

[Function] When the external read/punch stop signal becomes logical 1, it stops
w
program registeration, collation, or output via the reader/punch interface

and program registeration and collation via the remote buffer.
D The program registeration, collation or output triggered by the
external read or punch start signal is stopped immediately.
368
Background editing
signal
BGEACT<F180#4>
[Function] This signal indicates that the background edit function is operating.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1 when:
D The [BG EDIT] soft key is pressed to put the CNC in the background
edit mode.
om
D The MDI mode is selected.
D The external read or punch start signal starts program registeration,
collation, or output.
This signal becomes logical 0 when:
D The [BG END] soft key is pressed to terminate the background edit
r.c
mode.
D The CNC shifts from the MDI mode to another mode.
D Program registeration or output triggered by the external read or punch
start signal ends either normally or abnormally (reset or requested by
e
the EXSTP signal).
Read/punch busy signal

RPBSY<F180#2>
nt
ce
[Function] This signal indicates that program registeration, collation, or output
triggered by the external read or punch start signal is under way.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1, when:
nc
D The external read or punch start signal triggers program registeration,

collation, or output.
This signal becomes logical 0, when:
.c
D Program registeration collation or output triggered by the external read

or punch start signal ends either normally or abnormally (reset or
requested by the EXSTP signal).
w
Read/punch alarm signal

w
RPALM<F180#3>
w
[Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program
registeration, collation, or output triggered by the external read or punch
start signal.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1, when:
D An alarm condition occurs during program registeration, collation, or
output triggered by the external read or punch start signal.
This signal becomes logical 0, when:
D The system is reset, or the external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is
input.
369
Signal Address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G134 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F180 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY
Parameter
om
Input/output channel number
↓
I/O 0002#0 Stop bit and other data
I/O =0 Number specified for the
0038#6, #7
r.c
Specify a channel for input/output device
(channel 1)
an input/output device. 0552 Baud rate
I/O =0 : Channel1
0012#0 Stop bit and other data
=1 : Channel1
e
I/O =1
0038#6, #7 Number specified for the
nt 0553 Baud rate
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 PRG9
[Data type] Bit

nc

0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
.c

(2) Program punching (Even when punching of all programs is
w
specified, programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not

punched.)
w

w

370
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015 REP
[Data type] Bit

REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is
the same as that of an existing program
0 : An alarm is generated.
1 : The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered.
Note that if the existing program is protected from being edited, it is
om
not deleted, and an alarm is generated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0019 NEOP
r.c
[Data type] Bit
NEOP With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0045
[Data type] Bit

nt RAL RDL
ce
RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control
0 : The new program is registered following the programs already
registered.
1 : All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is
nc
registered.
Note that programs which are protected from being edited are not
deleted.
RAL When programs are registered through the reader/puncher interface
.c
0 : All programs are registered.

1 : Only one program is registered.
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0389 PRG8
w
[Data type] Bit

w
0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
371

Alarm and message

079 BP/S ALARM In memory or program collation,a pro-
om
gram in memory does not agree with
that read from an external I/O device.
Check both the programs in memory
and those from the external device.
085 BP/S ALARM When entering data in the memory by
using Reader / Puncher interface, an
r.c
overrun, parity or framing error was
generated. The number of bits of input
data or setting of baud rate or specifi-
cation No. of I/O unit is incorrect.
e
was turned off.
nt Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable
tive.
ce
using reader /puncher interface,
though the read terminate command
is specified, input does not stop after
10 characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B.
nc
is defective.
180 BP/S ALARM Remote buffer connection alarm has
generated. Confirm the number of
cables, parameters and I/O device.
.c
Reference item
w
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
w
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
w
(B–62544EN)
372
13.3
EXTERNAL
PROGRAM INPUT
General By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loaded
from an input unit into CNC memory.
When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy
Cassette is being used, a file can be searched for using the workpiece
number search signals, after which the program can be loaded into CNC
memory.
om
Signal
r.c
External program input
start signal
MINP<G120#0>(M series)/
e
<G117#0>(T series)
nt
[Function] This signal starts loading of a program from an input unit into CNC
memory.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
ce
D When memory operation mode is set, but no automatic operation is
being performed and program loading is not inhibited by the setting
of the memory protection key, the CNC deletes all currently loaded
nc
programs, then loads a program from the external input unit into CNC
memory.
D When the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy Cassette is being
used as the input unit, a desired file can be searched for using the
.c
workpiece number search signals (PN1 to PN8), after which the

program can be loaded into CNC memory.
File numbers are indicated using the workpiece number search signals,
w
as follows:
w
w
373
Workpiece no. search signal

File no.
PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
0 0 0 0 00 (*)
0 0 0 1 01
0 0 1 0 02
0 0 1 1 03
0 1 0 0 04
0 1 0 1 05
om
0 1 1 0 06
0 1 1 1 07
1 0 0 0 08
1 0 0 1 09
r.c
1 0 1 0 10
1 0 1 1 11
1 1 0 0 12
e
1 1 0 1 13
1 1 1 0 14
nt 1 1 1 1 15
(*) File No. 00 is used for special specification; specifying file No. 00
ce
means that no search operation is to be performed. Therefore, numbers
01 to 15 can be assigned to files.
[Application] This function is applicable to the following case:
When a program to be used for machining is too large to be loaded into
nc
CNC memory, the program is divided into several segments. These

segments are loaded into memory and executed, one by one.
.c
w
w
w
374
In this case, the general operation flow is as shown below.
Press the cycle start button.
Issuing the external program input start

signal (MINP) starts program input.
om
The automatic operation mode signal (STL)
is set to 1, then program input starts.
r.c
When input terminates, the STL
signal is set to 0.
e
nt A change to 0 in the STL signal is
detected, then CNC operation starts.
ce
Machining by the CNC
nc
Yes
End of machining?
Operation terminates.
No
.c
A miscellaneous function, previously added to the

end of the program, is executed. An appropriate
w
code is defined for this miscellaneous function in the

machine to input the next program.
w
This miscellaneous function is detected, then

operation is interrupted by a single block
w
signal or automatic operation stop signal.
The STL signal is set to 0. Then, input of

the next program is started according to the
MINP signal.
375
The timing chart for data reading is shown below.
Execution of a machining program
M code command for the Mxxx

next program input
Code signal M00AM31
Strobe signal MF
Single–block signal SBK
om
Completion signal FIN
Cycle start lamp signal STL
External program input MINP

start signal
r.c
Program input
Automatic operation ST
start signal
e
CAUTION
ntThe M code used for input of the next program must not be
buffered.
ce
NOTE
While a program is being input, the automatic operation
nc
mode signal STL is set to 1. Upon termination of program

input, STL is set to 0.
.c
Signal Address
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 MINP (M series)
w
G117 MINP (T series)

w
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0011 MCINP
[Data type] Bit

MCINP Specifies whether to load a program into memory according to the
external program input start signal (MINP).
0 : Does not load a program into memory.
1 : Loads a program into memory.
376
Note
NOTE
A program can be input according to the external program
input start signal only when the program has only one
program number.
To read programs having multiple program numbers, reset
the CNC each time the CNC reads one program. After
reset, search for a desired program by using the workpiece
om
number search signals, then input the program according to
the external program input start signal.
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
377
14. MEASUREMENT B–62543EN–1/01
14 MEASUREMENT
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
378
B–62543EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
14.1
SKIP FUNCTION (FOR
0–GCD/GSD ONLY)
14.1.1
Skip Function
General Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move

following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input
om
during the execution of this command, execution of the command is
interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed
but specified with a signal from the machine, for example, in grinding. It
is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece.
r.c
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a
custom macro because they are stored in the custom macro system
variable #5061 to #5064, as follows:
#5061 X axis coordinate value
e
#5062 Z axis coordinate value
#5063 3rd axis coordinate value
nt
#5064 4th axis coordinate value
ce
Signal
Skip signal
nc
SKIP<X008#7>
[Function] This signal terminates skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip
.c
signal turns to “1” in a block containing G31 is stored in a custom macro

variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same
time.
w
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to “1”, the control unit functions as described
below.
w
(1) When a block contains a skip cutting command G31, the control unit
reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time.
The control unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance
w
that the block was supposed to be moved.

(2) The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for its state. So,
if a skip signal continues to be “1”, a skip condition is assumed to be
satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting is specified.
379
NOTE
1 The skip signal requires at least 10 msec.
2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP<X008#7> from
the machine tool; the PMC no longer requires to process the
signal.
3 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the
signal terminal SKIP<X008#7> corresponding to the skip
signal as a general purpose input signal.
om
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
r.c
X008 SKIP
e
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015
[Data type] Bit

nt SKPF
ce
SKPF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip
command
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
nc
Alarm and message

.c

G31 tool nose radius compensation mode.
w
(T series) Modify the program.

G31 cutter compensation mode.
w
(M series) Modify the program.

w
Warning
WARNING
Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic
acceleration/deceleration (enabled with parameter
No.0015#3 SKPF=1) when the feedrate per minute is
specified, allowing for reducing an error in the position of the
tool when a skip signal is input. These functions are enabled
when the feedrate per rotation is specified.
380
Note
NOTE
1 The G31 block is set to G01 mode. The feedrate is specified
by an F code.
2 When the measuring motion is made by utilizing the skip
signal, program a constant feedrate; otherwise, if the
feedrate changes, the measuring error will be noticeable.
With a constant feedrate, the maximum measuring error can
be calculated as follows:
om
ERRmax = Fm × 1 × 4
60 1000
ERRmax : Maximum measuring error (mm or inch)

Fm : Measuring feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
r.c
3 Overtravel amount Qmax after skip signal has been turned
to ”1” is calculated by the following:
Qmax = Fm × 1 × 1
e
(20 + Tc + Ts)
60 1000
ntQmax
Fm
Tc
: Overtravel amount (mm or inch)
: Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
: Cutting time constant (ms) 1
ce
Ts : Servo time constant (ms) ( )
loop gain
nc
Reference item
FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD II.4.5 SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
.c
(B–62574EN)
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD II.4.6 SKIP FUNCTION(G31)

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
w
(B–62544EN)
w
w
381
14.1.2
Multi–step Skip
(0–GCD)
General In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multistage skip function

stores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal (4
points) is turned on.
Also in a block specifying Q1 to Q4 after G04, the multistage skip
function skips a dwell when the skip signal (4 points) has turned on.
om
A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size measuring
instrument can be used to skip programs being executed.
In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough
machining to spark-out can be performed automatically by applying a
skip signal each time rough machining, semi-fine machining, fine-
r.c
machining, or spark-out operation is completed.
Signal
e
Skip signal
SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP4
<X008#7, #2 to #4>
nt
ce
[Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip
signal turns to “1” in a command program block containing G31P1 (or
G31), G31P2, or G31P3, G31P4 is stored in a custom macro variable, and
the move command of the block is terminated at the same time.
nc
Furthermore, in a block containing G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3 or

G04Q4, the dwell command of the block is terminated.
In either case, until all other commands (such as miscellaneous functions)
of the block are completed, machining never proceeds to the next block.
.c
Which of the four skip signals is applicable to blocks containing the G

codes can be determined by parameter (No.0033 to 0035). The eight skip
w
signals can correspond to the G codes on a one-to-one basis. One skip

signal can also be made applicable to multiple G codes. Conversely,
multiple skip signals can be made applicable to one G code.
w
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to “1”, the control unit functions as described
below.
w
(1) When a block contains a G code from (G31, G31P1 to P4) for skip
cutting, and the skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to
the command, the control unit reads and stores the current position of
the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops the axis, then
cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be
moved.
(2) When a block contains a G04, or G04Q1 to Q4 code for dwell, and the
skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command,
the control unit stops dwell operation, and cancels any remaining
dwell time.
382
(3) The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for its state. So,
if a skip signal continues to be “1”, a skip condition is assumed to be
satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell operation is
specified.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X008 SKIP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
om
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0033 P2S4 P2S3 P2S2 P2S1 P1S4 P1S3 P1S2 P1S1
0034 P4S4 P4S3 P4S2 P4S1 P3S4 P3S3 P3S2 P3S1
r.c
0035 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
[Data type] Bit
e
P1S1 to P1S4, P2S1 to P2S4, P3S1 to P3S4, P4S1 to P4S4, DS1 to DS4
Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or
G31P1 to G31P4) and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are
nt
issued with the multi–step skip function.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input
signals, and commands.
ce
The settings of the bits have the following meanings:
0 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled.
1 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled.
nc
Multi–step skip function
Command G31
G31P2 G31P2 G31P4
Input G31P1 G04
G04Q2 G04Q2 G04Q4
G04Q1
.c
signal
SKIP 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 DS1
SKIP2 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 DS2

w

w

w
383
Note
NOTE
The skip cutting commands G31 P1, G31 P2, G31 P3, and
G31 P4 are all identical, except that they correspond to
different skip signals. The tool moves along the specified
axis until the SKIP signal is set to “1” or the end point of the
specified movement is reached, while performing linear
interpolation. The feedrate is specified in the program. G31
om
is the same as G31 P1.
Dwell commands G04, G04 Q1, G04 Q2, G04 Q3, and G04
Q4 are also identical, except that they correspond to
different skip signals.
When no Qn command follows the G04 command, and
when DS1 to DS4, bit 0 to bit 3 of parameter No.0035, are
r.c
not set, dwell is not skipped.
e
Reference item
nt
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
II.4.7 Multi–step (G31)
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
384
14.1.3
Torque Limit Skip
(0–GCD)
General Specifying a move command after G31 P99 (or G31 P98) with a motor
torque limit set (for example, specifying a torque limit on the PMC
window) allows the same cutting feed as that specified with G01 to be
performed.
om
While the tool is moved with a motor torque limit set during cutting feed,
skip is performed when a signal indicating that the motor torque limit has
been reached is input as a result of an operation such as pushing something
against the motor.
D Basic operations When the motor torque limit is reached during the execution of G31 P99,
r.c
the execution of the next block starts without executing the remaining
portion of the move command.
When no torque limit is specified before executing G31 P99, the move
e
command is executed without performing the skip operation.
For G31 P99, the coordinate, indicating the position to which the tool is
nt
to be positioned after skip, is stored in the system variable of the custom
macro.
ce
Alarm occurs if errors have accumulated to an amount (32767) that cannot
be corrected in one distribution before the torque–limit–reached signal is
input during the execution of G31 P99.
nc
Signal
.c
Torque limit reached

signals
TORQ1 to TORQ3
w
<F170#0 to #2>
w
[Function] Indicates that the torque limit has been reached.

[Output condition] Set to “1” when:
w
· The torque limit has been reached for the corresponding axis.
Set to “0” when:
· The torque limit has not been reached for the corresponding axis
Numbers 1 to 8 indicate the corresponding axis numbers.
385
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F170 TOQR3 TOQR2 TORQ1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0389 TSKECR
om
[Data type] Bit
TSKECR When a skip operation is performed by the G31 P99 command used to
specify torque limit skip:
0 : Corrects servo errors. (1)
1 : Does not correct servo errors. (2)
r.c
200
e
Position stored
Position stored in the system
in the system variable when
variable when
TSKECR = 0
nt TSKECR = 1
ce
100
(1) Error amount (2)

nc
Feed stops Torque limit Specified value

.c
100 200 300 400 500

w
w
w
386
Alarm and message

015 TOO MANY AXES COM- In the block including the command
MANDED for the skip function (G31 P99/P98),
to be executed under the control of
the torque limit reach signal, no axis
move command is specified, or two or
more axes are specified.
In a single block, specify one axis
om
only.
244 P/S ALARM When the skip function to be
executed under the control of the
torque limit reach signal is enabled,
an error value (32767) that exceeds
the maximum return value that can be
r.c
handled with a single distribution is
detected before input of the torque
limit reach signal.
Retry the processing after changing
the axis feedrate, torque limit, or other
conditions.
e
Warning
nt
ce
WARNING
Specify a torque limit before G31 P99. If G31 P99/P98 is
executed with no torque limit specified, the move command
is executed without a skip operation.
nc
.c
Caution
CAUTION
w
1 Before specifying G31 P99, cancel tool–tip radius

compensation with G40.
2 Set the SKPF bit (bit 3 of parameter No.0015) to 0 to disable
w
the dry run, override, and automatic

acceleration/deceleration functions for the G31 skip
command.
w
387
14.2
ENTERING
COMPENSATION
VALUES
14.2.1
Input of Offset Value
Measured A (T series)
om
General This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece
diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard.
First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or in the cross direction
manually. When the position record signal is turned “1” (prepare a button
r.c
on the machine operator’s panel) on completion of the cutting, the work-
piece coordinate value of X axis and Z axis at that time is recorded in the
CNC. Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and measure the diame-
ter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction or measure the distance
from the standard face if the cutting was on the facing. (The standard face
e
is made as Z = 0.) When the measured value is entered on the offset value
display screen, NC inputs the difference between the input measured
nt
value and the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset value of the
offset number.
ce
If you release the tool without moving the tool in the axis along which an
offset value is entered but moves the tool along the other axis, an offset
value can be set without using the position record signal.
The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of
nc
directly inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used
when the coordinate system planned in the program does not match with
the coordinate system actually set.
.c
The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except a
difference of using the standard tool on the work shift screen.
w
Signal
w
Position record signal

w
PRC<G103#6>
[Function] This signal is prepared for the function of input of offset value measured
A. It is used to store in the control unit the data on the positions of the
tool for tentative cutting. After measuring a dimension of the workpiece,
input the measured value by the specified manual operation. The
difference is then stored as the specified tool compensation value.
[Operation] The control unit stores the current position along X and Z axes when the
signal turns to “1”.
388
NOTE
To use this signal, set parameter MORB (No.0015#4) to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G103 PRC
om
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0015 MORB
r.c
[Data type] Bit
MORB Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift
value
e
0 : Not use a PRC signal
1 : Uses a PRC signal
Reference item
nt
ce
FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD III.11.4.2 Direct Input of Tool Offset Measured
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62544EN)
nc
14.2.2
Input of Measured
.c
Workpiece Origin
Offsets
w
General By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate

system from a programmed work coordinate system, the workpiece zero
point offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a command value
w
matches the actual measurement.

w
389
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62543EN–1/01
15 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
390
B–62543EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
15.1
PMC AXIS
CONTROL/PMC AXIS
SPEED CONTROL
FUNCTION
General The PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of the CNC.
In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the
CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying moving
om
distance and feedrate, from the PMC. This enables the control of turrets,
pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes of
the CNC.
Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input
signal provided for that particular axis.
r.c
The PMC can directly control the following operations:
(1) Rapid traverse with moving distance specified
(2) Cutting feed – feed per minute, with moving distance specified
e
(3) Cutting feed – feed per revolution, with moving distance specified
(T series)
nt
(4) Skip – feed per minute, with moving distance specified
(5) Dwell
ce
(6) Jog feed
(7) Reference position return
(8) 1st reference position return
(9) 2nd reference position return
nc
(10) External pulse synchronization – Main spindle

(11) External pulse synchronization – first manual handle
(12) Feedrate control
.c
(13) Auxiliary function

Two specification types are applicable to PMC axis control: specification
A and specification B.
w
When specification A is used with the M series, the X axis, Y axis, Z axis,
or fourth axis is controlled using the DI/DO signals of a PMC command
group.
w
With the T series, the third axis is controlled using the DI/DO signals of
two PMC command groups.
w
When specification B is used, an arbitrary axis is selected from among all

the axes and controlled using the DI/DO signals of two PMC command
groups. In other words, an axis can be selected from the available axes,
then controlled using commands issued through two paths. From the two
PMC command paths, the path to be used is selected for each axis by
parameter setting. When multiple axes are simultaneously selected for
one command path, the tool can be moved along these axes
synchronously.
When the increment system is set to 1/10, only 6.5 m/min can be specified
as the maximum cutting speed for the PMC axis.
391
If this restriction proves inconvenient, set parameter No. 052 so that the
least input increment for the PMC axis equals the standard specification
(0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch, 0.001 deg).
Specification Motion along a PMC controlled axis is independent of the CNC
controlled axes (basic and additional axes) or other PMC controlled axes.
Specification A or B is selected by setting bit 6 (EACSB) of parameter
No. 0032.
Controlled axis M series: One of the X axis, Y axis, Z axis, and fourth axis can be selected
<Specification A> as a controlled axis by setting bits 0 and 1 (EAC0 and EAC1)
om
of parameter No. 0030. The corresponding signal group is
group A.
T series: The third axis can be controlled. The control signals used
belong to group A.
PMC axis configuration
r.c
Master PC board
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis
T series f EAC1 EAC0
e
f 0 0
f 0 1
nt
M series
i
f
f
1
1
0
1
ce
<Specification B> An arbitrary axis can be selected from the X axis to the fourth axis (M
series) or from the X axis to the third axis (T series) to perform
simultaneous control.
nc
NOTE
For controlling the fourth axis, expansion I/O C7 is required.
.c
Controlled axis (a) The controlled axis is not affected by the mode select signal.
(b) When the fourth axis is to be controlled, the fourth–axis interface
option is required.
w
(c) By setting bit 5 (EAXOV) of parameter No. 0063, the same signals
as those used in the CNC can be used to control rapid traverse
w
override, cutting speed override, and dry run operations, in the same
way as for the CNC.
By setting bit 7 (EAXOVE) of parameter No. 0078, the signals
w
dedicated to PMC axis control can be used to perform override and

dry run operations, independently of the CNC.
(d) The CNC–controlled feed hold, single block, reset, and interlock
functions are not effective for the PMC controlled axis. However,
control similar to such CNC control is enabled by manipulating the
PMC signals.
(e) The CNC–controlled machine lock and emergency stop functions
are enabled.
Machine lock, however, can be disabled by setting bit 4 (PNGMLK)
of parameter No.0032.
392
(f) Where control of the same axis is switched between the CNC and
PMC, when the axis is controlled by the PMC, the actual speed can
be indicated without including motion along the PMC controlled
axis by setting bit 6 (AXPCF) of parameter No.0062.
Controlled axis in (a) When the controlled axis is the fourth axis, the fourth axis ignore
M series signal (X004.7 4NG) is enabled.
(b) When the controlled axis is the fourth axis, manual feed control
cannot be performed by PMC axis control alone if the additional axis
option for the fourth axis is not provided.
om
(c) In the same way as for machine lock, the Z–axis command cancel
signal (G103.6 ZNG) is enabled.
(d) The setting parameter mirror image function (mirror X, mirror Y,
and mirror 4) is enabled.
(e) If the setting of a workpiece coordinate system is specified by the
r.c
CNC (G54 to G59) during tool movement along an axis under PMC
control, the coordinate system cannot be set correctly.
Controlled axis in (a) Radius specification is always used regardless of the settings of bit
T series 2 (XRC) of parameter No. 0019.
e
nt PMC
DI/ DO
CNC
ce
Commands from path 1 Group A α axis control
Commands from path 2 Group B β axis control

nc
.c
In the following description, input/output signals from the four paths are
called group A (path 1) and group B (path 2) respectively.
The name of an input/output signal used for PMC axis control always
w
contains a lowercase g, as in EBUFg. However, there is no such signal

as EBUFg. The actual signal names represented by EBUFg are EBUFA
w
and EBUFB, which respectively correspond to signals of group A (path

1) and group B (path 2).
w
Axis selection at (1) In bits 0 to 3 of parameter No.0061, specify which DI/DO signal
specification B group (A or B) is to be used for PMC axis control on a per–axis basis.
When using the same group for simultaneously controlling two or
more axes, check that the settings of the parameters related to
feedrate (rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time
constant, diameter/radius, linear axis/rotation axis, etc.) are
identical for each axis to be controlled.
(2) To enable direct PMC axis control, set each control axis selection
signal (EAX1 to EAX4), that corresponds to an axis to be controlled,
to 1.
393
Basic procedure (1) Determine the operation.

The axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g) specify the type
of operation. The axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g)
specify the feedrate. The axis control data signals (EID0g to
EID31g) specify the moving distance and other data.
These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg
(described later), determine one complete operation, which is
tantamount to one block executed during CNC–controlled
automatic operation. These signals may be collectively called the
axis control block data signals.
om
List of Signals Determining Data, Tantamount to One Block for PMC
Axis Control
Generic name Signal name Symbol Data type
r.c
Block stop prohibi- EMSBKg Bit
tion signal
Axis control EC0g to EC6g Byte

Axis
A i controll command signal
block data
e
signals Axis control feedrate EIF0g to EIF15g Word
signal
nt Axis control data
signal
EID0g to EID31g Two words
(2) When the data governing a complete operation (one block) is

ce
determined, reverse the logical state of axis control command read
signal EBUFg (i.e., from “0” to “1” or vice versa). Note that, for this
to occur, axis control command read completion signal EBSYg must
be in the same logical state as EBUFg.
nc
D The CNC is capable of storing axis control functions from the PMC
in its buffer so that multiple operations can be performed in series,
under the control of the PMC. This allows the CNC to accept a new
command block from the PMC during the execution of another
.c
block if the buffer has free space.

The following figure illustrates an example in which command [1]
is being executed, commands [2] and [3] are stored in the buffers,
w
and command [4] has been issued (the axis control block data signal
is set).
w
w
394
PMC Commands Setting of the axis control CNC’s buffers

block data signal
Block 1 Command [1] [4] [3] Input buffer
Block 2 Command [2] ↓
Block 3 Command [3] [2] Waiting buffer
Block 4 Command [4]

↓
om
Block 5 Command [5] [1] Executing buffer
Block n
r.c
When the execution of command [1] is completed:
⋅ command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing
buffer;
e
⋅ command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer;
and
nt
⋅ command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block
(axis control block data signal).
ce
After the reception of command [4] by the input buffer, the PMC can issue
command [5] to the CNC (the axis control block data signal is set).
The timing chart for the command operation is shown below.
nc
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Command block
(Input)
EBUFg
.c
(Input)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
w
EBSYg
(Output)
w
The buffer is full.
Input buffer [3] [4]

w
Waiting buffer [2] [3]
Executing [1] [2]

buffer Beginning of execution Beginning of execution
End of
execution
(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) : A new block cannot be issued during these
intervals (while EBUFg and EBSYg are in different logical states).
395
D The status of the CNC buffer can be determined by the exclusive OR

of axis control command read signal EBUFg, input from the PMC, and
axis control command read completion signal EBSYg, output from the
CNC.
EBUFg Exclusive
ø OR CNC buffer status
EBSYg (XOR)
0 1 The previous block has already been read into

ø ø 0 the CNC buffer. The PMC can issue the next
0 1 block.
om
The previous block has not yet been read com-
pletely. It is just being read or waiting for the
0 1
CNC buffer to become available. Do not issue
ø ø 1
the next block, nor reverse the logical state of
1 0
EBUFg. Reversing the EBUFg state invalidates
any block that has been already issued.
r.c
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) until all the blocks have been issued.
When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection
signals EAX1 to EAX8 to “0”. Before setting these signals to “0”,
however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC’s input, waiting,
e
and executing buffers have all been executed. Setting the signals to
“0” while a block is being executed, or while a block remains in any
ntof these buffers, results in the issue of a P/S alarm. This alarm
suspends the current block execution and invalidates the blocks
stored in the input and waiting buffers.
ce
To ensure no block is being executed, or that there are no blocks
remaining in the input or waiting buffer, check that control axis
selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “0”.
For those axes that are always subject to PMC control, such as those
nc
controlling turrets, pallets, and ATCs, ensure that the EAX1 to

EAX8 signals are always set to “1”. There is no need to set these
signals to “0” after issuing commands from the PMC to the CNC.
When all command blocks have been executed (there are no blocks
.c
remaining to be executed), the CNC automatically stops execution.

(4) When control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX4 are set to “0”,
control is returned to the CNC.
w
w
w
396
Signal
Signal list
No. Symbol Signal name
1 EAX1 – EAX8 Control axis selection signals

2 EC0g – EC6g Axis control command signals
3 EIF0g – EIF15g Axis control feedrate signals
om
4 EID0g – EID31g Axis control data signals
5 EBUFg Axis control command read signal
6 EBSYg Axis control command read completion signal
7 ECLRg Reset signal
r.c
8 ESTPg Axis control temporary stop signal
9 ESBKg Block stop signal
10 EMSBKg Block stop disable signal
11 EM11g – EM28g Auxiliary function code signals
e
12 EMFg Auxiliary function strobe signal
13
14
15
nt EFINg
ESOFg
*EAXSL
Auxiliary function completion signal
Servo–off signal
Control axis selection status signal
ce
16 EINPg In–position signal
17 ECKZg Following zero checking signal
18 EIALg Alarm signal
nc
19 EGENg Axis moving signal

20 EDENg Auxiliary function executing signal
21 EOTNg Negative–direction overtravel signal
.c
22 EOTPg Positive–direction overtravel signal

23 *OV1E – *OV16E Feedrate override signals
24
w
OVCE Override cancellation signal

25 ROV1E, ROV2E Rapid traverse override signals
26 DRNE Dry run signal
w
27 RTE Manual rapid traverse selection signal

28 EOV0 Override 0% signal
w
29 ESKIP Skip signal
397
Signal Detail
1 Control axis selection

signals
EAX1 to EAX4
(Specification B)
[Function] When the signal is set to “1”, the corresponding axis becomes subject to
om
PMC control.
When the signal is set to “0”, PMC control becomes invalid. Changing
the setting of the control axis selection signal is possible only when
control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “0”. Changing the
setting when *EAXSL is set to “1” results in the issue of a P/S alarm (No.
r.c
139). Alarm signal EIALg is set to “1”.
While *EAXSL is set to “0”, the status of alarm signal EIALg does not
change to 1 when the control axis selection signal is set to 1 and a P/S
alarm (No. 139) is generated. In this case, the axis can be controlled from
e
the PMC, even when the CNC is in the alarm status.
NOTE
nt
After setting control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX4 to
1, it takes at least 8 msec before the PMC can issue
commands to the CNC.
ce
2 Axis control
nc
command signals
EC0g to EC6g
[Function] Specifies the following operations through each path.
.c
Axis control
command
Operation
(hexadecimal
w
code)
Rapid traverse (linear acceleration/deceleration)

w
00h
Performs the same operation as G00, used by the CNC.
Cutting feed – feed per minute

w
(exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/

deceleration after interpolation)
01h
Performs the same operation as G94 G01, used by the
CNC.
Cutting feed – feed per revolution (exponential acceleration/

deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after inter-
polation)
02h
Performs the same operation as G95 G01, used by the
CNC. (T series)
398
Axis control
command
Operation
(hexadecimal
code)
Skip – feed per minute

03h Performs the same operation as G31 G01, used by the
CNC.
Dwell
04h
om
Performs the same operation as G04, used by the CNC.
Reference position return
Moves the tool in the direction of reference position return

0 h
05h specified by ZM, bits 0 to 3 of parameter No.0003, in rapid
traverse mode, then performs the same operation as manual
r.c
reference position return, done by the CNC.
Jog feed (exponential acceleration/deceleration)
06h Moves the tool in the specified direction in jog feed mode.
Performs the same operation as that of JOG feed, done by
e
the CNC.
nt0 h
07h
1st reference position return
Performs the same operation as done when positioning the

tool to the reference position from the intermediate point
ce
specified by G28 of the CNC.
2nd reference position return
08h Performs the same operation as done when positioning the

tool to the reference position from the intermediate point
nc
specified by G30 P2 of the CNC.
External pulse synchronization – main spindle

0Bh
Synchronizes with the main spindle.
.c
External pulse synchronization – 1st manual handle

0Dh
Synchronizes with the 1st manual handle.
w
Speed command (linear acceleration/deceleration)

10h
Performs jog feed at the specified speed.
w
Auxiliary function
12h
w
Performs the same function as the miscellaneous function

(M function), used by the CNC.
399
Rapid traverse rate When using the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h), the
feedrate can be specified in either the same parameter as that used by the
CNC or the PMC’s axis interface feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF15g. This
can be set with EFERPD, bit 7 of parameter No.0387.
Feed per minute When the cutting feed – feed per minute command (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
is specified, the cutting feed time constant parameter (parameter Nos.
0651 to 0654; PEFDT to PEFDT4) and the lower cutting feedrate limit
(FL) parameter (parameter Nos.0657 to 0660; PEAFLX to PEAFL4) can
be set for each PMC axis, independently of the CNC.
om
Cutting feed – feed per When using the cutting feed – feed per revolution command (EC0g to
revolution (T series) EC6g: 02h).
Feed can be synchronized with the spindle by setting the amount of travel
r.c
per spindle rotation (feedrate) in EIF0g to EIF15g and the total amount
of travel in EID0g to EID31g. In this case, override is enabled, but dry
run is disabled.
The feedrate can be multiplied by 10 or 100 by setting bits 6 and 7 of
parameter No.0066.
e
Reference position
return
nt
When the function for returning to the reference position without dogs is
enabled, and no reference position return has been performed since
power–on operation, specifying a reference position return (EC0g to
ce
EC6g: 05h) command returns the tool to the reference position
(positioning to the grid point nearest the current point) without having to
issue a deceleration signal for reference position return. To do this,
specify a jog feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) command to move the tool along
each axis in the predetermined direction (positioning to a point near the
nc
reference position). Then, specify a reference position return (EC0g to

EC6g: 05h).
Note that, when positioning the tool to a point near the reference position,
.c
the tool must be moved in the direction of reference position return at such
a speed that the servo position error exceeds 128.
The direction of the grid relative to the proximate position depends on
w
ZM*, bits 0 to 3 of parameter No.0003.

After the reference position has been established, reference position
w
return can be performed at high speed by issuing the reference position

return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h), irrespective of the reference
position return direction specified by ZM*, bits 0 to 3 of parameter
w
No.0003.
When reference position return is specified, a low feedrate (FL) can be set
for the PMC axis, independently of the CNC, by using parameter No.
0672 (EZRNFL).
Reference position When the function for returning to the reference position without dogs is
return without dogs enabled, and the tool has not been returned to the reference position since
the power–on operation, specifying the 1st reference position return
(EC0g to EC6g: 07h) causes a P/S alarm (No.090).
400
1st and 2nd reference When using the 1st and 2nd reference position return commands (EC0g
position return to EC6g: 07h to 0Ah), the feedrate can be specified using EFERPD, bit
7 of parameter No.0387, in the same manner as when using the rapid
traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h).
Note that, in the case of the 1st reference position return, if the tool has
not been manually returned to the reference position after the power was
turned on, the feedrate specified by parameter applies.
External pulse When using the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to
om
synchronization EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh), the tool moves backwards if the external pulse
has a negative value.
When diameter programming is used, the amount of travel is doubled.
Display of remaining When using the jog feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external
r.c
distance pulse synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh), the
displayed remaining distance is always “0”.
Speed command When using the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h), specify the axis
e
to be controlled as a rotation axis.
nt
While position control is being executed for the jog feed command (EC0g
to EC6g: 06h), the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) exerts speed
control over the servo motor, thus allowing the speed to be dynamically
changed during jog feed. This makes this command suitable for driving
ce
a rotation tool with a servo motor.
A linear acceleration/deceleration time constant can be set for each axis,
using parameter.
nc
Note that, while jog feed is being executed by the speed command, no
coordinate system values are changed. This will result in the loss of the
tool position. Therefore, after jog feed has been completed, always return
the tool to the reference position before executing the move command.
.c
Also, note that absolute pulse coder specification is not allowed.

w
w
w
401
Command block
Axis control code
Operation Command data
signal EC0g to EC6g
Rapid traverse 00h Total moving distance
EID0g to EID31g
Rapid traverse rate
EIF0g to EIF15g
The rapid traverse rate

is valid when EFEPRD,
bit 7 of parameter
om
No.0387, is set to “1”.
Cutting feed – feed per 01h Total moving distance

minute EID0g to EID31g
Feedrate
Skip – feed per minute 03h EIF0g to EIF15g
r.c
Cutting feed – feed per 02h Total moving distance
revolution EID0g to EID31g
Feed per rotation
EIF0g to EIF15g
e
Dwell 04h Dwell time
EID0 to EID31g
nt
Reference position
return
Jog feed
05h
06h
None
Feed direction EID31g

ce
Jog feedrate
EIF0g to EIF15g
1st reference position 07h Rapid traverse rate

return EIF0g to EIF15g
nc
The rapid traverse rate

2nd reference position 08h is valid when EFEPRD,
return bit 7 of parameter
No.0387, is set to “1”.
.c
External pulse 0Bh Pulse weight

synchronization – EIF0g to EIF15g
main spindle
w
External pulse 0Dh

synchronization –
manual handle
w
Speed command 10h Jog feedrate

EIF0g to EIF15g
w
Auxiliary function 12h Auxiliary function code

EID0g to EID15g
402
3 Axis control feedrate

signals
EIF0g to EIF15g
[Function] (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)
(2) 1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 07h)
(3) 2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 08h)
(4) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g: 20h)
om
For these commands, signals EIF0g to EIF15g are used to specify
the rapid traverse rate, in binary format, when bit 7 (EFERPD) of
parameter 0387 is set to “1”. For 1st reference position return,
however, the rapid traverse rate specified with parameter is used if
manual reference position return has not been performed after the
r.c
power was first turned on.
[Unit of data] Data unit
Unit
IS–B IS–C
e
Linear Metric machine 1 mm/min
axis Inch machine 0.1 inch/min
nt
Rotation axis 1
[Valid data range] Specify data within the range given in the following table.
Data range
deg/min
ce
Unit
IS-B IS-C
Linear Metric machine 30 – 15000 30 – 12000 mm/min

axis
i Inch machine 30 – 6000 30 – 4800 inch/min
nc
Rotation axis 30 – 15000 30 – 12000 deg/min

(5) Cutting feed – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(6) Skip – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 03h)
For these commands, the signals are used to specify, in binary
.c
format, the feedrate along an axis. The specified feedrate can be

magnified by ten by the setting of bit 5 (EFML10) of parameter
No.0044.
w
[Unit of data] When bit 5 (EFML10) of parameter No.0049 is set to 0

Data unit
w
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric machine 1 0.1 mm/min

w
axis Inch machine 0.01 0.001 inch/min

Rotation axis 1 0.1 deg/min
When bit 5 (EFML10) of parameter No.0049 is set to 1

Data unit
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric machine 10 1 mm/min

axis Inch machine 0.1 0.001 inch/min
Rotation axis 10 1 deg/min
403

(Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.)
Data range
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric machine 1 – 100000 0.1 – 12000.0 mm/min

axis Inch machine 0.01 – 4000.00 0.001 – 480.000 inch/min
Rotation axis 1 – 100000 0.1 – 12000.0 deg/min
WARNING
om
Cutting feedrate clamp is disabled.
CAUTION
r.c
When “0” is specified, the CNC continues to perform
buffering without moving the tool. In such a case, release
the buffering by issuing reset signal ECLRg.
e
(7) Cutting feed – feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
For this command, the signals are used to specify the amount by
ntwhich the tool is moved for every rotation of the spindle.
<For T series>
ce
[Unit of data] The data increment depends on the settings of bits 6 (FRVF1) and 7 (FRVF2)
of parameter No.0066, as listed in the following table.
Parameter Metric input
p Inch input
p Rotation axis
FRVF2 FRVF1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
nc
1 1
0.0001 0.000001 0.0001
0 0
0 1 0.001 0.00001 0.001
.c
1 0 0.01 0.0001 0.01

(Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.)
w
Data range
Unit
IS–B IS–C
w
Linear Metric input 0.0001 – 500.0000 mm/rev

axis Inch input 0.000001 – 9.999999 inch/rev
w
Rotation axis 0.0001 – 500.0000 deg/rev

(8) External pulse synchronization – main spindle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
404
For these commands, the signals are used to specify the weight of the
external pulses. A weight range of "1/256 to "127 can be set by using
signals EIF0g to EIF7g for the figures after the decimal point. When a
negative weight is specified, the tool is moved in the reverse direction.
When a new pulse weight is specified while the tool is moving in
synchronization with external pulses, inverting signal EBUFg causes the
tool to move with the new pulse weight.
As commands for (7) to (8) are executed without buffering, axis control
command read completion signal EBSYg usually need not be checked.
om
CAUTION
The pulse weight is clamped according to the value set for
parameter (parameter for the manual rapid traverse rate for
each axis).
r.c
NOTE
When bit 2 (XRCx) of parameter No.0019 is set to diameter
programming, the tool moves with double pulse weight.
e
nt
(10) Jog feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h)
Set the feedrate as the same as for cutting feed – feed per minute
(EC0g to EC6g: 01h). The feedrate can be changed during jog feed.
ce
Specify the feedrate with signals EIF0g to EIF15g, and invert the
axis control command read signal EBUFg during jog feed, then the
tool moves at the new feedrate.
As commands for jog feed are executed without buffering, axis
nc
control command read completion signal EBSYg usually need not

be checked.
The specified feedrate can be magnified by 10 by setting bit 5
(EFML10) of parameter No.0049.
.c
CAUTION
The maximum feedrate depends on whether override is
w
applied or canceled. The following table lists the maximum

feedrate when override is canceled.
w
IS–B IS–C
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
w
Magnified 65535 655.35 6553 65.53

by 1 mm/min inch/min mm/min inch/min
Magnified 655350 6553.50 65535 655.35

by 10 mm/min inch/min mm/min inch/min
NOTE
The actual speed may not be displayed correctly,
depending on the feedrate.
405
(11) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h)

For this command, the signals are used to specify, in binary format,
the servo motor speed.
Specify a positive value for rotation in the forward direction.
Specify a negative value (twos complement) for rotation in the
reverse direction.
When a new servo motor speed is specified, inverting the axis
control command read signal EBUFg accelerates or decelerates the
servo motor until it attains the new speed.
om
Data range Unit
–32768 to +32767 rpm
NOTE
r.c
1 The servo motor speed may contain a slight error, as
follows:
Gears
Speed command
e
Amplifier Motor
↑
(b)
nt Detector ↑
(a)
Axis
ce
(a)The speed command for PMC axis control requires
specification of the servo motor speed, not the feedrate
along an axis. To specify a feedrate along the axis when
gears are used to link the servo motor and axis, the
nc
feedrate must be converted to a rotation speed of the

servo motor speed. As the motor speed must be
specified with an integer, the converted speed is subject
to a round–off error.
.c
(b)The minimum increment for specifying the motor speed

is calculated by the following formula and rounded to the
nearest integer:
Fmin : Minimum increment
w
for the motor speed

Fmin + P 2 1
15 1000 P : Number of pulses per
rotation of the detector for
w
velocity feedback
Specify the speed command using the value calculated
by the following formula:
w
F : Speed command value

(integer)
F+N P 2 1
15 1000 N : Servo motor speed (rpm)
P : Number of detector
pulses issued per rotation
for velocity feedback
2 In speed command mode, the speed after
acceleration/deceleration is specified to the servo control
unit. The loop gain for position control is invalid.
406
4 Axis control data

signals
EID0g to EID31g
[Function]
[Unit of data] IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm
om
Degree input deg
Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)

(2) Cutting feed – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
r.c
(3) Cutting feed – feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
(4) Skip – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 03h)
e
For these commands, signals EID0g to EID31g are used to specify, in
binary format, the incremental moving distance, according to the input
nt
increment used for the axis.
Metric input
IS–B
99999.999
IS–C
9999.9999
Unit
mm
ce
Degree input deg
Inch input 9999.9999 999.99999 inch

nc
When diameter programming is used, the specified data is doubled for

axial movement.
(5) Dwell (EC0g to EC6g: 04h)
.c
the dwell time.
Data range Unit

w
1 to 9999999 ms
w
When diamete programming is used by bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter

No. 1006, dwell is executed double the specified time.
w
For this command, signal EID31g is used to specify the direction of

jog feed, as follows:
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
Signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined.
(7) Auxiliary functions (EC0g to EC6g: 12h)
an auxiliary function code to be sent to the PMC.
407
5 Axis control
command read signal
EBUFg
[Function] Directs the CNC to read a block of command data for PMC axis control.
See “Basic procedure” for details of the operation performed when this
signal is set from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”.
om
6 Axis control
command read
completion signal
EBSYg
r.c
[Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for
PMC axis control and has stored the block in the input buffer. See “Basic
procedure” for details of the output conditions and the procedure.
e
7 Reset signal
ECLRg nt
[Function] Resets the corresponding PMC–controlled axis.
When this signal is set to “1”, the following is performed:
ce
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the
tool.
(2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation.
nc
(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation.

Simultaneously, all buffered commands are canceled. Any control
command is ignored while this signal is set to “1”.
The jog feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and external pulse
.c
synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh) can be terminated

by setting reset signal ECLRg to “1”. When these commands are
terminated, the servo motor decelerates and stops, the axis moving signal
w
EGENg is set to “0”, and the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL
is set to “0”. Confirm that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL
w
has been set to “0” before issuing the next command. Do not set reset
signal ECLRg to “0” until the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL has been set to “0”.
w
The speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can also be terminated by

setting the reset signal ECLRg to “1”. When this command is terminated,
the servo motor decelerates and stops, and the axis moving signal EGENg
is set to “0”. Confirm that the axis moving signal EGENg has been set
to “0” before issuing the next command. Do not attempt to set the reset
signal ECLRg to “0” until the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to
“0”.
408
8 Axis control
temporary stop signal
ESTPg
[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the
tool.
(2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation.
om
(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation
when auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is input.
The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to “0”.
r.c
9 Block stop signal
ESBKg
10 Block stop disable
e
signal
EMSBKg
nt
[Function] When block stop signal ESBKg is set to “1” during the execution of a
ce
command issued from the PMC, axis control is stopped after the block
being executed is completed. When this signal is set to “0”, the buffered
command is executed. Block stop signal ESBKg is disabled when block
stop disable signal EMSBKg is set to “1” for the block.
nc
|← More than →|
8 msec
.c
ESBKg
(input)
[1] [2] [3]
Command
w
block
(input)
EBUFg
w
(input)
EBSYg
w
(output)
The buffer is full.
Input buffer [2] [3]
Waiting buffer
[1] [2]
Executing
buffer [1]
Beginning of execution
409
11 Auxiliary function
code signals
EM11g to EM48g
strobe signal
EMFg [Classification] Output signal
om
completion signal
EFINg [Classification] Input signal
[Function] When an auxiliary function command (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is issued by
r.c
the PMC, the CNC sends the auxiliary function code specified in signals
EID0g to EID7g to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM28g and
awaits auxiliary function completion signal EFINg. When the auxiliary
function completion signal EFINg is returned, the CNC starts executing
e
the next block.
The timings for sending the auxiliary function code signals and auxiliary
nt
function strobe signal, as well as for receiving the auxiliary function
completion signal, are the same as those for the miscellaneous functions
(M functions) under the control of the CNC. See “Auxiliary function
executing signal” for details.
ce
14 Servo–off signal
ESOFg
nc

[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, the servo motor for the corresponding
PMC–controlled axis is turned off (servo–off state).
When this signal is set to “0”, the servo motor is turned on.
.c
15 Control axis selection

w
status signal
*EAXSL
w
(Specification B)
w
[Function] When this signal is set to “0”, control axis selection signals EAX1 to
EAX4 can be changed.
This signal is set to 1 in the following cases:
(1) When the tool is moving along a PMC–controlled axis
(2) When a block is being read into a buffer
(3) When the servo–off signal ESOFg is set to “1”
When this signal is set to “1”, control axis selection signals EAX1 to
EAX4 cannot be changed. Any attempt to change these signals results in
the output of P/S alarm No. 139.
410
If an attempt to change signals EAX1 to EAX4 is made when servo–off

signal ESOFg is “1”, P/S alarm No. 139 occurs and cannot be released
simply by setting reset signal ECLRg to “1”. In such a case, restore
signals EAX1 to EAX4 or set servo–off signal ESOFg to “0” before
setting reset signal ECLRg to “1”.
When a command is issued for any of the two paths with PMC axis
control, signal *EAXSL is set to “1” to disable axis selection. Thus,
changing signals EAX1 to EAX4 results in the output of P/S alarm No.
139. For paths for which commands are not issued, however, axis
selection is enabled if the parameter EADSL (No.0389#4 (M)/No.0398#0
om
(T)) is set accordingly.
16 In–position signal
EINPg
r.c
[Function] This signal is set to “1” when the corresponding PMC–controlled axis is
in the in–position state.
e
17 Following zero
checking signal
ECKZg
nt
ce
[Function] This signal is set to “1” when following zero check or in–position check
is being performed for the corresponding PMC–controlled axis.
nc
18 Alarm signal
EIALg [Classification] Output signal
.c
[Function] This signal is set to “1” when a servo alarm, overtravel alarm, or P/S alarm
No. 130 or 139 occurs for the corresponding PMC–controlled axis. This
signal is set to “0” when reset signal ECLRg is set to “1” after the alarm
w
is released, as described below.

D Servo alarm
Eliminate the cause of the alarm, then reset the CNC.
w
D Overtravel alarm
Move the tool into the area within the stored stroke limit, then reset the
w
CNC.
The following commands can be used to move the tool into the area
within the stored stroke limit during an overtravel alarm:
(1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)
(2) Cutting feed–feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(3) Cutting feed–feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
411
D P/S alarm (130 or 139)

Reset the CNC. See “Alarms and messages” for details.
Reset signal ECLRg cannot be used to reset the CNC in the above cases.
Use the reset button on the setting panel, external reset signal ERS, or
emergency stop signal *ESP.
19 Axis moving signal

EGENg
om
[Function] This signal is set to “1” when the tool is moving along the corresponding
PMC–controlled axis according to commands such as rapid traverse
(EC0g to EC6g: 00h) and cutting feed (EC0g to EC6g: 01h).
r.c
NOTE
This signal is set to “0” when distribution for the axis is
completed (the signal is set to “0” during deceleration).
e
executing signal
EDENg
nt
ce
[Function] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is specified by the
PMC, this signal is set to “1” during the period from when auxiliary
function codes EID0g to EID7g are sent to auxiliary function code signals
nc
EM11g to EM28g until auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is

returned.
.c
Auxiliary function command Next command

Command block
(input)
w
EM11g to EM28g
(output)
w
TMF
EMFg
(output)
w
TFIN
EFINg
(input)
EDENg
(output)
TMF and TFIN are set with parameter 0009.
412
21 Negative–direction
overtravel signal
EOTNg
22 Positive–direction
overtravel signal
EOTPg [Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals are set to “1” when an overtravel alarm is detected. When
the stroke limit in the negative direction is exceeded, signal EOTNg is set
to “1”. When the stroke limit in the positive direction is exceeded, signal
om
EOTPg is set to “1”. Simultaneously, alarm signal EIALg is set to “1”.
These signals are set to “0” when the overtravel alarm is released and reset
signal ECLRg is set to “1”. See “Alarm signal EIALg” for details of how
to release an overtravel alarm.
r.c
23 Feedrate override
signals
*OV1E to *OV8E
e
[Function] Like the CNC’s feedrate override signals *OV1 to *OV8, these signals
nt
can be used to select the override for the cutting feedrate, in steps of 10%
from 0 to 150%, independently of the CNC using bit 7 (EAXOVE) of
parameter No.0078.
ce
NOTE
OVRIE is set with bit 4 of parameter No. 0078.
nc
Contact signal status on machine side Override value

*OV1E *OV2E *OV4E *OV8E OVRIE=1 OVRIE=0
0 0 0 0 0% 150%
.c
1 0 0 0 10% 140%
0 1 0 0 20% 130%
1 1 0 0 30% 120%
w
0 0 1 0 40% 110%
1 0 1 0 50% 100%
w
0 1 1 0 60% 90%
1 1 1 0 70% 80%
w
0 0 0 1 80% 70%
1 0 0 1 90% 60%
0 1 0 1 100% 50%
1 1 0 1 110% 40%
0 0 1 1 120% 30%
1 0 1 1 130% 20%
0 1 1 1 140% 10%
1 1 1 1 150% 0%
413
24 Override cancellation
signal OVCE
[Function] When override is enabled, independently of the CNC, by setting bit 7
(EAXOVC) of parameter No.0078, setting this signal to “1” fixes the cut-
ting feed override to 100%. This signal does not affect the rapid traverse
override.
om
25 Rapid traverse
override signals
ROV1E and ROV2E
[Function] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate,
r.c
independently of the CNC, by setting bit 7 (EAXOVC) of parameter No.0078.
Contact signal status on machine side Override value
ROV1E ROV2E OVRIE=1 OVRIE=0
e
1 1 100% F0
0 1 50% 25%
nt 1
0
0
0
25%
F0
50%
100%
ce
F0 is the minimum feedrate specified with parameter No.0685.
26 Dry run signal DRNE

27 Manual rapid traverse
nc
selection signal RTE

[Function] These signals can be used to perform dry run or manual rapid traverse,
.c
independently of the CNC, by setting bit 7 (EAXOVE) of parameter

No.0078. When dry run signal DRNE is set to “1”, the specified rapid
traverse rate and cutting feedrate are ignored and the tool moves at the dry
w
run speed multiplied by the specified override. Bit 6 (RDRNE) of

parameter No.0078 can be used to specify whether to enable or disable dry
run for rapid traverse.
w
When manual rapid traverse selection signal RTE is set to “1” during dry
run, the tool moves at the rapid traverse rate for rapid traverse and at the
maximum jog feedrate for cutting feed. When the signal is set to “0”, the
w
tool moves at the jog feedrate. When dry run signal DRNE is set to “0”,
the specified rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate is restored.
Manual rapid Command from PMC
traverse select
signal Rapid traverse Feed
1 Rapid traverse rate Maximum jog feedrate

0 Jog feedrate(*) Jog feedrate
* Can also be set to the rapid traverse rate with bit 6 (RDRNE) of
parameter No.0078.
414
Contact signal
g status on Jog feed
machine side OVRIE=1 OVRIE=0
Metric Inch Metric Inch
*OV1E *OV2E *OV4E *OV8E
system system system system
0 0 0 0 0 0 1260 50
1 0 0 0 2.0 0.08 790 30
0 1 0 0 3.2 0.12 500 20
1 1 0 0 5.0 0.2 320 12
om
0 0 1 0 7.9 0.3 200 8.0
1 0 1 0 12.6 0.5 126 5.0
0 1 1 0 20 0.8 79 3.0
1 1 1 0 32 1.2 50 2.0
r.c
0 0 0 1 50 2.0 32 1.2
1 0 0 1 79 3.0 20 0.8
0 1 0 1 126 5.0 12.6 0.5
e
1 1 0 1 200 8.0 7.9 0.3
0 0 1 1 320 12 5.0 0.2
nt
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
500
790
20
30
3.2
2.0
0.12
0.08
1 1 1 1 1260 50 0 0
ce
28 Override 0% signal
nc
EOV0
[Function] Signal EOV0 is turned “1” at 0% override value, when override is valid
.c
independently of the CNC by setting the parameter EAXOVE (bit 7 of

No.0078).
w
29 Skip signal
ESKIP
w

[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, the block being executed is immediately
w
stopped and the next block is executed. Bit 3 (EPMSKD) of parameter

No.0066 can be used to select whether to use signal SKIP, which is the
common skip signal for the PMC and CNC, or PMC–specific skip signal
ESKIP.
415
Signal address
MT ³ CNC
PMC
ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X008 SKIP ESKIP
PMC ³ CNC
PMC
om
ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G144 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G146 ROV2E ROV1E
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
r.c
G147 DRNE RTE OVCE *OV16E *OV8E *OV4E *OV2E *OV1E
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G210 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EFINA
e
G211 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
G212 EIF7A
nt
EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A
ce
G213 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A
For
group A
G214 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A
nc

.c

w
w
w
416
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G218 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EFINB
G219 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B
G220 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B

For
om
group B
G222 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B
r.c
e
CNC ³ PMC
PMC
ADDRESS
F188
#7
*EAXSL
nt #6 #5
EOV0
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F270 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
For
group A F271 EMFA
nc
F272 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A

.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F273 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
For
w
group B F274 EMFB
F275 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B

w
w
417
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0030 EAC1 EAC0
[Data type] Bit

EAC1, EAC0 One of the axes from the X axis to the fourth axis is selected as the
controlled axis. (For M series with specification A only)
EAC1 EAC0 PMC controlled axis
om
0 0 Fourth axis
0 1 X axis
1 0 Y axis
1 1 Z axis
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0032 EACSB PNGMLK
e
[Data type] Bit
PNGMLK 1 : Machine lock signal MLK is invalid for the PMC controlled axis.
nt
0 : Machine lock signal MLK is valid for the PMC controlled axis.
EACSB 1 : Specification B is used for the PMC axis control function.
ce
0 : Specification A is used for the PMC axis control function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0049 EFML10
nc
[Data type] Bit

EFML10 1 : The cutting feedrate command for PMC axis control is multiplied by
ten.
.c
0 : The ordinary specification is valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0052 NODIC4 NODIC3 NODIC2 NODIC1
[Data type] Bit

w
NODICn n=1 to 4
1 : The increment system 1/10 for the n–th axis is ignored.
w
0 : The increment system 1/10 for the n–th axis is not ignored.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0061 EBC4 EBCZ EBCY EBCX
[Data type] Bit

EBCx 1 : Group B is used for the DI/DO signals for the PMC axis control
function.
0 : Group A is used for the DI/DO signals for the PMC axis control
function.
418
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0062 AXPCF
[Data type] Bit

AXPCF 1 : Movement along the PMC controlled axis is not included in the actual
speed display.
0 : Movement along the PMC controlled axis is included in the actual
speed display.
om
NOTE
This parameter is valid when control of an axis is switched
between the CNC and PMC.
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0063 EAXOV
[Data type] Bit
e
EAXOV 1 : The same override and dry run operations as those for the CNC are
valid for the PMC axis. (This setting is ignored when bit 7
nt
(EAXOVE) of parameter No. 0078 is set to 1.)
0 : The same override and dry run operations as those for the CNC are
invalid for the PMC axis.
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0066 ERVF2 ERVF1 EPMSKP ENSU
nc
[Data type] Bit

ERVF1, ERVF2 Sets the multiplier for the feedrate when the cutting feed – feed per
rotation command (EC0g to EC6g: 02h) is specified.
.c
ERVF2 ERVF1 Multiply
0 0 1
w
1 1
0 1 10
w
1 0 100
ENSU 1 : Acceleration/deceleration is not performed for an axis which is

w
controlled in sync with the external pulse signal.

0 : Acceleration/deceleration is performed for an axis which is controlled
in sync with the external pulse signal.
EPMSKP 1 : A skip signal dedicated to the PMC is used.
0 : The same skip signal as that for the CNC is used.
419
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0078 EAXOVE RDRNE OVRIE
[Data type] Bit

EAXOVE 1 : Override and dry run in PMC axis control independent of the CNC are
valid.
0 : Override and dry run in PMC axis control independent of the CNC are
not valid.
RDRNE 1 : Dry run for the rapid traverse command in PMC axis control
om
independent of the CNC is also valid.
0 : Dry run for the rapid traverse command in PMC axis control
independent of the CNC is not valid. (This setting is allowed only
when EAXOVE = 1.)
OVRIE 1 : In PMC axis control, the polarity of the override signal is set
r.c
independently of the CNC so that specifying “1” increases the
feedrate.
0 : n PMC axis control, the polarity of the override signal is set
independently of the CNC so that specifying “0” increases the
e
feedrate. (This setting is allowed only when EAXOVE = 1.)
0350
nt PVRIDX
PVRIDX Axis number of an axis for which a velocity command is issued.

ce
Setting value T series M sereis
1 X axis X axis
2 Z axis Y axis
3 3rd axis Z axis
nc
4 4th axis
If a value that falls outside the above range is set, a velocity command
cannot be issued for any axis. When this parameter has been set, the
power must be turned off then back on before operation is continued.
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0387 EFERPD
[Data type] Bit

w
EFERPD 1 : Any rapid traverse rate can be specified in PMC axis control
independently of the CNC.
0 : The rapid traverse rate in PMC axis control depends on the parameter
w
setting made for the CNC.
420
0651 EFDTX
0652 EFDTY
0653 EFDTZ
0654 EFDT4
EFDTx Set the time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting

feed along each axis when the axis is used as the PMC axis.
om
[Unit of data] msec
When 0 is set, the FEEDT value set in parameter No. 0529 is used.
r.c
0657 EAFLX
0658 EAFLY
0659 EAFLZ
e
0660 EAFL4
nt
EAFLx Set the lower feedrate limit (FL) for exponential acceleration/deceleration
for cutting feed along each axis when the axis is used as the PMC axis.
When metric output mode is used, the specifiable range is 6 to 15000
ce
(mm/min).
When inch output mode is used, the specifiable range is 6 to 5000
(inches/min).
When 0 is set, the FEDFL value set in parameter No. 0530 is used.
nc
0672 EZRNFL
EZRNFL Sets a low feedrate (FL) at which reference position return is performed
.c
along the PMC axis.

(mm/min).
w

(inches/min).
When 0 is set, the ZRNFL value set in parameter No. 0534 is used.
w
0679 PVRTC1 (T series)

w
0462 PVRTC1 (M series)
PVRTC1 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration for a specified feedrate.

Set the time required to increase/decrease the servo motor speed by 1000
rpm.
[Valid data range] 1 to +32767
[Unit of data] msec/1000rpm
When 0 is set, acceleration/deceleration control is not performed.
421
0685 RPDFLE
RPDFLE Specifies the lowest feedrate (Fo) for rapid traverse overrides performed
in PMC axis control independently of the CNC.
(mm/min).
(0.1inches/min).
NOTE
When the increment system is 1/10, the same unit is used.
om
0698 PFEDMX
r.c
PFEDMX Sets the upper speed limit on feed per rotation used for the PMC axis.
(mm/min).
(0.1inches/min).
e
A servo alarm or overtravel alarm for a PMC–controlled axis is detected
in the same way as an alarm for a CNC–controlled axis.
If an alarm occurs, the alarm is handled by applying the normal procedure,
ce
alarm signal EIALg being set to “1” to inform the PMC of the alarm.
(If an overtravel alarm occurs, either negative overtravel signal EOTNg
or positive overtravel signal EOTPg is also set to “1”.)
If the PMC issues a command for a CNC–controlled axis, a P/S alarm No.
nc
130 occurs.
Commands issued by the PMC are effective if the axis is in feed hold or
single block stop mode. The command results in the issue of an alarm if
cutting feed is executed with an override of 0%, or if the interlock is
.c
enabled.
If the CNC issues a command for a PMC–controlled axis, a P/S alarm No.
130 occurs.
w
If the PMC issues a movement command for an axis in the plane of polar
coordinate interpolation in polar coordinate interpolation mode (G112),
a P/S alarm No. 130 occurs.
w
130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERA- An axis control command was given

w
TION by PMC to an axis controlled by CNC.

Or an axis control command was giv-
en by CNC to an axis controlled by
PMC. Modify the program.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC A PMC controlled axis was again se-
CONTROL AXIS lected. Or, the CNC issued a control
command for an axis that has been
set as a PMC–controlled axis for
which no command has been speci-
fied. Or, an axis under control of CNC
was selected by PMC.
422
Warning
WARNING
1 The mode selection, CNC reset, and other CNC statuses
have no effect.
2 Feed hold, single block stop, reset, or interlock of one or all
axes, performed by the CNC, does not affect a
PMC–controlled axis. Similar control is possible by using
the equivalent signals issued from the PMC.
om
3 The mirror image functions (setting, parameter, input signal)
are disabled.
Caution
r.c
CAUTION
1 Emergency stop or machine lock is enabled. Machine lock
can be disabled if the PNGMLK bit (bit 4 of parameter
e
No.0032) is specified accordingly. However, machine lock
for an individual axis is always enabled.
2 In consecutive cutting feed blocks, a new block starts its
nt
operation without waiting for the following zero of the servo
acceleration/deceleration. In other than the above blocks,
a new block starts its operation after the following zero of the
ce
servo acceleration/deceleration is confirmed.
3 For a PMC–controlled axis, manual absolute mode is
always set. If the PMC starts control of an axis after manual
intervention (manual continuous feed, manual handle feed,
nc
etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual

absolute mode is not set (*ABSM is set to 1), manual
absolute mode is set.
.c
Note
w
NOTE
1 The actual speed excluding the effect of the movement
along a PMC–controlled axis can be displayed if the AXPCF
w
bit (bit 6 of parameter No.0062) is specified.

2 If an absolute pulse coder is used, a specified reference
position is retained in memory, even after the power is
w
turned off.
423
15.2
EXTERNAL DATA
INPUT
General The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.
Signal name Signal code
Data signal for external data input (input) ED0 to ED15

Address signal for external data input (input) EA0 to EA6
om
Read signal for external data input (input) ESTB
Read completion signal for external data input EREND
(output)
Search completion signal for external data input ESEND
(output)
r.c
The basic external data input procedure is described below:
(1) The PMC sets address signals EA0 to EA6 that indicate the data type
and data signals ED0 to ED15.
(2) The PMC sets read signal ESTB to 1.
e
(3) When the ESTB signal is set to 1, the control unit reads the address.
nt
(4)After reading the address, the control unit sets read completion signal
EREND to 1.
(5) When the EREND signal is set to 1, the PMC sets the ESTB signal to
0.
ce
(6) When the ESTB signal is set to 0, the control unit sets the EREND
signal to 0.
This completes the data input procedure. New data can now be entered.
nc

.c
ED0-15
w
EA0-6
More than
w
More than 32ms 0ms

ESTB
w
EREND
External program number search

ESEND
Search
end
424
Kind of data accessed by external data input
E ED15 to ED0
S E E E E E E E
No. Item
T AAA AAAA
B 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
External program
p g number Program number(BCD4 digits)
1 1 0 0 0 × × × ×
search 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
External tool compensa-

p Offset value(BCD 4 digits with sign)
2 1 0 0 1 × × × ×
tion ±0 to 7 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
om
External workpiece coordi- Shift value(BCD 4 digits with sign)
3 nate 1 0 1 0 axis code
system shift ±0 to 7 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
External machine coordi- Machine coordinate system shift value(binary)
4 1 0 1 1 axis code
nate system shift ±0 to 9999
r.c
Alarm No.(binary)
Alarm set 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 to 999
Alarm No.(binary)
Alarm clear 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 to 999
e
5 Message No.(binary)
Oper to tor message list 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 to 999
Operator message clear
Message
nt
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 × 1 1
Message No.(binary)
0 to 999
character(Character code)
ce
WARNING
Though bits EA4 to EA6 distinguish one set of data from
nc
another, the machine side must be interlocked in order to

prevent other function data being fed during a process for
which they are invalid.
.c
NOTE
Input an axis code according to the list below.
w
EA3 to EA0
w
Axis
3 2 1 0
1st axis 0 0 0 0
w
2nd axis 0 0 0 1
3rd axis 0 0 1 0
4th axis 0 0 1 1
425
1) External Program A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from the outside and is selected
Number Search in the CNC memory.
For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can
automatically select for execution the program corresponding to a
specific workpiece.
Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of the
mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state.
The ESEND signal switches from “0” to “1” at the end of the external
program number search. This signal does not turn to “0” unless the cycle
start or reset signal is input, or another search is made. Use ESEND to
om
make a cycle start signal after the search.
NOTE
1 The external program number search is valid when
parameter EXTS (No.0028#4) is 1.
r.c
2 The reset state is when the automatic operation lamp is off.
If the start button is pushed in the cycle operation stop or
hold state, search execution starts from the actual position
indicated by the pointer.
e
3 When there is not a program stored in memory
corresponding to the set program number, alarm No.59 will
nt
be activated.
4 Program search is not made if the program number is set to
“0”. When the start button is pushed, execution starts from
ce
the position indicated by the pointer, instead.
nc
2) External tool These signals provide for changing the tool compensation amount via the
compensation PMC. When the offset number is specified by a program, data input from
the PMC is added to the offset amount. The offset amount can also be used
as input data itself by specifying the input signal.
.c
When the machine tool is equipped with automatic tools or workpiece

measuring functions, the offset amount can be corrected using this
function, by inputting the error from the correct value into the CNC via
w
PMC.
If the tool compensation amount is externally input when offset number

w
0 is specified in a program (a offset cancel) in T series, the workpiece

coordinate system shifts by the entered quantity. The external tool
compensation amount is 0 to 7.999mm or 0.7999inch at a time.
w
426
Data specification method in external tool compensation (For M series)
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 ABS 0 0 0 s MSB LSB
/ i
INC g Offset amount
n
om
0 :+ Specified by BCD 4-digit code
sign
1 :– (0000 to 7999)
Specify “000”
0 : Incremental specification
r.c
(Input value is added to present compensation amount)
1 : Absolute specification
(Input value is replaced with present compensation amount)
Specify “001” for external tool offset
e
Address
nt
Data specification method in external tool compensation (For T series)
Data
ce
E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ABS W s
0 0 1 / i MSB LSB
nc
/ X/Z/R g
INC Offset amount
G n
0 :+ Specified by BCD 4-digit code

.c
sign
1 :– (0000 to 7999)
EA1 EA0 Description

w
0 0 Specification of X axis offset

0 1 Specification of Z axis offset
w
1 0 Specification of tool nose radius compensation amount
0 : Specification of tool wear offset amount

w
1 : Specification of tool geometry offset amount

0 : Incremental specification
(Input value is added to present compensation amount)
1 : Absolute specification
(Input value is replaced with present compensation amount)
Specify “001” for external tool offset
427
3) External workpiece The external workpiece coordinate system shift adjusts the workpiece
coordinate system coordinate system depending on the shift amount set via PMC. Each axis
shift (parameter Nos.0751 to 0754) has this shift amount, and it is added to all
the workpiece coordinate systems for use. The shift amount is not lost by
cut off of the power supply. It is not added incrementally, but each input
shift amount makes a new shift amount. The amount that can be input is
0 to 7.999mm or 0.7999inch.
4) External machine The machine coordinate system can be shifted by inputting shift value.
coordinate system When the shift amount is input, compensation is immediately applied to
om
the corresponding axis and the machine starts operation. The position
accuracy can be improved by combining this function with the sensor.
The specification method for the axis to be shifted is the same as that for
the external workpiece coordinate system shift.
The compensation value is specified for the signals ED0 to ED15 by a
binary code ranging from 0 to 9999. This compensation value should
r.c
be absolute and the amount which the machine actually moves on input
is the difference from the previously stored value. When a large amount
of compensation is applied at a time, an alarm such as ”excessive error on
stop” may occur. In this case, input the compensation amount several
e
times.
5) External alarm
message
nt
- External alarm message
The external alarm message holds the CNC under an alarm
condition by sending an alarm number from the external unit, as
ce
well as a message that is displayed on the CRT screen of the CNC.
Up to four alarm numbers and messages can be sent at a time; the
alarm number ranges from 0 to 999, and the CNC displays it with
1000 added. The message for one alarm number can be up to 15
nc
characters long. The alarm condition is reset by external data.

- External operator message
The external operator message sends the operator message and
number from the external unit to the CNC, with a display on the
.c
CRT screen of the CNC.

Only one message can be transmitted, with a potential message
length of 127 characters. The alarm number ranges from 0 to 999;
w
from 0 to 99, the CNC adds 2000 to the number, while from 100
to 999 the number is not displayed, only the message is displayed.
w
Data specification method in external message
E E E E E E E
ED15 to ED0
w
Item A A A A A A A
(binary)
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Alarm set 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Alarm No.
Alarm clear 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Alarm No.
Operator mes- 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 Message No.
sage list
Operator mes- 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Message No.
sage clear
Message 1 0 0 0 × 1 1 Character
(Note)
428
NOTE
Two characters are sent at a time (see ISO code given in
Table below).
ED15 - ED8 . . . . . . . Character code in 1st character.
ED7 - ED0 . . . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character.
If sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code
smaller than 20 and it will be ignored.
om
Character code table
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
r.c
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
0 0 0 0 SP 0 @ P –
0 0 0 1 ! 1 A Q #
e
0 0 1 0 I 2 B R V
0 0 1 1 # 3 C S W
0
0
1
1
0
0
nt 0
1
$
%
4
5
D
E
T
U
”
·
0 1 1 0 &
ce
6 F V
0 1 1 1 ’ 7 G W
1 0 0 0 ( 8 H X
1 0 0 1 ) 9 I Y
nc
1 0 1 0 * : J Z
1 0 1 1 + ; K [
1 1 0 0 , < L o
.c
1 1 0 1 = = M ]
1 1 1 0 . > N ^ \\
1 1 1 1 / ? O _ °
w
SP : Space code
w
w
429
6) Substituting No. of Substitution is possible for the No. of parts required and the No. of parts
parts required and No. machined.
of parts, machined
Data specification method for No. of parts required and
No. of parts machined.
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D S S S D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 0
om
1 1 0 0 0 0 0/1 MSB LSB
Value of aprt nos.
BCD 4–digit code

(0000 to 9999)
r.c
0 : No. of parts required
1 : No. of parts machined
Set to 110000.
e
Signals
nt
ce
Data signals for external
data input
ED0 to ED15
<G100, G101>
nc

[Function] The signals indicate the entered data.
The use of the 16 code signals varies with the data type.
.c
Address signals for

external data input
w
EA0 to EA6<G102>
w
[Function] The signals indicate the type of the entered data.

w
Read signal for external

data input
ESTB<G102#7>
[Function] The signal reports that the address and data are set in external data input.
When the signal is set to 1, the control unit reads the address and data for
external data input.
[Operation] The “basic procedure” describes the procedure for, and operation of, the
control unit when the signal turns to “1”.
430
Read completion signal

for external data input
EREND<F160#0>
[Function] The signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered
data.
[Operation] The output condition and procedure are described in the “basic
om
procedure.”
Search completion
signal for external data
r.c
input
ESEND<F160#1>
e
[Function] The signal reports that program number search, specified by external data
input, has been completed.
nt
The program number search specified by external data input is completed.
ce
· An automatic operation is started.
· A reset occurs.
nc
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c
G100 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0

w
G102 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
F160 ESRND EREND

w
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0028 ESR
[Data type] Bit

ESR External program number search
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
431
Alarm and Message

059 PROGRAM NUMBER In an external program number

NOT FOUND search or external workpiece number
search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program
specified for searching is being edited
in background processing. Check the
program number and external signal.
om
Or discontinue the background eiting.
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL Five or more alarms have generated
ALARM MESSAGES in external alarm message.
Consult the PMC ladder diagram to
find the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT No alarm No. concerned exists in ex-
r.c
FOUND ternal alarm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. Small section data is erroneous in ex-
ALARM MSG ternal alarm message or external op-
e
erator message. Check the PMC lad-
der diagram.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
432
15.3
EXTERNAL
WORKPIECE
NUMBER SEARCH
General When several part programs are stored in program storage memory, a
program can be searched with the workpiece number search signals PN1
to PN16 from the machine side.
When the cycle operation is actuated in the memory operation mode under
om
reset status, the workpiece number (program number) specified by PN1
to PN16 is searched and executed from the beginning.
Signal
r.c
Workpiece Number
Search Signal
e
PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8
<G122#4 to #7>
nt
[Function] Select the number of a workpiece to be machined in the memory mode.
Four code signals are provided. These signals are set as binary code to
ce
designate a workpiece number as follows:
Workpiece number search signal Workpiece
p
PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 number
0 0 0 0 00
nc
0 0 0 1 01
0 0 1 0 02
0 0 1 1 03
.c
0 1 0 0 04
0 1 0 1 05
w
0 1 1 0 06
0 1 1 1 07
w
1 0 0 0 08
1 0 0 1 09
w
1 0 1 0 10
1 0 1 1 11
1 1 0 0 12
1 1 0 1 13
1 1 1 0 14
1 1 1 1 15
Workpiece number 00 is used for special designation “no search”. Thus,

a workpiece number ranges from 01 to 15.
433
NOTE
These signals are also used to specify a file number for file
search during external program input. See Section 13.3,
“External Program Input.”
Signal address
om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G122 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
Alarm and Message
r.c
059 PROGRAM NUMBER In an external program number

NOT FOUND search or external workpiece number
e
search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program
specified for searching is being edited
nt in background processing. Check the
program number and external signal.
Or discontinue the background eiting.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
434
Note
NOTE
1 This function can be used only in memory operation. It
cannot be used during manual data input operation.
2 Select the program number from O001 to O015.
3 Program numbers from O001 to O015 can be used.
However, programs corresponding to all the program
numbers do not have to be stored in memory.
4 When a program corresponding to the specified program
om
number is not stored in memory, an alarm (No.059) is
activated when the start button is pressed.
5 Program search is performed only when the start button is
pressed in the reset state. When the CNC is in the
automatic operation stop state (single block stop, etc.) or
pause state (feedhold stop, etc.), program search is not
r.c
performed even if the start button is pressed and execution
is started from the point specified by the present execution
pointer.
6 To restart program halfway through, press the start button
e
after sequence number search in MEM mode. The
workpiece number search is not performed; program
execution starts from the block which is searched by
nt
sequence number search, because the OP signal is set by
sequence number search in MEM mode and the CNC reset
state is released.
ce
7 When the start button is pressed with all PN1 to PN8 “0”,
program search is not performed but execution is started
from the point specified by the present execution pointer.
To restart operation from the start of a program which
cannot be searched by this function, perform the usual
nc
program number search operation (CRT/MDI panel

operation), turn all the PN1 to PN8 to “0” and press the start
button
.c
w
w
w
435
15.4
SPINDLE OUTPUT
CONTROL BY THE
PMC
General The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor,
connected by the optional spindle serial output/spindle analog output
function.
om
In the serial output, the first and second spindles have their own individual
interfaces. By using a PMC ladder program, the user can control the
spindles as desired.
This section describes how to use the PMC to control spindle rotation and
provides example applications.
r.c
Switching control This function can be used to specify the following:
⋅ Spindle motor speed (number of rotations)
e
⋅ Output polarity for each spindle motor (direction of rotation)
Usually, the CNC is used to control the speed and polarity of the first
nt
spindle motor.
This function allows the user to select whether the CNC or PMC is used
ce
to control the speed and output polarity of the spindle motors.
Specifying the spindle The PMC can be used to specify the spindle motor speed upon executing
motor speed the following:
nc
⋅ Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an

SINDx signal
⋅ Setting the spindle motor speed data, calculated by the PMC, in spindle
.c
control signal R01Ix to R12Ix

When controlled by the PMC, the spindle motor speed is not affected by
any signal (for example, the spindle speed override signal) or parameter
w
setting (for example, the maximum speed clamp parameter) related to the
spindle speed command of the CNC spindle control function.
w
The spindle motor speed data is obtained from the following expression.
Its value can range from 0 to 4095:
Spindle motor speed
w
Spindle motor speed data = 4095

Remark) Usually, the spindle speed must be controlled. If a gear train is
used to connect the spindle to the spindle motor, first obtain the
maximum spindle speed at the maximum spindle motor speed.
Spindle speed
Spindle motor speed data = 4095
Maximum spindle speed
By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data can be
obtained easily.
436
Specifying the output The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the
polarity for the spindle following are executed:
motor ⋅ Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an
SSINx signal
⋅ Specifying the output polarity to the SGNx signal
S–code and SF signals To control the spindle, the PMC may require to read the S value specified
by the CNC.
om
If the spindle serial output/spindle analog control function is added (if the
PMC can control the spindle), the S–code signals <F185 to F187> and SF
signal <F150#2> can be output only when many conditions, determined
by the CNC spindle control, are satisfied. In some cases, the signals
cannot be used under standard conditions.
r.c
Twelve code signals Twelve code signals corresponding to S value R01O to R12O <F172 to
corresponding to the S F173> are output to the first spindle motor. The output data is calculated
value (output) from the results of the CNC spindle control. (See Section 9.3.)
e
Even while a spindle is subject to PMC control, an S command that is
issued to the CNC is converted to spindle output data and output.
nt
The SIND signal determines whether the speed output command, issued
to the spindle motor, is obtained from the twelve code signals
corresponding to the S value, or from the R01I to R12I signals calculated
ce
and specified by the PMC.
The use of this signal may simplify PMC ladder processing used to enable
PMC spindle control.
nc
Sample application 1) Controlling the first and second spindles of a lathe system
→ Share the gear stages between the first and second spindles.
(If the first spindle uses two gears, for example, specify parameters
.c
Nos.0542 and 0543, thus enabling the use of gears 3 and 4 for the
second spindle.)
Perform the necessary setting to enable control of the first and second
w
spindles by the PMC.

To specify a rotation command for the first spindle, enter the gears for
w
the first spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data of the twelve code
signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the data as the speed
output command for the first spindle in the PMC control interface for
w
the first spindle.

To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gears
to be used for the second spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data
of the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the
data as the speed output command for the second spindle in the PMC
control interface for the second spindle.
437
Sample application 2) Using a lathe’s orientation function with the stop position of the serial
spindle specified externally, specifying the S value as the angle of the stop
position for spindle orientation after the spindle positioning mode has
been selected
→ Use those gears that are not being used for the first spindle.
(In this application, gear 4 is used to calculate the spindle position. Set
parameter No.0543 to 360.)
Specify the M code used to set the spindle to positioning mode and
stop the spindle. Enter gear 4 in GR1 and GR2.
om
Then, specify a spindle positioning angle with the S command. (To
specify the position of 145 degrees, for example, specify S145;.)
Expression 145/360*4095 is calculated and the result is output to the
twelve code signals corresponding to the S value (output signal).
Enter the data in external stop position commands SHA00 to SHA11
<G110#0 to G111#3> and perform the orientation.
r.c
Signal
e
PMC spindle control signals
For the first spindle:
nt
SIND, SSIN, SGN <G125#7, #6, #5>
R01I to R12I <G124#0 to G125#3>
For the second spindle: SIND2, SSIN2, SGN2 <G107#7, #6, #5>
ce
R01I2 to R12I2 <G106#0 to G107#3>

nc
[Function] The above signals enable the control of a spindle motor by issuing
commands from the PMC. Both the speed and polarity of the spindle
motor (direction of rotation) can be controlled.
The speed command and polarity are usually specified by the CNC. The
.c
use of these signals allows the user to select whether the speed and
polarity are controlled by the CNC or PMC.
In the serial output, even if the multispindle control function is not
w
provided, these signals allow the second spindle to be controlled.

D Details of the signals D Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx
w
→ The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is
controlled by the CNC or PMC.
w
1: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands

(R01Ix to R12Ix) issued by the PMC.
0: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands
issued by the CNC. The spindle speed specified with the S
command is output.
D Signals used to input the spindle motor speed command issued by the
PMC R01Ix to R12Ix
→ If the PMC is being used to control the spindle motor speed command,
specify, in binary format, the value obtained using the following
expression.
438
Spindle motor speed

Value to be specified = 4095
(Spindle motor speed)
Maximum
spindle motor
speed
om
0 rpm
r.c
Code signal
0 4095
D Signal used to select the polarity of the spindle motor speed command,
SSINx
e
→ The above signal selects whether the output polarity of the spindle
motor speed command is controlled by the CNC or PMC.
nt
1 : The spindle motor is controlled according to the polarity command
(SGNx) issued by the PMC.
0 : The CNC controls the polarity. The polarity is determined by the
ce
TCW and CWM bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No.0013) and the
M03 or M04 command.
D Signal used to specify the polarity of the spindle motor selected by the
PMC, SGNx
nc
→ If the PMC is used to control the output polarity of the spindle motor
speed command, specify the polarity with this signal.
1 : The output polarity of the spindle is negative.
.c
0 : The output polarity of the spindle is positive.

w
Twelve code signals

corresponding to the S
w
value R01O to R12O

<F172#0 to F173#3>
w
[Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speed
output to the spindle motor that is required to control the connected
spindle. The converted value is sent to the PMC with twelve code signals,
in proportion to the spindle motor speed output.
The speed data, the final result of the CNC spindle control, is output to
the spindle motor after the spindle gear ratio, spindle speed override,
speed clamp, conversion of the surface speed into the spindle speed by the
constant surface speed control command, and other data have been
considered.
439
(See Section 9.3 for an explanation of the relationship between the CNC
spindle control and the speed output to the spindle motor.)
Code signal
4095
om
(Speed output to the
spindle motor)
0
Maximum spindle
0 rpm
r.c
motor speed
e
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0020 SFOUT
[Data type] Bit

nt (M series)

ce
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0049 EVSF (T series)
[Data type] Bit

.c
EVSF When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is
used, S codes and SF are:
0 : Not output for an S command.
w
1 : Output for an S command.

w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0071 SRL2SP
[Data type] Bit

w
SRL2SP The number of connections in serial spindle control

0: 1
1: 2
440
Note
NOTE
1 If the spindle fails to move after the PMC issues the spindle
motor speed command, check the following:
M03/M04 is not specified when the CNC is being used to
control the output polarity.
→ If the TCW bit, bit 7 of parameter No.0013, is set to 1, the
M03/M04 command issued to the CNC changes the
output polarity for the spindle motor. If no M03/M04
om
command is specified after the CNC is turned on, the
specified speed output is not sent to the spindle motor
because the output polarity has not been determined.
2 The SF signal indicates that output of the S code to the PMC
has been completed. The signal does not indicate the end
of the command for specifying the spindle speed.
r.c
3 For an explanation of connecting the second spindle, see
Section 9.2.
4 CNC does not issue any commands to the second spindle.
The output polarity is controlled by the SGNx signal. It is not
e
affected by the SSINx signal.
The speed output to the spindle motor can be controlled
only when the SINDx signal is set to “1”.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
441
15.5
PMC WINDOW
FUNCTION
General This function allows the PMC to read and rewrite CNC data.
Signal
om
Window request signal
WNRQ<G200#0>
[Function] See the description of window completion signal WNANS, below.
r.c
Window completion
signal
e
WNANS<F250#0>
nt
[Function] Window request signal WNRQ is sent, by the PMC, to request the CNC
to read/write data. A request is made by placing the signal in a state other
than the signal state of window completion signal WNANS. By request,
ce
the CNC reads or writes data, then posts the completion of the requested
processing by placing WNANS in the same signal state as that of WNRQ.
WNWRT
nc
WNRQ
WNANS
.c
WNERR
w
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

w
Rewrite processing Read processing

(1): Request for rewrite (4): Request for read
(2): Rewrite processing by CNC (5): Read processing by CNC
(3): Termination with an error (6): Normal termination
w
Window rewrite signal

WNWRT<G200#1>
[Function] When data in the CNC is read (from CNC to PMC; output), this signal
is set to 0. The read data is output to F252 to F267.
When data in the CNC is rewritten (from PMC to CNC; input), this signal
is set to 1. The data to be written is set in G206 to G209.
442
Window error signal

WNERR<F250#1>
[Function] When data passed to the window contains an error, completion
notification is made using WNANS, and WNERR is set to 1. When the
data contains no errors, WNERR is set to 0. Therefore, the PMC must
check to ensure that WNERR is 0 after checking that completion signal
WNANS has been inverted.
om
List of functions
Function Function
No.
Data name No.
Data name
0 20 Distribution information
r.c
1 Absolute coordinate system 21
2 Machine coordinate system 22 Output of axis movement

signal
3 Skip coordinate system 23 In–position information
e
4 Servo delay amount 24 Distribution information
nt
5
6
25
26
Load information of serial
spindle
Speed information of serial

ce
spindle
7 Distribution amount 27 Alarm information of serial

spindle
nc
8 28
9 29
10 Alarm information 30
.c
11 31
12 32 Torque limit
w
13 33 Output of modal data
14 Program number of the 34

w
current selection
15 Output of the servo load 35

current value
w
16 Output of the number of 36

required parts
17 Output of the number of 37

machined parts
18 38
19 39
* Those function numbers for which the data name fields are blank must
not be used.
443
Functional Nos.01,02,03 : (1) Function

Current Position Enables output of the current position.
The following three factors can be obtained with three functional
numbers:
1 : absolute coordinates
2 : machine coordinates
3 : skip position
(2) Data content
Type : binary
Data length : 2 words (for one axis)
om
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
r.c
G202 Functional binary number 1 to 3
G203 Word number of data 2 to 8
G204 Axis selection code 0 to 20
e
G205 00 0
nt
Example)
To obtain the data of the 2nd axis, set the word number of data to
“2” and the axis selection code to “4”. To obtain the data for several
ce
axes at a time, set the word number of data to “number of axis 2”
and the axis selection code to the value for the first axis.
Axis Selection Code)
M series T series
nc
0 : X axis X axis
4 : Y axis Z axis
8 : Z axis 3rd axis
12 : 4th axis
.c
Functional No.04 : (1) Function

w
Servo Delay Amount Enables reading of the current servo delay amount.
(2) Data content
Type : binary
w
Data length : 2 words (for one axis)

(3) Usage
w
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
G202 Functional binary number 4
G205 00 0
444
Example)
M series T series
0 : X axis X axis
4 : Y axis Z axis
8 : Z axis 3rd axis
om
12 : 4th axis

Distribution Amount Enables reading of the distribution amount of the current axis at every
interpolation cycle.
r.c
Window function is useful to discriminate the direction and the speed
of the movement in constant moving.
Please note that a time delay inevitably occurs when reading is
performed by PMC.
e
(2) Data content
Type : binary
ntData length : 2 words (for one axis)
(3) Usage
1) Classification
ce
Output
2) Control data

nc
G205 00 0
.c
Example)
w
w

M series T series
0 : X axis X axis
w
4 : Y axis Z axis
8 : Z axis 3rd axis
12 : 4th axis
445

Alarm Information Enables reading of the current alarm information.
(2) Data content
Type : bit
Data length : 1 byte
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
om
G203 Word number of data 1
G204 00 0
00 0
r.c
G205
Remarks)
Data can be obtained in a bit format.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
e
F252 SV OH OTS PS PS3 PS2 PS1
PS1 P/S alarm 100 (PWE ON)

PS2
PS3
nt
P/S alarm 000 (power off demand)
P/S alarm 101 (program area deletion demand)
ce
PS P/S alarm
OTS Over travel alarm
OH Over heat alarm
SV Servo alarm
nc

Program Number of Enables reading of the program number that is currently selected.
the Current Selection (2) Data content
.c
Given by 2–byte size.

The range of value is 0 through 9999.
w
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
w
2) Control data
w
G204 00 0
G205 00 0
446

Output of the Servo Enables reading of the output of load current value with sign of servo.
Load Current Value (2) Data content
Given by a binary format specified by 2–byte size for one axis.
Conversion of the load current value is given by the following
formula:
5 λ
Load current value [Apeak] = D
256 128
Where, D : read value in the PMC window
λ : motor model,
om
40 [Apeak] for 0, 5, 10, 20
80 [Apeak] for 20, 30
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
r.c
2) Control data
e
nt G205
Example)
00 0
ce
“1” and the axis selection code to “26”. The data for several axes
can not be obtained at the same time with this window.
M series T series
nc
2 : X axis X axis
26 : Y axis Z axis
50 : Z axis 3rd axis
74 : 4th axis
.c

Output of Number of Enables reading of the number of part required in the display of the
w
Required Parts machining parts number of CNC.

(2) Data content
Type : binary
w
Data length : 1 word

Data range : 0 through 32767
(3) Usage
w
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
G204 00 0
G205 00 0
447

Output of Number of Enables reading of the machined parts number in the display of the
Machined Parts machined parts number of CNC.
(2) Data content
Type : binary
Data length : 2 words
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
om
2) Control data
r.c
G204 00 0
G205 00 0
e
Distribution Enables reading of the following distribution information.
Information nt
(2) Data content
Type : bit
ce
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
nc
00 0
.c
G204
G205 00 0
Remarks)
w
The data can be obtained in a bit format.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
F252 MTN DWL AF CYL ORGN
ORGN 1 : block for setting coordinate system.

0 : block not for setting coordinate system.
w
CYL 1 : in a cycle operation.

0 : out of a cycle operation.
AF 1 : with auxiliary function
0 : without auxiliary function
DWL 1 : with dwell
0 : without dwell
MTN 1 : with distribution
0 : without distribution
448

Output of Axis Enables reading if the current axis is moving.
Movement Signal (2) Data content
Type : bit
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
om
G204 00 0
r.c
G205 00 0
Remarks)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
e
F252 MV3 MVZ MVX (T series)
MV4 MVZ MVY MVX (M series)
nt
MVx Represents the movement signal of X, Y (Z), Z (3) and 4th axis
successively.
ce
Each axis is moving when each bit is 1.

In–position Enables reading if an axis is in the in–position.
nc
Information (2) Data content

Type : bit
.c
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
w
2) Control data

w
G204 00 0
w
G205 00 0
Remarks)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F252 INP3 INPZ INPX (T series)
INP4 INPZ INPY INPX (M series)
INPx Represents the in–position of X, Y (Z), Z (3) and 4th axis successively.
Each axis is in the in–position when each bit is 1.
449

Distribution Enables reading of the information related to the distribution of CNC.
Information (2) Data content
Type : bit
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
om
G204 00 0
00 0
r.c
G205
Remarks)
The data can be obtained in a bit form.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
e
F252 HND ZRNM G30 G27
AUTO @POS
CIR G03 SCRW
nt
AUTO 0 : pulse distribution in a manual mode (jog, step, etc.)
1 : pulse distribution in an automatic mode (AUTO, MDI, etc.)
@POS 0 : pulse distribution in a position format.
ce
1 : pulse distribution in an interpolation format.
The content of the information of bit 0 through 5 varies according to the
state of @POS as follows:
nc
In the case of @POS = 0 ;

HND 0 : pulse distribution other than a handle.
1 : pulse distribution of a handle.
.c
ZRNM 0 : non reference position return

1 : reference position return
G30 0 : out of 2nd reference position returning
w
1 : in 2nd reference position returning

G27 0 : non reference position return check
w
1 : reference position return check

In the case of @POS = 1;
w
CIR 0 : linear interpolation

1 : circular interpolation
G03 0 : G02 (significant only when CIR = 1)
1 : G03
SCRW 0 : out of thread cutting
1 : in thread cutting
450

Load Information of Enables reading of the load information of serial spindles.
Serial Spindles (2) Data content
Type : binary
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
om
G204 00 0
r.c
G205 00 0
Remarks)
For reference, the formula to normalize the load information is
shown as follows:
e
L
Load (%) = λ
32767
nt where , L is the value read from the window,
λ is the ratio of maximum output to the continuous rated output of
a motor (when the continuous rated output is regarded as 100%, λ
ce
for 180% of the maximum output becomes 180).

Speed Information of Enables reading of the speed information of serial spindles.
nc

Type : binary
Data range : 0 through "16383
.c
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
w
2) Control data
w
G204 00 0
w
G205 00 0
Remarks)
For reference, the formula to obtain the rotation number from the
speed information is shown as follows:
Rotation Number (rpm)
ȧVȧ
= (Maximum rotation number of the motor)
16383
where, V is the value read from the window,
ȧVȧ is the absolute value of V.
451

Alarm Information of Enables reading of the alarm information of serial spindles.
Type : binary
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
om
G204 00 0
G205 00 0
r.c
Remarks)
The alarm code and the content of alarms are shown as follows:
Code Content of alarm
e
0 Normal operation
1 Motor over heat
nt 2
4
7
Velocity error excess
Phase lack alarm
Over speed
ce
9 Over load
10 Low voltage in control power supply
11 Over voltage in DC linking part
nc
12 Over current in DC linking part

13 Internal memory abnormality of CPU
14 ROM alarm
18 Sumcheck alarm of program memory (ROM)
.c
19 Excessive offset in U phase current detection circuit

20 Excessive offset in V phase current detection circuit
w
24 Serial data transmission alarm

25 Serial LSI watchdog
26 Burn–out alarm of 9000p speed detector
w
27 Burn–out alarm of position coder

28 Burn–out alarm of 9000p position detector
w
29 Over load
30 Over current in input circuit
31 Motor binding alarm
32 Internal RAM abnormality in serial LSI
33 Undercharge alarm at DC linking part
34 Parameter data malsetting
35 Disagreement in gear ratio setting
36 Error counter overflow
37 HCRDY handshake alarm
452

Torque Limit Enables setting of the torque limit to a servo motor from the PMC
window.
(2) Data content
Torque limit data
Type : binary
Input range : 0 through 255
0 for 0%.
255 for 100%.
om
(3) Usage
1) Classification
Input
2) Control data
r.c
e
G205 00 0
G206 to Torque limit data 0 to 255
nt G207
Set value : 0 to 5
ce
M series T series
0 : X axis X axis
1 : Y axis Z axis
2 : Z axis 3rd axis
nc
3 : 4th axis
Example)
To set 50% of the torque limit to 2nd axis, set the axis selection code
to “1” and the torque limit data to “128”. To cancel the torque limit,
.c
set the torque limit data to “255”.

Remarks)
When the number exceeding the maximum controlled axis number
w
is set, an error occurs.

w
w
453

Output of Modal Data Enables reading of the modal information of CNC from PMC window.
(2) Data content
The modal data of G function:
The read modal data of G function is set in F252 by a binary code in
the following format:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F252
The modal data is shown by code.
om
1 : represents that the read modal data is commanded in a current block of the
part program.
0 : represents that the read modal data is not commanded in a current block of
the part program.
Modal data other than G function:
r.c
The eleven kinds of data, the addresses D, H, L, M, N, O, S, T, F, of
the NC part program and 2nd auxiliary function, can be read as modal
data other than G function.
The read data is set in the area of 5 byte F252 through F256 as follows:
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F252
F253
#7
nt #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F254
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F255
nc
3 : The read data is set in a binary format.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F256
.c
Sign No. of digit

w
1 : represents that the read modal data is commanded in a current block of the
part program.
0 : represents that the read modal data is not commanded in a current block of
w
the part program.
(3) Usage
w
1) Classification
Output
2) Control data
G204 to Modal Data 0 to 21,

G205 Group number 24 to 33
100 to 116, 200 to 216
124 to 133, 224 to 233
454
Remarks)
The correspondence between the numbers to be specified to G204
trough G205 and the modal data is shown as follows:
Either number “1” (current) or “2” (next) is specified to the blank
space of each 3rd digit according to the necessary modal data.
The G code in a lathe system is represented on the basis of B in the
G code system.
For example, G32 in the G code system A corresponds to G33 in
the G code system B and the code read to F252 becomes 4.
om
Number Correspondence Table of G Code Group
Group G code in the G code in the
Code Code
number machining system lathe system
G00 0 G00 0
r.c
G01 1 G01 1
G02 2 G02 2
G03 3 G03 3
j00 G33 4 G33 4
G34 8
G77 5
e
G78 6
G79 7
nt
j01
G17
G18
G19
0
8
4
G96
G97
1
0
ce
G90 0 G90 0
j02
G91 1 G91 1
G22 1 G68 1
j03
G23 0 G89 0
nc
G94 0 G94 0
j04
G95 1 G95 1
G20 0 G20 0
j05
.c
G21 1 G21 1
G40 0 G40 0
j06 G41 1 G41 1
w
G42 2 G42 2
G43 1 G25 0
j07 G44 2 G26 1
w
G49 0
G73 10 G22 0
w
G74 11 G23 1
G76 12
G80 0
G81 1
G82 2
j08 G83 3
G84 4
G85 5
G86 6
G87 7
G88 8
G89 9
455
Group G code in the G code in the

Code Code
number machining system lathe system
G98 0 G80 0
G99 1 G83 1
G84 2
j09 G86 3
G87 5
G88 6
G89 7
G50 0 G98 0
j10
om
G51 1 G99 1
G66 1 G66 1
j11
G67 0 G77 0
G96 1
j12
G97 0
r.c
G54 0
G55 1
G56 2
j13
G57 3
G58 4
e
G59 5
nt
j14
G61
G62
G63
G64
1
2
3
0
ce
G68 1 G17 0
j15 G69 0 G18 4
G19 8
G15 0
nc
j16
G16 1
Number Correspondence Table of Modal Data Group Other than G Code

.c
Modal data other Area where the

Machine system Lathe system
than the G function data is read
j24
w
D –
H j25 – F252 to F255
L j26 j24
w
M j27 j25
N j28 j26
O j29 j27
w
S j30 j28
T j31 j29
F j32 j30
B j33 j31
456
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G200 WNWRT WNRQ
G202 DI for PMC window (Function number)
G203 DI for PMC window (Number of word of data)
G204 DI for PMC window
om
to to
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F250 WNERR WNANS
F252 DO for PMC window
e
to to
F267 DO for PMC window
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
457
w
w
w
.c
nc
ce
APPENDIX
nt
er.c
om
B–62543EN–1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
461
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B–62543EN–1/01
A.1
LIST OF ADDRESSES
List of address
(M series)
→
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 4NG
om
X008 SKIP ESKIP *RILK
X016 *DECX
X017 *DECY
r.c
X018 *DECZ
X019 *DEC4
e
X020 *–LZ *–LY *–LX *+LZ *+LY *+LX
X021 *ESP
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
462
PMC →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G103 AFL ZNG SPC SPB SPA
G104 RRW *FLWU
om
G105 SVF4 SVFZ SVFY SVFX
G106 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2
G107 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2
r.c
G108
G109
e
G109
G110
G111
nt
SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03
SHA11
SHA02
SHA10
SHA01
SHA09
SHA00
SHA08
ce
G112
G113
G114
nc
G115 BFIN1 BFIN2 TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN
G116 HX/ROV1 AOV64 AOV32 AOV16 –X +X SBK BDT

.c
G117 HY/ROV2 AOV128 –Y +Y MLK *ILK
G118 HZ/DRN –Z +Z
w
G119 H4 –4 +4 *LDSP
w
G120 ZRN *SSTP SOR SAR FIN ST MP2 MP1/MINP
G121 ERS RT *SP *ESP *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1

w
G122 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
G123 RTNT RGTPN IGNVRY
G124 RO8I RO7I RO6I RO5I RO4I RO3I RO2I RO1I
G125 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I RO9I
G126 OVC
463
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G127 MIR4 DLK DNCI *ABSM MIRY MIRX
G128 *IT4 *ITZ *ITY *ITX
G129 EXLM2
om
G132
G133
G134 MFIN3 MFIN2 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
r.c
G135 RGTAP
G136
G137
e
G138
G139
G140
nt
ce
G141
G142 *–MIT4 *–MITZ *–MITY *–MITX *+MIT4 *+MITZ *+MITY *+MITX

nc
G143
G144 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1

.c
G145
G146 ROV1E ROV2E

w

w
w
464
CNC →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F148 OP SA STL SPL ZP4 ZPZ/EF ZPY ZPX
F149 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL
F150 BF1 BF2 DST TF SF EFD MF
F151 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
F152 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14/GR3O S12/GR2O S11/GR1O
om
F153 T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11
F154 M00 M01 M02 M30 B38 B34 B32 B31
F155 B28 B24 B22 B21 B18 B14 B12 B11
r.c
F156 T48 T44 T42 T41 T38 T34 T32 T31
F157 MF3 MF2 M38 M34 M32 M31
e
F158 MMI4 MMI2 MMI1
F159
F160
nt BAL4 BAL3 BAL2
ESEND
BAL1
EREND
ce
F161 FXST ZP24 ZP2Z ZP2Y ZP2X
F162 U07 U06 U05 U04 U03 U02 U01 U00
F163 U15 U14 U13 U12 U11 U10 U09 U08

nc
F164 PRTSF RWD
F165 RGSPM RGSPP

.c
F166
F167
w
F168 TORQL ZRF4 ZRFZ ZRFY ZRFX

w
F169
F170
w
F173 R12O R11O R10O R09O
F174 H4O HZO HYO HXO ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
465
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F177 –4O +4O –ZO +ZO –YO +YO –XO +XO
F178 SPO RTO KEYO
F179
om
F181
F182
F183
r.c
F184 MV4 MVZ MVY MVX INP4 INPZ INPY INPX
F185 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11
F186 S48 S44 S42 S41 S38 S34 S32 S31
e
F187 S58 S54 S52 S51
F188
F189
nt
*EAXSL CUT EOV0
SPDS4 SPDS3 SPDS2 SPDS1

ce
F190
F191
nc
F192 RTPT
F193 M228 M224 M222 M221 M218 M214 M212 M211

.c
F194 M318 M314 M312 M311 M238 M234 M232 M231
F195 M338 M334 M332 M331 M328 M324 M322 M321

w

w

w
466
PMC →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G200 PMC window DI
to to
G209 PMC window DI
G211 EC7A EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
om
r.c
e
G219
G220
EC7B
nt
EIF7B
EC6B
EIF6B
EC5B
EIF5B
EC4B
EIF4B
EC3B
EIF3B
EC2B
EIF2B
EC1B
EIF1B
EC0B
EIF0B
ce

nc

.c
G226
w
G227
w
G228

w
G230 RCHA RSLA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G231 NRROA ROTAA INDXA
G232
G233 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G234 RCHB RSLB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
467
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G235 NRROB ROTAB INDXB
G236
G237 INFD
G238
G239
om
G240 Operator’s panel DI
to to
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
468
PMC →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F250 PMC window DO
to to
F269 PMC window DO
F270 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EFENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
F271 EMFA
om
F273 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
F274 EMFB
r.c
F276
F277
e
F278
F279
F280
nt
ce
F282 PCFNA PCHPA CFINA CHPA

nc
F283
F284

.c
F286 PCFNB PCHPB CFINB CHOB

w
F287
F288
w
F289
w
F290
F291 Operator’s panel DO
to to
469
List of addresses
(T series)
MT →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X008 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1
SKIP ESKIP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
* 0-GCD/GSD for lower stage
X016 *DEC3 *DECX
om
X017 *DECZ
* By parameter setting
X018 *+LZ
X019 *DEC3
r.c
* By parameter setting
X020
e
X021 *ESP
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
470
PMC →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G103 AFL PRC SPC SPB SPA SPD
G104 RRW *FLWU
om
G105 PLCRVON KILPLUS SVF3 SVFZ SVFX
G106 M2R08I M2R07I M2R06I M2R05I M2R04I M2R03I M2R02I M2R01I
G107 M2SIND M2SSIN M2SGN M2R12I M2R11I M2R10I M2R09I
r.c
G108 M3R08I M3R07I M3R06I M3R05I M3R04I M3R03I M3R02I M3R01I
G109 M3SIND M3SSIN M3SGN M3R12I M3R11I M3R10I M3R09I
e
G110 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G111 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
G112
nt
ce
G113
G114
G115 TFIN SFIN MFIN

nc
G116 HX/ROV1 ROV3D ROV2D ROV1D –X +X SBK BDT
G117 HZ/ROV2 –Z +Z MLK MP1/MINP

.c
G118 DRN GR2 GR1 MP2

H3 –3 +3 MP2
w
* Lower stage by parameter setting
G119 *LDSP
w
G120 ZRN *SSTP SOR SAR FIN ST STLK MIX
G121 ERS RT *SP *ESP *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1

w
G122 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
G123 SPSTP RGTPN COFF

DRN SPSTP GR2 GR1 RGTPN COFF
* Lower setting by parameter setting
G124 RO8I RO7I RO6I RO5I RO4I RO3I RO2I RO1I
G125 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
471
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G126 CDZ SMZ *OV16 OVC HI3 HIZ HIX
G127 DLK DNCI *ABSM MIZ IGNVRY
G128 IT3 ITZ ITX
G129 EXLM2
om
G132
G133 NOZAGC
r.c
G134 MFIN3 MFIN2 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
G135
G136
e
G137
G138
G139
nt *–EDCZ *–EDCX *+EDCZ *+EDCX
ce
G140 AOVR128 AOVR64 AOVR32 AOVR16
G141
nc
G142
G143
.c
G144 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1
G145 GR31 GR21

w
G146 ROV2E ROV1E

w
w
472
CNC →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F148 OP SA STL SPL ZP4 ZP3 ZPZ ZPX
F149 MA DEN2 TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL
F150 DST TF SF MF
F151 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
F152 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11
om
F153 T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11
F154
F155 MMI2 MMI1
r.c
F156 BAL3 BAL2 BAL1
F157 MF3 MF2 M38 M34 M32 M31
e
F158
F159
F160
nt ESEND EREND
ce
F161 ZP23 ZP2Z ZP2X

nc
F164 PRSTF RWD ENB3 ENB2
F165
.c
F166
F167
w
F168 ZRF3 ZRFZ ZRFX

w
F169
F170 TORQ3 TORQ2 TORQ1

w
F173 R12O R11O R10O R09O
F174 H3O HZO HXO ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
473
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F177 –3O +3O –ZO +ZO –XO +XO
F178 SPO RTO KEYO
F179
om
F181
F182
F183
r.c
F184 MV3 MVZ MVX INP3 INPZ INPX
F185 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11
F186 S48 S44 S42 S41 S38 S34 S32 S31
e
F187 S58 S54 S52 S51
F188
F189
nt
*EAXSL CUT EOV0 THRD
ce
F190
F191
nc
F192
F193 M228 M224 M222 M221 M218 M214 M212 M211

.c
F194 M318 M314 M312 M311 M238 M234 M232 M231
F195 M338 M334 M332 M331 M328 M324 M322 M321

w

w

w
474
PMC →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G200 PMC window DI
to to
G209 PMC window DI
G211 EC7A EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
om
r.c
e
G219
G220
EC7B
nt
EIF7B
EC6B
EIF6B
EC5B
EIF5B
EC4B
EIF4B
EC3B
EIF3B
EC2B
EIF2B
EC1B
EIF1B
EC0B
EIF0B
ce

nc

.c
G226
w
G227
w
G228

w
G230 RCHA RSLA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G231
G232
G233 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB ERVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G234 PCHB RSLB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
475
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G235
G236
G237
G238
G239
om
to to
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
476
CNC →
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F250 PMC window DO
to to
F269 PMC window DO
F270 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
F271 EMFA
om
F273 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECZKB EINPB
F274 EMFB
r.c
F276
F277
e
F278
F279
F280
nt
ce
F282 PCFNA PCHPA CFINA CHPA

nc
F283
F284

.c
F286 PCFNB PCHPB CFINB CHPB

w
F287
F288
w
F289
w
to to
477
List of addresses
(without PMC)
(1) M series
(a) MT ³ CNC (without PMC)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 000
X002 002
X004 004 4NG
om
X006 006
X008 008 SKIP *RILK ZAE YAE XAE
X010 010 / / / /
r.c
X012 012
X014 014
e
X016 016 HX/ROV1 / *DECX / –X +X SBK BDT
X017 017 HY/ROV2 / *DECY / –Y +Y MLK *ILK
X018 018
nt
HZ/DRN / *DECZ / –Z +Z / /
ce
X019 019 H4 / *DEC4 / –4 +4 / /
X020 020 ZRN *SSTP SOR SAR FIN ST MP2 MP1/MINP
X021 021 ERS RT *SP *ESP *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1

nc
X022 022 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
(b) CNC ³ MT (without PMC)

.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y048 048 OP SA STL SPL / ZPZ/EF ZPY ZPX
w
Y049 049 MA / / ENB DEN / RST AL
Y050 050 / / DST / TF SF / MF

w
Y051 051 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
Y052 052 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14/GR30 S12/GR20 S11/GR10
w
Y053 053 T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11
Y080 080
Y082 082
Y084 084 ZP4
Y086 086
478
(2) Tseries
(a) MT ³ CNC (without PMC)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 000
X002 002
X004 004
X006 006
om
SKIP ZAE XAE
X008 008 SKIP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 ZAE XAE
0-GCD for lower stage
X010 010 / / / /
r.c
X012 012
X014 014
e
X016 016 HX/ROV1 / *DECX / –X +X SBK BDT
X017
X018
017
018 DRN
nt
HY/ROV2 /
/
*DECY
*+LZ
/
/
–Z
GR2
+Z
GR1
MLK
/
MP1/MINP
/
ce
X019 019 *DEC3 / *DEC4 / / /
X020 020 ZRN *SSTP SOR SAR FIN ST STLK MIX
X021 021 ERS RT *SP *ESP *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1

nc
X022 022 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
(b) CNC ³ MT (without PMC)

.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y048 048 OP SA STL SPL / ZPT ZPX
w
Y049 049 MA / / ENB DEN / RST AL
Y050 050 / / DST / TF SF / MF

w
Y051 051 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
w
Y052 052 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11
Y053 053 T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11
Y080 080
Y082 082
Y084 084
Y086 086
479
A.2
LIST OF SIGNALS
A.2.1
List of Signals Meaning of symbols in the below table
(In Order of Functions) f: Available
l: Available for 0–GCD or 0–GSD only
Blank : Unavailable
om
Refer-
Function Signal name Symbol T M PMC address ence
item
Axis moving
g state Axis moving signal MVX, MVY, MVZ, MV4 f F148.4 to F148.7
124
1.2.4
r.c
output Axis moving signal MVX, MVZ, MV3 f F148.4 to F148.6
Mirror image check signal MMI1, MMI2 f F155.0, F155.1
F158.0, F158.1,
Mirror image check signal MMI1, MMI2, MMI4 f
F158.3,
Mi
Mirror image
i 12
1.2.5
e
Mirror image signal MIX, MIZ f G120.0, G127.1
G127.0, G127.1,
Mirror image signal MIRX, MIRY, MIR4 f
Follow–up
Servo off
Follow–up signal
nt *FLWU
SVFX, SVFZ, SVF3

f
f
f
G127.7
G104.5
G105.0, G105.1,
1.2.6
ce
G105.2
(mechanical Servo off signal 1.2.7
handle) SVFX, SVFY, SVFZ, G105.0, G105.1,
f
SVF4 G105.2, G105.3
4th axis disable
4th axis disable signal 4NG f X004.7 1.4.3
signal
nc
Z axis command
Z axis command cancel signal ZNG f G103.6 1.4.4
cancel signal
Angular axis control Angular axis control Z axis
NOZAGC l G133.6 1.6
(0–GCD) offset moving signal
.c
Emergency stop Emergency stop signal *ESP, *ESP f f X021.4, G121.4 2.1
Servo ready completion signal SA f f F148.6
CNC ready signal 22
2.2
w
CNC ready signal MA f f F149.7

Over travel limit signal *+LZ f X018.5
X020.0, X020.1,
w
O
Overtravel
l signal
i l *+LX, *+LY, *+LZ, *–LX, 231
2.3.1
Over travel limit signal f X020.2, X020.3,
*–LY, *–LZ
X020.4, X020.5
Stored stroke limit select
w
Stored stroke limit 1 EXLM2 f f G129.6 2.3.2

signal
CNC alarm signal AL f f F149.0
Battery alarm BAL f f F149.2
Al
Alarm signal
i l 24
2.4
Absolute pulse
p coder batteryy BAL1 to BAL4 f F159.0 to F159.3
alar BAL1 to BAL3 f F156.0 to F156.2
G128.0, G128.1,
*ITX, *ITY, *ITZ, *IT4 f
G128.2, G128.3
Start lock/interlock Interlock signal for each axis 2.5
G128.0, G128.1,
ITX, ITZ, IT3 f
G128.2
480
Refer-
item
Interlock signal for each axis +MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, X008.2, X008.3
f
direction –MIT2 X008.4, X008.5
*+MITX, *+MITY, G142.0, G142.1,
Interlock signal for each axis *+MITZ, *+MIT4, G142.2, G142.3,
f
direction *–MITX, *–MITY, G142.4, G142.5,
S
Start llock/interlock
k/i l k 2
2.5
*–MITZ, *–MIT4 G142.6, G142.7
High–speed interlock signal *RILK f X008.5
f
om
Start lock signal STLK G120.1
Interlock signal *ILK f G117.0
G122.0, G122.1,
Mode select signal MD1, MD2, MD4 f f 2.6
G122.2
Mode selection
Manual reference position
ZRN f f G120.7 2.6, 4.1
return select signal
r.c
Cutting feed signal CUT f f F188.6
Status output signal 27
2.7
Canned cycle start signal FXST f F161.4
VRDY off alarm IGNVRY f G123.0

V–READY check signal 28
2.8
e
ignore signal IGNVRY f G127.0
*OV1, *OV2, *OV4, G121.0, G121.1, 3.1,
Override signal f f
nt *OV8
+X, –X, –Y, +Y, –Z, +Z

+4, –4
f
G121.2, G121.3
G116.2, G116.3,
G117.3, G117.2,
G118.3, G118.2,
7.1.5.2
ce
Jog
J Feed axis direction select G119.2, G119.3
feed/incremental signal
G116.2, G116.3,
feed 31
3.1
+X –X
+X, –X, +Z
+Z, –Z
–Z, +3
+3, –3 f G117.2, G117.3,
G118.2, G118.3
nc
Jog feedrate override signal JOV1 to JOV8 f G104.0 to G104.3

Manual rapid traverse select
RT f f G121.6
signal
G116.7, G117.7,
HX, HZ, H3 f
.c
G118.7
Handle feed axis select signal
G116.7, G117.7,
M
Manual
lhhandle
dl ffeed
d HX, HY, HZ, H4 f 32
3.2
G118.7, G119.7
w
Manual handle feed amount MP1, MP2 f G120.0, G120.1

select signal MP1, MP2 f G118.0, G119.0
F168.0, F168.1,
w
ZRFX, ZRFZ, ZRF3 f

Reference p
position F168.2
establishment signal ZRFX, ZRFY, ZRFZ, F168.0, F168.1,
f
ZRF4 F168.2, F168.3
w
F148.0, F148.1,
ZPX, ZPZ, ZP3 f
f
Manuall reference
M Reference p
position return F148.2
41
4.1
position return completion signal F148.0, F148.1,
ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ZP4 f
F148.2, F148.3
*DECX, *DECY, *DECZ, X016.5, X017.5,
f
g
Deceleration signal for *DEC4 X018.5, X019.5
reference position return X016.5, X017.5,
*DECX, *DECZ, *DEC3 f
X018.5
481
Refer-
item
ZP2X, ZP2Y, ZP2Z, F161.0, F161.1,
f
Second reference 2nd reference p
position return ZP24 F161.2, F161.3
4.4
position return completion signal F161.0, F161.1,
ZP2X, ZP2Z, ZP23 f
F161.2
Manual data input start signal DST f f F150.5
Automatic operation halt signal SPL f f F148.4
Automatic operation signal OP f f F148.7
om
Cycle
C l start/feed
/f d Automatic operation hold
*SP f f G121.5 1
5.1
hold signal
Automatic operation start lamp
STL f f F148.5
signal
Automatic operation start
ST f f G120.2
r.c
signal
Rewind signal RRW f f G104.6
Reset signal RST f f F149.1
R
Reset and
d rewind
i d 52
5.2
Rewinding signal RWD f f F164.6
e
External reset signal ERS f f G121.7
Machine lock All–axis machine lock signal MLK f f G117.1 5.3.1
Dry run
Single block
Manual absolute
Dry run signal
Single block signal
nt DRN
SBK
f
f
f
f
G118.7
G116.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
ce
Manual absolute signal *ABSM f f G127.2 5.4
on/off
Optional block skip Optional block skip signal BDT f f G116.0 5.5
Cycle start/feed
DNC operation select signal DNCI f f G127.5 5.7
hold
nc
Infeed control cutting start

Infeed control INFD l G237.6 5.8
signal
Thread cutting in–progress
Thread cutting THRD f F188.3 6.4.1
signal
.c
Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse override signal ROV1, ROV2 f f G116.7, G117.7 7.1.5.1
override
*AOV16, *AOV32, G116.4, G116.5,
f
w
*AOV64, *AOV128 G116.6, G117.6

Feedrate override 1% step override signal 7152
7.1.5.2
*AOVR16, *AOVR32, G140.4, G140.5,
f
*AOVR64, *AOVR128 G140.6, G140.7
w
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse override B ROV1D, ROV2D, G116.4, G116.5,

f 7.1.5.3
override signal ROV3D G116.6
f f
w
Override cancel Override cancel signal OVC G126.4 7.1.5.4

In–position check In–position signal INP1 to INP4 f f F184.0 to F184.3 7.2.2.1
Error detect Error detect signal SMZ f G126.6 7.2.2.3
Signal by axis SPDS1, SPDS2, F189.0, F189.1,
Signal by axis moving speed f 7.2.2.4
moving speed SPDS3, SPDS4 F189.2, F189.3
Passed point output signal DEN2 f F149.6
Miscellaneous
function/2nd T11 to T28 f F153.0 to F153.7 81
8.1
auxiliary function Tool function code signal
T11 to T48 f F153.0 to F156.7
482
Refer-
item
2nd auxiliary function signal B11 to B38 f F155.0 to F154.3
F154.7, F154.6,
M decode signal M00, M01, M02, M30 f
F154.5, F154.4
B code strobe signal BF1, BF2 f F150.7, F150.6
Tool function strobe signal TF f f F150.3
81
8.1
F151.0, F151.1,
F151.2, F151.3,
om
M11, M12, M14, M18,
Miscellaneous function code F151.4, F151.5,
M21, M22, M24, M28, f f
signal F151.6, F151.7,
M31, M32, M34, M38
Miscellaneous
Mi ll F157.0, F157.1,
function/2nd F157.2, F157.3
auxiliary function Spindle function strobe signal SF f f F150.2 8.1, 9.5
F152.0, F152.1,
r.c
S11, S12, S14, S18, F152.2, F152.3,
Spindle function code signal f f 8.1, 9.3
S21, S22, S24, S28 F152.4, F152.5,
F152.6, F152.7
Miscellaneous function strobe
MF f f F150.0
signal
e
M, S, T, B function completion 81
8.1
FIN f f G120.3
signal
Auxiliary function
lock
Distribution end signal
Miscellaneous function lock
signal
nt DEN
AFL
f
f
f
f
F149.3
G103.7 8.2
ce
F194.4, F194.5,
M311, M312, M314, F194.6, F194.7,
M318, M321, M322, F195.0, F195.1,
3rd M function code signal f f
M324, M328, M331, F195.2, F195.3,
M332, M334, M338 F195.4, F195.5,
nc
F195.6, F195.7
Multiple M
2nd or 3rd M function strobe
commands in a MF2, MF3 f f F157.4, F157.5 83
8.3
signal
single block
F193.0, F193.1,
.c
M211, M212, M214, F193.2, F193.3,

M218, M221, M222, F193.4, F193.5,
2nd M function code signal f f
M224, M228, M231, F193.6, F193.7,
w
M232, M234, M238 F194.0, F194.1,

F194.2, F194.3
2nd auxiliary function
BFIN1, BFIN2 f G115.7, G115.6
w
completion signal
2nd M function completion
MFIN2 f f G134.4
signal
w
3rd M function completion

MFIN3 f f G134.5
signal
High–speed
Hi
High
h speedd
External operation signal for 8.4
8 4
M/S/T/B interface EFD f F150.1
high–speed interface
Tool function completion signal TFIN f f G115.3
Spindle function completion
SFIN f f G115.2
signal
External operation completion
EFIN f G115.1
signal for high–speed interface
483
Refer-
item
High–speed Miscellaneous function
MFIN f f G115.0 8.4
M/S/T/B interface completion signal
ENB f f F149.4
S i dl enable
Spindle bl signal
i l F149.4, F164.2,
ENB2, ENB3 f
F164.3
9 3 9.5
9.3, 9
GR1, GR2 f G118.2, G118.3
G
Gear select
l signal
i l G152.0, G152.1,
f
om
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
G152.2
G103.3, G103.4,
S i dl controll
Spindle Spindle speed override signal SPA, SPB, SPC f 9.3
G103.5
S12–bit code signal R01O to R12O f f F172.0 to F173.3 9.3, 15.4
Spindle speed reached signal SAR f f G120.4
r.c
G103.3, G103.4,
Spindle speed override signal SPA, SPB, SPC, SPD f
G103.5, G103.2 93
9.3
Spindle orientation signal SOR f f G120.5
Spindle stop signal *SSTP f f G120.6
e
Rigid tapping signal RGTAP, RGTPN f G135.0, G123.1
Ri id tapping
Rigid i Spindle rotation direction 9
9.5
f
Spindle orientation
signal nt
1st spindle orientation external
stop position command signal
RGSPM, RGSPP
SHA00 to SHA11 f f
F165.1, F165.0
G110.0 to G110.7,
G111.0 to G111.3
9.6
ce
Position coder return control
Position coder PLCRVON f f G105.7
signal
return control 97
9.7
function Position coder return direction
KILPLUS f f G105.6
select signal
nc
Output
p signal
g for custom UO100 to UO131 f f F196.0 to F199.7
C
Custom macro macro UO000 to UO015 f f F162.0 to F163.7 11 1
11.5.1
Input signal for custom macro UI000 to UI015 f f G130.0 to G131.7
Canned cycle (M
f f
.c
Tapping signal TAP F149.5 11.6

series)
External motion
External operation signal EF f F150.0 11.7
function
w
Canned cycle Chamfering signal CDZ f G126.7 11.8

Ladder display signal *LDSP f f G119.0
Di l and
Display d setting
i 12 1
12.1
w
Renewal disable signal of

DLK f f G127.6
relative coordinate
Run hour and parts Required parts count reached
PRTSF f f F164.7 12.1.5
w
count display signal

Software operator’s panel
OUT0 to OUT7 f f F171.0 to F171.7
general–purpose switch signal
Jog rapid traverse select
signal (software operator’s RTO f f F178.6
S f
Software operator’s
’ panel signal)
12 1
12.1.7
panel
Feed hold signal (software
SPO f f F178.7
operator’s panel signal)
Mode select signal (software F174.0, F174.1,
MD1O, MD2O, MD4O f f
operator’s panel signal) F174.2
484
Refer-
item
F174.4, F174.5,
Manual pulse generator feed HXO, HZO, H3O f
F174.6
axis select signal (software
operator’s panel signal) F174.4, F174.5,
HXO, HYO, HZO, H4O f
F174.6, F174.7
Jog feedrate override signal
JV1O, JV2O, JV4O, F175.0, F175.1,
(software operator’s panel f
JV8O F175.2, F175.3
signal)
om
Mode select signal (software
ZRNO f f F174.3
Dry run signal (software
DRNO f f F176.7
Machine lock signal (software
MLKO f f F176.6
r.c
Single block signal (software
SBKO f f F176.5
Optional block skip signal
(software operator’s panel BDTO f f F176.4
signal)
e
S f
Software operator’s
’
F177.0, F177.1, 12.1.7
12 1
panel
+XO, –XO, +YO, –YO, F177.2, F177.3,
((software operator’s
signal)
p p
nt
Jog feed axis select signal
panel
+ZO, –ZO, +4O, –4O
+XO, –XO, +ZO, –ZO,

f
F177.4, F177.5,
F177.6, F177.7
F177.0, F177.1,
f
ce
F177.2, F177.3,
+3O , –3O
F177.4, F177.5
Rapid traverse override signal
(software operator’s panel ROV1O, ROV2O f f F175.4, F175.5
signal)
nc
Program protect signal

(software operator’s panel KEYO f f F178.5
signal)
Feedrate override signal
OV1O, OV2O, OV4O, F176.0, F176.1,
.c
(software operator’s panel f f

OV8O F176.2, F176.3
signal)
Select of magnification of
w
manual pulse generator

MP1O, MP2O f f F175.6, F175.7
(software operator’s panel
signal)
w
Memory protection
Program protect signal KEY f f G122.3 12.2.3
key
Read/punch alarm signal RPALM f f F180.3
w
External read/punch stop

EXSTP f f G134.2
signal
Externall I/O d
E device
i External punch start signal EXWT f f G134.3
13.2
13 2
control Background busy signal BGEACT f f F180.4
External read start signal EXRD f f G134.1
Read/punch in–progress
RPBSY f f F180.2
signal
External p
program
g External program
p g input
p start MINP f G117.0
13 3
13.3
input signal MINP f G120.0
485
Refer-
item
14.1.1,
Skip signal Skip signal SKIP l l X008.7
14.1.2
Multi–step skip X008.2, X008.3,
Skip signal SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 l 14.1.2
signal X008.4
TORQ1, TORQ2, F170.0, F170.1,
Torque limit skip Torque limit reached signal f 14.1.3
TORQ3 F170.2
Input of tool offset
Position record signal PRC f G103.6 14.2.1
om
value measured A
Axis control command signal EC0A to EC7A, EC0B G211.0 to G211.7,
f f
(PMC axis control ) to EC7B G219.0 to G219.7
Auxiliary function executing
EDENA, EDENB f f F270.3, F273.3
signal (PMC axis control )
Alarm signal (PMC axis control
r.c
EIALA, EIALB f f F270.2, F273.2
)
Control axis selection status
*EAXSL f f F188.7
signal (PMC axis control)
Following zero checking
ECKZA, ECZKB f f F270.1, F273.1
e
signal(PMC axis control )
Override 0% signal (PMC axis
EOV0 f f F188.5
control )
control)
nt
In–position signal (PMC axis
EINPA, EINPB f f F270.0, F273.0
ce
Axis control feedrate signal EIF0A to EIF15A, G212.0 to G213.7,
f f
(PMC axis control) EIF0B to EIF15B G220.0 to G221.7
Positive–direction overtravel
EOTPA, EOTPB f f F270.5, F273.5
Skip signal (PMC axis control ) ESKIP f f X008.6
nc
Axis moving signal (PMC axis

EGENA, EGENB f f F270.4, F273.4
PMC axis
i controll control ) 15.1
1 1
Axis control data signal (PMC EID0A to EID31A, G214.0 to G217.7,
f f
axis control) EID0B to EID31B G222.0 to G225.7
.c
Auxiliary function strobe signal

EMFA, EMFB f f F271.0, F274.0
(PMC axis control)
Command read completion
w
EBSYA, EBSYB f f F270.7, F273.7

Negative–direction overtravel
EOTNA, EOTNB f f F270.6, F273.6
w
Dry run signal (PMC axis

DRNE f f G147.7
control )
w
Block stop signal (PMC axis

ESBKA, ESBKB f f G210.3, G218.3
control )
Auxiliary function completion
EFINA, EFINB f f G210.0, G218.0
Servo off signal (PMC axis
ESOFA, ESOFB f f G210.4, G218.4
control )
Axis control temporary stop
ESTPA, ESTPB f f G210.5, G218.5
Manual rapid traverse select
RTE f f G147.6
486
Refer-
item
Auxiliary function code signal EM11A to EM28A, F272.0 to F272.7,
f f
(PMC axis control) EM11B to EM28B F275.0 to F275.7
Reset signal (PMC axis control
ECLRA, ECLRB f f G210.6, G218.6
)
Command read signal (PMC
EBUFA, EBUFB f f G210.7, G218.7
axis control )
PMC axis rapid traverse
ROV1E, ROV2E f f G146.0, G146.1
om
override signal
PMC axis
i controll Block stop disable signal 15.1
1 1
EMSBKA, EMSBKB f f F211.0, G219.0
(PMC axis control)
Control axis select signal
EAX1 to EAX4 f f G144.0 to G144.5
(PMC axis control )
PMC axis override cancel
r.c
OVCE f f G147.5
signal
G147.0, G147.1,
Feedrate override signal (PMC *OV1E, *OV2E, *OV4E,
f f G147.2, G147.3,
axis control ) *OV8E, *OV16E
G147.4
e
Read completion signal (for
EREND f f F160.0
external data input)
E
External
lddata iinput
external data input)
input)
nt
Search completion signal (for
Read signal (for external data

ESEND
ESTB
f
f
f
f
F160.1
G102.7 1 2
15.2
ce
Address signal (for external
EA0 to EA6 f f G102.0 to G102.6
data input)
Data signal (for external data
ED0 to ED15 f f G100.0 to G101.7
input)
nc
External workpiece Workpiece number search G122.4, G122.5,

PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8 f f 15.3
number search signal G122.6, G122.7
Motor speed command spindle R01I to R12I, R01I2 to G124.0 to G125.3,
f f
input signal R12I2 G106.0 to G107.3
.c
Spindle motor speed

SIND, SIND2 f f G125.7, G107.7
Spindle
S pi dl output
p command signal
15 4
15.4
1
control by the PMC Spindle motor command
SGN, SGN2 f f G125.5, G107.5
w
polarity select signal

Spindle motor command
SSIN, SSIN2, SSIN3 f f G125.6, G107.6
polarity select signal
w
Window request signal WNRQ f f G200.0
PMC Wi d
Window Window completion signal WNANS f f F250.0
1
15 5
15.5
w
function Window write signal WNWRT f f G200.1

Window error signal WNERR f f F250.1
Soft start /stop cancel signal SOCNA, SOCNB f f G230.4, G234.4
Spindle orientation stop R f to
Refer
INDXA, INDXB f f G231.0, G235.0
position change signal Descrip-
Functions
F i related
l d to
tions for
serial spindle Spindle rotation direction
serial
command signal while
ROTAA, ROTAB f f G231.1, G235.1 spindle
changing the orientation stop
position
487
Refer-
item
Power line switch completion
MCFNA, MCFNB f f G230.3, G234.3
signal
Power line status check signal RCHA, RCHB f f G230.7, G234.7
Output switch request signal RSLA, RSLB f f G230.6, G234.6
Short–distant movement
command while changing the NRROA, NRROB f f G231.2, G235.2
orientation stop position signal
om
Speed reached signal SARA, SARB f f F281.3, F285.3
Output switching completion
PCFNA, PCFNB f f F282.3, F286.3
signal
Output switching signal PCHPA, PCHPB f f F282.2, F286.2
Speed zero detection signal SSTA, SSTB f f F281.1, F285.1
r.c
Speed detection signal SDTA, SDTB f f F281.2, F285.2
Speed reached signal SARA, SARB f f F281.3, F285.3
Spindle switch completion
CFINA, CFINB f f F282.1, F286.1
signal
Refer
R f to
e
LDT1A, LDT1B, F281.4, F285.4, Descrip-
Functions
F i related
l d to Load detection signal f f
LDT2A, LDT2B F281.5, F285.5 tions for
serial spindle
Emergency stop signal for
spindle
Torque limit signal
nt *ESPA, *ESPB
TLMA, TLMB
f
f
f
f
G230.1, G234.1
F281.6, F285.6
serial
spindle
ce
Spindle orientation completion
ORARA, ORARB f f F281.7, F285.7
signal
Power line switch signal CHPA, CHPB f f F282.0, F286.0
Spindle select signal SPSLA, SPSLB f f G230.2, G234.2
nc
Spindle alarm signal ALMA, ALMB f F281.0, F285.0

Alarm reset signal ARSTA, ARSTB f f G230.0, G234.0
Low speed torque limit signal TLMLA, TLMLB f f G229.0, G233.0
Machine ready signal (serial
.c
MRDYA, MRDYB f f G229.7, G233.7

spindle)
High–speed torque limit signal TLMHA, TLMHB f f G229.1, G233.1
f f
w
Spindle CCW command signal SRVA, SRVB G229.4, G233.4

Orientation command signal ORCMA, ORCMB f f G229.6, G233.6
Spindle CW command signal SFRA, SFRB f f G229.5, G233.5
w
w
488
A.2.2
(In Order of Functions)
f: Available
Blank : Unavailable
Refer-
om
Symbol Signal name T M PMC address ence
item
*+LX, *+LY, *+LZ, *–LX, X020.0, X020.1, X020.2,
f
*–LY, *–LZ Over travel limit signal
g X020.3, X020.4, X020.5 2.3.1
*+LZ f X018.5
*+MITX, *+MITY, *+MITZ, G142.0, G142.1, G142.2,
r.c
*+MIT4, *–MITX, *–MITY, Interlock signal for each axis direction f G142.3, G142.4, G142.5, 2.5
*–MITZ, *–MIT4 G142.6, G142.7
*ABSM Manual absolute signal f f G127.2 5.4
*AOV16, *AOV32, *AOV64, G116.4, G116.5, G116.6,
f
e
*AOV128 G117.6
1% step override signal 7.1.5.2
*AOVR16, *AOVR32, G140.4, G140.5, G140.6,
f
*AOVR64, *AOVR128
*DECX, *DECY, *DECZ,
*DEC4
nt
Deceleration signal for reference position
return
f
G140.7
X016.5, X017.5, X018.5,
X019.5 4.1
f
ce
*DECX, *DECZ, *DEC3 X016.5, X017.5, X018.5
Control axis selection status signal (PMC
*EAXSL f f F188.7 15.1
axis control)
*ESP, *ESP Emergency stop signal f f X021.4, G121.4 2.1
nc
Refer to
Descrip-
*ESPA, *ESPB Emergency stop signal for spindle f f G230.1, G234.1 tions for
serial
spindle
.c
*FLWU Follow–up signal f f G104.5 1.2.6

G128.0, G128.1, G128.2,
*ITX, *ITY, *ITZ, *IT4 Interlock signal for each axis f 2.5
G128.3
w
*LDSP Ladder display signal f f G119.0 12.1

G121.0, G121.1, G121.2, 3.1,
*OV1, *OV2, *OV4, *OV8 Override signal f f
G121.3 7.1.5.2
w
*OV1E, *OV2E, *OV4E, Feedrate override signal (PMC axis G147.0, G147.1, G147.2,
f f 15.1
*OV8E, *OV16E control ) G147.3, G147.4
w
*RILK High–speed interlock signal f X008.5 2.5

*SP Automatic operation hold signal f f G121.5 5.1
*SSTP Spindle stop signal f f G120.6 9.3
+MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, X008.2, X008.3 X008.4,
Interlock signal for each axis direction f 2.5
–MIT2 X008.5
G116.2, G116.3, G117.2,
+X, –X, +Y, –Y, –Z, +Z, +4,
f G117.3, G118.3, G118.2,
–4
g
Feed axis direction select signal G119.2, G119.3 3.1
G116.2, G116.3, G117.2,
+X, –X, +Z, –Z, +3, –3 f
G117.3, G118.2, G118.3
489
Refer-
item
F177.0, F177.1, F177.2,
+XO,, –XO,, +YO,, –YO,,
f F177.3, F177.4, F177.5,
+ZO, –ZO, +4O, –4O JJog feed
f d axis i select
l signal
i l ((software
f F177.6, F177.7 12 1
12.1.7
operator’ss panel signal)
operator
+XO, –XO, +ZO, –ZO, F177.0, F177.1, F177.2,
f
+3O,
+3O –3O F177.3, F177.4,
F177 3 F177 F177.5
4 F177 5
4NG 4th axis disable signal f X004.7 1.4.3
AFL Miscellaneous function lock signal f f G103.7 8.2
om
AL CNC alarm signal f f F149.0 2.4
Refer to
ALMA, ALMB Spindle alarm signal f F281.0, F285.0 Descrip-
tions for
ARSTA, ARSTB Alarm reset signal f f G230.0, G234.0 serial
spindle
r.c
B11 to B38 2nd auxiliary function signal f F155.0 to F154.3 8.1
BAL Battery alarm f f F149.2
BAL1 to BAL4 f F159.0 to F159.3 24
2.4
Absolute pulse coder battery alar
e
BAL1 to BAL3 f F156.0 to F156.2
BDT Optional block skip signal f f G116.0 5.5
BDTO
BF1, BF2
nt
Optional block skip signal (software
B code strobe signal
f f
f
F176.4
F150.7, F150.6
12.1.7
8.1
ce
BFIN1, BFIN2 2nd auxiliary function completion signal f G115.7, G115.6 8.4
BGEACT Background busy signal f f F180.4 13.2
CDZ Chamfering signal f G126.7 11.8
Refer to
nc
CFINA, CFINB Spindle switch completion signal f f F282.1, F286.1 Descrip-

tions for
CHPA, CHPB Power line switch signal f f F282.0, F286.0 serial
spindle
f f
.c
CUT Cutting feed signal F188.6 2.7

DEN Distribution end signal f f F149.3
81
8.1
DEN2 Passed point output signal f F149.6
w
Renewal disable signal of relative

DLK f f G127.6 12.1
coordinate
DNCI DNC operation select signal f f G127.5 5.7
w
DRN Dry run signal f f G118.7 5.3.2

DRNE Dry run signal (PMC axis control ) f f G147.7 15.1
w
Dry run signal (software operator’s panel

DRNO f f F176.7 12.1.7
signal)
DST Manual data input start signal f f F150.5 5.1
EA0 to EA6 Address signal (for external data input) f f G102.0 to G102.6 15.2
Control axis select signal (PMC axis
EAX1 to EAX4 f f G144.0 to G144.5
control )
Command read completion signal (PMC 15.1
1 1
EBSYA, EBSYB f f F270.7, F273.7
axis control )
EBUFA, EBUFB Command read signal (PMC axis control ) f f G210.7, G218.7
490
Refer-
item
EC0A to EC7A, EC0B to Axis control command signal (PMC axis G211.0 to G211.7,
f f
EC7B control ) G219.0 to G219.7
Following zero checking signal(PMC axis 1 1
15.1
ECKZA, ECZKB f f F270.1, F273.1
control )
ECLRA, ECLRB Reset signal (PMC axis control ) f f G210.6, G218.6
ED0 to ED15 Data signal (for external data input) f f G100.0 to G101.7 15.2
Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC
f f
om
EDENA, EDENB F270.3, F273.3
axis control )
Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC
EFINA, EFINB f f G210.0, G218.0
axis control )
15 1
15.1
1
EGENA, EGENB Axis moving signal (PMC axis control ) f f F270.4, F273.4
EIALA, EIALB Alarm signal (PMC axis control ) f f F270.2, F273.2
r.c
EID0A to EID31A, EID0B G214.0 to G217.7,
Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) f f
to EID31B G222.0 to G225.7
EF External operation signal f F150.0 11.7
External operation signal for high–speed
EFD f F150.1
e
interface
84
8.4
External operation completion signal for
EFIN f G115.1
EIF15B control)
nt
EIF0A to EIF15A, EIF0B to Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis
f f
G212.0 to G213.7,
G220.0 to G221.7
EINPA, EINPB In–position signal (PMC axis control) f f F270.0, F273.0
ce
EM11A to EM28A, EM11B Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis F272.0 to F272.7, F275.0
f f
to EM28B control) to F275.7 1 1
15.1
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis
EMFA, EMFB f f F271.0, F274.0
control)
nc
Block stop disable signal (PMC axis

EMSBKA, EMSBKB f f F211.0, G219.0
control)
ENB f f F149.4
Spindle enable signal 93 9
9.3, 9.5
5
f
.c
ENB2, ENB3 F149.4, F164.2, F164.3

Negative–direction overtravel signal (PMC
EOTNA, EOTNB f f F270.6, F273.6
axis control)
w
Positive–direction overtravel signal (PMC 15.1

1 1
EOTPA, EOTPB f f F270.5, F273.5
axis control)
EOV0 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control ) f f F188.5
w
Read completion signal (for external data

EREND f f F160.0 15.2
input)
ERS External reset signal f f G121.7 5.2
w
ESBKA, ESBKB Block stop signal (PMC axis control ) f f G210.3, G218.3 15.1
Search completion signal (for external
ESEND f f F160.1 15.2
data input)
ESKIP Skip signal (PMC axis control ) f f X008.6
15 1
15.1
ESOFA, ESOFB Servo off signal (PMC axis control ) f f G210.4, G218.4
ESTB Read signal (for external data input) f f G102.7 15.2
Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC
ESTPA, ESTPB f f G210.5, G218.5 15.1
axis control )
491
Refer-
item
EXLM2 Stored stroke limit select signal f f G129.6 2.3.2
EXRD External read start signal f f G134.1 13.2
EXSTP External read/punch stop signal f f G134.2
13 2
13.2
EXWT External punch start signal f f G134.3
FIN M, S, T, B function completion signal f f G120.3 8.1
FXST Canned cycle start signal f F161.4 2.7
om
GR1, GR2 f G118.2, G118.3
Gear select signal 93 9
9.3, 9.5
5
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O f G152.0, G152.1, G152.2
HX, HZ, H3 f G116.7, G117.7, G118.7
H dl ffeed
Handle d axis
i select
l signal
i l G116.7, G117.7, G118.7, 32
3.2
HX, HY, HZ, H4 f
G119.7
r.c
F174.4,, F174.5,, F174.6,,
HXO HYO,
HXO, HYO HZO,
HZO H4O Manual pulse generator feed axis select f
F174.7 12.1.7
12 1
signal (software operator’s
operator s panel signal)
HXO, HZO, H3O f F174.4, F174.5, F174.6
IGNVRY f G123.0
e
V–READY check signal 28
2.8
IGNVRY f G127.0
Refer to
INDXA, INDXB
signal
nt
Spindle orientation stop position change
f f G231.0, G235.0
Descrip-
tions for
serial
spindle
ce
INFD Infeed control cutting start signal l G237.6 5.8
INP1 to INP4 In–position signal f f F184.0 to F184.3 7.2.2.1
ITX, ITZ, IT3 Interlock signal for each axis f G128.0, G128.1, G128.2 2.5
nc
JOV1 to JOV8 Jog feedrate override signal f G104.0 to G104.3 3.1

Jog feedrate override signal (software F175.0, F175.1, F175.2,
JV1O, JV2O, JV4O, JV8O f 12.1.7
operator’s panel signal) F175.3
KEY Program protect signal f f G122.3 12.2.3
.c
Program protect signal (software

KEYO f f F178.5 12.1.7
Position coder return direction select
KILPLUS f f G105.6 9.7
w
signal
Refer to
Descrip-
LDT1A, LDT1B, LDT2A, F281.4, F285.4, F281.5,
w
Load detection signal f f tions for

LDT2B F285.5
serial
spindle
w
F154.7, F154.6, F154.5,

M00, M01, M02, M30 M decode signal f
F154.4
F151.0, F151.1, F151.2, 81
8.1
M11, M12, M14, M18, M21,
F151.3, F151.4, F151.5,
M22, M24, M28, M31, M32, Miscellaneous function code signal f f
F151.6, F151.7, F157.0,
M34, M38
F157.1, F157.2, F157.3
F193.0, F193.1, F193.2,
M211, M212, M214, M218,
F193.3, F193.4, F193.5,
M221, M222, M224, M228, 2nd M function code signal f f 8.3
F193.6, F193.7, F194.0,
M231, M232, M234, M238
F194.1, F194.2, F194.3
492
Refer-
item
F194.4, F194.5, F194.6,
M311, M312, M314, M318,
F194.7, F195.0, F195.1,
M321, M322, M324, M328, 3rd M function code signal f f 8.3
F195.2, F195.3, F195.4,
M331, M332, M334, M338
F195.5, F195.6, F195.7
MA CNC ready signal f f F149.7 2.2
Refer to
Descrip-
MCFNA, MCFNB Power line switch completion signal f f G230.3, G234.3 tions for
om
serial
spindle
MD1, MD2, MD4 Mode select signal f f G122.0, G122.1, G122.2 2.6
Mode select signal (software operator’s
MD1O, MD2O, MD4O f f F174.0, F174.1, F174.2 12.1.7
panel signal)
r.c
MF Miscellaneous function strobe signal f f F150.0 8.1
MF2, MF3 2nd or 3rd M function strobe signal f f F157.4, F157.5 8.3
MFIN Miscellaneous function completion signal f f G115.0
MFIN2 2nd M function completion signal f f G134.4 84
8.4
e
MFIN3 3rd M function completion signal f f G134.5
MINP f G117.0
MINP
MIRX, MIRY, MIR4
nt
External program input start signal
Mirror image signal

f
f
G120.0
G127.0, G127.1, G127.7
13 3
13.3
125
1.2.5
MIX, MIZ f G120.0, G127.1
ce
MLK All–axis machine lock signal f f G117.1 5.3.1
Machine lock signal (software operator’s
MLKO f f F176.6 12.1.7
panel signal)
nc
MMI1, MMI2 f F155.0, F155.1

Mirror image check signal 125
1.2.5
MMI1, MMI2, MMI4 f F158.0, F158.1, F158.3,
MP1, MP2 f G120.0, G120.1
Manual handle feed amount select signal 32
3.2
MP1, MP2 f G118.0, G119.0
.c
Select of magnification of manual pulse

MP1O, MP2O generator (software operator’s panel f f F175.6, F175.7 12.1.7
signal)
w
Refer to
Descrip-
MRDYA, MRDYB Machine ready signal (serial spindle) f f G229.7, G233.7 tions for
w
serial
spindle
MVX, MVY, MVZ, MV4 f F148.4 to F148.7
Axis moving signal 124
1.2.4
w
MVX, MVZ, MV3 f F148.4 to F148.6

Angular axis control Z axis offset moving
NOZAGC l G133.6 1.6
signal
Refer to
Short–distant movement command while Descrip-
NRROA, NRROB changing the orientation stop position f f G231.2, G235.2 tions for
signal serial
spindle
OP Automatic operation signal f f F148.7 5.1
493
Refer-
item
Refer to
ORARA, ORARB Spindle orientation completion signal f f F281.7, F285.7 Descrip-
tions for
ORCMA, ORCMB Orientation command signal f f G229.6, G233.6 serial
spindle
OV1O, OV2O, OV4O, Feedrate override signal (software F176.0, F176.1, F176.2,
f f 12.1.7
OV8O operator’s panel signal) F176.3
OVC Override cancel signal f f G126.4 7.1.5.4
om
OVCE PMC axis override cancel signal f f G147.5 15.1
OUT0 to OUT7 f f F171.0 to F171.7 12.1.7
Refer to
PCFNA, PCFNB Output switching completion signal f f F282.3, F286.3 Descrip-
r.c
tions for
PCHPA, PCHPB Output switching signal f f F282.2, F286.2 serial
spindle
PLCRVON Position coder return control signal f f G105.7 9.7
e
G122.4, G122.5, G122.6,
PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8 Workpiece number search signal f f 15.3
G122.7
PRC nt
Position record signal f G103.6 14.2.1
PRTSF Required parts count reached signal f f F164.7 12.1.5
R01I to R12I, R01I2 to Motor speed command spindle input G124.0 to G125.3,
f f 15.4
R12I2 signal G106.0 to G107.3
ce
R01O to R12O S12–bit code signal f f F172.0 to F173.3 9.3, 15.4
Refer to
Descrip-
RCHA, RCHB Power line status check signal f f G230.7, G234.7 tions for
nc
serial
spindle
RGSPM, RGSPP Spindle rotation direction signal f F165.1, F165.0
95
9.5
RGTAP, RGTPN Rigid tapping signal f G135.0, G123.1
.c
Refer to
Spindle rotation direction command signal Descrip-
ROTAA, ROTAB while changing the orientation stop f f G231.1, G235.1 tions for
w
position serial
spindle
ROV1, ROV2 Rapid traverse override signal f f G116.7, G117.7 7.1.5.1
w
ROV1D, ROV2D, ROV3D Rapid traverse override B signal f G116.4, G116.5, G116.6 7.1.5.3
ROV1E, ROV2E PMC axis rapid traverse override signal f f G146.0, G146.1 15.1
w
Rapid traverse override signal (software

ROV1O, ROV2O f f F175.4, F175.5 12.1.7
RPALM Read/punch alarm signal f f F180.3
13 2
13.2
RPBSY Read/punch in–progress signal f f F180.2
RRW Rewind signal f f G104.6 5.2
Refer to
Descrip-
RSLA, RSLB Output switch request signal f f G230.6, G234.6 tions for
serial
spindle
494
Refer-
item
RST Reset signal f f F149.1 5.2
RT Manual rapid traverse select signal f f G121.6 3.1
Manual rapid traverse select signal (PMC
RTE f f G147.6 15.1
axis control )
Jog rapid traverse select signal (software
RTO f f F178.6 12.1.7
RWD Rewinding signal f f F164.6 5.2
om
F152.0, F152.1, F152.2,
S11, S12, S14, S18, S21,
Spindle function code signal f f F152.3, F152.4, F152.5, 8.1, 9.3
S22, S24, S28
F152.6, F152.7
SA Servo ready completion signal f f F148.6 2.2
SAR Spindle speed reached signal f f G120.4 8.1, 9.3
r.c
Refer to
SARA, SARB f f F281.3, F285.3 Descrip-
Speed reached signal tions for
SARA, SARB f f F281.3, F285.3 serial
spindle
e
SBK Single block signal f f G116.1 5.3.3
Single block signal (software operator’s
SBKO
panel signal) nt f f F176.5 12.1.7
Refer to
Descrip-
ce
SDTA, SDTB Speed detection signal f f F281.2, F285.2 tions for
serial
spindle
SF Spindle function strobe signal f f F150.2 8.1, 9.5
f f
nc
SFIN Spindle function completion signal G115.2 8.4

Refer to
Descrip-
SFRA, SFRB Spindle CW command signal f f G229.5, G233.5 tions for
serial
.c
spindle
Spindle motor command polarity select
SGN, SGN2 f f G125.5, G107.5 15.4
signal
w
1st spindle orientation external stop G110.0 to G110.7,

SHA00 to SHA11 f f 9.6
position command signal G111.0 to G111.3
SIND, SIND2 Spindle motor speed command signal f f G125.7, G107.7 15.4
w
14.1.1,
SKIP l l X008.7
p signal
Skip g 14.1.2
l
w
SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 X008.2, X008.3, X008.4 14.1.2

SMZ Error detect signal f G126.6 7.2.2.3
Refer to
Descrip-
SOCNA, SOCNB Soft start /stop cancel signal f f G230.4, G234.4 tions for
serial
spindle
SOR Spindle orientation signal f f G120.5 9.3
495
Refer-
item
SPA, SPB, SPC f G103.3, G103.4, G103.5
S i dl speed
Spindle d override
id signal
i l G103.3, G103.4, G103.5, 93
9.3
SPA, SPB, SPC, SPD f
G103.2
SPDS1, SPDS2, SPDS3, F189.0, F189.1, F189.2,
SPDS4 F189.3
SPL Automatic operation halt signal f f F148.4 5.1
Feed hold signal (software operator’s
f f
om
SPO F178.7 12.1.7
panel signal)
Refer to
SPSLA, SPSLB Spindle select signal f f G230.2, G234.2 Descrip-
tions for
SRVA, SRVB Spindle CCW command signal f f G229.4, G233.4 serial
spindle
r.c
Spindle motor command polarity select
SSIN, SSIN2 f f G125.6, G107.6 15.4
signal
Refer to
Descrip-
f f
e
SSTA, SSTB Speed zero detection signal F281.1, F285.1 tions for
serial
spindle
ST
STL
STLK
nt
Automatic operation start signal
Automatic operation start lamp signal
Start lock signal
f
f
f
f
f
G120.2
F148.5
G120.1
5.1
5.1
2.5
ce
SVFX, SVFZ, SVF3 f G105.0, G105.1, G105.2
S
Servo off
ff signal
i l G105.0, G105.1, G105.2, 12
1.2.7
SVFX, SVFY, SVFZ, SVF4 f
G105.3
f
nc
T11 to T28 F153.0 to F153.7

Tool function code signal 81
8.1
T11 to T48 f F153.0 to F156.7
TAP Tapping signal f f F149.5 11.6
TF Tool function strobe signal f f F150.3 8.1
.c
TFIN Tool function completion signal f f G115.3 8.4

THRD Thread cutting in–progress signal f F188.3 6.4.1
f f Refer to
w
TLMA, TLMB Torque limit signal F281.6, F285.6

Descrip-
TLMHA, TLMHB High–speed torque limit signal f f G229.1, G233.1 tions for
serial
w
TLMLA, TLMLB Low speed torque limit signal f f G229.0, G233.0 spindle
TORQ1, TORQ2, TORQ3 Torque limit reached signal f F170.0, F170.1, F170.2 14.1.3
UI000 to UI015 Input signal for custom macro f f G130.0 to G131.7
w
UO000 to UO015 f f F162.0 to F163.7 11 1

11.5.1
Output signal for custom macro
UO100 to UO131 f f F196.0 to F199.7
WNANS Window completion signal f f F250.0
WNERR Window error signal f f F250.1
1 5
15
15.5
WNRQ Window request signal f f G200.0
WNWRT Window write signal f f G200.1
ZNG Z axis command cancel signal f G103.6 1.4.4
496
Refer-
item
F161.0, F161.1, F161.2,
ZP2X, ZP2Y, ZP2Z, ZP24 2nd reference position return completion f
F161.3 4.4
signal
ZP2X, ZP2Z, ZP23 f F161.0, F161.1, F161.2
F148.0, F148.1, F148.2,
ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ZP4 Reference position return completion f
F148.3
signal
ZPX, ZPZ, ZP3 f F148.0, F148.1, F148.2
4.1
4 1
F168.0, F168.1, F168.2,
f
om
ZRFX, ZRFY, ZRFZ, ZRF4
p
Reference position g
establishment signal F168.3
ZRFX, ZRFZ, ZRF3 f F168.0, F168.1, F168.2
Manual reference position return select
ZRN f f G120.7 2.6, 4.1
signal
Mode select signal (software operator’s
ZRNO f f F174.3 12.1.7
r.c
panel signal)
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
497
A.2.3
(In Order of Addresses) f: Available
Blank : Unavailable
Refer-
PMC address Signal name Symbol T M ence
item
om
X004.7 4th axis disable signal 4NG f 1.4.3
X008.2, X008.3 X008.4, +MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2,
Interlock signal for each axis direction f 2.5
X008.5 –MIT2
X008.2, X008.3, X008.4 Skip signal SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 l 14.1.2
f
r.c
X008.5 High–speed interlock signal *RILK 2.5
X008.6 Skip signal (PMC axis control ) ESKIP f f 15.1
14.1.1,
X008.7 Skip signal SKIP l l
14.1.2
e
X016.5, X017.5, X018.5, *DECX, *DECY, *DECZ,
Deceleration signal for reference position f
X019.5 *DEC4 4.1
return
X016.5, X017.5, X018.5 *DECX, *DECZ, *DEC3 f
X018.5
X020.0, X020.1, X020.2, Over
X020.3, X020.4, X020.5
O travell lilimit i
nt
i signal
l
*+LZ
*+LX, *+LY, *+LZ, *–LX,
*–LY, *–LZ
f
f
231
2.3.1
ce
X021.4, G121.4 Emergency stop signal *ESP, *ESP f f 2.1
F148.0, F148.1, F148.2 ZPX, ZPZ, ZP3 f
Reference position return completion
F148.0, F148.1, F148.2, 41
4.1
signal ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ZP4 f
nc
F148.3
F148.4 Automatic operation halt signal SPL f f 5.1
F148.4 to F148.7 MVX, MVY, MVZ, MV4 f
Axis moving signal 124
1.2.4
F148.4 to F148.6 MVX, MVZ, MV3 f
.c
F148.5 Automatic operation start lamp signal STL f f 5.1

F148.6 Servo ready completion signal SA f f 2.2
f f
w
F148.7 Automatic operation signal OP 5.1

F149.0 CNC alarm signal AL f f 2.4
F149.1 Reset signal RST f f 5.2
w
F149.2 Battery alarm BAL f f 2.4

F149.3 Distribution end signal DEN f f 8.1
w
F149.4 ENB f f
Spindle enable signal 93 9
9.3, 9.5
5
F149.4, F164.2, F164.3 ENB2, ENB3 f
F149.5 Tapping signal TAP f f 11.6
F149.6 Passed point output signal DEN2 f 8.1
F149.7 CNC ready signal MA f f 2.2
F150.0 Miscellaneous function strobe signal MF f f 8.1
F150.0 External operation signal EF f 11.7
External operation signal for high–speed
F150.1 EFD f 8.4
interface
498
Refer-
item
F150.2 Spindle function strobe signal SF f f 8.1, 9.5
F150.3 Tool function strobe signal TF f f 8.1
F150.5 Manual data input start signal DST f f 5.1
F150.7, F150.6 B code strobe signal BF1, BF2 f
F151.0, F151.1, F151.2,
M11, M12, M14, M18, M21, 81
8.1
F151.3, F151.4, F151.5,
Miscellaneous function code signal M22, M24, M28, M31, M32, f f
F151.6, F151.7, F157.0,
om
M34, M38
F157.1, F157.2, F157.3
F152.0, F152.1, F152.2,
S11, S12, S14, S18, S21,
F152.3, F152.4, F152.5, Spindle function code signal f f 8.1, 9.3
S22, S24, S28
F152.6, F152.7
F153.0 to F153.7 T11 to T28 f
Tool function code signal
r.c
F153.0 to F156.7 T11 to T48 f
F154.7, F154.6, F154.5, 81
8.1
M decode signal M00, M01, M02, M30 f
F154.4
F155.0 to F154.3 2nd auxiliary function signal B11 to B38 f
e
F155.0, F155.1 Mirror image check signal MMI1, MMI2 f 1.2.5
F156.0 to F156.2 Absolute pulse coder battery alar BAL1 to BAL3 f 2.4
F157.4, F157.5
F158.0, F158.1, F158.3,
F159.0 to F159.3
nt
2nd or 3rd M function strobe signal
Mirror image check signal
Absolute pulse coder battery alar
MF2, MF3
MMI1, MMI2, MMI4
BAL1 to BAL4
f f
f
f
8.3
1.2.5
2.4
ce
Read completion signal (for external data
F160.0 EREND f f
input)
15.2
Search completion signal (for external
F160.1 ESEND f f
data input)
nc
F161.0, F161.1, F161.2,

2nd reference position return completion ZP2X, ZP2Y, ZP2Z f
F161.3 4.4
signal
F161.0, F161.1, F161.2 ZP2X, ZP2Z, ZP23 f
F161.4 Canned cycle start signal FXST f 2.7
.c
F162.0 to F163.7 Output signal for custom macro UO000 to UO015 f f 11.5.1
F164.6 Rewinding signal RWD f f 5.2
f f
w
F164.7 Required parts count reached signal PRTSF 12.1.5

F165.1, F165.0 Spindle rotation direction signal RGSPM, RGSPP f 9.5
F168.0, F168.1, F168.2 ZRFX, ZRFZ, ZRF3 f
w
F168.0, F168.1, F168.2, R f

Reference position
i i establishment
bli h signal
i l 41
4.1
ZRFX, ZRFY, ZRFZ, ZRF4 f
F168.3
f
w
F170.0, F170.1, F170.2 Torque limit reached signal TORQ1, TORQ2, TORQ3 14.1.3
F171.0 to F171.7 OUT0 to OUT7 f f 12.1.7
F172.0 to F173.3 S12–bit code signal R01O to R12O f f 9.3, 15.4
F174.0, F174.1, F174.2 Mode select signal
g ((software operator’s
p MD1O, MD2O, MD4O f f
F174.3 panel signal) ZRNO f f
F174.4, F174.5, F174.6, 12 1
12.1.7
Manual pulse generator feed axis select HXO, HYO, HZO, H4O f
F174.7
signal (software operator’s
operator s panel signal)
F174.4, F174.5, F174.6 HXO, HZO, H3O f
499
Refer-
item
F175.0, F175.1, F175.2, Jog feedrate override signal (software
JV1O, JV2O, JV4O, JV8O f
F175.3 operator’s panel signal)
Rapid traverse override signal (software
F175.4, F175.5 ROV1O, ROV2O f f
Select of magnification of manual pulse
F175.6, F175.7 generator (software operator’s panel MP1O, MP2O f f
signal)
om
F176.0, F176.1, F176.2, Feedrate override signal (software OV1O, OV2O, OV4O,
f f
F176.3 operator’s panel signal) OV8O
Optional block skip signal (software
F176.4 BDTO f f
Single block signal (software operator’s
F176.5 SBKO f f
panel signal)
r.c
Machine lock signal (software operator’s
F176.6 MLKO f f 12.1.7
12 1
panel signal)
Dry run signal (software operator’s panel
F176.7 DRNO f f
signal)
e
F177.0, F177.1, F177.2,
+XO,, –XO,, +YO,, –YO,,
F177.3,
F177 3 F177.4,
F177 4 F177.5,
F177 5 f
Jog
J feed
f d axis i select
l signal
i l ((software
f +ZO, –ZO, +4O, –4O
F177.6, F177.7
F177.1, F177.0, F177.2,
F177.3, F177.4, F177.5
operator nt
operator’ss panel signal)
Program protect signal (software

–XO, +XO, +ZO, –ZO,
+3O, –3O
f
ce
F178.5 KEYO f f
Jog rapid traverse select signal (software
F178.6 RTO f f
Feed hold signal (software operator’s
f f
nc
F178.7 SPO
panel signal)
F180.2 Read/punch in–progress signal RPBSY f f 13.2
F180.3 Read/punch alarm signal RPALM f f
13 2
13.2
F180.4 Background busy signal BGEACT f f
.c
F184.0 to F184.3 In–position signal INP1 to INP4 f f 7.2.2.1

F188.3 Thread cutting in–progress signal THRD f 6.4.1
w
F188.5 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control ) EOV0 f f 15.1

F188.6 Cutting feed signal CUT f f 2.7
Control axis selection status signal (PMC
w
F188.7 *EAXSL f f 15.1

axis control)
F189.0, F189.1, F189.2, SPDS1, SPDS2, SPDS3,
F189.3 SPDS4
w
F193.0, F193.1, F193.2,

M211, M212, M214, M218,
F193.3, F193.4, F193.5,
2nd M function code signal M221, M222, M224, M228, f f
F193.6, F193.7, F194.0,
M231, M232, M234, M238
F194.1, F194.2, F194.3
83
8.3
F194.4, F194.5, F194.6,
M311, M312, M314, M318,
F194.7, F195.0, F195.1,
3rd M function code signal M321, M322, M324, M328, f f
F195.2, F195.3, F195.4,
M331, M332, M334, M338
F195.5, F195.6, F195.7
F196.0 to F199.7 Output signal for custom macro UO100 to UO131 f f 11.5.1
500
Refer-
item
Block stop disable signal (PMC axis
F211.0, G219.0 EMSBKA, EMSBKB f f 15.1
control)
F250.0 Window completion signal WNANS f f
15 5
15.5
F250.1 Window error signal WNERR f f
F270.0, F273.0 In–position signal (PMC axis control) EINPA, EINPB f f
Following zero checking signal(PMC axis
F270.1, F273.1 ECKZA, ECZKB f f
control )
om
F270.2, F273.2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control ) EIALA, EIALB f f
Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC
F270.3, F273.3 EDENA, EDENB f f
axis control )
F270.4, F273.4 Axis moving signal (PMC axis control ) EGENA, EGENB f f
Positive–direction overtravel signal (PMC
r.c
F270.5, F273.5 EOTPA, EOTPB f f 15.1
1 1
axis control)
Negative–direction overtravel signal (PMC
F270.6, F273.6 EOTNA, EOTNB f f
axis control)
Command read completion signal (PMC
F270.7, F273.7 EBSYA, EBSYB f f
e
axis control )
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis
F271.0, F274.0 EMFA, EMFB f f
F272.0 to F272.7,
F275.0 to F275.7
control)
control)
nt
Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis EM11A to EM28A, EM11B
to EM28B
f f
F281.0, F285.0 Spindle alarm signal ALMA, ALMB f

ce
F281.1, F285.1 Speed zero detection signal SSTA, SSTB f f
F281.2, F285.2 Speed detection signal SDTA, SDTB f f
F281.3, F285.3 Speed reached signal SARA, SARB f f
nc
F281.4, F285.4, F281.5, LDT1A, LDT1B, LDT2A, R f to

Refer
Load detection signal f f
F285.5 LDT2B Descrip-
tions for
F281.6, F285.6 Torque limit signal TLMA, TLMB f f
serial
F281.7, F285.7 Spindle orientation completion signal ORARA, ORARB f f spindle
.c
F282.0, F286.0 Power line switch signal CHPA, CHPB f f

F282.1, F286.1 Spindle switch completion signal CFINA, CFINB f f
f f
w
F282.2, F286.2 Output switching signal PCHPA, PCHPB

F282.3, F286.3 Output switching completion signal PCFNA, PCFNB f f
G100.0 to G101.7 Data signal (for external data input) ED0 to ED15 f f
w
G102.0 to G102.6 Address signal (for external data input) EA0 to EA6 f f 1 2
15.2
G102.7 Read signal (for external data input) ESTB f f
w
G103.3, G103.4, G103.5 SPA, SPB, SPC f

G103.3, G103.4, G103.5, Spindle
S i dl speed
d override
id signal
i l 93
9.3
SPA, SPB, SPC, SPD f
G103.2
G103.6 Z axis command cancel signal ZNG f 1.4.4
G103.6 Position record signal PRC f 14.2.1
G103.7 Miscellaneous function lock signal AFL f f 8.2
G104.0 to G104.3 Jog feedrate override signal JOV1 to JOV8 f 3.1
G104.5 Follow–up signal *FLWU f f 1.2.6
501
Refer-
item
G104.6 Rewind signal RRW f f 5.2
G105.0, G105.1, G105.2 SVFX, SVFZ, SVF3 f
G105.0, G105.1, G105.2, Servo
S off
ff signal
i l 12
1.2.7
SVFX, SVFY, SVFZ, SVF4 f
G105.3
Position coder return direction select
G105.6 KILPLUS f f
signal 9.7
G105.7 Position coder return control signal PLCRVON f f
om
G110.0 to G110.7, 1st spindle orientation external stop
SHA00 to SHA11 f f 9.6
G111.0 to G111.3 position command signal
G115.0 Miscellaneous function completion signal MFIN f f
External operation completion signal for
G115.1 EFIN f
r.c
84
8.4
G115.2 Spindle function completion signal SFIN f f
G115.3 Tool function completion signal TFIN f f
G115.7, G115.6 2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN1, BFIN2 f
G116.0 Optional block skip signal BDT f f 5.5
e
G116.1 Single block signal SBK f f 5.3.3
G116.2, G116.3, G117.3,
G117.2, G118.3, G118.2,
G119.2, G119.3 F d axis
Feed
G116.2,, G116.3,, G117.2,,
i di
direction
i select
l
nt
signal
ig l
+X,, –X,, –Y,, +Y,, –Z,, +Z,, +4,,
–4
f
31
3.1
f
ce
+X –X,
+X, –X +Z,
+Z –Z,
–Z +3
+3, –3
G117.3, G118.2, G118.3
G116.4, G116.5, G116.6, *AOV16, *AOV32, *AOV64,
1% step override signal f 7.1.5.2
G117.6 *AOV128
7153
7.1.5.3
G116.4, G116.5, G116.6 Rapid traverse override B signal ROV1D, ROV2D, ROV3D f
nc
G116.7, G117.7, G118.7 HX, HZ, H3 f

G116.7, G117.7, G118.7, Handle
H dl ffeed
d axis
i select
l signal
i l 32
3.2
HX, HY, HZ, H4 f
G119.7
G116.7, G117.7 Rapid traverse override signal ROV1, ROV2 f f 7.1.5.1
.c
G117.0 Interlock signal *ILK f 2.5

G117.0 External program input start signal MINP f 13.3
w
G117.1 All–axis machine lock signal MLK f f 5.3.1

G118.0, G119.0 Manual handle feed amount select signal MP1, MP2 f 3.2
G118.2, G118.3 Gear select signal GR1, GR2 f 9.3, 9.5
w
G118.7 Dry run signal DRN f f 5.3.2

G119.0 Ladder display signal *LDSP f f 12.1
w
G120.6 External program input start signal MINP f 13.3

G120.0, G127.1 Mirror image signal MIX, MIZ f 1.2.5
G120.0, G120.1 Manual handle feed amount select signal MP1, MP2 f 3.2
G120.1 Start lock signal STLK f 2.5
G120.2 Automatic operation start signal ST f f 5.1
G120.3 M, S, T, B function completion signal FIN f f 8.1
G120.4 Spindle speed reached signal SAR f f
93
9.3
G120.5 Spindle orientation signal SOR f f
502
Refer-
item
G120.6 Spindle stop signal *SSTP f f 9.3
Manual reference position return select
G120.7 ZRN f f 2.6, 4.1
signal
G121.0, G121.1, G121.2, 3.1,
Override signal *OV1, *OV2, *OV4, *OV8 f f
G121.3 7.1.5.2
G121.5 Automatic operation hold signal *SP f f 5.1
G121.6 Manual rapid traverse select signal RT f f 3.1
om
G121.7 External reset signal ERS f f 5.2
G122.0, G122.1, G122.2 Mode select signal MD1, MD2, MD4 f f 2.6
G122.3 Program protect signal KEY f f 12.2.3
G122.4, G122.5, G122.6,
Workpiece number search signal PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8 f f 15.3
G122.7
r.c
G123.0 V–READY check signal IGNVRY f 2.8
G124.0 to G125.3, Motor speed command spindle input R01I to R12I, R01I2 to
f f
G106.0 to G107.3 signal R12I2
G125.5, G107.5 SGN, SGN2 f f
e
Spindle
p motor command p
polarity
y select 1 4
15.4
G125.6, G107.6 signal SSIN, SSIN2 f f
G125.7, G107.7 Spindle motor speed command signal SIND, SIND2 f f
G126.4
G126.6 Error detect signal
nt
Override cancel signal OVC
SMZ
f
f
f 7.1.5.4
7.2.2.3
ce
G126.7 Chamfering signal CDZ f 11.8
G127.0 V–READY check signal IGNVRY f 2.8
G127.0, G127.1, G127.7 Mirror image signal MIRX, MIRY, MIR4 f 1.2.5
G127.2 Manual absolute signal *ABSM f f 5.4
nc
G127.5 DNC operation select signal DNCI f f 5.7

Renewal disable signal of relative
G127.6 DLK f f 12.1
coordinate
G128.0, G128.1, G128.2,
.c
*ITX, *ITY, *ITZ, *IT4 f

G128.3 Interlock signal
g for each axis 2.5
G128.0, G128.1, G128.2 ITX, ITZ, IT3 f
f f
w
G129.6 Stored stroke limit select signal EXLM2 2.3.2

G130.0 to G131.7 Input signal for custom macro UI000 to UI015 f f 11.5.1
Angular axis control Z axis offset moving
G133.6 NOZAGC l 1.6
w
signal
G134.1 External read start signal EXRD f f 13.2
G134.2 External read/punch stop signal EXSTP f f
w
13 2
13.2
G134.3 External punch start signal EXWT f f
G134.4 2nd M function completion signal MFIN2 f f
84
8.4
G134.5 3rd M function completion signal MFIN3 f f
G135.0, G123.1 Rigid tapping signal RGTAP, RGTPN f 9.5
G140.4, G140.5, G140.6, *AOVR16, *AOVR32,
1% step override signal f 7.1.5.2
G140.7 *AOVR64, *AOVR128
503
Refer-
item
G142.0, G142.1, G142.2, *+MITX, *+MITY, *+MITZ,
G142.3, G142.4, G142.5, Interlock signal for each axis direction *+MIT4, *–MITX, *–MITY, f 2.5
G142.6, G142.7 *–MITZ, *–MIT4
Control axis select signal (PMC axis
G144.0 to G144.5 EAX1 to EAX4 f f
control )
G146.0, G146.1 PMC axis rapid traverse override signal ROV1E, ROV2E f f
G147.0, G147.1, G147.2, Feedrate override signal (PMC axis *OV1E, *OV2E, *OV4E,
f f
om
G147.3, G147.4 control ) *OV8E, *OV16E 1 1
15.1
G147.5 PMC axis override cancel signal OVCE f f
Manual rapid traverse select signal (PMC
G147.6 RTE f f
axis control )
G147.7 Dry run signal (PMC axis control ) DRNE f f
r.c
G152.0, G152.1, G152.2 Gear select signal GR1O, GR2O, GR3O f 9.3, 9.5
G200.0 Window request signal WNRQ f f
15 5
15.5
G200.1 Window write signal WNWRT f f
Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC
G210.0, G218.0 EFINA, EFINB f f
e
axis control )
G210.3, G218.3 Block stop signal (PMC axis control ) ESBKA, ESBKB f f
G210.4, G218.4
G210.5, G218.5
axis control )
nt
Servo off signal (PMC axis control )
Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC
ESOFA, ESOFB
ESTPA, ESTPB
f
f
f
f 15.1
1 1
ce
G210.6, G218.6 Reset signal (PMC axis control ) ECLRA, ECLRB f f
G210.7, G218.7 Command read signal (PMC axis control ) EBUFA, EBUFB f f
G211.0 to G211.7, Axis control command signal (PMC axis EC0A to EC7A, EC0B to
f f
G219.0 to G219.7 control ) EC7B
nc
G212.0 to G213.7, Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis EIF0A to EIF15A, EIF0B to
f f
G220.0 to G221.7 control) EIF15B
15 1
15.1
G214.0 to G217.7, EID0A to EID31A, EID0B to
Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) f f
G222.0 to G225.7 EID31B
.c
G229.0, G233.0 Low speed torque limit signal TLMLA, TLMLB f f

G229.1, G233.1 High–speed torque limit signal TLMHA, TLMHB f f
G229.4, G233.4 Spindle CCW command signal SRVA, SRVB f f
w
G229.5, G233.5 Spindle CW command signal SFRA, SFRB f f

G229.6, G233.6 Orientation command signal ORCMA, ORCMB f f
w
G229.7, G233.7 Machine ready signal (serial spindle) MRDYA, MRDYB f f

R f to
Refer
G230.0, G234.0 Alarm reset signal ARSTA, ARSTB f f Descrip-
p
G230.1, G234.1 Emergency stop signal for spindle *ESPA, *ESPB f f tions for
w
serial
G230.2, G234.2 Spindle select signal SPSLA, SPSLB f f spindle
G230.3, G234.3 Power line switch completion signal MCFNA, MCFNB f f
G230.4, G234.4 Soft start /stop cancel signal SOCNA, SOCNB f f
G230.6, G234.6 Output switch request signal RSLA, RSLB f f
G230.7, G234.7 Power line status check signal RCHA, RCHB f f
Spindle orientation stop position change
G231.0, G235.0 INDXA, INDXB f f
signal
504
Refer-
item
Spindle rotation direction command signal
G231.1, G235.1 while changing the orientation stop ROTAA, ROTAB f f Refer to
position Descrip-
tions for
Short–distant movement command while serial
G231.2, G235.2 changing the orientation stop position NRROA, NRROB f f spindle
signal
G237.6 Infeed control cutting start signal INFD l 5.8
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
505
B–62543EN–1/01 Index
ƠNumbersơ DNC operation, 134
Dry run, 125
2nd reference position return, 110
ƠE ơ
ƠAơ
Edit, 357
Absolute position detection, 28
Emergency stop, 45
Acceleration/deceleration control, 173
Entering compensation values, 388
Alarm signal, 56
Error compensation, 16
Angular axis control (0–GCD), 39
Error detect (T series), 181
om
Automatic acceleration/deceleration, 173
Exact stop/exact stop mode/tapping mode/cutting mode (M
Automatic operation, 112 series), 133
Auxiliary function, 185 External data input, 424
Auxiliary function lock, 198 External I/O device control, 367
Axis control, 1 External motion function (M Series), 331
r.c
External program input, 373
External workpiece number search, 433
ƠBơ
Background editing, 360
ƠF ơ
e
Backlash compensation, 21
Feed forward in rapid traverse (M series), 184
ƠCơ
Cancel–the–Z–axis command signal, 30
nt Feed per minute, 163
Feed per revolution/manual feed per revolution (T series), 165
Feedrate control, 160
Feedrate control/acceleration and deceleration control, 159
ce
Canned cycle (M series), 323
Feedrate override, 169
Canned cycle (T series)/multiple repetitive canned cycle (T
series), 333 Follow–up, 13
Cf axis control (T series), 42
nc
Circular interpolation, 142

CNC ready signal, 47 ƠGơ
Command format, 254 G code system (T series), 305
Connection among spindle, spindle motor, and position coder,
246
.c
Constant surface speed control (for T series only), 241

ƠHơ
Controlled axes, 2
High–speed M/S/T/B interface, 203
Controlled axes detach, 9
w
Corner control, 177

Custom macro, 314
ƠI ơ
w
Cutter compensation, 297

Ignore–the–fourth–axis–signal, 29
Cutter compensation C (M series), 297
In–feed control, 136
Cutting feedrate clamp, 162
w
In–position check, 177

Cycle start/feed hold, 113
In–position check independently of feed/rapid traverse (M
series), 179
Inch/metric conversion, 311
ƠDơ Increment system, 5
Decimal point programming/pocket calculator type decimal Input of measured workpiece origin offsets, 389
point programming, 303
Input of offset value measured A (T series), 388
Display data on the diagnosis screen, 251
Input/output of data, 361
Display/set, 341
Interface between CNC and PMC, 461
Display/set/edit, 340 Interpolation function, 137
Displaying operating monitor, 348
i–1
INDEX B–62543EN–1/01
ƠJơ ƠP ơ
Jog feed/incremental feed, 74 Parameters related to servo, 23
Part program storage length, 357
Password function, 359
ƠL ơ
PMC axis control/PMC axis speed control function, 391
PMC control function, 390
Linear interpolation, 140 PMC window function, 442
List of addresses, 462 Position coder feedback control function (0–TC), 288
List of signals, 480 Position display neglect, 344
om
List of signals (In order of addresses), 498 Positioning, 138
List of signals (In order of function), 489 Preparations for operation, 44
List of signals (In order of functions), 480 Program command, 302

Program configuration, 309
r.c
ƠM ơ ƠRơ
M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block, 264
Rapid traverse override, 167
Machine coordinate system, 31 Rapid traverse override B (T series), 171
Machine lock, 123 Rapid traverse rate, 160
e
Manual absolute on/off, 129 Reader/puncher interface, 362
Manual handle feed, 82 Reference position establishment, 88
Manual operation, 73
Manual reference position return, 89
nt Reference position return, 108
Reset and rewind, 119
Rigid tapping (for M series only), 245
ce
Measurement, 378
Rigid tapping specification, 250
Memory protection key, 358
Rotary axis roll over, 37
Mirror image, 10
Run hour and parts count display, 345
Miscellaneous function/2nd auxiliary function (M series), 186
nc
Mode selection, 63
Multi–language display, 356 ƠS ơ
Multi–step skip (0–GCD), 382 Self–diagnosis, 343
Multiple M commands in a single block, 200
.c
Servo off (mechanical handle), 14

Servo tuning screen, 342
Setting each axis, 3
ƠNơ
w
Setting the reference position without dogs, 101

Settings related to servo–controlled axes, 23
Name of axes, 3
Settings related with coordinate systems, 31
w
No. of registered programs, 357

Signal, 257
Normal direction control (only for 0–GSD), 156 Signal addresses, 259
Notes on interface with the PMC, 259 Signals for the rigid tapping function, 257
w
Signals output according to the speed of travel along an axis (M

series), 182
Signals related to gear switching, 259
ƠOơ Signals related to S code output, 258
Optional block skip, 131 Single block, 127
Override, 167 Single direction positioning (M Series), 154
Override cancel, 172 Skip function, 379
Overtravel check, 49 Skip function (for 0–GCD/GSD only), 379
Overtravel signal, 49 Software operator’s panel, 349

Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters, 266
i–2
B–62543EN–1/01 INDEX
Specifying the rotation axis, 7 Timing charts for rigid tapping specification, 261
Spindle orientation, 286 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode, 268
Spindle output control by the PMC, 436 Tool compensation value/tool compensation number/tool
compensation memory, 293
Spindle serial output/spindle analog output, 210
Spindle speed control, 214 Tool function, 291
Spindle speed function, 208 Tool functions, 290
Spindle speed function (S code output), 209 Tool nose radius compensation (T series), 300
Spindle tuning screen, 342 Torque limit skip (0–GCD), 385
Start lock/interlock, 58
Status output signal, 69
om
Stored pitch error compensation, 16 ƠV ơ
Stored stroke check 1, 53
VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal, 71
ƠT ơ
ƠWơ
r.c
Testing a program, 123
Thread cutting (only for T series), 147 When M29 is specified before G84 (G74), 262
Thread cutting cycle retract (T series), 152 Workpiece coordinate system, 32
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
i–3
w Revision Record
FANUCĄSeriesĄ0-TD/MD/GCD/GSD CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–62543EN–1)

w
w
.c
nc
ce
nt
e r.c
01 Apr., ’97
om
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

62543en1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

62543en1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

62543en1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GFZ-62543EN-1 B-62543EN-1

Presented By: CNC Center

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

This manual describes the following NC functions required to enable

FANUC Series 0–TD 0–TD

Product Name Series Edition

FANUC Series 0–MD 0471 Edition 05 or later

0472 Edition 01 or later

FANUC Series 0–GSD 0891 Edition 01 or later

FANUC Series 0–TD 0671 Edition 04 or later

FANUC Series 0–GCD 0881 Edition 01 or later

This manual provides a general description of the FANUC Series 0–D.

Expression of signals One address accommodates eight signals.

Parameter description Parameters are classified by data type as follows :

the valid data range of a specific parameter, see the

D Notation of bit type

Data No. Data

Data number Data (M series)

[Machine without PMC]

Series 0–D Machine

FANUC Series 0–TD/MD/GCD/GSD

FANUC Series 0–TD/MD/GCD/GSD

FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62544EN

FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62574EN

FANUC Series 0–TD/MD/GCD/GSD

FANUC Series 0–TD/GCD PARAMETER MANUAL B–62550EN

FANUC Series 0–MD/GSD PARAMETER MANUAL B–62580EN

FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER D Installation amplifier

D Start up the system

1.6 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL (0–GCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

2.1 EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

2.3.1 Overtravel Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2.4 ALARM SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . 159

7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

7.1.5.1 Rapid traverse override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

7.1.5.4 Override cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

9.5.9 Alarm and Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

9.6 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

10.2 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/TOOL COMPENSATION

11. PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

11.2 G CODE SYSTEM (T Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

13.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

14. MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

14.1 SKIP FUNCTION (FOR 0–GCD/GSD ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

14.1.3 Torque Limit Skip (0–GCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

14.2.1 Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388